# FFMPEG-FILTERS - FFmpeg filters - man(1) - [phpMan]

[_FFMPEG-FILTERS_(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/FFMPEG-FILTERS/1/markdown)                                                                  [_FFMPEG-FILTERS_(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/FFMPEG-FILTERS/1/markdown)

## NAME
       ffmpeg-filters - FFmpeg filters

## DESCRIPTION
       This document describes filters, sources, and sinks provided by the libavfilter library.

## FILTERING INTRODUCTION
       Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.

       In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple outputs.  To illustrate the
       sorts of things that are possible, we consider the following filtergraph.

                               [main]
               input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
                           |                             ^
                           |[tmp]                  [flip]|
                           +-----> crop --> vflip -------+

       This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one stream through the
       crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it back with the other stream by overlaying
       it on top. You can use the following command to achieve this:

               ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT

       The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored onto the bottom half of the
       output video.

       Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct linear chains of
       filters are separated by semicolons. In our example, _crop,vflip_ are in one linear chain,
       _split_ and _overlay_ are separately in another. The points where the linear chains join are
       labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the example, the split filter generates two
       outputs that are associated to the labels _[main]_ and _[tmp]_.

       The stream sent to the second output of _split_, labelled as _[tmp]_, is processed through the
       _crop_ filter, which crops away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped.
       The _overlay_ filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the split filter (which was
       labelled as _[main]_), and overlay on its lower half the output generated by the _crop,vflip_
       filterchain.

       Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified after the filter name and
       an equal sign, and are separated from each other by a colon.

       There exist so-called _source_ _filters_ that do not have an audio/video input, and _sink_ _filters_
       that will not have audio/video output.

## GRAPH
       The _graph2dot_ program included in the FFmpeg _tools_ directory can be used to parse a
       filtergraph description and issue a corresponding textual representation in the dot language.

       Invoke the command:

               graph2dot -h

       to see how to use _graph2dot_.

       You can then pass the dot description to the _dot_ program (from the graphviz suite of
       programs) and obtain a graphical representation of the filtergraph.

       For example the sequence of commands:

               echo <GRAPH_DESCRIPTION> | \
               tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
               dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
               display graph.png

       can be used to create and display an image representing the graph described by the
       _GRAPH_DESCRIPTION_ string. Note that this string must be a complete self-contained graph, with
       its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.  For example if your command line is of the form:

               ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile

       your _GRAPH_DESCRIPTION_ string will need to be of the form:

               nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink

       you may also need to set the _nullsrc_ parameters and add a _format_ filter in order to simulate
       a specific input file.

## FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
       A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain cycles, and there can
       be multiple links between a pair of filters. Each link has one input pad on one side
       connecting it to one filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
       side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.

       Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class registered in the application,
       which defines the features and the number of input and output pads of the filter.

       A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no output pads is called
       a "sink".

### Filtergraph syntax
       A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is recognized by the **-filter**/**-vf**/**-af **and
### -filter_complex  -vf -af 
       avfilter_graph_parse_ptr() function defined in _libavfilter/avfilter.h_.

       A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one connected to the previous
       one in the sequence. A filterchain is represented by a list of ","-separated filter
       descriptions.

       A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of filterchains is
       represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain descriptions.

       A filter is represented by a string of the form:
       [_in_link_1_]...[_in_link_N_]_filter_name_@_id_=_arguments_[_out_link_1_]...[_out_link_M_]

       _filter_name_ is the name of the filter class of which the described filter is an instance of,
       and has to be the name of one of the filter classes registered in the program optionally
       followed by "@_id_".  The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
       "=_arguments_".

       _arguments_ is a string which contains the parameters used to initialize the filter instance.
       It may have one of two forms:

       •   A ':'-separated list of _key=value_ pairs.

       •   A  ':'-separated list of _value_. In this case, the keys are assumed to be the option names
           in the order they are declared. E.g. the "fade" filter declares  three  options  in  this
           order  -- **type**, **start_frame **and **nb_frames**. Then the parameter list _in:0:30_ means that the
           value _in_ is assigned to the option **type**, _0_ to **start_frame **and _30_ to **nb_frames**.

       •   A ':'-separated list of mixed direct _value_ and long _key=value_  pairs.  The  direct  _value_
           must  precede  the _key=value_ pairs, and follow the same constraints order of the previous
           point. The following _key=value_ pairs can be set in any preferred order.

       If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the "format" filter takes a list of pixel
       formats), the items in the list are usually separated by **|**.

       The list of arguments can be quoted using the character **' **as initial and ending mark, and the
       character **\ **for escaping the characters within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string
       is considered terminated when the next special character (belonging  to  the  set  **[]=;,**)  is
       encountered.

       A  special syntax implemented in the **ffmpeg **CLI tool allows loading option values from files.
       This is done be prepending a slash '/' to  the  option  name,  then  the  supplied  value  is
       interpreted as a path from which the actual value is loaded. E.g.

               ffmpeg -i <INPUT> -vf drawtext=/text=/tmp/some_text <OUTPUT>

       will  load the text to be drawn from _/tmp/some_text_. API users wishing to implement a similar
       feature should use the "avfilter_graph_segment_*()" functions together with custom IO code.

       The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and followed by a list  of  link
       labels.   A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output or input
       pad. The preceding labels _in_link_1_ ... _in_link_N_, are associated to the filter  input  pads,
       the following labels _out_link_1_ ... _out_link_M_, are associated to the output pads.

       When  two  link  labels  with  the same name are found in the filtergraph, a link between the
       corresponding input and output pad is created.

       If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first unlabelled  input  pad
       of the next filter in the filterchain.  For example in the filterchain

               nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink

       the  split  filter  instance  has  two output pads, and the overlay filter instance two input
       pads. The first output pad of split is labelled "L1", the  first  input  pad  of  overlay  is
       labelled  "L2",  and  the  second  output  pad  of split is linked to the second input pad of
       overlay, which are both unlabelled.

       In a filter description, if the input label of the first filter is  not  specified,  "in"  is
       assumed; if the output label of the last filter is not specified, "out" is assumed.

       In  a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output pads must be connected.
       A filtergraph is considered valid if all  the  filter  input  and  output  pads  of  all  the
       filterchains are connected.

       Leading  and  trailing  whitespaces  (space,  tabs,  or  line feeds) separating tokens in the
       filtergraph specification are ignored. This means that the filtergraph can be expressed using
       empty lines and spaces to improve redability.

       For example, the filtergraph:

               testsrc,split[L1],hflip[L2];[L1][L2] hstack

       can be represented as:

               testsrc,
               split [L1], hflip [L2];

               [L1][L2] hstack

       Libavfilter will automatically insert **scale **filters where format conversion is  required.  It
       is  possible  to specify swscale flags for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
       "sws_flags=_flags_;" to the filtergraph description.

       Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:

               <NAME>             ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
               <FILTER_NAME>      ::= <NAME>["@"<NAME>]
               <LINKLABEL>        ::= "[" <NAME> "]"
               <LINKLABELS>       ::= <LINKLABEL> [<LINKLABELS>]
               <FILTER_ARGUMENTS> ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
               <FILTER>           ::= [<LINKLABELS>] <FILTER_NAME> ["=" <FILTER_ARGUMENTS>] [<LINKLABELS>]
               <FILTERCHAIN>      ::= <FILTER> [,<FILTERCHAIN>]
               <FILTERGRAPH>      ::= [sws_flags=<flags>;] <FILTERCHAIN> [;<FILTERGRAPH>]

### Notes on filtergraph escaping
       Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of escaping. See **the "Quoting  and**
       **escaping"  section  in  the  [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown)  manual  **for more information about the employed
       escaping procedure.

       A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option value, which may contain the
       special character ":" used to separate values, or one of the escaping characters "\'".

       A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which may contain the  escaping
       characters "\'" or the special characters "[],;" used by the filtergraph description.

       Finally,  when  you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you need to perform a third
       level escaping for the shell special characters contained within it.

       For example, consider the following string to be embedded in the **drawtext **filter  description
       **text **value:

               this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters

       This string contains the "'" special escaping character, and the ":" special character, so it
       needs to be escaped in this way:

               text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters

       A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter description in a filtergraph
       description,  in  order  to  escape  all the filtergraph special characters. Thus the example
       above becomes:

               drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters

       (note that in addition to the  "\'"  escaping  special  characters,  also  ","  needs  to  be
       escaped).

       Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the filtergraph description in
       a  shell  command,  which  depends  on  the escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example,
       assuming that "\" is special and needs to be escaped with another "\",  the  previous  string
       will finally result in:

               -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"

       In  order  to  avoid  cumbersome  escaping  when  using a commandline tool accepting a filter
       specification as input, it is advisable to avoid direct inclusion of the  filter  or  options
       specification in the shell.

       For  example,  in case of the **drawtext filter**, you might prefer to use the **textfile **option in
       place of **text **to specify the text to render.

       When using the  **ffmpeg  **tool,  you  might  consider  to  use  the  **-filter_script  option  **or
### -filter_complex_script option

## TIMELINE EDITING
       Some  filters  support  a generic **enable **option. For the filters supporting timeline editing,
       this option can be set to an expression which is evaluated before  sending  a  frame  to  the
       filter.  If  the evaluation is non-zero, the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will
       be sent unchanged to the next filter in the filtergraph.

       The expression accepts the following values:

       **t   **timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown

       **n   **sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0

       **pos **the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated, do not use

       **w**
       **h   **width and height of the input frame if video

       Additionally, these filters support an **enable **command that  can  be  used  to  re-define  the
       expression.

       Like any other filtering option, the **enable **option follows the same rules.

       For  example,  to enable a blur filter (**smartblur**) from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, and a **curves**
       filter starting at 3 seconds:

               smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
               curves    = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process

       See "ffmpeg -filters" to view which filters have timeline support.

## CHANGING OPTIONS AT RUNTIME WITH A COMMAND
       Some options can be changed during the operation of the filter using a command. These options
       are marked 'T' on the output of **ffmpeg -h filter=<name of filter>**.  The name of  the  command
       is the name of the option and the argument is the new value.

## OPTIONS FOR FILTERS WITH SEVERAL INPUTS
       Some  filters with several inputs support a common set of options.  These options can only be
       set by name, not with the short notation.

### eof_action
           The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts one of  the
           following values:

           **repeat**
               Repeat the last frame (the default).

           **endall**
               End both streams.

           **pass**
               Pass the main input through.

### shortest
           If  set  to  1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input terminates. Default
           value is 0.

### repeatlast
           If set to 1, force the filter to extend the last frame of secondary streams until the end
           of the primary stream. A value of 0 disables this behavior.  Default value is 1.

### ts_sync_mode
           How strictly to sync streams based on secondary input timestamps; it accepts one  of  the
           following values:

           **default**
               Frame  from  secondary input with the nearest lower or equal timestamp to the primary
               input frame.

           **nearest**
               Frame from secondary input with the absolute nearest timestamp to the  primary  input
               frame.

## AUDIO FILTERS
       When  you  configure  your  FFmpeg  build,  you can disable any of the existing filters using
       "--disable-filters".  The configure output will show  the  audio  filters  included  in  your
       build.

       Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.

### acompressor
       A compressor is mainly used to reduce the dynamic range of a signal.  Especially modern music
       is  mostly  compressed  at a high ratio to improve the overall loudness. It's done to get the
       highest attention of a listener, "fatten" the sound and bring more "power" to the track.   If
       a  signal  is  compressed  too much it may sound dull or "dead" afterwards or it may start to
       "pump" (which could be a powerful effect but can also destroy a track completely).  The right
       compression is the key to reach a professional sound and  is  the  high  art  of  mixing  and
       mastering.  Because  of its complex settings it may take a long time to get the right feeling
       for this kind of effect.

       Compression is done by detecting the volume above a chosen level "threshold" and dividing  it
       by the factor set with "ratio".  So if you set the threshold to -12dB and your signal reaches
       -6dB  a  ratio  of  2:1 will result in a signal at -9dB. Because an exact manipulation of the
       signal would cause distortion of the waveform the reduction can be levelled  over  the  time.
       This  is done by setting "Attack" and "Release".  "attack" determines how long the signal has
       to rise above the threshold before any reduction will occur and "release" sets the  time  the
       signal  has  to  fall below the threshold to reduce the reduction again. Shorter signals than
       the chosen attack time will be left untouched.  The overall reduction of the  signal  can  be
       made  up afterwards with the "makeup" setting. So compressing the peaks of a signal about 6dB
       and raising the makeup to this level results in a signal twice as loud than  the  source.  To
       gain  a softer entry in the compression the "knee" flattens the hard edge at the threshold in
       the range of the chosen decibels.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input gain. Default is 1. Range is between 0.015625 and 64.

### mode
           Set mode of compressor operation. Can be "upward" or "downward".  Default is "downward".

### threshold
           If a signal of stream rises above this level it  will  affect  the  gain  reduction.   By
           default it is 0.125. Range is between 0.00097563 and 1.

### ratio
           Set  a  ratio  by which the signal is reduced. 1:2 means that if the level rose 4dB above
           the threshold, it will be only 2dB above after the reduction.  Default  is  2.  Range  is
           between 1 and 20.

### attack
           Amount  of  milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before gain reduction
           starts. Default is 20. Range is between 0.01 and 2000.

### release
           Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the  threshold  before  reduction  is
           decreased again. Default is 250. Range is between 0.01 and 9000.

### makeup
           Set  the  amount  by  how  much signal will be amplified after processing.  Default is 1.
           Range is from 1 to 64.

### knee
           Curve the sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more  softly.   Default
           is 2.82843. Range is between 1 and 8.

### link
           Choose   if   the   "average"   level  between  all  channels  of  input  stream  or  the
           louder("maximum") channel of input stream affects the reduction. Default is "average".

### detection
           Should the exact signal be taken in case of "peak" or  an  RMS  one  in  case  of  "rms".
           Default is "rms" which is mostly smoother.

       **mix **How much to use compressed signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### acontrast
       Simple audio dynamic range compression/expansion filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### contrast
           Set contrast. Default is 33. Allowed range is between 0 and 100.

### acopy
       Copy  the  input  audio  source  unchanged  to  the output. This is mainly useful for testing
       purposes.

### acrossfade
       Apply cross fade from one input audio stream to another input audio stream.  The  cross  fade
       is applied for specified duration near the end of first stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### nb_samples, ns
           Specify the number of samples for which the cross fade effect has to last.  At the end of
           the cross fade effect the first input audio will be completely silent. Default is 44100.

### duration, d
           Specify  the  duration  of  the  cross  fade effect. See **the Time duration section in the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.  By default the duration is determined by
           _nb_samples_.  If set this option is used instead of _nb_samples_.

### overlap, o
           Should first stream end overlap with second stream start. Default is enabled.

### curve1
           Set curve for cross fade transition for first stream.

### curve2
           Set curve for cross fade transition for second stream.

           For description of available curve types see **afade **filter description.

       _Examples_

       •   Cross fade from one input to another:

                   ffmpeg -i first.flac -i second.flac -filter_complex acrossfade=d=10:c1=exp:c2=exp output.flac

       •   Cross fade from one input to another but without overlapping:

                   ffmpeg -i first.flac -i second.flac -filter_complex acrossfade=d=10:o=0:c1=exp:c2=exp output.flac

### acrossover
       Split audio stream into several bands.

       This filter splits audio stream into two or more frequency ranges.  Summing all streams  back
       will give flat output.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### split
           Set split frequencies. Those must be positive and increasing.

### order
           Set  filter  order  for  each  band  split. This controls filter roll-off or steepness of
           filter transfer function.  Available values are:

           **2nd **12 dB per octave.

           **4th **24 dB per octave.

           **6th **36 dB per octave.

           **8th **48 dB per octave.

           **10th**
               60 dB per octave.

           **12th**
               72 dB per octave.

           **14th**
               84 dB per octave.

           **16th**
               96 dB per octave.

           **18th**
               108 dB per octave.

           **20th**
               120 dB per octave.

           Default is _4th_.

### level
           Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.

### gains
           Set output gain for each band. Default value is 1 for all bands.

### precision
           Set which precision to use when processing samples.

           **auto**
               Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.

           **float**
               Always use single-floating point precision sample format.

           **double**
               Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

           Default value is "auto".

       _Examples_

       •   Split input audio stream into two bands (low and high) with split frequency of  1500  Hz,
           each band will be in separate stream:

                   ffmpeg -i in.flac -filter_complex 'acrossover=split=1500[LOW][HIGH]' -map '[LOW]' low.wav -map '[HIGH]' high.wav

       •   Same as above, but with higher filter order:

                   ffmpeg -i in.flac -filter_complex 'acrossover=split=1500:order=8th[LOW][HIGH]' -map '[LOW]' low.wav -map '[HIGH]' high.wav

       •   Same as above, but also with additional middle band (frequencies between 1500 and 8000):

                   ffmpeg -i in.flac -filter_complex 'acrossover=split=1500 8000:order=8th[LOW][MID][HIGH]' -map '[LOW]' low.wav -map '[MID]' mid.wav -map '[HIGH]' high.wav

### acrusher
       Reduce audio bit resolution.

       This  filter  is  bit  crusher  with enhanced functionality. A bit crusher is used to audibly
       reduce number of bits an audio signal is sampled with. This doesn't change the bit  depth  at
       all,  it  just  produces  the  effect.  Material  reduced  in bit depth sounds more harsh and
       "digital".  This filter is able to even round to continuous values instead  of  discrete  bit
       depths.   Additionally  it  has a D/C offset which results in different crushing of the lower
       and the upper half of the signal.  An Anti-Aliasing  setting  is  able  to  produce  "softer"
       crushing sounds.

       Another  feature  of  this filter is the logarithmic mode.  This setting switches from linear
       distances between bits to logarithmic ones.  The result is a  much  more  "natural"  sounding
       crusher  which  doesn't  gate  low  signals  for  example.  The  human  ear has a logarithmic
       perception, so this kind of crushing is much more pleasant.   Logarithmic  crushing  is  also
       able to get anti-aliased.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set level in.

### level_out
           Set level out.

### bits
           Set bit reduction.

       **mix **Set mixing amount.

### mode
           Can be linear: "lin" or logarithmic: "log".

       **dc  **Set DC.

       **aa  **Set anti-aliasing.

### samples
           Set sample reduction.

       **lfo **Enable LFO. By default disabled.

### lforange
           Set LFO range.

### lforate
           Set LFO rate.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### acue
       Delay audio filtering until a given wallclock timestamp. See the **cue **filter.

### adeclick
       Remove impulsive noise from input audio.

       Samples detected as impulsive noise are replaced by interpolated samples using autoregressive
       modelling.

### window, w
           Set  window  size,  in milliseconds. Allowed range is from 10 to 100. Default value is 55
           milliseconds.  This sets size of window which will be processed at once.

### overlap, o
           Set window overlap, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from 50 to 95. Default
           value is 75 percent.  Setting this to a very high value increases impulsive noise removal
           but makes whole process much slower.

### arorder, a
           Set autoregression order, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from  0  to  25.
           Default  value  is  2  percent. This option also controls quality of interpolated samples
           using neighbour good samples.

### threshold, t
           Set threshold value. Allowed range is from 1 to 100.  Default value is 2.  This  controls
           the  strength of impulsive noise which is going to be removed.  The lower value, the more
           samples will be detected as impulsive noise.

### burst, b
           Set burst fusion, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is 0 to 10.  Default  value
           is  2.   If  any  two  samples detected as noise are spaced less than this value then any
           sample between those two samples will be also detected as noise.

### method, m
           Set overlap method.

           It accepts the following values:

           **add, a**
               Select overlap-add method. Even not interpolated samples are  slightly  changed  with
               this method.

           **save, s**
               Select overlap-save method. Not interpolated samples remain unchanged.

           Default value is "a".

### adeclip
       Remove clipped samples from input audio.

       Samples  detected  as  clipped  are  replaced  by  interpolated  samples using autoregressive
       modelling.

### window, w
           Set window size, in milliseconds. Allowed range is from 10 to 100.  Default value  is  55
           milliseconds.  This sets size of window which will be processed at once.

### overlap, o
           Set window overlap, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from 50 to 95. Default
           value is 75 percent.

### arorder, a
           Set  autoregression  order,  in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from 0 to 25.
           Default value is 8 percent. This option also controls  quality  of  interpolated  samples
           using neighbour good samples.

### threshold, t
           Set  threshold value. Allowed range is from 1 to 100.  Default value is 10. Higher values
           make clip detection less aggressive.

### hsize, n
           Set size of histogram used to detect clips. Allowed range is from 100 to  9999.   Default
           value is 1000. Higher values make clip detection less aggressive.

### method, m
           Set overlap method.

           It accepts the following values:

           **add, a**
               Select  overlap-add  method.  Even not interpolated samples are slightly changed with
               this method.

           **save, s**
               Select overlap-save method. Not interpolated samples remain unchanged.

           Default value is "a".

### adecorrelate
       Apply decorrelation to input audio stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### stages
           Set decorrelation stages of filtering. Allowed range is from 1 to 16. Default value is 6.

### seed
           Set random seed used for setting delay in samples across channels.

### adelay
       Delay one or more audio channels.

       Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### delays
           Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.  Unused delays will
           be silently ignored. If number of given delays is smaller than  number  of  channels  all
           remaining  channels  will  not be delayed.  If you want to delay exact number of samples,
           append 'S' to number.  If you want instead to delay in seconds, append 's' to number.

       **all **Use last set delay for all remaining channels. By default is disabled.   This  option  if
           enabled changes how option "delays" is interpreted.

       _Examples_

       •   Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave the second
           channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.

                   adelay=1500|0|500

       •   Delay second channel by 500 samples, the third channel by 700 samples and leave the first
           channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.

                   adelay=0|500S|700S

       •   Delay all channels by same number of samples:

                   adelay=delays=64S:all=1

### adenorm
       Remedy denormals in audio by adding extremely low-level noise.

       This filter shall be placed before any filter that can produce denormals.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

### level
           Set level of added noise in dB. Default is -351.  Allowed range is from -451 to -90.

### type
           Set type of added noise.

           **dc  **Add DC signal.

           **ac  **Add AC signal.

           **square**
               Add square signal.

           **pulse**
               Add pulse signal.

           Default is "dc".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### aderivative, aintegral
       Compute derivative/integral of audio stream.

       Applying both filters one after another produces original audio.

### adrc
       Apply spectral dynamic range controller filter to input audio stream.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### transfer
           Set the transfer expression.

           The expression can contain the following constants:

           **ch  **current channel number

           **sn  **current sample number

           **nb_channels**
               number of channels

           **t   **timestamp expressed in seconds

           **sr  **sample rate

           **p   **current frequency power value, in dB

           **f   **current frequency in Hz

           Default value is "p".

### attack
           Set  the  attack in milliseconds. Default is 50 milliseconds.  Allowed range is from 1 to
           1000 milliseconds.

### release
           Set the release in milliseconds. Default is 100 milliseconds.  Allowed range is from 5 to
           2000 milliseconds.

### channels
           Set which channels to filter, by default "all" channels in audio stream are filtered.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply spectral compression to all frequencies with threshold of -50 dB and 1:6 ratio:

                   adrc=transfer='if(gt(p,-50),-50+(p-(-50))/6,p)':attack=50:release=100

       •   Similar to above but with 1:2 ratio and filtering only front center channel:

                   adrc=transfer='if(gt(p,-50),-50+(p-(-50))/2,p)':attack=50:release=100:channels=FC

       •   Apply spectral noise gate to all frequencies with threshold of  -85  dB  and  with  short
           attack time and short release time:

                   adrc=transfer='if(lte(p,-85),p-800,p)':attack=1:release=5

       •   Apply spectral expansion to all frequencies with threshold of -10 dB and 1:2 ratio:

                   adrc=transfer='if(lt(p,-10),-10+(p-(-10))*2,p)':attack=50:release=100

       •   Apply limiter to max -60 dB to all frequencies, with attack of 2 ms and release of 10 ms:

                   adrc=transfer='min(p,-60)':attack=2:release=10

### adynamicequalizer
       Apply dynamic equalization to input audio stream.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### threshold
           Set  the  detection threshold used to trigger equalization.  Threshold detection is using
           detection filter.  Default value is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 100.

### dfrequency
           Set the detection frequency in Hz used for detection filter used to trigger equalization.
           Default value is 1000 Hz. Allowed range is between 2 and 1000000 Hz.

### dqfactor
           Set the detection resonance factor for detection filter  used  to  trigger  equalization.
           Default value is 1. Allowed range is from 0.001 to 1000.

### tfrequency
           Set the target frequency of equalization filter.  Default value is 1000 Hz. Allowed range
           is between 2 and 1000000 Hz.

### tqfactor
           Set  the  target  resonance  factor  for target equalization filter.  Default value is 1.
           Allowed range is from 0.001 to 1000.

### attack
           Set the amount of milliseconds the signal from detection has to rise above the  detection
           threshold  before  equalization  starts.   Default  is 20. Allowed range is between 1 and
           2000.

### release
           Set the amount of milliseconds the signal from detection has to fall below the  detection
           threshold before equalization ends.  Default is 200. Allowed range is between 1 and 2000.

### ratio
           Set  the  ratio by which the equalization gain is raised.  Default is 1. Allowed range is
           between 0 and 30.

### makeup
           Set the makeup offset by which the equalization gain is raised.  Default  is  0.  Allowed
           range is between 0 and 100.

### range
           Set the max allowed cut/boost amount. Default is 50.  Allowed range is from 1 to 200.

### mode
           Set the mode of filter operation, can be one of the following:

           **listen**
               Output only isolated detection signal.

           **cut **Cut frequencies above detection threshold.

           **boost**
               Boost frequencies bellow detection threshold.

           Default mode is **cut**.

### dftype
           Set the type of detection filter, can be one of the following:

           **bandpass**
           **lowpass**
           **highpass**
           **peak**

           Default type is **bandpass**.

### tftype
           Set the type of target filter, can be one of the following:

           **bell**
           **lowshelf**
           **highshelf**

           Default type is **bell**.

### direction
           Set processing direction relative to threshold.

           **downward**
               Boost/Cut if threshold is higher/lower than detected volume.

           **upward**
               Boost/Cut if threshold is lower/higher than detected volume.

           Default direction is **downward**.

### auto
           Automatically  gather  threshold  from  detection  filter.  By default is **disabled**.  This
           option is useful to detect threshold in certain time frame of input audio stream, in such
           case option value is changed at runtime.

           Available values are:

           **disabled**
               Disable using automatically gathered threshold value.

           **off **Stop picking threshold value.

           **on  **Start picking threshold value.

### precision
           Set which precision to use when processing samples.

           **auto**
               Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.

           **float**
               Always use single-floating point precision sample format.

           **double**
               Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### adynamicsmooth
       Apply dynamic smoothing to input audio stream.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### sensitivity
           Set an amount of sensitivity to frequency fluctations. Default is 2.   Allowed  range  is
           from 0 to 1e+06.

### basefreq
           Set  a  base frequency for smoothing. Default value is 22050.  Allowed range is from 2 to
           1e+06.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### aecho
       Apply echoing to the input audio.

       Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst  mountains  (and  sometimes  large
       buildings)  when  talking  or  shouting;  digital echo effects emulate this behaviour and are
       often used to help fill out the sound of a single instrument or vocal.  The  time  difference
       between  the  original  signal  and  the  reflection  is the "delay", and the loudness of the
       reflected signal is the "decay".  Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

### in_gain
           Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.6.

### out_gain
           Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.3.

### delays
           Set list of time intervals  in  milliseconds  between  original  signal  and  reflections
           separated by '|'. Allowed range for each "delay" is "(0 - 90000.0]".  Default is 1000.

### decays
           Set  list  of  loudness  of  reflected  signals separated by '|'.  Allowed range for each
           "decay" is "(0 - 1.0]".  Default is 0.5.

       _Examples_

       •   Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:

                   aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4

       •   If delay is very short, then it sounds like a (metallic) robot playing music:

                   aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4

       •   A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:

                   aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3

       •   Same as above but with one more mountain:

                   aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25

### aemphasis
       Audio emphasis filter creates or restores material directly taken from LPs  or  emphased  CDs
       with  different filter curves. E.g. to store music on vinyl the signal has to be altered by a
       filter first to even out the disadvantages of this recording medium.  Once  the  material  is
       played  back  the inverse filter has to be applied to restore the distortion of the frequency
       response.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input gain.

### level_out
           Set output gain.

### mode
           Set  filter  mode.  For  restoring  material  use  "reproduction"  mode,  otherwise   use
           "production" mode. Default is "reproduction" mode.

### type
           Set filter type. Selects medium. Can be one of the following:

           **col **select Columbia.

           **emi **select EMI.

           **bsi **select BSI (78RPM).

           **riaa**
               select RIAA.

           **cd  **select Compact Disc (CD).

           **50fm**
               select 50µs (FM).

           **75fm**
               select 75µs (FM).

           **50kf**
               select 50µs (FM-KF).

           **75kf**
               select 75µs (FM-KF).

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### aeval
       Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.

       This  filter  accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel), which are evaluated and
       used to modify a corresponding audio signal.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### exprs
           Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If the number of  input
           channels is greater than the number of expressions, the last specified expression is used
           for the remaining output channels.

### channel_layout, c
           Set  output  channel  layout.  If  not  specified, the channel layout is specified by the
           number of expressions. If set to **same**, it will use by  default  the  same  input  channel
           layout.

       Each expression in _exprs_ can contain the following constants and functions:

       **ch  **channel number of the current expression

       **n   **number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0

       **s   **sample rate

       **t   **time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds

### nb_in_channels
### nb_out_channels
           input and output number of channels

### val(CH)
           the value of input channel with number _CH_

       Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a dedicated filter.

       _Examples_

       •   Half volume:

                   aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same

       •   Invert phase of the second channel:

                   aeval=[val(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/val/0/markdown)|[-val(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/-val/1/markdown)

### aexciter
       An  exciter is used to produce high sound that is not present in the original signal. This is
       done by creating harmonic distortions of the signal which are restricted in range  and  added
       to  the  original  signal.  An Exciter raises the upper end of an audio signal without simply
       raising the higher frequencies like an equalizer  would  do  to  create  a  more  "crisp"  or
       "brilliant" sound.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set  input  level  prior  processing  of signal.  Allowed range is from 0 to 64.  Default
           value is 1.

### level_out
           Set output level after processing of signal.  Allowed range is from  0  to  64.   Default
           value is 1.

### amount
           Set  the  amount  of  harmonics added to original signal.  Allowed range is from 0 to 64.
           Default value is 1.

### drive
           Set the amount of newly created harmonics.  Allowed range is from  0.1  to  10.   Default
           value is 8.5.

### blend
           Set  the  octave  of  newly created harmonics.  Allowed range is from -10 to 10.  Default
           value is 0.

### freq
           Set the lower frequency limit of producing harmonics in Hz.  Allowed range is  from  2000
           to 12000 Hz.  Default is 7500 Hz.

### ceil
           Set  the  upper  frequency  limit  of producing harmonics.  Allowed range is from 9999 to
           20000 Hz.  If value is lower than 10000 Hz no limit is applied.

### listen
           Mute the original signal and output only added harmonics.  By default is disabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### afade
       Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

### type, t
           Specify the effect type, can be either "in" for fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out  effect.
           Default is "in".

### start_sample, ss
           Specify  the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade effect. Default is
           0.

### nb_samples, ns
           Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At the  end  of  the
           fade-in  effect the output audio will have the same volume as the input audio, at the end
           of the fade-out transition the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.

### start_time, st
           Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.  The value must be specified  as
           a  time  duration;  see  **the  Time duration section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the
           accepted syntax.  If set this option is used instead of _start_sample_.

### duration, d
           Specify the  duration  of  the  fade  effect.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in  the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown)  manual  **for  the  accepted syntax.  At the end of the fade-in effect the
           output audio will have the same volume as the input audio, at the  end  of  the  fade-out
           transition  the  output  audio will be silence.  By default the duration is determined by
           _nb_samples_.  If set this option is used instead of _nb_samples_.

### curve
           Set curve for fade transition.

           It accepts the following values:

           **tri **select triangular, linear slope (default)

           **qsin**
               select quarter of sine wave

           **hsin**
               select half of sine wave

           **esin**
               select exponential sine wave

           **log **select logarithmic

           **ipar**
               select inverted parabola

           **qua **select quadratic

           **cub **select cubic

           **squ **select square root

           **cbr **select cubic root

           **par **select parabola

           **exp **select exponential

           **iqsin**
               select inverted quarter of sine wave

           **ihsin**
               select inverted half of sine wave

           **dese**
               select double-exponential seat

           **desi**
               select double-exponential sigmoid

           **losi**
               select logistic sigmoid

           **sinc**
               select sine cardinal function

           **isinc**
               select inverted sine cardinal function

           **quat**
               select quartic

           **quatr**
               select quartic root

           **qsin2**
               select squared quarter of sine wave

           **hsin2**
               select squared half of sine wave

           **nofade**
               no fade applied

### silence
           Set the initial gain for fade-in or final gain for fade-out.  Default value is 0.0.

### unity
           Set the initial gain for fade-out or final gain for fade-in.  Default value is 1.0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:

                   afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15

       •   Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:

                   afade=t=out:st=875:d=25

### afftdn
       Denoise audio samples with FFT.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

### noise_reduction, nr
           Set the noise reduction in dB, allowed range is 0.01 to 97.  Default value is 12 dB.

### noise_floor, nf
           Set the noise floor in dB, allowed range is -80 to -20.  Default value is -50 dB.

### noise_type, nt
           Set the noise type.

           It accepts the following values:

           **white, w**
               Select white noise.

           **vinyl, v**
               Select vinyl noise.

           **shellac, s**
               Select shellac noise.

           **custom, c**
               Select custom noise, defined in "bn" option.

               Default value is white noise.

### band_noise, bn
           Set custom band noise profile for every one of 15 bands.  Bands are separated by '  '  or
           '|'.

### residual_floor, rf
           Set the residual floor in dB, allowed range is -80 to -20.  Default value is -38 dB.

### track_noise, tn
           Enable  noise  floor tracking. By default is disabled.  With this enabled, noise floor is
           automatically adjusted.

### track_residual, tr
           Enable residual tracking. By default is disabled.

### output_mode, om
           Set the output mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **input, i**
               Pass input unchanged.

           **output, o**
               Pass noise filtered out.

           **noise, n**
               Pass only noise.

               Default value is _output_.

### adaptivity, ad
           Set the adaptivity factor, used how fast to adapt gains adjustments  per  each  frequency
           bin.  Value _0_ enables instant adaptation, while higher values react much slower.  Allowed
           range is from _0_ to _1_. Default value is _0.5_.

### floor_offset, fo
           Set the noise floor offset factor. This option  is  used  to  adjust  offset  applied  to
           measured noise floor. It is only effective when noise floor tracking is enabled.  Allowed
           range is from _-2.0_ to _2.0_. Default value is _1.0_.

### noise_link, nl
           Set the noise link used for multichannel audio.

           It accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Use unchanged channel's noise floor.

           **min **Use measured min noise floor of all channels.

           **max **Use measured max noise floor of all channels.

           **average**
               Use measured average noise floor of all channels.

               Default value is _min_.

### band_multiplier, bm
           Set  the  band  multiplier  factor,  used how much to spread bands across frequency bins.
           Allowed range is from _0.2_ to _5_. Default value is _1.25_.

### sample_noise, sn
           Toggle capturing and measurement of noise profile from input audio.

           It accepts the following values:

           **start, begin**
               Start sample noise capture.

           **stop, end**
               Stop sample noise capture and measure new noise band profile.

               Default value is "none".

### gain_smooth, gs
           Set gain smooth spatial radius, used to smooth  gains  applied  to  each  frequency  bin.
           Useful  to  reduce  random  music  noise artefacts.  Higher values increases smoothing of
           gains.  Allowed range is from 0 to 50.  Default value is 0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the some above mentioned options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Reduce white noise by 10dB, and use previously measured noise floor of -40dB:

                   afftdn=nr=10:nf=-40

       •   Reduce white noise by 10dB, also set initial noise floor to -80dB  and  enable  automatic
           tracking of noise floor so noise floor will gradually change during processing:

                   afftdn=nr=10:nf=-80:tn=1

       •   Reduce noise by 20dB, using noise floor of -40dB and using commands to take noise profile
           of first 0.4 seconds of input audio:

                   asendcmd=0.0 afftdn sn start,asendcmd=0.4 afftdn sn stop,afftdn=nr=20:nf=-40

### afftfilt
       Apply arbitrary expressions to samples in frequency domain.

### real
           Set  frequency domain real expression for each separate channel separated by '|'. Default
           is "re".  If the number of input channels is greater than the number of expressions,  the
           last specified expression is used for the remaining output channels.

### imag
           Set  frequency  domain  imaginary  expression for each separate channel separated by '|'.
           Default is "im".

           Each expression in _real_ and _imag_ can contain the following constants and functions:

           **sr  **sample rate

           **b   **current frequency bin number

           **nb  **number of available bins

           **ch  **channel number of the current expression

           **chs **number of channels

           **pts **current frame pts

           **re  **current real part of frequency bin of current channel

           **im  **current imaginary part of frequency bin of current channel

           **real(b, ch)**
               Return the value of real part of frequency bin at location (_bin_,_channel_)

           **imag(b, ch)**
               Return the value of imaginary part of frequency bin at location (_bin_,_channel_)

### win_size
           Set window size. Allowed range is from 16 to 131072.  Default is 4096

### win_func
           Set window function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hann, hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default is "hann".

### overlap
           Set window overlap. If set to 1, the recommended overlap  for  selected  window  function
           will be picked. Default is 0.75.

       _Examples_

       •   Leave almost only low frequencies in audio:

                   afftfilt="'real=re * (1-clip((b/nb)*b,0,1))':imag='im * (1-clip((b/nb)*b,0,1))'"

       •   Apply robotize effect:

                   afftfilt="real='hypot(re,im)*[sin(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/sin/0/markdown)':imag='hypot(re,im)*[cos(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/cos/0/markdown)':win_size=512:overlap=0.75"

       •   Apply whisper effect:

                   afftfilt="real='hypot(re,im)*cos(([random(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/random/0/markdown)*2-1)*2*3.14)':imag='hypot(re,im)*sin(([random(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/random/1/markdown)*2-1)*2*3.14)':win_size=128:overlap=0.8"

       •   Apply phase shift:

                   afftfilt="real=re*[cos(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/cos/1/markdown)-im*[sin(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/sin/1/markdown):imag=re*[sin(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/sin/1/markdown)+im*[cos(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/cos/1/markdown)"

### afir
       Apply an arbitrary Finite Impulse Response filter.

       This filter is designed for applying long FIR filters, up to 60 seconds long.

       It  can  be  used  as  component for digital crossover filters, room equalization, cross talk
       cancellation, wavefield synthesis, auralization, ambiophonics, ambisonics and spatialization.

       This filter uses the streams higher than first one as FIR  coefficients.   If  the  non-first
       stream  holds  a  single channel, it will be used for all input channels in the first stream,
       otherwise the number of channels in the non-first stream  must  be  same  as  the  number  of
       channels in the first stream.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **dry **Set dry gain. This sets input gain.

       **wet **Set wet gain. This sets final output gain.

### length
           Set Impulse Response filter length. Default is 1, which means whole IR is processed.

### gtype
           Enable applying gain measured from power of IR.

           Set which approach to use for auto gain measurement.

           **none**
               Do not apply any gain.

           **peak**
               select peak gain, very conservative approach. This is default value.

           **dc  **select DC gain, limited application.

           **gn  **select gain to noise approach, this is most popular one.

           **ac  **select AC gain.

           **rms **select RMS gain.

### irgain
           Set  gain  to  be  applied to IR coefficients before filtering.  Allowed range is 0 to 1.
           This gain is applied after any gain applied with _gtype_ option.

### irfmt
           Set format of IR stream. Can be "mono" or "input".  Default is "input".

### maxir
           Set max allowed Impulse Response filter duration  in  seconds.  Default  is  30  seconds.
           Allowed range is 0.1 to 60 seconds.

### response
           Show  IR  frequency response, magnitude(magenta), phase(green) and group delay(yellow) in
           additional video stream.  By default it is disabled.

### channel
           Set for which IR channel to display frequency  response.  By  default  is  first  channel
           displayed. This option is used only when _response_ is enabled.

### size
           Set video stream size. This option is used only when _response_ is enabled.

### rate
           Set video stream frame rate. This option is used only when _response_ is enabled.

### minp
           Set  minimal partition size used for convolution. Default is _8192_.  Allowed range is from
           _1_ to _65536_.  Lower values decreases latency at cost of higher CPU usage.

### maxp
           Set maximal partition size used for convolution. Default is _8192_.  Allowed range is  from
           _8_ to _65536_.  Lower values may increase CPU usage.

### nbirs
           Set  number  of  input  impulse  responses  streams  which will be switchable at runtime.
           Allowed range is from _1_ to _32_. Default is _1_.

       **ir  **Set IR stream which will be used for convolution, starting from _0_, should always be lower
           than supplied value by "nbirs" option. Default is _0_.   This  option  can  be  changed  at
           runtime via **commands**.

### precision
           Set which precision to use when processing samples.

           **auto**
               Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.

           **float**
               Always use single-floating point precision sample format.

           **double**
               Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

           Default value is auto.

### irload
           Set  when  to load IR stream. Can be "init" or "access".  First one load and prepares all
           IRs on initialization, second one once on  first  access  of  specific  IR.   Default  is
           "init".

       _Examples_

       •   Apply reverb to stream using mono IR file as second input, complete command using ffmpeg:

                   ffmpeg -i input.wav -i middle_tunnel_1way_mono.wav -lavfi afir output.wav

       •   Apply  true stereo processing given input stereo stream, and two stereo impulse responses
           for left and right channel, the impulse response files are files with names l_ir.wav  and
           r_ir.wav:

                   "pan=4C|c0=FL|c1=FL|c2=FR|c3=FR[a];amovie=l_ir.wav[LIR];amovie=r_ir.wav[RIR];[LIR][RIR]amerge[ir];[a][ir]afir=irfmt=input:gtype=gn:irgain=-5dB,pan=stereo|FL<c0+c2|FR<c1+c3"

### aformat
       Set  output  format  constraints  for  the input audio. The framework will negotiate the most
       appropriate format to minimize conversions.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### sample_fmts, f
           A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.

### sample_rates, r
           A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.

### channel_layouts, cl
           A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.

           See **the Channel Layout section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the required syntax.

       If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.

       Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo

               aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo

### afreqshift
       Apply frequency shift to input audio samples.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### shift
           Specify frequency shift. Allowed range is -INT_MAX to INT_MAX.  Default value is 0.0.

### level
           Set output gain applied to final output. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.  Default value
           is 1.0.

### order
           Set filter order used for filtering. Allowed range is from 1 to 16.  Default value is 8.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### afwtdn
       Reduce broadband noise from input samples using Wavelets.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### sigma
           Set the noise sigma, allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default  value  is  0.   This  option
           controls  strength  of  denoising  applied to input samples.  Most useful way to set this
           option is via decibels, eg. -45dB.

### levels
           Set the number of wavelet levels of decomposition.   Allowed  range  is  from  1  to  12.
           Default value is 10.  Setting this too low make denoising performance very poor.

### wavet
           Set  wavelet  type  for  decomposition  of  input  frame.   They  are sorted by number of
           coefficients, from lowest to highest.  More coefficients means worse filtering speed, but
           overall better quality.  Available wavelets are:

           **sym2**
           **sym4**
           **rbior68**
           **deb10**
           **sym10**
           **coif5**
           **bl3**
### percent
           Set percent of full denoising. Allowed range is from 0 to 100 percent.  Default value  is
           85 percent or partial denoising.

### profile
           If  enabled,  first  input  frame  will be used as noise profile.  If first frame samples
           contain non-noise performance will be very poor.

### adaptive
           If enabled, input frames are analyzed for presence of noise.  If noise is  detected  with
           high  possibility  then input frame profile will be used for processing following frames,
           until new noise frame is detected.

### samples
           Set size of single frame in number of samples.  Allowed  range  is  from  512  to  65536.
           Default frame size is 8192 samples.

### softness
           Set softness applied inside thresholding function. Allowed range is from 0 to 10. Default
           softness is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### agate
       A  gate  is  mainly  used  to  reduce lower parts of a signal. This kind of signal processing
       reduces disturbing noise between useful signals.

       Gating is done by detecting the volume below a chosen level _threshold_ and dividing it by  the
       factor  set  with  _ratio_.  The  bottom  of the noise floor is set via _range_. Because an exact
       manipulation of the signal would cause distortion  of  the  waveform  the  reduction  can  be
       levelled over time. This is done by setting _attack_ and _release_.

       _attack_  determines  how  long the signal has to fall below the threshold before any reduction
       will occur and _release_ sets the time the signal has to rise above the threshold to reduce the
       reduction again.  Shorter signals than the chosen attack time will be left untouched.

### level_in
           Set input level before filtering.  Default is 1. Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.

### mode
           Set the mode of operation. Can be "upward" or "downward".  Default is "downward". If  set
           to  "upward"  mode,  higher parts of signal will be amplified, expanding dynamic range in
           upward direction.  Otherwise, in case  of  "downward"  lower  parts  of  signal  will  be
           reduced.

### range
           Set  the  level  of  gain  reduction  when the signal is below the threshold.  Default is
           0.06125. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Setting this to 0  disables  reduction  and  then
           filter behaves like expander.

### threshold
           If  a  signal  rises  above this level the gain reduction is released.  Default is 0.125.
           Allowed range is from 0 to 1.

### ratio
           Set a ratio by which the signal is reduced.  Default is 2. Allowed range  is  from  1  to
           9000.

### attack
           Amount  of  milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before gain reduction
           stops.  Default is 20 milliseconds. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.

### release
           Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the threshold before the reduction is
           increased again. Default is 250 milliseconds.  Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.

### makeup
           Set amount of amplification of signal after processing.  Default is 1. Allowed  range  is
           from 1 to 64.

### knee
           Curve  the  sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more softly.  Default
           is 2.828427125. Allowed range is from 1 to 8.

### detection
           Choose if exact signal should be taken for detection or an  RMS  like  one.   Default  is
           "rms". Can be "peak" or "rms".

### link
           Choose  if  the  average  level  between  all  channels or the louder channel affects the
           reduction.  Default is "average". Can be "average" or "maximum".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### aiir
       Apply an arbitrary Infinite Impulse Response filter.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### zeros, z
           Set B/numerator/zeros/reflection coefficients.

### poles, p
           Set A/denominator/poles/ladder coefficients.

### gains, k
           Set channels gains.

### dry_gain
           Set input gain.

### wet_gain
           Set output gain.

### format, f
           Set coefficients format.

           **ll  **lattice-ladder function

           **sf  **analog transfer function

           **tf  **digital transfer function

           **zp  **Z-plane zeros/poles, cartesian (default)

           **pr  **Z-plane zeros/poles, polar radians

           **pd  **Z-plane zeros/poles, polar degrees

           **sp  **S-plane zeros/poles

### process, r
           Set type of processing.

           **d   **direct processing

           **s   **serial processing

           **p   **parallel processing

### precision, e
           Set filtering precision.

           **dbl **double-precision floating-point (default)

           **flt **single-precision floating-point

           **i32 **32-bit integers

           **i16 **16-bit integers

### normalize, n
           Normalize filter coefficients,  by  default  is  enabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

       **mix **How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### response
           Show  IR  frequency response, magnitude(magenta), phase(green) and group delay(yellow) in
           additional video stream.  By default it is disabled.

### channel
           Set for which IR channel to display frequency  response.  By  default  is  first  channel
           displayed. This option is used only when _response_ is enabled.

### size
           Set video stream size. This option is used only when _response_ is enabled.

       Coefficients in "tf" and "sf" format are separated by spaces and are in ascending order.

       Coefficients in "zp" format are separated by spaces and order of coefficients doesn't matter.
       Coefficients in "zp" format are complex numbers with _i_ imaginary unit.

       Different  coefficients  and gains can be provided for every channel, in such case use '|' to
       separate coefficients or gains. Last provided coefficients will be  used  for  all  remaining
       channels.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply 2 pole elliptic notch at around 5000Hz for 48000 Hz sample rate:

                   aiir=k=1:z=7.957584807809675810E-1 -2.575128568908332300 3.674839853930788710 -2.57512875289799137 7.957586296317130880E-1:p=1 -2.86950072432325953 3.63022088054647218 -2.28075678147272232 6.361362326477423500E-1:f=tf:r=d

       •   Same as above but in "zp" format:

                   aiir=k=0.79575848078096756:z=0.80918701+0.58773007i 0.80918701-0.58773007i 0.80884700+0.58784055i 0.80884700-0.58784055i:p=0.63892345+0.59951235i 0.63892345-0.59951235i 0.79582691+0.44198673i 0.79582691-0.44198673i:f=zp:r=s

       •   Apply  3-rd  order  analog  normalized Butterworth low-pass filter, using analog transfer
           function format:

                   aiir=z=1.3057 0 0 0:p=1.3057 2.3892 2.1860 1:f=sf:r=d

### alimiter
       The limiter prevents an input signal from rising over a desired threshold.  This limiter uses
       lookahead technology to prevent your signal from distorting.  It means that there is a  small
       delay  after  the  signal is processed. Keep in mind that the delay it produces is the attack
       time you set.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input gain. Default is 1.

### level_out
           Set output gain. Default is 1.

### limit
           Don't let signals above this level pass the limiter. Default is 1.

### attack
           The limiter will reach its attenuation level in this  amount  of  time  in  milliseconds.
           Default is 5 milliseconds.

### release
           Come back from limiting to attenuation 1.0 in this amount of milliseconds.  Default is 50
           milliseconds.

       **asc **When  gain reduction is always needed ASC takes care of releasing to an average reduction
           level rather than reaching a reduction of 0 in the release time.

### asc_level
           Select how much the release time is affected by ASC, 0 means nearly no changes in release
           time while 1 produces higher release times.

### level
           Auto level output signal. Default is enabled.  This  normalizes  audio  back  to  0dB  if
           enabled.

### latency
           Compensate  the delay introduced by using the lookahead buffer set with attack parameter.
           Also flush the valid audio data in the lookahead buffer when the stream hits EOF.

       Depending on picked setting it is recommended to upsample input 2x or 4x times with **aresample**
       before applying this filter.

### allpass
       Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz) _frequency_,  and  filter-width
       _width_.   An  all-pass  filter  changes  the  audio's  frequency to phase relationship without
       changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set frequency in Hz.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### order, o
           Set the filter order, can be 1 or 2. Default is 2.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change allpass frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change allpass width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change allpass width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### mix, m
           Change allpass mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### aloop
       Loop audio samples.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### loop
           Set the number of loops. Setting this value to -1 will result in infinite loops.  Default
           is 0.

### size
           Set maximal number of samples. Default is 0.

### start
           Set first sample of loop. Default is 0.

### time
           Set the time of loop start in seconds.  Only used if option named _start_ is set to -1.

### amerge
       Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### inputs
           Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.

       If  the  channel  layouts  of  the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible, the channel
       layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels will be reordered as necessary.
       If the channel layouts of the inputs are not disjoint, the output will have all the  channels
       of  the first input then all the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel
       layout of the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of channels.

       For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input is  FC+BL+BR,  then
       the  output  will be in 5.1, with the channels in the following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3
       (a1 is the first channel of the first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).

       On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be  in  the  default
       order:  a1,  a2,  b1, b2, and the channel layout will be arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or
       may not be the expected value.

       All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.

       If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the shortest.

       _Examples_

       •   Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:

                   amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge

       •   Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in _input.mkv_:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv

### amix
       Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.

       Note that this filter only supports float samples (the _amerge_ and _pan_ audio  filters  support
       many  formats).  If  the  _amix_ input has integer samples then **aresample **will be automatically
       inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### inputs
           The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.

### duration
           How to determine the end-of-stream.

           **longest**
               The duration of the longest input. (default)

           **shortest**
               The duration of the shortest input.

           **first**
               The duration of the first input.

### dropout_transition
           The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an  input  stream  ends.
           The default value is 2 seconds.

### weights
           Specify  weight of each input audio stream as a sequence of numbers separated by a space.
           If fewer weights are specified compared to number of inputs, the last weight is  assigned
           to the remaining inputs.  Default weight for each input is 1.

### normalize
           Always scale inputs instead of only doing summation of samples.  Beware of heavy clipping
           if  inputs  are  not normalized prior or after filtering by this filter if this option is
           disabled. By default is enabled.

       _Examples_

       •   This will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with  the  same  duration  as  the
           first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT

       •   This will mix one vocal and one music input audio stream to a single output with the same
           duration  as the longest input. The music will have quarter the weight as the vocals, and
           the inputs are not normalized:

                   ffmpeg -i VOCALS -i MUSIC -filter_complex amix=inputs=2:duration=longest:dropout_transition=0:weights="1 0.25":normalize=0 OUTPUT

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### weights
### normalize
           Syntax is same as option with same name.

### amultiply
       Multiply first audio stream with second audio stream and store result in output audio stream.
       Multiplication is done by multiplying each sample from  first  stream  with  sample  at  same
       position from second stream.

       With   this  element-wise  multiplication  one  can  create  amplitude  fades  and  amplitude
       modulations.

### anequalizer
       High-order parametric multiband equalizer for each channel.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### params
           This option string is in format: "c_chn_ f=_cf_ w=_w_ g=_g_ t=_f_ | ..."  Each  equalizer  band  is
           separated by '|'.

           **chn **Set channel number to which equalization will be applied.  If input doesn't have that
               channel the entry is ignored.

           **f   **Set  central  frequency  for band.  If input doesn't have that frequency the entry is
               ignored.

           **w   **Set band width in Hertz.

           **g   **Set band gain in dB.

           **t   **Set filter type for band, optional, can be:

               **0   **Butterworth, this is default.

               **1   **Chebyshev type 1.

               **2   **Chebyshev type 2.

### curves
           With this option activated frequency  response  of  anequalizer  is  displayed  in  video
           stream.

### size
           Set video stream size. Only useful if curves option is activated.

### mgain
           Set  max gain that will be displayed. Only useful if curves option is activated.  Setting
           this to a reasonable value makes it possible  to  display  gain  which  is  derived  from
           neighbour  bands which are too close to each other and thus produce higher gain when both
           are activated.

### fscale
           Set frequency scale used to draw frequency response in video output.  Can  be  linear  or
           logarithmic. Default is logarithmic.

### colors
           Set color for each channel curve which is going to be displayed in video stream.  This is
           list of color names separated by space or by '|'.  Unrecognised or missing colors will be
           replaced by white color.

       _Examples_

       •   Lower  gain  by 10 of central frequency 200Hz and width 100 Hz for first 2 channels using
           Chebyshev type 1 filter:

                   anequalizer=c0 f=200 w=100 g=-10 t=1|c1 f=200 w=100 g=-10 t=1

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### change
           Alter   existing    filter    parameters.     Syntax    for    the    commands    is    :
           "_fN_|f=_freq_|w=_width_|g=_gain_"

           _fN_  is  existing  filter number, starting from 0, if no such filter is available error is
           returned.  _freq_ set new frequency parameter.  _width_ set new  width  parameter  in  Hertz.
           _gain_ set new gain parameter in dB.

           Full  filter  invocation  with  asendcmd  may look like this: asendcmd=c='4.0 anequalizer
           change 0|f=200|w=50|g=1',anequalizer=...

### anlmdn
       Reduce broadband noise in audio samples using Non-Local Means algorithm.

       Each sample is adjusted by looking for other samples  with  similar  contexts.  This  context
       similarity  is defined by comparing their surrounding patches of size **p**. Patches are searched
       in an area of **r **around the sample.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### strength, s
           Set denoising strength. Allowed range is from 0.00001 to 10000. Default value is 0.00001.

### patch, p
           Set patch radius duration. Allowed range is from 1 to 100 milliseconds.  Default value is
           2 milliseconds.

### research, r
           Set research radius duration. Allowed range is from 2 to 300 milliseconds.  Default value
           is 6 milliseconds.

### output, o
           Set the output mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **i   **Pass input unchanged.

           **o   **Pass noise filtered out.

           **n   **Pass only noise.

               Default value is _o_.

### smooth, m
           Set smooth factor. Default value is _11_. Allowed range is from _1_ to _1000_.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### anlmf, anlms
       Apply Normalized Least-Mean-(Squares|Fourth) algorithm to the first audio  stream  using  the
       second audio stream.

       This  adaptive  filter  is  used to mimic a desired filter by finding the filter coefficients
       that relate to producing the least mean square of the error signal  (difference  between  the
       desired, 2nd input audio stream and the actual signal, the 1st input audio stream).

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### order
           Set filter order.

       **mu  **Set filter mu.

       **eps **Set the filter eps.

### leakage
           Set the filter leakage.

### out_mode
           It accepts the following values:

           **i   **Pass the 1st input.

           **d   **Pass the 2nd input.

           **o   **Pass difference between desired, 2nd input and error signal estimate.

           **n   **Pass difference between input, 1st input and error signal estimate.

           **e   **Pass error signal estimated samples.

               Default value is _o_.

       _Examples_

       •   One  of  many usages of this filter is noise reduction, input audio is filtered with same
           samples that are delayed by fixed amount, one such example for stereo audio is:

                   asplit[a][b],[a]adelay=32S|32S[a],[b][a]anlms=order=128:leakage=0.0005:mu=.5:out_mode=o

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the same commands as options, excluding option "order".

### anull
       Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.

### apad
       Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.

       This can be used together with **ffmpeg -shortest **to extend audio streams to the same length as
       the video stream.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### packet_size
           Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.

### pad_len
           Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the value is  reached,  the
           stream is terminated. This option is mutually exclusive with **whole_len**.

### whole_len
           Set  the  minimum  total  number  of  samples in the output audio stream. If the value is
           longer than the input audio length, silence is added to  the  end,  until  the  value  is
           reached. This option is mutually exclusive with **pad_len**.

### pad_dur
           Specify  the  duration of samples of silence to add. See **the Time duration section in the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax. Used only if set to non-negative value.

### whole_dur
           Specify the minimum total duration in the output audio  stream.  See  **the  Time  duration**
           **section  in  the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax. Used only if set to non-
           negative value. If the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is  added  to
           the end, until the value is reached.  This option is mutually exclusive with **pad_dur**

       If  neither the **pad_len **nor the **whole_len **nor **pad_dur **nor **whole_dur **option is set, the filter
       will add silence to the end of the input stream indefinitely.

       Note that for ffmpeg 4.4 and earlier a zero **pad_dur **or **whole_dur **also caused  the  filter  to
       add silence indefinitely.

       _Examples_

       •   Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:

                   apad=pad_len=1024

       •   Make  sure  the  audio  output  will  contain  at least 10000 samples, pad the input with
           silence if required:

                   apad=whole_len=10000

       •   Use **ffmpeg **to pad the audio input with silence, so that  the  video  stream  will  always
           result the shortest and will be converted until the end in the output file when using the
           **shortest **option:

                   ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT

### aphaser
       Add a phasing effect to the input audio.

       A  phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.  The position
       of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they  vary  over  time,  creating  a  sweeping
       effect.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

### in_gain
           Set input gain. Default is 0.4.

### out_gain
           Set output gain. Default is 0.74

### delay
           Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.

### decay
           Set decay. Default is 0.4.

### speed
           Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.

### type
           Set modulation type. Default is triangular.

           It accepts the following values:

           **triangular, t**
           **sinusoidal, s**

### aphaseshift
       Apply phase shift to input audio samples.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### shift
           Specify phase shift. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.  Default value is 0.0.

### level
           Set output gain applied to final output. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.  Default value
           is 1.0.

### order
           Set filter order used for filtering. Allowed range is from 1 to 16.  Default value is 8.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### apsnr
       Measure Audio Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio.

       This  filter  takes two audio streams for input, and outputs first audio stream.  Results are
       in dB per channel at end of either input.

### apsyclip
       Apply Psychoacoustic clipper to input audio stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].

### level_out
           Set output gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].

### clip
           Set the clipping start value. Default value is 0dBFS or 1.

### diff
           Output only difference samples, useful to hear introduced  distortions.   By  default  is
           disabled.

### adaptive
           Set strength of adaptive distortion applied. Default value is 0.5.  Allowed range is from
           0 to 1.

### iterations
           Set  number  of  iterations  of  psychoacoustic  clipper.  Allowed range is from 1 to 20.
           Default value is 10.

### level
           Auto level output signal. Default is disabled.  This normalizes audio back  to  0dBFS  if
           enabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### apulsator
       Audio  pulsator  is  something between an autopanner and a tremolo.  But it can produce funny
       stereo effects as well. Pulsator changes the volume of the left and right channel based on  a
       LFO (low frequency oscillator) with different waveforms and shifted phases.  This filter have
       the  ability  to  define  an offset between left and right channel. An offset of 0 means that
       both LFO shapes match each other.  The left  and  right  channel  are  altered  equally  -  a
       conventional  tremolo.  An offset of 50% means that the shape of the right channel is exactly
       shifted in phase (or moved backwards about half of the  frequency)  -  pulsator  acts  as  an
       autopanner.  At  1  both  curves  match again. Every setting in between moves the phase shift
       gapless between all stages and produces  some  "bypassing"  sounds  with  sine  and  triangle
       waveforms.  The  more you set the offset near 1 (starting from the 0.5) the faster the signal
       passes from the left to the right speaker.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].

### level_out
           Set output gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].

### mode
           Set waveform shape the LFO will use. Can be one of:  sine,  triangle,  square,  sawup  or
           sawdown. Default is sine.

### amount
           Set modulation. Define how much of original signal is affected by the LFO.

### offset_l
           Set left channel offset. Default is 0. Allowed range is [0 - 1].

### offset_r
           Set right channel offset. Default is 0.5. Allowed range is [0 - 1].

### width
           Set pulse width. Default is 1. Allowed range is [0 - 2].

### timing
           Set possible timing mode. Can be one of: bpm, ms or hz. Default is hz.

       **bpm **Set bpm. Default is 120. Allowed range is [30 - 300]. Only used if timing is set to bpm.

       **ms  **Set ms. Default is 500. Allowed range is [10 - 2000]. Only used if timing is set to ms.

       **hz  **Set  frequency in Hz. Default is 2. Allowed range is [0.01 - 100]. Only used if timing is
           set to hz.

### aresample
       Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using  the  libswresample  library.  If
       none are specified then the filter will automatically convert between its input and output.

       This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match the timestamps or
       to  inject  silence / cut out audio to make it match the timestamps, do a combination of both
       or do neither.

       The filter accepts the syntax [_sample_rate_:]_resampler_options_, where _sample_rate_ expresses  a
       sample  rate  and  _resampler_options_  is a list of _key_=_value_ pairs, separated by ":". See the
       **"Resampler Options" section in the  [ffmpeg-resampler(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-resampler/1/markdown)  manual  **for  the  complete  list  of
       supported options.

       _Examples_

       •   Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:

                   aresample=44100

       •   Stretch/squeeze  samples  to  the  given  timestamps,  with a maximum of 1000 samples per
           second compensation:

                   aresample=async=1000

### areverse
       Reverse an audio clip.

       Warning: This filter requires memory to buffer the entire clip, so trimming is suggested.

       _Examples_

       •   Take the first 5 seconds of a clip, and reverse it.

                   atrim=end=5,areverse

### arls
       Apply Recursive Least Squares algorithm to the first audio  stream  using  the  second  audio
       stream.

       This  adaptive  filter  is  used  to mimic a desired filter by recursively finding the filter
       coefficients that relate to producing the minimal weighted linear least squares cost function
       of the error signal (difference between the desired, 2nd input audio stream  and  the  actual
       signal, the 1st input audio stream).

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### order
           Set the filter order.

### lambda
           Set the forgetting factor.

### delta
           Set the coefficient to initialize internal covariance matrix.

### out_mode
           Set the filter output samples. It accepts the following values:

           **i   **Pass the 1st input.

           **d   **Pass the 2nd input.

           **o   **Pass difference between desired, 2nd input and error signal estimate.

           **n   **Pass difference between input, 1st input and error signal estimate.

           **e   **Pass error signal estimated samples.

               Default value is _o_.

### arnndn
       Reduce noise from speech using Recurrent Neural Networks.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### model, m
           Set train model file to load. This option is always required.

       **mix **Set  how  much to mix filtered samples into final output.  Allowed range is from -1 to 1.
           Default value is 1.  Negative values are special, they set  how  much  to  keep  filtered
           noise in the final filter output. Set this option to -1 to hear actual noise removed from
           input signal.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### asdr
       Measure Audio Signal-to-Distortion Ratio.

       This  filter  takes two audio streams for input, and outputs first audio stream.  Results are
       in dB per channel at end of either input.

### asetnsamples
       Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.

       The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as the  filter  will  flush
       all the remaining samples when the input audio signals its end.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### nb_out_samples, n
           Set  the  number  of  frames  per  each output audio frame. The number is intended as the
           number of samples _per_ _each_ _channel_.  Default value is 1024.

### pad, p
           If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so that the last frame
           will contain the same number of samples as the previous ones. Default value is 1.

       For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and disable padding for the  last
       frame, use:

               asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0

### asetrate
       Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.  This will result in a change of speed and
       pitch.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sample_rate, r
           Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.

### ashowinfo
       Show  a  line  containing various information for each input audio frame.  The input audio is
       not modified.

       The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form _key_:_value_.

       The following values are shown in the output:

       **n   **The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.

       **pts **The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base  depends
           on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/_sample_rate_.

### pts_time
           The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.

       **fmt **The sample format.

### chlayout
           The channel layout.

### rate
           The sample rate for the audio frame.

### nb_samples
           The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.

### checksum
           The  Adler-32  checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar audio, the
           data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.

### plane_checksums
           A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.

### asisdr
       Measure Audio Scaled-Invariant Signal-to-Distortion Ratio.

       This filter takes two audio streams for input, and outputs first audio stream.   Results  are
       in dB per channel at end of either input.

### asoftclip
       Apply audio soft clipping.

       Soft  clipping  is  a  type of distortion effect where the amplitude of a signal is saturated
       along a smooth curve, rather than the abrupt shape of hard-clipping.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### type
           Set type of soft-clipping.

           It accepts the following values:

           **hard**
           **tanh**
           **atan**
           **cubic**
           **exp**
           **alg**
           **quintic**
           **sin**
           **erf**
### threshold
           Set threshold from where to start clipping. Default value is 0dB or 1.

### output
           Set gain applied to output. Default value is 0dB or 1.

### param
           Set additional parameter which controls sigmoid function.

### oversample
           Set oversampling factor.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### aspectralstats
       Display frequency domain statistical information about the audio  channels.   Statistics  are
       calculated and stored as metadata for each audio channel and for each audio frame.

       It accepts the following option:

### win_size
           Set  the  window  length  in samples. Default value is 2048.  Allowed range is from 32 to
           65536.

### win_func
           Set window function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hann, hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default is "hann".

### overlap
           Set window overlap. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.5.

### measure
           Select the parameters which are measured. The metadata keys can be used as flags, default
           is **all **which measures everything.  **none **disables all measurement.

       A list of each metadata key follows:

### mean
### variance
### centroid
### spread
### skewness
### kurtosis
### entropy
### flatness
### crest
### flux
### slope
### decrease
### rolloff

### asr
       Automatic Speech Recognition

       This filter uses PocketSphinx for speech recognition. To enable compilation of  this  filter,
       you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-pocketsphinx".

       It accepts the following options:

### rate
           Set  sampling  rate of input audio. Defaults is 16000.  This need to match speech models,
           otherwise one will get poor results.

       **hmm **Set dictionary containing acoustic model files.

### dict
           Set pronunciation dictionary.

       **lm  **Set language model file.

### lmctl
           Set language model set.

### lmname
           Set which language model to use.

### logfn
           Set output for log messages.

       The filter exports recognized speech as the frame metadata "lavfi.asr.text".

### astats
       Display time domain  statistical  information  about  the  audio  channels.   Statistics  are
       calculated  and  displayed for each audio channel and, where applicable, an overall figure is
       also given.

       It accepts the following option:

### length
           Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough  RMS  measurement.   Default  is
           0.05 (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is "[0 - 10]".

### metadata
           Set  metadata  injection. All the metadata keys are prefixed with "lavfi.astats.X", where
           "X" is channel number starting from 1 or string "Overall". Default is disabled.

           Available keys for each  channel  are:  _Bit_depth_  _Crest_factor_  _DC_offset_  _Dynamic_range_
           _Entropy_  _Flat_factor_  _Max_difference_  _Max_level_  _Mean_difference_ _Min_difference_ _Min_level_
           _Noise_floor_   _Noise_floor_count_   _Number_of_Infs_    _Number_of_NaNs_    _Number_of_denormals_
           _Peak_count_  _Abs_Peak_count_  _Peak_level_  _RMS_difference_ _RMS_peak_ _RMS_trough_ _Zero_crossings_
           _Zero_crossings_rate_

           and for "Overall":  _Bit_depth_  _DC_offset_  _Entropy_  _Flat_factor_  _Max_difference_  _Max_level_
           _Mean_difference_  _Min_difference_  _Min_level_  _Noise_floor_  _Noise_floor_count_ _Number_of_Infs_
           _Number_of_NaNs_ _Number_of_denormals_ _Number_of_samples_ _Peak_count_ _Abs_Peak_count_ _Peak_level_
           _RMS_difference_ _RMS_level_ _RMS_peak_ _RMS_trough_

           For    example,    a    full    key    looks    like    "lavfi.astats.1.DC_offset"     or
           "lavfi.astats.Overall.Peak_count".

           Read below for the description of the keys.

### reset
           Set  the  number of frames over which cumulative stats are calculated before being reset.
           Default is disabled.

### measure_perchannel
           Select the parameters which are measured per channel. The metadata keys can  be  used  as
           flags,  default  is  **all  **which  measures  everything.   **none  **disables  all  per channel
           measurement.

### measure_overall
           Select the parameters which are measured overall. The metadata keys can be used as flags,
           default is **all **which measures everything.  **none **disables all overall measurement.

       A description of the measure keys follow:

### none
           no measures

       **all **all measures

### Bit_depth
           overall bit depth of audio, i.e. number of bits used for each sample

### Crest_factor
           standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB)

### DC_offset
           mean amplitude displacement from zero

### Dynamic_range
           measured dynamic range of audio in dB

### Entropy
           entropy measured across whole audio, entropy of value near 1.0 is typically measured  for
           white noise

### Flat_factor
           flatness  (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
           (i.e. either _Min_level_ or _Max_level_)

### Max_difference
           maximal difference between two consecutive samples

### Max_level
           maximal sample level

### Mean_difference
           mean difference between two consecutive samples, i.e.  the  average  of  each  difference
           between two consecutive samples

### Min_difference
           minimal difference between two consecutive samples

### Min_level
           minimal sample level

### Noise_floor
           minimum local peak measured in dBFS over a short window

### Noise_floor_count
           number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained _Noise_ _floor_

### Number_of_Infs
           number of samples with an infinite value

### Number_of_NaNs
           number of samples with a NaN (not a number) value

### Number_of_denormals
           number of samples with a subnormal value

### Number_of_samples
           number of samples

### Peak_count
           number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either _Min_level_
           or _Max_level_

### Abs_Peak_count
           number of occasions that the absolute samples taken from the signal attained max absolute
           value of _Min_level_ and _Max_level_

### Peak_level
           standard peak level measured in dBFS

### RMS_difference
           Root Mean Square difference between two consecutive samples

### RMS_level
           standard RMS level measured in dBFS

### RMS_peak
### RMS_trough
           peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window, measured in dBFS.

### Zero crossings
           number of points where the waveform crosses the zero level axis

### Zero crossings rate
           rate of Zero crossings and number of audio samples

### asubboost
       Boost subwoofer frequencies.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **dry **Set dry gain, how much of original signal is kept. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default
           value is 1.0.

       **wet **Set wet gain, how much of filtered signal is kept. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default
           value is 1.0.

### boost
           Set max boost factor. Allowed range is from 1 to 12. Default value is 2.

### decay
           Set delay line decay gain value. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 0.0.

### feedback
           Set delay line feedback gain value. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 0.9.

### cutoff
           Set cutoff frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 50 to 900.  Default value is 100.

### slope
           Set  slope  amount  for cutoff frequency. Allowed range is 0.0001 to 1.  Default value is
           0.5.

### delay
           Set delay. Allowed range is from 1 to 100.  Default value is 20.

### channels
           Set the channels to process. Default value is all available.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### asubcut
       Cut subwoofer frequencies.

       This filter allows to set custom, steeper roll off than highpass filter, and thus is able  to
       more attenuate frequency content in stop-band.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### cutoff
           Set cutoff frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 2 to 200.  Default value is 20.

### order
           Set filter order. Available values are from 3 to 20.  Default value is 10.

### level
           Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### asupercut
       Cut super frequencies.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### cutoff
           Set cutoff frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 20000 to 192000.  Default value is 20000.

### order
           Set filter order. Available values are from 3 to 20.  Default value is 10.

### level
           Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### asuperpass
       Apply high order Butterworth band-pass filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### centerf
           Set center frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 2 to 999999.  Default value is 1000.

### order
           Set filter order. Available values are from 4 to 20.  Default value is 4.

### qfactor
           Set Q-factor. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 100. Default value is 1.

### level
           Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 2. Default value is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### asuperstop
       Apply high order Butterworth band-stop filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### centerf
           Set center frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 2 to 999999.  Default value is 1000.

### order
           Set filter order. Available values are from 4 to 20.  Default value is 4.

### qfactor
           Set Q-factor. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 100. Default value is 1.

### level
           Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 2. Default value is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### atempo
       Adjust audio tempo.

       The  filter  accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not specified then the filter
       will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must be in the [0.5, 100.0] range.

       Note that tempo greater than 2 will skip some samples rather than blend them in.  If for  any
       reason  this is a concern it is always possible to daisy-chain several instances of atempo to
       achieve the desired product tempo.

       _Examples_

       •   Slow down audio to 80% tempo:

                   atempo=0.8

       •   To speed up audio to 300% tempo:

                   atempo=3

       •   To speed up audio to 300% tempo by daisy-chaining two atempo instances:

                   atempo=[sqrt(3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/sqrt/3/markdown),atempo=[sqrt(3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/sqrt/3/markdown)

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### tempo
           Change filter tempo scale factor.  Syntax for the command is : "_tempo_"

### atilt
       Apply spectral tilt filter to audio stream.

       This filter apply any spectral roll-off slope over any specified frequency band.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### freq
           Set central frequency of tilt in Hz. Default is 10000 Hz.

### slope
           Set slope direction of tilt. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### width
           Set width of tilt. Default is 1000. Allowed range is from 100 to 10000.

### order
           Set order of tilt filter.

### level
           Set input volume level. Allowed range is from 0 to 4.  Defalt is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### atrim
       Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### start
           Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the  audio  sample  with
           the timestamp _start_ will be the first sample in the output.

       **end **Specify  time  of  the  first  audio  sample  that will be dropped, i.e. the audio sample
           immediately preceding the one with the timestamp _end_ will  be  the  last  sample  in  the
           output.

### start_pts
           Same as _start_, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples instead of seconds.

### end_pts
           Same as _end_, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead of seconds.

### duration
           The maximum duration of the output in seconds.

### start_sample
           The number of the first sample that should be output.

### end_sample
           The number of the first sample that should be dropped.

       **start**, **end**, and **duration **are expressed as time duration specifications; see **the Time duration**
       **section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual**.

       Note  that  the  first  two sets of the start/end options and the **duration **option look at the
       frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the samples  that  pass  through  the
       filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will give different results when the timestamps
       are  wrong,  inexact  or do not start at zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the
       timestamps. If you wish to have the output timestamps  start  at  zero,  insert  the  asetpts
       filter after the atrim filter.

       If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and keep all samples
       that  match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep only the part that matches all
       the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim filters.

       The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.  just the end
       values to keep everything before the specified time.

       Examples:

       •   Drop everything except the second minute of input:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120

       •   Keep only the first 1000 samples:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000

### axcorrelate
       Calculate normalized windowed cross-correlation between two input audio streams.

       Resulted samples are always between -1 and 1 inclusive.  If result is 1 it  means  two  input
       samples  are  highly  correlated  in  that  selected  segment.   Result  0 means they are not
       correlated at all.  If result is -1 it means two input samples are out of phase, which  means
       they cancel each other.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size
           Set  size of segment over which cross-correlation is calculated.  Default is 256. Allowed
           range is from 2 to 131072.

### algo
           Set algorithm for cross-correlation. Can be "slow"  or  "fast"  or  "best".   Default  is
           "best".  Fast  algorithm  assumes  mean values over any given segment are always zero and
           thus need much less calculations to make.  This is generally not true, but is  valid  for
           typical audio streams.

       _Examples_

       •   Calculate correlation between channels in stereo audio stream:

                   ffmpeg -i stereo.wav -af channelsplit,axcorrelate=size=1024:algo=fast correlation.wav

### bandpass
       Apply  a  two-pole  Butterworth  band-pass  filter  with  central  frequency  _frequency_,  and
       (3dB-point) band-width width.  The _csg_ option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain  =  Q)
       instead  of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.  The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB
       per decade).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set the filter's central frequency. Default is 3000.

       **csg **Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change bandpass frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change bandpass width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change bandpass width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### mix, m
           Change bandpass mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### bandreject
       Apply  a  two-pole  Butterworth  band-reject  filter  with  central  frequency _frequency_, and
       (3dB-point) band-width _width_.  The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set the filter's central frequency. Default is 3000.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change bandreject frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change bandreject width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change bandreject width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### mix, m
           Change bandreject mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### bass, lowshelf
       Boost  or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole shelving filter with
       a response similar to that of a  standard  hi-fi's  tone-controls.  This  is  also  known  as
       shelving equalisation (EQ).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### gain, g
           Give  the  gain  at  0  Hz. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut) to +20 (for a
           large boost).  Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.

### frequency, f
           Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used to extend or reduce  the  frequency
           range to be boosted or cut.  The default value is 100 Hz.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.

### poles, p
           Set number of poles. Default is 2.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize  biquad  coefficients,  by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling it will normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero  values)  filtering
           will  become  linear  phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will just produce nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change bass frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change bass width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change bass width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### gain, g
           Change bass gain.  Syntax for the command is : "_gain_"

### mix, m
           Change bass mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### biquad
       Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.  Where _b0_, _b1_, _b2_ and _a0_, _a1_,  _a2_  are
       the  numerator  and  denominator  coefficients  respectively.   and _channels_, _c_ specify which
       channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

       **a0**
       **a1**
       **a2**
       **b0**
       **b1**
       **b2  **Change biquad parameter.  Syntax for the command is : "_value_"

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

### bs2b
       Bauer  stereo  to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of stereo audio
       records.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libbs2b".

       It accepts the following parameters:

### profile
           Pre-defined crossfeed level.

           **default**
               Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).

           **cmoy**
               Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).

           **jmeier**
               Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).

### fcut
           Cut frequency (in Hz).

### feed
           Feed level (in Hz).

### channelmap
       Remap input channels to new locations.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **map **Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of mappings, each
           in the "_in_channel_-_out_channel_" or _in_channel_ form. _in_channel_ can be either the name  of
           the  input  channel  (e.g.  FL  for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
           _out_channel_ is the name of the output channel or its index in the output channel  layout.
           If  _out_channel_  is  not  given  then  it  is implicitly an index, starting with zero and
           increasing by one for each mapping.

### channel_layout
           The channel layout of the output stream.

       If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to  output  channels,
       preserving indices.

       _Examples_

       •   For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,

                   ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav

           will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of the input.

       •   To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order

                   ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:5.1' out.wav

### channelsplit
       Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### channel_layout
           The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".

### channels
           A  channel  layout  describing the channels to be extracted as separate output streams or
           "all" to extract each input channel as a separate stream. The default is "all".

           Choosing channels not present in channel layout in the input will result in an error.

       _Examples_

       •   For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,

                   ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv

           will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only the  left
           channel and the other the right channel.

       •   Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:

                   ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
                   'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
                   -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
                   front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
                   side_right.wav

       •   Extract only LFE from a 5.1 WAV file:

                   ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1:channels=LFE[LFE]'
                   -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav

### chorus
       Add a chorus effect to the audio.

       Can make a single vocal sound like a chorus, but can also be applied to instrumentation.

       Chorus  resembles  an  echo  effect  with  a  short delay, but whereas with echo the delay is
       constant, with chorus, it is varied using using sinusoidal  or  triangular  modulation.   The
       modulation  depth  defines the range the modulated delay is played before or after the delay.
       Hence the delayed sound will sound slower or faster, that is the delayed sound  tuned  around
       the original one, like in a chorus where some vocals are slightly off key.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### in_gain
           Set input gain. Default is 0.4.

### out_gain
           Set output gain. Default is 0.4.

### delays
           Set delays. A typical delay is around 40ms to 60ms.

### decays
           Set decays.

### speeds
           Set speeds.

### depths
           Set depths.

       _Examples_

       •   A single delay:

                   chorus=0.7:0.9:55:0.4:0.25:2

       •   Two delays:

                   chorus=0.6:0.9:50|60:0.4|0.32:0.25|0.4:2|1.3

       •   Fuller sounding chorus with three delays:

                   chorus=0.5:0.9:50|60|40:0.4|0.32|0.3:0.25|0.4|0.3:2|2.3|1.3

### compand
       Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### attacks
### decays
           A  list  of  times  in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level of the
           input signal is averaged to determine its volume. _attacks_ refers to  increase  of  volume
           and  _decays_  refers to decrease of volume. For most situations, the attack time (response
           to the audio getting louder) should be shorter than the decay time, because the human ear
           is more sensitive to sudden loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack
           is 0.3 seconds and a typical value for decay is 0.8  seconds.   If  specified  number  of
           attacks & decays is lower than number of channels, the last set attack/decay will be used
           for all remaining channels.

### points
           A  list  of  points  for  the  transfer function, specified in dB relative to the maximum
           possible signal amplitude. Each key points list  must  be  defined  using  the  following
           syntax: "x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|...." or "x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...."

           The  input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function does not
           have to be monotonically rising. The point "0/0" is assumed but  may  be  overridden  (by
           "0/out-dBn"). Typical values for the transfer function are "-70/-70|-60/-20|1/0".

### soft-knee
           Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.

### gain
           Set  the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer function. This
           allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.  It defaults to 0.

### volume
           Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering starts.  This
           permits  the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for example, a very large
           gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the companding has begun to  operate.
           A typical value for audio which is initially quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.

### delay
           Set  a  delay,  in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is delayed
           before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay approximately  equal  to  the
           attack/decay  times  allows  the  filter to effectively operate in predictive rather than
           reactive mode. It defaults to 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Make music with both quiet and loud  passages  suitable  for  listening  to  in  a  noisy
           environment:

                   compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2

           Another example for audio with whisper and explosion parts:

                   compand=0|0:1|1:-90/-900|-70/-70|-30/-9|0/-3:6:0:0:0

       •   A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:

                   compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1

       •   Here  is  another  noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level than the
           signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):

                   compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1

       •   2:1 compression starting at -6dB:

                   compand=points=-80/-80|-6/-6|0/-3.8|20/3.5

       •   2:1 compression starting at -9dB:

                   compand=points=-80/-80|-9/-9|0/-5.3|20/2.9

       •   2:1 compression starting at -12dB:

                   compand=points=-80/-80|-12/-12|0/-6.8|20/1.9

       •   2:1 compression starting at -18dB:

                   compand=points=-80/-80|-18/-18|0/-9.8|20/0.7

       •   3:1 compression starting at -15dB:

                   compand=points=-80/-80|-15/-15|0/-10.8|20/-5.2

       •   Compressor/Gate:

                   compand=points=-80/-105|-62/-80|-15.4/-15.4|0/-12|20/-7.6

       •   Expander:

                   compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-169|-54/-80|-49.5/-64.6|-41.1/-41.1|-25.8/-15|-10.8/-4.5|0/0|20/8.3

       •   Hard limiter at -6dB:

                   compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-80|-6/-6|20/-6

       •   Hard limiter at -12dB:

                   compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-80|-12/-12|20/-12

       •   Hard noise gate at -35 dB:

                   compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-115|-35.1/-80|-35/-35|20/20

       •   Soft limiter:

                   compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-80|-12.4/-12.4|-6/-8|0/-6.8|20/-2.8

### compensationdelay
       Compensation Delay Line is  a  metric  based  delay  to  compensate  differing  positions  of
       microphones or speakers.

       For  example,  you  have  recorded guitar with two microphones placed in different locations.
       Because the front of sound wave  has  fixed  speed  in  normal  conditions,  the  phasing  of
       microphones  can vary and depends on their location and interposition. The best sound mix can
       be achieved when these microphones are in phase (synchronized). Note that a distance  of  ~30
       cm  between  microphones  makes  one  microphone capture the signal in antiphase to the other
       microphone. That makes the final mix  sound  moody.   This  filter  helps  to  solve  phasing
       problems by adding different delays to each microphone track and make them synchronized.

       The  best  result can be reached when you take one track as base and synchronize other tracks
       one by one with it.  Remember that synchronization/delay tolerance depends  on  sample  rate,
       too.  Higher sample rates will give more tolerance.

       The filter accepts the following parameters:

       **mm  **Set millimeters distance. This is compensation distance for fine tuning.  Default is 0.

       **cm  **Set cm distance. This is compensation distance for tightening distance setup.  Default is
           0.

       **m   **Set  meters  distance. This is compensation distance for hard distance setup.  Default is
           0.

       **dry **Set dry amount. Amount of unprocessed (dry) signal.  Default is 0.

       **wet **Set wet amount. Amount of processed (wet) signal.  Default is 1.

### temp
           Set temperature in degrees Celsius. This is the temperature of the environment.   Default
           is 20.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### crossfeed
       Apply headphone crossfeed filter.

       Crossfeed  is  the process of blending the left and right channels of stereo audio recording.
       It is mainly used to reduce extreme stereo separation of low frequencies.

       The intent is to produce more speaker like sound to the listener.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### strength
           Set strength of crossfeed. Default is 0.2. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  This sets  gain
           of low shelf filter for side part of stereo image.  Default is -6dB. Max allowed is -30db
           when strength is set to 1.

### range
           Set soundstage wideness. Default is 0.5. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  This sets cut off
           frequency  of  low shelf filter. Default is cut off near 1550 Hz. With range set to 1 cut
           off frequency is set to 2100 Hz.

### slope
           Set curve slope of low shelf filter. Default is 0.5.  Allowed range is from 0.01 to 1.

### level_in
           Set input gain. Default is 0.9.

### level_out
           Set output gain. Default is 1.

### block_size
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero  values)  filtering
           will  become  linear  phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will just produce nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### crystalizer
       Simple algorithm for audio noise sharpening.

       This filter linearly increases differences betweeen each audio sample.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **i   **Sets the intensity of effect (default:  2.0).  Must  be  in  range  between  -10.0  to  0
           (unchanged sound) to 10.0 (maximum effect).  To inverse filtering use negative value.

       **c   **Enable clipping. By default is enabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### dcshift
       Apply a DC shift to the audio.

       This  can  be  useful  to  remove  a  DC  offset (caused perhaps by a hardware problem in the
       recording chain) from the audio. The effect of a DC offset  is  reduced  headroom  and  hence
       volume. The **astats **filter can be used to determine if a signal has a DC offset.

### shift
           Set the DC shift, allowed range is [-1, 1]. It indicates the amount to shift the audio.

### limitergain
           Optional.  It  should  have  a  value much less than 1 (e.g. 0.05 or 0.02) and is used to
           prevent clipping.

### deesser
       Apply de-essing to the audio samples.

       **i   **Set intensity for triggering de-essing. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default is 0.

       **m   **Set amount of ducking on treble part of sound. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default  is
           0.5.

       **f   **How much of original frequency content to keep when de-essing. Allowed range is from 0 to
           1.  Default is 0.5.

       **s   **Set the output mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **i   **Pass input unchanged.

           **o   **Pass ess filtered out.

           **e   **Pass only ess.

               Default value is _o_.

### dialoguenhance
       Enhance dialogue in stereo audio.

       This  filter  accepts  stereo  input  and  produce surround (3.0) channels output.  The newly
       produced front center channel have enhanced speech  dialogue  originally  available  in  both
       stereo  channels.   This filter outputs front left and front right channels same as available
       in stereo input.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### original
           Set the original center factor to keep in front center channel output.  Allowed range  is
           from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.

### enhance
           Set  the dialogue enhance factor to put in front center channel output.  Allowed range is
           from 0 to 3. Default value is 1.

### voice
           Set the voice detection factor.  Allowed range is from 2 to 32. Default value is 2.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### drmeter
       Measure audio dynamic range.

       DR values of 14 and higher is found in very dynamic material. DR of  8  to  13  is  found  in
       transition material. And anything less that 8 have very poor dynamics and is very compressed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### length
           Set  window length in seconds used to split audio into segments of equal length.  Default
           is 3 seconds.

### dynaudnorm
       Dynamic Audio Normalizer.

       This filter applies a certain amount of gain to the input audio in order to  bring  its  peak
       magnitude  to  a  target  level  (e.g.  0  dBFS).  However,  in  contrast  to  more  "simple"
       normalization algorithms, the Dynamic Audio  Normalizer  *dynamically*  re-adjusts  the  gain
       factor  to  the  input audio.  This allows for applying extra gain to the "quiet" sections of
       the audio while avoiding distortions or clipping the "loud" sections.  In  other  words:  The
       Dynamic  Audio Normalizer will "even out" the volume of quiet and loud sections, in the sense
       that the volume of each section is brought to the same target level. Note, however, that  the
       Dynamic  Audio  Normalizer achieves this goal *without* applying "dynamic range compressing".
       It will retain 100% of the dynamic range *within* each section of the audio file.

### framelen, f
           Set the frame length in milliseconds. In range from 10 to 8000 milliseconds.  Default  is
           500  milliseconds.   The  Dynamic  Audio  Normalizer  processes  the input audio in small
           chunks, referred to as frames. This is required, because a peak magnitude has no  meaning
           for  just  a  single sample value. Instead, we need to determine the peak magnitude for a
           contiguous sequence of sample values. While a "standard" normalizer would simply use  the
           peak  magnitude  of  the  complete file, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer determines the peak
           magnitude  individually  for  each  frame.  The  length  of  a  frame  is  specified   in
           milliseconds.  By  default,  the  Dynamic  Audio  Normalizer  uses  a frame length of 500
           milliseconds, which has been found to give good results with most files.  Note  that  the
           exact  frame length, in number of samples, will be determined automatically, based on the
           sampling rate of the individual input audio file.

### gausssize, g
           Set the Gaussian filter window size. In range from 3 to 301, must be odd number.  Default
           is  31.   Probably  the  most  important parameter of the Dynamic Audio Normalizer is the
           "window size" of the Gaussian smoothing filter. The filter's window size is specified  in
           frames,  centered  around  the current frame. For the sake of simplicity, this must be an
           odd number. Consequently, the default value of 31 takes into account the  current  frame,
           as  well  as  the 15 preceding frames and the 15 subsequent frames. Using a larger window
           results in a stronger smoothing effect and thus in less gain variation, i.e. slower  gain
           adaptation.  Conversely,  using a smaller window results in a weaker smoothing effect and
           thus in more gain variation, i.e. faster gain adaptation.  In other words, the  more  you
           increase  this  value,  the  more  the  Dynamic  Audio  Normalizer  will  behave  like  a
           "traditional" normalization filter. On the contrary, the more you  decrease  this  value,
           the more the Dynamic Audio Normalizer will behave like a dynamic range compressor.

### peak, p
           Set the target peak value. This specifies the highest permissible magnitude level for the
           normalized  audio  input.  This  filter will try to approach the target peak magnitude as
           closely as possible, but at the same time it also makes sure that the  normalized  signal
           will  never  exceed  the  peak magnitude.  A frame's maximum local gain factor is imposed
           directly by the target peak magnitude. The default  value  is  0.95  and  thus  leaves  a
           headroom of 5%*.  It is not recommended to go above this value.

### maxgain, m
           Set  the  maximum  gain factor. In range from 1.0 to 100.0. Default is 10.0.  The Dynamic
           Audio Normalizer determines the maximum possible  (local)  gain  factor  for  each  input
           frame,  i.e.  the maximum gain factor that does not result in clipping or distortion. The
           maximum gain factor is determined by the frame's highest magnitude sample.  However,  the
           Dynamic  Audio  Normalizer  additionally  bounds  the  frame's  maximum  gain factor by a
           predetermined (global) maximum gain factor. This is done in order to avoid excessive gain
           factors in "silent" or almost silent frames. By default, the maximum gain factor is 10.0,
           For most inputs the default value should be sufficient and it usually is not  recommended
           to  increase this value. Though, for input with an extremely low overall volume level, it
           may be necessary to allow even higher gain factors. Note, however, that the Dynamic Audio
           Normalizer does not simply apply a "hard"  threshold  (i.e.  cut  off  values  above  the
           threshold).   Instead, a "sigmoid" threshold function will be applied. This way, the gain
           factors will smoothly approach the threshold value, but never exceed that value.

### targetrms, r
           Set the target RMS. In range from 0.0 to 1.0. Default is 0.0 - disabled.  By default, the
           Dynamic Audio Normalizer performs "peak" normalization.   This  means  that  the  maximum
           local  gain  factor  for  each  frame  is defined (only) by the frame's highest magnitude
           sample. This way, the samples can be amplified as much as possible without exceeding  the
           maximum  signal  level,  i.e.  without  clipping.  Optionally, however, the Dynamic Audio
           Normalizer can also take into account the frame's root mean square, abbreviated  RMS.  In
           electrical engineering, the RMS is commonly used to determine the power of a time-varying
           signal.  It  is  therefore  considered  that  the  RMS  is  a better approximation of the
           "perceived loudness" than just looking at the signal's peak magnitude.  Consequently,  by
           adjusting  all  frames  to  a  constant  RMS value, a uniform "perceived loudness" can be
           established. If a target RMS value has been specified, a frame's  local  gain  factor  is
           defined  as  the factor that would result in exactly that RMS value.  Note, however, that
           the maximum local gain factor is  still  restricted  by  the  frame's  highest  magnitude
           sample, in order to prevent clipping.

### coupling, n
           Enable  channels  coupling.  By  default  is  enabled.   By  default,  the  Dynamic Audio
           Normalizer will amplify all channels by the same amount. This means the same gain  factor
           will  be applied to all channels, i.e.  the maximum possible gain factor is determined by
           the "loudest" channel.  However, in some recordings, it may happen that the volume of the
           different channels is uneven, e.g. one channel may be "quieter" than  the  other  one(s).
           In this case, this option can be used to disable the channel coupling. This way, the gain
           factor  will  be  determined  independently  for  each  channel,  depending  only  on the
           individual channel's highest magnitude sample. This allows for harmonizing the volume  of
           the different channels.

### correctdc, c
           Enable  DC bias correction. By default is disabled.  An audio signal (in the time domain)
           is a sequence of sample values.  In the Dynamic Audio Normalizer these sample values  are
           represented  in the -1.0 to 1.0 range, regardless of the original input format. Normally,
           the audio signal, or "waveform", should be centered around the zero point.  That means if
           we calculate the mean value of all samples in a file, or in  a  single  frame,  then  the
           result  should  be  0.0  or  at  least  very close to that value. If, however, there is a
           significant deviation of the  mean  value  from  0.0,  in  either  positive  or  negative
           direction,  this  is  referred  to  as a DC bias or DC offset. Since a DC bias is clearly
           undesirable, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer provides optional DC bias correction.  With  DC
           bias  correction  enabled, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer will determine the mean value, or
           "DC correction" offset, of each input frame and subtract  that  value  from  all  of  the
           frame's sample values which ensures those samples are centered around 0.0 again. Also, in
           order  to  avoid  "gaps" at the frame boundaries, the DC correction offset values will be
           interpolated smoothly between neighbouring frames.

### altboundary, b
           Enable alternative boundary mode. By default is disabled.  The Dynamic  Audio  Normalizer
           takes into account a certain neighbourhood around each frame. This includes the preceding
           frames  as  well as the subsequent frames. However, for the "boundary" frames, located at
           the very beginning and at the very end of the audio file, not all neighbouring frames are
           available. In particular, for the first few frames  in  the  audio  file,  the  preceding
           frames  are  not  known.  And,  similarly, for the last few frames in the audio file, the
           subsequent frames are not known. Thus, the question arises which gain factors  should  be
           assumed  for  the  missing  frames in the "boundary" region. The Dynamic Audio Normalizer
           implements two modes to deal with this situation. The default  boundary  mode  assumes  a
           gain  factor  of  exactly 1.0 for the missing frames, resulting in a smooth "fade in" and
           "fade out" at the beginning and at the end of the input, respectively.

### compress, s
           Set the compress factor. In range from 0.0 to 30.0. Default  is  0.0.   By  default,  the
           Dynamic Audio Normalizer does not apply "traditional" compression. This means that signal
           peaks  will  not  be  pruned and thus the full dynamic range will be retained within each
           local neighbourhood. However, in some cases it may be desirable to  combine  the  Dynamic
           Audio  Normalizer's  normalization  algorithm with a more "traditional" compression.  For
           this  purpose,  the  Dynamic  Audio   Normalizer   provides   an   optional   compression
           (thresholding)  function.  If (and only if) the compression feature is enabled, all input
           frames will be processed by a  soft  knee  thresholding  function  prior  to  the  actual
           normalization  process.  Put  simply,  the  thresholding  function  is going to prune all
           samples whose magnitude exceeds a certain threshold value.  However,  the  Dynamic  Audio
           Normalizer  does  not  simply apply a fixed threshold value. Instead, the threshold value
           will be adjusted for each individual frame.  In general,  smaller  parameters  result  in
           stronger  compression,  and  vice  versa.   Values below 3.0 are not recommended, because
           audible distortion may appear.

### threshold, t
           Set the target threshold value. This specifies the lowest permissible magnitude level for
           the audio input which will be normalized.  If input frame  volume  is  above  this  value
           frame  will  be  normalized.   Otherwise  frame may not be normalized at all. The default
           value is set to 0, which means all input frames  will  be  normalized.   This  option  is
           mostly useful if digital noise is not wanted to be amplified.

### channels, h
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available channels are filtered.

### overlap, o
           Specify overlap for frames. If set to 0 (default) no frame overlapping is done.  Using >0
           and  <1 values will make less conservative gain adjustments, like when framelen option is
           set to smaller value, if framelen option value is compensated for non-zero  overlap  then
           gain adjustments will be smoother across time compared to zero overlap case.

### curve, v
           Specify the peak mapping curve expression which is going to be used when calculating gain
           applied  to  frames.  The  max  output  frame gain will still be limited by other options
           mentioned previously for this filter.

           The expression can contain the following constants:

           **ch  **current channel number

           **sn  **current sample number

           **nb_channels**
               number of channels

           **t   **timestamp expressed in seconds

           **sr  **sample rate

           **p   **current frame peak value

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### earwax
       Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.

       This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio so that when  listened
       to on headphones the stereo image is moved from inside your head (standard for headphones) to
       outside and in front of the listener (standard for speakers).

       Ported from SoX.

### equalizer
       Apply  a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this filter, the signal-level at and
       around a selected frequency can be  increased  or  decreased,  whilst  (unlike  bandpass  and
       bandreject filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.

       In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can be given several times, each
       with a different central frequency.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.

### gain, g
           Set  the  required  gain  or attenuation in dB.  Beware of clipping when using a positive
           gain.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Examples_

       •   Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:

                   equalizer=f=1000:t=h:width=200:g=-10

       •   Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:

                   equalizer=f=1000:t=q:w=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:t=q:w=2:g=-5

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change equalizer frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change equalizer width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change equalizer width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### gain, g
           Change equalizer gain.  Syntax for the command is : "_gain_"

### mix, m
           Change equalizer mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### extrastereo
       Linearly  increases  the  difference  between left and right channels which adds some sort of
       "live" effect to playback.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **m   **Sets the difference coefficient (default: 2.5). 0.0 means mono  sound  (average  of  both
           channels),  with  1.0  sound will be unchanged, with -1.0 left and right channels will be
           swapped.

       **c   **Enable clipping. By default is enabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### firequalizer
       Apply FIR Equalization using arbitrary frequency response.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### gain
           Set gain curve equation (in dB). The expression can contain variables:

           **f   **the evaluated frequency

           **sr  **sample rate

           **ch  **channel number, set to 0 when multichannels evaluation is disabled

           **chid**
               channel id,  see  libavutil/channel_layout.h,  set  to  the  first  channel  id  when
               multichannels evaluation is disabled

           **chs **number of channels

           **chlayout**
               channel_layout, see libavutil/channel_layout.h

           and functions:

           **gain_interpolate(f)**
               interpolate gain on frequency f based on gain_entry

           **cubic_interpolate(f)**
               same as gain_interpolate, but smoother

           This option is also available as command. Default is gain_interpolate(f).

### gain_entry
           Set gain entry for gain_interpolate function. The expression can contain functions:

           **entry(f, g)**
               store gain entry at frequency f with value g

           This option is also available as command.

### delay
           Set filter delay in seconds. Higher value means more accurate.  Default is 0.01.

### accuracy
           Set filter accuracy in Hz. Lower value means more accurate.  Default is 5.

### wfunc
           Set window function. Acceptable values are:

           **rectangular**
               rectangular window, useful when gain curve is already smooth

           **hann**
               hann window (default)

           **hamming**
               hamming window

           **blackman**
               blackman window

           **nuttall3**
               3-terms continuous 1st derivative nuttall window

           **mnuttall3**
               minimum 3-terms discontinuous nuttall window

           **nuttall**
               4-terms continuous 1st derivative nuttall window

           **bnuttall**
               minimum 4-terms discontinuous nuttall (blackman-nuttall) window

           **bharris**
               blackman-harris window

           **tukey**
               tukey window

### fixed
           If  enabled,  use  fixed number of audio samples. This improves speed when filtering with
           large delay. Default is disabled.

### multi
           Enable multichannels evaluation on gain. Default is disabled.

### zero_phase
           Enable zero phase  mode  by  subtracting  timestamp  to  compensate  delay.   Default  is
           disabled.

### scale
           Set scale used by gain. Acceptable values are:

           **linlin**
               linear frequency, linear gain

           **linlog**
               linear frequency, logarithmic (in dB) gain (default)

           **loglin**
               logarithmic (in octave scale where 20 Hz is 0) frequency, linear gain

           **loglog**
               logarithmic frequency, logarithmic gain

### dumpfile
           Set file for dumping, suitable for gnuplot.

### dumpscale
           Set scale for dumpfile. Acceptable values are same with scale option.  Default is linlog.

### fft2
           Enable  2-channel  convolution  using  complex  FFT.  This  improves speed significantly.
           Default is disabled.

### min_phase
           Enable minimum phase impulse response. Default is disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   lowpass at 1000 Hz:

                   firequalizer=gain='if(lt(f,1000), 0, -INF)'

       •   lowpass at 1000 Hz with gain_entry:

                   firequalizer=gain_entry='entry(1000,0); entry(1001, -INF)'

       •   custom equalization:

                   firequalizer=gain_entry='entry(100,0); entry(400, -4); entry(1000, -6); entry(2000, 0)'

       •   higher delay with zero phase to compensate delay:

                   firequalizer=delay=0.1:fixed=on:zero_phase=on

       •   lowpass on left channel, highpass on right channel:

                   firequalizer=gain='if(eq(chid,1), gain_interpolate(f), if(eq(chid,2), gain_interpolate(1e6+f), 0))'
                   :gain_entry='entry(1000, 0); entry(1001,-INF); entry(1e6+1000,0)':multi=on

### flanger
       Apply a flanging effect to the audio.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### delay
           Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.

### depth
           Set added sweep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.

### regen
           Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from  -95  to  95.   Default
           value is 0.

### width
           Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.  Default value
           is 71.

### speed
           Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.

### shape
           Set swept wave shape, can be _triangular_ or _sinusoidal_.  Default value is _sinusoidal_.

### phase
           Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.  Default value is
           25.

### interp
           Set delay-line interpolation, _linear_ or _quadratic_.  Default is _linear_.

### haas
       Apply Haas effect to audio.

       Note  that  this makes most sense to apply on mono signals.  With this filter applied to mono
       signals it give some directionality and stretches its stereo image.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input level. By default is _1_, or 0dB

### level_out
           Set output level. By default is _1_, or 0dB.

### side_gain
           Set gain applied to side part of signal. By default is _1_.

### middle_source
           Set kind of middle source. Can be one of the following:

           **left**
               Pick left channel.

           **right**
               Pick right channel.

           **mid **Pick middle part signal of stereo image.

           **side**
               Pick side part signal of stereo image.

### middle_phase
           Change middle phase. By default is disabled.

### left_delay
           Set left channel delay. By default is _2.05_ milliseconds.

### left_balance
           Set left channel balance. By default is _-1_.

### left_gain
           Set left channel gain. By default is _1_.

### left_phase
           Change left phase. By default is disabled.

### right_delay
           Set right channel delay. By defaults is _2.12_ milliseconds.

### right_balance
           Set right channel balance. By default is _1_.

### right_gain
           Set right channel gain. By default is _1_.

### right_phase
           Change right phase. By default is enabled.

### hdcd
       Decodes High Definition Compatible Digital (HDCD) data. A 16-bit  PCM  stream  with  embedded
       HDCD codes is expanded into a 20-bit PCM stream.

       The  filter  supports  the  Peak  Extend  and Low-level Gain Adjustment features of HDCD, and
       detects the Transient Filter flag.

               ffmpeg -i HDCD16.flac -af hdcd OUT24.flac

       When using the filter with wav, note the default encoding for wav is 16-bit, so the resulting
       20-bit stream will be truncated back to 16-bit. Use something like  **-acodec  pcm_s24le  **after
       the filter to get 24-bit PCM output.

               ffmpeg -i HDCD16.wav -af hdcd OUT16.wav
               ffmpeg -i HDCD16.wav -af hdcd -c:a pcm_s24le OUT24.wav

       The filter accepts the following options:

### disable_autoconvert
           Disable any automatic format conversion or resampling in the filter graph.

### process_stereo
           Process  the  stereo  channels  together. If target_gain does not match between channels,
           consider it invalid and use the last valid target_gain.

### cdt_ms
           Set the code detect timer period in ms.

### force_pe
           Always extend peaks above -3dBFS even if PE isn't signaled.

### analyze_mode
           Replace audio with a solid tone and adjust the amplitude to signal some  specific  aspect
           of  the  decoding process. The output file can be loaded in an audio editor alongside the
           original to aid analysis.

           "analyze_mode=pe:force_pe=true" can be used to see all samples above the PE level.

           Modes are:

           **0, off**
               Disabled

           **1, lle**
               Gain adjustment level at each sample

           **2, pe**
               Samples where peak extend occurs

           **3, cdt**
               Samples where the code detect timer is active

           **4, tgm**
               Samples where the target gain does not match between channels

### headphone
       Apply head-related transfer functions (HRTFs) to create virtual loudspeakers around the  user
       for  binaural  listening  via headphones.  The HRIRs are provided via additional streams, for
       each channel one stereo input stream is needed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **map **Set mapping of input streams for convolution.  The argument is a  '|'-separated  list  of
           channel  names  in  order as they are given as additional stream inputs for filter.  This
           also specify number of input streams. Number of input  streams  must  be  not  less  than
           number of channels in first stream plus one.

### gain
           Set gain applied to audio. Value is in dB. Default is 0.

### type
           Set  processing  type. Can be _time_ or _freq_. _time_ is processing audio in time domain which
           is slow.  _freq_ is processing audio in frequency domain which is fast.  Default is _freq_.

       **lfe **Set custom gain for LFE channels. Value is in dB. Default is 0.

### size
           Set size of frame in number of samples which will be processed at once.  Default value is
           _1024_. Allowed range is from 1024 to 96000.

### hrir
           Set format of hrir stream.  Default value is _stereo_. Alternative value  is  _multich_.   If
           value is set to _stereo_, number of additional streams should be greater or equal to number
           of  input channels in first input stream.  Also each additional stream should have stereo
           number of channels.  If value is set to _multich_, number of additional streams  should  be
           exactly  one.  Also  number  of  input  channels  of additional stream should be equal or
           greater than twice number of channels of first input stream.

       _Examples_

       •   Full example using wav files as coefficients with amovie filters for  7.1  downmix,  each
           amovie filter use stereo file with IR coefficients as input.  The files give coefficients
           for each position of virtual loudspeaker:

                   ffmpeg -i input.wav
                   -filter_complex "amovie=azi_270_ele_0_DFC.wav[sr];amovie=azi_90_ele_0_DFC.wav[sl];amovie=azi_225_ele_0_DFC.wav[br];amovie=azi_135_ele_0_DFC.wav[bl];amovie=azi_0_ele_0_DFC.wav,asplit[fc][lfe];amovie=azi_35_ele_0_DFC.wav[fl];amovie=azi_325_ele_0_DFC.wav[fr];[0:a][fl][fr][fc][lfe][bl][br][sl][sr]headphone=FL|FR|FC|LFE|BL|BR|SL|SR"
                   output.wav

       •   Full example using wav files as coefficients with amovie filters for 7.1 downmix, but now
           in _multich_ _hrir_ format.

                   ffmpeg -i input.wav -filter_complex "amovie=minp.wav[hrirs];[0:a][hrirs]headphone=map=FL|FR|FC|LFE|BL|BR|SL|SR:hrir=multich"
                   output.wav

### highpass
       Apply  a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.  The filter can be either single-pole, or
       double-pole (the default).  The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per
       decade).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.

### poles, p
           Set number of poles. Default is 2.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type  units.   Applies  only  to  double-pole
           filter.  The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize  biquad  coefficients,  by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling it will normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero  values)  filtering
           will  become  linear  phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will just produce nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change highpass frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change highpass width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change highpass width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### mix, m
           Change highpass mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### join
       Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### inputs
           The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.

### channel_layout
           The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.

       **map **Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a  '|'-separated  list  of  mappings,
           each  in  the  "_input_idx_._in_channel_-_out_channel_" form. _input_idx_ is the 0-based index of
           the input stream. _in_channel_ can be either the name of the input  channel  (e.g.  FL  for
           front  left)  or  its index in the specified input stream. _out_channel_ is the name of the
           output channel.

       The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified explicitly. It does
       so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel and if that fails  it  picks  the
       first unused input channel.

       Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):

               ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT

       Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:

               ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
               'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
               out

### ladspa
       Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-ladspa".

### file, f
           Specifies  the  name  of  LADSPA  plugin  library  to  load.  If the environment variable
           **LADSPA_PATH **is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in  each  one  of  the  directories
           specified  by  the  colon separated list in **LADSPA_PATH**, otherwise in the standard LADSPA
           paths,   which   are   in   this   order:   _HOME/.ladspa/lib/_,    _/usr/local/lib/ladspa/_,
           _/usr/lib/ladspa/_.

### plugin, p
           Specifies  the  plugin  within  the  library. Some libraries contain only one plugin, but
           others contain many of them. If this is not set filter will list  all  available  plugins
           within the specified library.

### controls, c
           Set  the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point values that
           determine the behavior of the loaded plugin  (for  example  delay,  threshold  or  gain).
           Controls      need      to     be     defined     using     the     following     syntax:
           c0=_value0_|c1=_value1_|c2=_value2_|..., where _valuei_ is the value set  on  the  _i_-th  control.
           Alternatively    they    can    be    also    defined   using   the   following   syntax:
           _value0_|_value1_|_value2_|..., where _valuei_ is the value set on the _i_-th control.  If **controls**
           is set to "help", all available controls and their valid ranges are printed.

### sample_rate, s
           Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.

### nb_samples, n
           Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default is 1024.  Only  used
           if plugin have zero inputs.

### duration, d
           Set  the  minimum  duration  of  the  sourced audio. See **the Time duration section in the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.  Note that the resulting duration may  be
           greater than the specified duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
           complete  frame.   If  not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
           supposed to be generated forever.  Only used if plugin have zero inputs.

### latency, l
           Enable latency compensation, by default is disabled.  Only used if plugin have inputs.

       _Examples_

       •   List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:

                   ladspa=file=amp

       •   List all available controls and their valid ranges  for  "vcf_notch"  plugin  from  "VCF"
           library:

                   ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help

       •   Simulate low quality audio equipment using "Computer Music Toolkit" (CMT) plugin library:

                   ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12

       •   Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):

                   ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb

       •   Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:

                   ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2

       •   Generate  20  bpm  clicks  using  plugin "C* Click - Metronome" from the "C* Audio Plugin
           Suite" (CAPS) library:

                   ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'

       •   Apply "C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser" effect:

                   ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2

       •   Increase volume by 20dB using fast lookahead limiter  from  Steve  Harris  "SWH  Plugins"
           collection:

                   ladspa=fast_lookahead_limiter_1913:fastLookaheadLimiter:20|0|2

       •   Attenuate low frequencies using Multiband EQ from Steve Harris "SWH Plugins" collection:

                   ladspa=mbeq_1197:mbeq:-24|-24|-24|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0

       •   Reduce stereo image using "Narrower" from the "C* Audio Plugin Suite" (CAPS) library:

                   ladspa=caps:Narrower

       •   Another white noise, now using "C* Audio Plugin Suite" (CAPS) library:

                   ladspa=caps:White:.2

       •   Some fractal noise, using "C* Audio Plugin Suite" (CAPS) library:

                   ladspa=caps:Fractal:c=c1=1

       •   Dynamic volume normalization using "VLevel" plugin:

                   ladspa=vlevel-ladspa:vlevel_mono

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

       **cN  **Modify the _N_-th control value.

           If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.

### loudnorm
       EBU  R128  loudness  normalization.  Includes  both  dynamic  and linear normalization modes.
       Support for both single pass (livestreams,  files)  and  double  pass  (files)  modes.   This
       algorithm  can  target  IL, LRA, and maximum true peak. In dynamic mode, to accurately detect
       true peaks, the audio stream will  be  upsampled  to  192  kHz.   Use  the  "-ar"  option  or
       "aresample" filter to explicitly set an output sample rate.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### I, i
           Set integrated loudness target.  Range is -70.0 - -5.0. Default value is -24.0.

### LRA, lra
           Set loudness range target.  Range is 1.0 - 50.0. Default value is 7.0.

### TP, tp
           Set maximum true peak.  Range is -9.0 - +0.0. Default value is -2.0.

### measured_I, measured_i
           Measured IL of input file.  Range is -99.0 - +0.0.

### measured_LRA, measured_lra
           Measured LRA of input file.  Range is  0.0 - 99.0.

### measured_TP, measured_tp
           Measured true peak of input file.  Range is  -99.0 - +99.0.

### measured_thresh
           Measured threshold of input file.  Range is -99.0 - +0.0.

### offset
           Set  offset gain. Gain is applied before the true-peak limiter.  Range is  -99.0 - +99.0.
           Default is +0.0.

### linear
           Normalize  by  linearly  scaling  the  source   audio.    "measured_I",   "measured_LRA",
           "measured_TP", and "measured_thresh" must all be specified. Target LRA shouldn't be lower
           than  source  LRA  and  the change in integrated loudness shouldn't result in a true peak
           which exceeds the target TP. If any of these conditions aren't  met,  normalization  mode
           will revert to _dynamic_.  Options are "true" or "false". Default is "true".

### dual_mono
           Treat  mono  input  files  as  "dual-mono".  If a mono file is intended for playback on a
           stereo system, its EBU R128 measurement  will  be  perceptually  incorrect.   If  set  to
           "true",  this  option will compensate for this effect.  Multi-channel input files are not
           affected by this option.  Options are true or false. Default is false.

### print_format
           Set print format for stats. Options are summary, json, or none.  Default value is none.

### lowpass
       Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.  The filter can be  either  single-pole  or
       double-pole (the default).  The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per
       decade).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.

### poles, p
           Set number of poles. Default is 2.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Specify  the  band-width  of  a  filter in width_type units.  Applies only to double-pole
           filter.  The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Examples_

       •   Lowpass only LFE channel, it LFE is not present it does nothing:

                   lowpass=c=LFE

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change lowpass frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change lowpass width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change lowpass width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### mix, m
           Change lowpass mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### lv2
       Load a LV2 (LADSPA Version 2) plugin.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-lv2".

### plugin, p
           Specifies the plugin URI. You may need to escape ':'.

### controls, c
           Set  the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point values that
           determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay, threshold or  gain).   If
           **controls **is set to "help", all available controls and their valid ranges are printed.

### sample_rate, s
           Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.

### nb_samples, n
           Set  the  number of samples per channel per each output frame, default is 1024. Only used
           if plugin have zero inputs.

### duration, d
           Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See  **the  Time  duration  section  in  the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown)  manual **for the accepted syntax.  Note that the resulting duration may be
           greater than the specified duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
           complete frame.  If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative,  the  audio  is
           supposed to be generated forever.  Only used if plugin have zero inputs.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply bass enhancer plugin from Calf:

                   lv2=p=http\\\\://calf.sourceforge.net/plugins/BassEnhancer:c=amount=2

       •   Apply vinyl plugin from Calf:

                   lv2=p=http\\\\://calf.sourceforge.net/plugins/Vinyl:c=drone=0.2|aging=0.5

       •   Apply bit crusher plugin from ArtyFX:

                   lv2=p=http\\\\://www.openavproductions.com/artyfx#bitta:c=crush=0.3

       _Commands_

       This filter supports all options that are exported by plugin as commands.

### mcompand
       Multiband Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.

       The  input  audio is divided into bands using 4th order Linkwitz-Riley IIRs.  This is akin to
       the crossover of a loudspeaker, and results in flat frequency response when absent  compander
       action.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### args
           This option syntax is: attack,decay,[attack,decay..] soft-knee points crossover_frequency
           [delay [initial_volume [gain]]] | attack,decay ...  For explanation of each item refer to
           compand filter documentation.

### pan
       Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output channel layout followed
       by a set of channels definitions.

       This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio stream.

       The filter accepts parameters of the form: "_l_|_outdef_|_outdef_|..."

       **l   **output channel layout or number of channels

### outdef
           output           channel           specification,          of          the          form:
           "_out_name_=[_gain_*]_in_name_[(+-)[_gain_*]_in_name_...]"

### out_name
           output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel  number  (c0,
           c1, etc.)

### gain
           multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged

### in_name
           input  channel  to  use,  see  out_name  for details; it is not possible to mix named and
           numbered input channels

       If the `=' in  a  channel  specification  is  replaced  by  `<',  then  the  gains  for  that
       specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus avoiding clipping noise.

       _Mixing_ _examples_

       For  example,  if  you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger factor for the
       left channel:

               pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1

       A customized down-mix to stereo that works  automatically  for  3-,  4-,  5-  and  7-channels
       surround:

               pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR

       Note  that  **ffmpeg **integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system that should be preferred
       (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific needs.

       _Remapping_ _examples_

       The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:

       *<gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,>
       *<only one input per channel output,>

       If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure channel mapping
       detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the remapping.

       For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by  dropping  the  extra
       channels:

               pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"

       Given  the  same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels and keep the
       input channel layout:

               pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"

       If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel  (and  still  keep
       the stereo channel layout) with:

               pan="stereo|c1=c1"

       Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both front left and
       right:

               pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"

### replaygain
       ReplayGain  scanner  filter.  This  filter  takes  an audio stream as an input and outputs it
       unchanged.  At end of filtering it displays "track_gain" and "track_peak".

       The filter accepts the following exported read-only options:

### track_gain
           Exported track gain in dB at end of stream.

### track_peak
           Exported track peak at end of stream.

### resample
       Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is not meant to  be  used
       directly.

### rubberband
       Apply time-stretching and pitch-shifting with librubberband.

       To   enable   compilation   of   this   filter,   you   need   to   configure   FFmpeg   with
       "--enable-librubberband".

       The filter accepts the following options:

### tempo
           Set tempo scale factor.

### pitch
           Set pitch scale factor.

### transients
           Set transients detector.  Possible values are:

           _crisp_
           _mixed_
           _smooth_
### detector
           Set detector.  Possible values are:

           _compound_
           _percussive_
           _soft_
### phase
           Set phase.  Possible values are:

           _laminar_
           _independent_
### window
           Set processing window size.  Possible values are:

           _standard_
           _short_
           _long_
### smoothing
           Set smoothing.  Possible values are:

           _off_
           _on_
### formant
           Enable formant preservation when shift pitching.  Possible values are:

           _shifted_
           _preserved_
### pitchq
           Set pitch quality.  Possible values are:

           _quality_
           _speed_
           _consistency_
### channels
           Set channels.  Possible values are:

           _apart_
           _together_

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### tempo
           Change filter tempo scale factor.  Syntax for the command is : "_tempo_"

### pitch
           Change filter pitch scale factor.  Syntax for the command is : "_pitch_"

### sidechaincompress
       This filter acts like normal compressor but has the ability to compress detected signal using
       second input signal.  It needs two input streams and returns one output stream.  First  input
       stream  will be processed depending on second stream signal.  The filtered signal then can be
       filtered with other filters in later stages of processing. See **pan **and **amerge **filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input gain. Default is 1. Range is between 0.015625 and 64.

### mode
           Set mode of compressor operation. Can be "upward" or "downward".  Default is "downward".

### threshold
           If a signal of second stream raises above this level it will affect the gain reduction of
           first stream.  By default is 0.125. Range is between 0.00097563 and 1.

### ratio
           Set a ratio about which the signal is reduced. 1:2 means that if  the  level  raised  4dB
           above  the threshold, it will be only 2dB above after the reduction.  Default is 2. Range
           is between 1 and 20.

### attack
           Amount of milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before  gain  reduction
           starts. Default is 20. Range is between 0.01 and 2000.

### release
           Amount  of  milliseconds  the  signal has to fall below the threshold before reduction is
           decreased again. Default is 250. Range is between 0.01 and 9000.

### makeup
           Set the amount by how much signal will be amplified  after  processing.   Default  is  1.
           Range is from 1 to 64.

### knee
           Curve  the  sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more softly.  Default
           is 2.82843. Range is between 1 and 8.

### link
           Choose if  the  "average"  level  between  all  channels  of  side-chain  stream  or  the
           louder("maximum")  channel  of  side-chain  stream  affects  the  reduction.  Default  is
           "average".

### detection
           Should the exact signal be taken in case of "peak" or  an  RMS  one  in  case  of  "rms".
           Default is "rms" which is mainly smoother.

### level_sc
           Set sidechain gain. Default is 1. Range is between 0.015625 and 64.

       **mix **How much to use compressed signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Full  ffmpeg  example  taking 2 audio inputs, 1st input to be compressed depending on the
           signal of 2nd input and later compressed signal to be merged with 2nd input:

                   ffmpeg -i main.flac -i sidechain.flac -filter_complex "[1:a]asplit=2[sc][mix];[0:a][sc]sidechaincompress[compr];[compr][mix]amerge"

### sidechaingate
       A sidechain gate acts like a normal (wideband)  gate  but  has  the  ability  to  filter  the
       detected signal before sending it to the gain reduction stage.  Normally a gate uses the full
       range  signal  to  detect  a  level  above  the threshold.  For example: If you cut all lower
       frequencies from your sidechain signal the gate will decrease the volume of your  track  only
       if  not  enough  highs appear. With this technique you are able to reduce the resonation of a
       natural drum or remove "rumbling" of muted strokes from a heavily distorted guitar.  It needs
       two input streams and returns one output  stream.   First  input  stream  will  be  processed
       depending on second stream signal.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input level before filtering.  Default is 1. Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.

### mode
           Set  the mode of operation. Can be "upward" or "downward".  Default is "downward". If set
           to "upward" mode, higher parts of signal will be amplified, expanding  dynamic  range  in
           upward  direction.   Otherwise,  in  case  of  "downward"  lower  parts of signal will be
           reduced.

### range
           Set the level of gain reduction when the signal  is  below  the  threshold.   Default  is
           0.06125.  Allowed  range  is  from 0 to 1.  Setting this to 0 disables reduction and then
           filter behaves like expander.

### threshold
           If a signal rises above this level the gain reduction is  released.   Default  is  0.125.
           Allowed range is from 0 to 1.

### ratio
           Set  a ratio about which the signal is reduced.  Default is 2. Allowed range is from 1 to
           9000.

### attack
           Amount of milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before  gain  reduction
           stops.  Default is 20 milliseconds. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.

### release
           Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the threshold before the reduction is
           increased again. Default is 250 milliseconds.  Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.

### makeup
           Set  amount  of amplification of signal after processing.  Default is 1. Allowed range is
           from 1 to 64.

### knee
           Curve the sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more  softly.   Default
           is 2.828427125. Allowed range is from 1 to 8.

### detection
           Choose if exact signal should be taken for detection or an RMS like one.  Default is rms.
           Can be peak or rms.

### link
           Choose  if  the  average  level  between  all  channels or the louder channel affects the
           reduction.  Default is average. Can be average or maximum.

### level_sc
           Set sidechain gain. Default is 1. Range is from 0.015625 to 64.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### silencedetect
       Detect silence in an audio stream.

       This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less or equal to  a
       noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the minimum detected noise duration.

       The  printed  times  and  duration  are  expressed  in  seconds. The "lavfi.silence_start" or
       "lavfi.silence_start.X" metadata key is set on the first  frame  whose  timestamp  equals  or
       exceeds  the  detection  duration  and  it  contains  the timestamp of the first frame of the
       silence.

       The  "lavfi.silence_duration"  or  "lavfi.silence_duration.X"  and   "lavfi.silence_end"   or
       "lavfi.silence_end.X"  metadata keys are set on the first frame after the silence. If **mono **is
       enabled, and each channel is evaluated separately, the ".X" suffixed keys are used,  and  "X"
       corresponds to the channel number.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### noise, n
           Set  noise  tolerance.  Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified
           value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.

### duration, d
           Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).  See  **the  Time  duration**
           **section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

### mono, m
           Process each channel separately, instead of combined. By default is disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:

                   silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5

       •   Complete   example  with  **ffmpeg  **to  detect  silence  with  0.0001  noise  tolerance  in
           _silence.mp3_:

                   ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -

### silenceremove
       Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### start_periods
           This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of  the  audio.  A
           value  of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the beginning. When specifying
           a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it finds non-silence. Normally,  when  trimming
           silence  from  beginning  of audio the _start_periods_ will be 1 but it can be increased to
           higher values to trim all audio up to specific count  of  non-silence  periods.   Default
           value is 0.

### start_duration
           Specify  the  amount  of  time that non-silence must be detected before it stops trimming
           audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated as silence and trimmed
           off. Default value is 0.

### start_threshold
           This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital audio, a value
           of 0 may be fine but for audio recorded from analog, you may wish to increase  the  value
           to account for background noise.  Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
           specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.

### start_silence
           Specify max duration of silence at beginning that will be kept after trimming. Default is
           0, which is equal to trimming all samples detected as silence.

### start_mode
           Specify  mode of detection of silence end at start of multi-channel audio.  Can be _any_ or
           _all_. Default is _any_.  With _any_, any sample from any channel  that  is  detected  as  non-
           silence will trigger end of silence trimming at start of audio stream.  With _all_, only if
           every  sample  from  every channel is detected as non-silence will trigger end of silence
           trimming at start of audio stream, limited usage.

### stop_periods
           Set the count for trimming silence from the end of  audio.  When  specifying  a  positive
           value,  it  trims  audio after it finds specified silence period.  To remove silence from
           the middle of a file, specify a _stop_periods_ that is negative. This value is then treated
           as a positive value and is used to indicate  the  effect  should  restart  processing  as
           specified  by  _stop_periods_,  making  it  suitable for removing periods of silence in the
           middle of the audio.  Default value is 0.

### stop_duration
           Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not  copied  any  more.  By
           specifying  a  higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in the audio.  Default
           value is 0.

### stop_threshold
           This is the same as **start_threshold **but for trimming silence from the end of audio.   Can
           be  specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value) or amplitude ratio.
           Default value is 0.

### stop_silence
           Specify max duration of silence at end that will be kept after trimming.  Default  is  0,
           which is equal to trimming all samples detected as silence.

### stop_mode
           Specify  mode  of  detection of silence start after start of multi-channel audio.  Can be
           _any_ or _all_. Default is _all_.  With _any_, any sample from any channel that  is  detected  as
           silence  will  trigger  start  of  silence  trimming after start of audio stream, limited
           usage.  With _all_, only if every sample from every channel is  detected  as  silence  will
           trigger start of silence trimming after start of audio stream.

### detection
           Set how is silence detected.

           **avg **Mean of absolute values of samples in moving window.

           **rms **Root squared mean of absolute values of samples in moving window.

           **peak**
               Maximum of absolute values of samples in moving window.

           **median**
               Median of absolute values of samples in moving window.

           **ptp **Absolute of max peak to min peak difference of samples in moving window.

           **dev **Standard deviation of values of samples in moving window.

           Default value is "rms".

### window
           Set  duration  in number of seconds used to calculate size of window in number of samples
           for detecting silence. Using 0 will effectively disable any windowing and use only single
           sample per channel for silence detection.  In that case it may  be  needed  to  also  set
           **start_silence  **and/or  **stop_silence  **to  nonzero  values  with also **start_duration **and/or
           **stop_duration **to nonzero values.  Default value is 0.02. Allowed range is from 0 to 10.

### timestamp
           Set processing mode of every audio frame output timestamp.

           **write**
               Full timestamps rewrite, keep only the start time for the first output frame.

           **copy**
               Non-dropped frames are left with same timestamp as input audio frame.

           Defaults value is "write".

       _Examples_

       •   The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a  recording  that  does
           not  contain  the  delay  at  the  start which usually occurs between pressing the record
           button and the start of the performance:

                   silenceremove=start_periods=1:start_duration=5:start_threshold=0.02

       •   Trim all silence encountered from beginning to end where there is more than 1  second  of
           silence in audio:

                   silenceremove=stop_periods=-1:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB

       •   Trim all digital silence samples, using peak detection, from beginning to end where there
           is more than 0 samples of digital silence in audio and digital silence is detected in all
           channels at same positions in stream:

                   silenceremove=window=0:detection=peak:stop_mode=all:start_mode=all:stop_periods=-1:stop_threshold=0

       •   Trim  every 2nd encountered silence period from beginning to end where there is more than
           1 second of silence per silence period in audio:

                   silenceremove=stop_periods=-2:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB

       •   Similar as above, but keep maximum of 0.5 seconds of silence from each trimmed period:

                   silenceremove=stop_periods=-2:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB:stop_silence=0.5

       •   Similar as above, but keep maximum of 1.5 seconds of silence from start of audio:

                   silenceremove=stop_periods=-2:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB:stop_silence=0.5:start_periods=1:start_duration=1:start_silence=1.5:stop_threshold=-90dB

       _Commands_

       This filter supports some above options as **commands**.

### sofalizer
       SOFAlizer uses head-related transfer functions (HRTFs) to create virtual loudspeakers  around
       the  user  for  binaural listening via headphones (audio formats up to 9 channels supported).
       The HRTFs are stored in SOFA  files  (see  <**<http://www.sofacoustics.org/>**>  for  a  database).
       SOFAlizer  is  developed at the Acoustics Research Institute (ARI) of the Austrian Academy of
       Sciences.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libmysofa".

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sofa
           Set the SOFA file used for rendering.

### gain
           Set gain applied to audio. Value is in dB. Default is 0.

### rotation
           Set rotation of virtual loudspeakers in deg. Default is 0.

### elevation
           Set elevation of virtual speakers in deg. Default is 0.

### radius
           Set distance in meters between loudspeakers  and  the  listener  with  near-field  HRTFs.
           Default is 1.

### type
           Set  processing  type. Can be _time_ or _freq_. _time_ is processing audio in time domain which
           is slow.  _freq_ is processing audio in frequency domain which is fast.  Default is _freq_.

### speakers
           Set custom positions of virtual loudspeakers. Syntax for  this  option  is:  <CH>  <AZIM>
           <ELEV>[|<CH>  <AZIM>  <ELEV>|...].   Each  virtual  loudspeaker  is  described with short
           channel name following with azimuth and elevation in degrees.  Each  virtual  loudspeaker
           description  is  separated  by  '|'.   For example to override front left and front right
           channel positions use: 'speakers=FL 45 15|FR 345  15'.   Descriptions  with  unrecognised
           channel names are ignored.

### lfegain
           Set custom gain for LFE channels. Value is in dB. Default is 0.

### framesize
           Set  custom frame size in number of samples. Default is 1024.  Allowed range is from 1024
           to 96000. Only used if option **type **is set to _freq_.

### normalize
           Should all IRs be normalized upon importing SOFA file.  By default is enabled.

### interpolate
           Should nearest IRs be interpolated with neighbor IRs if exact position does not match. By
           default is disabled.

### minphase
           Minphase all IRs upon loading of SOFA file. By default is disabled.

### anglestep
           Set neighbor search angle step. Only used if option _interpolate_ is enabled.

### radstep
           Set neighbor search radius step. Only used if option _interpolate_ is enabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Using ClubFritz6 sofa file:

                   sofalizer=sofa=/path/to/ClubFritz6.sofa:type=freq:radius=1

       •   Using ClubFritz12 sofa file and bigger radius with small rotation:

                   sofalizer=sofa=/path/to/ClubFritz12.sofa:type=freq:radius=2:rotation=5

       •   Similar as above but with custom speaker positions for front left, front right, back left
           and back right and also with custom gain:

                   "sofalizer=sofa=/path/to/ClubFritz6.sofa:type=freq:radius=2:speakers=FL 45|FR 315|BL 135|BR 225:gain=28"

### speechnorm
       Speech Normalizer.

       This filter expands or compresses each half-cycle of audio samples (local set of samples  all
       above or all below zero and between two nearest zero crossings) depending on threshold value,
       so audio reaches target peak value under conditions controlled by below options.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### peak, p
           Set  the  expansion  target  peak  value.  This  specifies  the  highest allowed absolute
           amplitude level for the normalized audio input. Default value is 0.95. Allowed  range  is
           from 0.0 to 1.0.

### expansion, e
           Set  the  maximum  expansion  factor. Allowed range is from 1.0 to 50.0. Default value is
           2.0.  This option controls maximum local half-cycle of  samples  expansion.  The  maximum
           expansion  would  be  such  that  local peak value reaches target peak value but never to
           surpass it and that ratio between new and previous  peak  value  does  not  surpass  this
           option value.

### compression, c
           Set  the  maximum compression factor. Allowed range is from 1.0 to 50.0. Default value is
           2.0.  This option controls maximum local half-cycle of samples compression.  This  option
           is  used  only  if  **threshold **option is set to value greater than 0.0, then in such cases
           when local peak is lower or same as value set by **threshold **all samples belonging to  that
           peak's half-cycle will be compressed by current compression factor.

### threshold, t
           Set  the  threshold  value. Default value is 0.0. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.  This
           option specifies which half-cycles of samples  will  be  compressed  and  which  will  be
           expanded.   Any  half-cycle  samples  with  their  local peak value below or same as this
           option value will be compressed by current compression factor, otherwise, if greater than
           threshold value they will be expanded with expansion factor so that it could  reach  peak
           target value but never surpass it.

### raise, r
           Set  the expansion raising amount per each half-cycle of samples. Default value is 0.001.
           Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0. This controls how fast expansion factor is  raised  per
           each  new half-cycle until it reaches **expansion **value.  Setting this options too high may
           lead to distortions.

### fall, f
           Set the compression raising amount per each  half-cycle  of  samples.  Default  value  is
           0.001.   Allowed  range  is from 0.0 to 1.0. This controls how fast compression factor is
           raised per each new half-cycle until it reaches **compression **value.

### channels, h
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available channels are filtered.

### invert, i
           Enable inverted filtering,  by  default  is  disabled.  This  inverts  interpretation  of
           **threshold  **option.  When  enabled  any  half-cycle of samples with their local peak value
           below or same as **threshold **option will be expanded otherwise it will be compressed.

### link, l
           Link channels when calculating gain applied to each filtered channel sample,  by  default
           is  disabled.   When  disabled  each  filtered  channel  gain calculation is independent,
           otherwise when this option is enabled the minimum of all possible gains for each filtered
           channel is used.

### rms, m
           Set the expansion target RMS value. This specifies the highest allowed RMS level for  the
           normalized audio input. Default value is 0.0, thus disabled. Allowed range is from 0.0 to
           1.0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Weak and slow amplification:

                   speechnorm=e=3:r=0.00001:l=1

       •   Moderate and slow amplification:

                   speechnorm=e=6.25:r=0.00001:l=1

       •   Strong and fast amplification:

                   speechnorm=e=12.5:r=0.0001:l=1

       •   Very strong and fast amplification:

                   speechnorm=e=25:r=0.0001:l=1

       •   Extreme and fast amplification:

                   speechnorm=e=50:r=0.0001:l=1

### stereotools
       This  filter  has  some  handy  utilities to manage stereo signals, for converting M/S stereo
       recordings to L/R signal while having control over the parameters  or  spreading  the  stereo
       image of master track.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_in
           Set input level before filtering for both channels. Defaults is 1.  Allowed range is from
           0.015625 to 64.

### level_out
           Set output level after filtering for both channels. Defaults is 1.  Allowed range is from
           0.015625 to 64.

### balance_in
           Set input balance between both channels. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### balance_out
           Set output balance between both channels. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### softclip
           Enable  softclipping. Results in analog distortion instead of harsh digital 0dB clipping.
           Disabled by default.

### mutel
           Mute the left channel. Disabled by default.

### muter
           Mute the right channel. Disabled by default.

### phasel
           Change the phase of the left channel. Disabled by default.

### phaser
           Change the phase of the right channel. Disabled by default.

### mode
           Set stereo mode. Available values are:

           **lr>lr**
               Left/Right to Left/Right, this is default.

           **lr>ms**
               Left/Right to Mid/Side.

           **ms>lr**
               Mid/Side to Left/Right.

           **lr>ll**
               Left/Right to Left/Left.

           **lr>rr**
               Left/Right to Right/Right.

           **lr>l+r**
               Left/Right to Left + Right.

           **lr>rl**
               Left/Right to Right/Left.

           **ms>ll**
               Mid/Side to Left/Left.

           **ms>rr**
               Mid/Side to Right/Right.

           **ms>rl**
               Mid/Side to Right/Left.

           **lr>l-r**
               Left/Right to Left - Right.

### slev
           Set level of side signal. Default is 1.  Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.

### sbal
           Set balance of side signal. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### mlev
           Set level of the middle signal. Default is 1.  Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.

### mpan
           Set middle signal pan. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### base
           Set stereo base between mono and inversed channels. Default is 0.  Allowed range is  from
           -1 to 1.

### delay
           Set  delay  in  milliseconds  how  much  to delay left from right channel and vice versa.
           Default is 0. Allowed range is from -20 to 20.

### sclevel
           Set S/C level. Default is 1. Allowed range is from 1 to 100.

### phase
           Set the stereo phase in degrees. Default is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 360.

### bmode_in, bmode_out
           Set balance mode for balance_in/balance_out option.

           Can be one of the following:

           **balance**
               Classic balance mode. Attenuate one channel at time.  Gain is raised up to 1.

           **amplitude**
               Similar as classic mode above but gain is raised up to 2.

           **power**
               Equal power distribution, from -6dB to +6dB range.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply karaoke like effect:

                   stereotools=mlev=0.015625

       •   Convert M/S signal to L/R:

                   "stereotools=mode=ms>lr"

### stereowiden
       This filter enhance the stereo effect by suppressing signal common to both  channels  and  by
       delaying the signal of left into right and vice versa, thereby widening the stereo effect.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### delay
           Time  in  milliseconds of the delay of left signal into right and vice versa.  Default is
           20 milliseconds.

### feedback
           Amount of gain in delayed signal into right and vice versa. Gives a delay effect of  left
           signal in right output and vice versa which gives widening effect. Default is 0.3.

### crossfeed
           Cross feed of left into right with inverted phase. This helps in suppressing the mono. If
           the value is 1 it will cancel all the signal common to both channels. Default is 0.3.

### drymix
           Set level of input signal of original channel. Default is 0.8.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options except "delay" as **commands**.

### superequalizer
       Apply 18 band equalizer.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **1b  **Set 65Hz band gain.

       **2b  **Set 92Hz band gain.

       **3b  **Set 131Hz band gain.

       **4b  **Set 185Hz band gain.

       **5b  **Set 262Hz band gain.

       **6b  **Set 370Hz band gain.

       **7b  **Set 523Hz band gain.

       **8b  **Set 740Hz band gain.

       **9b  **Set 1047Hz band gain.

       **10b **Set 1480Hz band gain.

       **11b **Set 2093Hz band gain.

       **12b **Set 2960Hz band gain.

       **13b **Set 4186Hz band gain.

       **14b **Set 5920Hz band gain.

       **15b **Set 8372Hz band gain.

       **16b **Set 11840Hz band gain.

       **17b **Set 16744Hz band gain.

       **18b **Set 20000Hz band gain.

### surround
       Apply audio surround upmix filter.

       This filter allows to produce multichannel output from audio stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### chl_out
           Set output channel layout. By default, this is _5.1_.

           See **the Channel Layout section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the required syntax.

### chl_in
           Set input channel layout. By default, this is _stereo_.

           See **the Channel Layout section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the required syntax.

### level_in
           Set input volume level. By default, this is _1_.

### level_out
           Set output volume level. By default, this is _1_.

       **lfe **Enable LFE channel output if output channel layout has it. By default, this is enabled.

### lfe_low
           Set LFE low cut off frequency. By default, this is _128_ Hz.

### lfe_high
           Set LFE high cut off frequency. By default, this is _256_ Hz.

### lfe_mode
           Set  LFE  mode,  can  be _add_ or _sub_. Default is _add_.  In _add_ mode, LFE channel is created
           from input audio and added to output.  In _sub_ mode, LFE channel  is  created  from  input
           audio and added to output but also all non-LFE output channels are subtracted with output
           LFE channel.

### smooth
           Set  temporal  smoothness  strength,  used  to gradually change factors when transforming
           stereo sound in time. Allowed range is from _0.0_ to _1.0_.  Useful to improve output quality
           with _focus_ option values greater than _0.0_.  Default is _0.0_. Only values inside this range
           and without edges are effective.

### angle
           Set angle of stereo surround transform, Allowed range is from _0_ to _360_.  Default is _90_.

### focus
           Set focus of stereo surround transform, Allowed range is from _-1_ to _1_.  Default is _0_.

### fc_in
           Set front center input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### fc_out
           Set front center output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### fl_in
           Set front left input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### fl_out
           Set front left output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### fr_in
           Set front right input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### fr_out
           Set front right output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### sl_in
           Set side left input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### sl_out
           Set side left output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### sr_in
           Set side right input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### sr_out
           Set side right output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### bl_in
           Set back left input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### bl_out
           Set back left output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### br_in
           Set back right input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### br_out
           Set back right output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### bc_in
           Set back center input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### bc_out
           Set back center output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### lfe_in
           Set LFE input volume. By default, this is _1_.

### lfe_out
           Set LFE output volume. By default, this is _1_.

### allx
           Set spread usage of stereo image across X axis for all channels.  Allowed range  is  from
           _-1_ to _15_.  By default this value is negative _-1_, and thus unused.

### ally
           Set  spread  usage of stereo image across Y axis for all channels.  Allowed range is from
           _-1_ to _15_.  By default this value is negative _-1_, and thus unused.

### fcx, flx, frx, blx, brx, slx, srx, bcx
           Set spread usage of stereo image across X axis for each channel.  Allowed range  is  from
           _0.06_ to _15_.  By default this value is _0.5_.

### fcy, fly, fry, bly, bry, sly, sry, bcy
           Set  spread  usage of stereo image across Y axis for each channel.  Allowed range is from
           _0.06_ to _15_.  By default this value is _0.5_.

### win_size
           Set window size. Allowed range is from _1024_ to _65536_. Default size is _4096_.

### win_func
           Set window function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hann, hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default is "hann".

### overlap
           Set window overlap. If set to 1, the recommended overlap  for  selected  window  function
           will be picked. Default is 0.5.

### tiltshelf
       Boost  or  cut the lower frequencies and cut or boost higher frequencies of the audio using a
       two-pole shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard hi-fi's tone-controls.
       This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### gain, g
           Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large  cut)  to  +20  (for  a
           large boost).  Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.

### frequency, f
           Set  the  filter's central frequency and so can be used to extend or reduce the frequency
           range to be boosted or cut.  The default value is 3000 Hz.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.

### poles, p
           Set number of poles. Default is 2.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports some options as **commands**.

### treble, highshelf
       Boost  or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole shelving filter with a
       response similar to that of a standard hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as  shelving
       equalisation (EQ).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### gain, g
           Give  the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the Nyquist frequency. Its useful
           range is about -20 (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping  when
           using a positive gain.

### frequency, f
           Set  the  filter's central frequency and so can be used to extend or reduce the frequency
           range to be boosted or cut.  The default value is 3000 Hz.

### width_type, t
           Set method to specify band-width of filter.

           **h   **Hz

           **q   **Q-Factor

           **o   **octave

           **s   **slope

           **k   **kHz

### width, w
           Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.

### poles, p
           Set number of poles. Default is 2.

### mix, m
           How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.  Range is between 0 and 1.

### channels, c
           Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.

### normalize, n
           Normalize biquad coefficients, by  default  is  disabled.   Enabling  it  will  normalize
           magnitude response at DC to 0dB.

### transform, a
           Set transform type of IIR filter.

           **di**
           **dii**
           **tdi**
           **tdii**
           **latt**
           **svf**
           **zdf**
### precision, r
           Set precison of filtering.

           **auto**
               Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

           **s16 **Always use signed 16-bit.

           **s32 **Always use signed 32-bit.

           **f32 **Always use float 32-bit.

           **f64 **Always use float 64-bit.

### block_size, b
           Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough value
           (higher  than  impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
           will become linear phase  otherwise  if  not  big  enough  it  will  just  produce  nasty
           artifacts.

           Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### frequency, f
           Change treble frequency.  Syntax for the command is : "_frequency_"

### width_type, t
           Change treble width_type.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_type_"

### width, w
           Change treble width.  Syntax for the command is : "_width_"

### gain, g
           Change treble gain.  Syntax for the command is : "_gain_"

### mix, m
           Change treble mix.  Syntax for the command is : "_mix_"

### tremolo
       Sinusoidal amplitude modulation.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **f   **Modulation  frequency in Hertz. Modulation frequencies in the subharmonic range (20 Hz or
           lower) will result in a tremolo effect.  This filter may also be used as a ring modulator
           by specifying a modulation frequency higher than 20 Hz.  Range is 0.1 - 20000.0.  Default
           value is 5.0 Hz.

       **d   **Depth of modulation as a percentage. Range is 0.0 - 1.0.  Default value is 0.5.

### vibrato
       Sinusoidal phase modulation.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **f   **Modulation frequency in Hertz.  Range is 0.1 - 20000.0. Default value is 5.0 Hz.

       **d   **Depth of modulation as a percentage. Range is 0.0 - 1.0.  Default value is 0.5.

### virtualbass
       Apply audio Virtual Bass filter.

       This  filter  accepts  stereo  input  and produce stereo with LFE (2.1) channels output.  The
       newly produced LFE channel have enhanced virtual bass originally obtained  from  both  stereo
       channels.   This filter outputs front left and front right channels unchanged as available in
       stereo input.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### cutoff
           Set the virtual bass cutoff frequency. Default value is 250 Hz.  Allowed  range  is  from
           100 to 500 Hz.

### strength
           Set the virtual bass strength. Allowed range is from 0.5 to 3.  Default value is 3.

### volume
       Adjust the input audio volume.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### volume
           Set audio volume expression.

           Output values are clipped to the maximum value.

           The output audio volume is given by the relation:

                   <output_volume> = <volume> * <input_volume>

           The default value for _volume_ is "1.0".

### precision
           This parameter represents the mathematical precision.

           It  determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the precision of
           the volume scaling.

           **fixed**
               8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.

           **float**
               32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)

           **double**
               64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.

### replaygain
           Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.

           **drop**
               Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).

           **ignore**
               Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.

           **track**
               Prefer the track gain, if present.

           **album**
               Prefer the album gain, if present.

### replaygain_preamp
           Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.

           Default value for _replaygain_preamp_ is 0.0.

### replaygain_noclip
           Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.

           Default value for _replaygain_noclip_ is 1.

### eval
           Set when the volume expression is evaluated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **once**
               only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or  when  the  **volume**
               command is sent

           **frame**
               evaluate expression for each incoming frame

           Default value is **once**.

       The volume expression can contain the following parameters.

       **n   **frame number (starting at zero)

### nb_channels
           number of channels

### nb_consumed_samples
           number of samples consumed by the filter

### nb_samples
           number of samples in the current frame

       **pos **original frame position in the file; deprecated, do not use

       **pts **frame PTS

### sample_rate
           sample rate

### startpts
           PTS at start of stream

### startt
           time at start of stream

       **t   **frame time

       **tb  **timestamp timebase

### volume
           last set volume value

       Note  that  when **eval **is set to **once **only the _sample_rate_ and _tb_ variables are available, all
       other variables will evaluate to NAN.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### volume
           Modify the volume expression.  The command accepts the same syntax of  the  corresponding
           option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

       _Examples_

       •   Halve the input audio volume:

                   volume=volume=0.5
                   volume=volume=1/2
                   volume=volume=-6.0206dB

           In all the above example the named key for **volume **can be omitted, for example like in:

                   volume=0.5

       •   Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:

                   volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed

       •   Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:

                   volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame

### volumedetect
       Detect the volume of the input video.

       The  filter  has  no parameters. It supports only 16-bit signed integer samples, so the input
       will be converted when needed. Statistics about the volume will be printed in  the  log  when
       the input stream end is reached.

       In  particular  it  will  show  the mean volume (root mean square), maximum volume (on a per-
       sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the registered  volume  values  (from  the
       maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of the samples).

       All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.

       _Examples_

       Here is an excerpt of the output:

               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
               [Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409

       It means that:

       •   The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.

       •   The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.

       •   There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.

       In  other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping, raising it by +5 dB
       causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.

## AUDIO SOURCES
       Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.

### abuffer
       Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.

       This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular  through  the  interface
       defined in _libavfilter/buffersrc.h_.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### time_base
           The  timebase  which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be either a
           floating-point number or in _numerator_/_denominator_ form.

### sample_rate
           The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.

### sample_fmt
           The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.  Either a  sample  format  name  or  its
           corresponding    integer    representation    from    the    enum    AVSampleFormat    in
           _libavutil/samplefmt.h_

### channel_layout
           The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.  Either  a  channel  layout  name  from
           channel_layout_map   in   _libavutil/channel_layout.c_   or   its   corresponding   integer
           representation from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in _libavutil/channel_layout.h_

### channels
           The  number  of  channels  of  the  incoming  audio  buffers.   If  both   _channels_   and
           _channel_layout_ are specified, then they must be consistent.

       _Examples_

               abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo

       will  instruct  the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.  Since the sample
       format with name "s16p"  corresponds  to  the  number  6  and  the  "stereo"  channel  layout
       corresponds to the value 0x3, this is equivalent to:

               abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3

### aevalsrc
       Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.

       This  source  accepts  in  input  one  or  more expressions (one for each channel), which are
       evaluated and used to generate a corresponding audio signal.

       This source accepts the following options:

### exprs
           Set  the  '|'-separated  expressions  list  for  each  separate  channel.  In  case   the
           **channel_layout **option is not specified, the selected channel layout depends on the number
           of  provided  expressions.  Otherwise  the  last  specified  expression is applied to the
           remaining output channels.

### channel_layout, c
           Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout must be  equal  to
           the number of specified expressions.

### duration, d
           Set  the  minimum  duration  of  the  sourced audio. See **the Time duration section in the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.  Note that the resulting duration may  be
           greater than the specified duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
           complete frame.

           If  not  specified,  or  the  expressed duration is negative, the audio is supposed to be
           generated forever.

### nb_samples, n
           Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default to 1024.

### sample_rate, s
           Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.

       Each expression in _exprs_ can contain the following constants:

       **n   **number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0

       **t   **time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0

       **s   **sample rate

       _Examples_

       •   Generate silence:

                   aevalsrc=0

       •   Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to 8000 Hz:

                   aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"

       •   Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front Center +  Back  Center)
           explicitly:

                   aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"

       •   Generate white noise:

                   aevalsrc="[-2+random(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/-2%2Brandom/0/markdown)"

       •   Generate an amplitude modulated signal:

                   aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"

       •   Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:

                   aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"

### afdelaysrc
       Generate a fractional delay FIR coefficients.

       The resulting stream can be used with **afir **filter for filtering the audio signal.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### delay, d
           Set the fractional delay. Default is 0.

### sample_rate, r
           Set the sample rate, default is 44100.

### nb_samples, n
           Set the number of samples per each frame. Default is 1024.

### taps, t
           Set the number of filter coefficents in output audio stream.  Default value is 0.

### channel_layout, c
           Specifies  the  channel  layout,  and can be a string representing a channel layout.  The
           default value of _channel_layout_ is "stereo".

### afireqsrc
       Generate a FIR equalizer coefficients.

       The resulting stream can be used with **afir **filter for filtering the audio signal.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### preset, p
           Set equalizer preset.  Default preset is "flat".

           Available presets are:

           **custom**
           **flat**
           **acoustic**
           **bass**
           **beats**
           **classic**
           **clear**
           **deep bass**
           **dubstep**
           **electronic**
           **hard-style**
           **hip-hop**
           **jazz**
           **metal**
           **movie**
           **pop**
           **r&b**
           **rock**
           **vocal booster**
### gains, g
           Set custom gains for each band. Only used if the preset option is set to "custom".  Gains
           are separated by white spaces and each gain is set in dBFS.  Default is "0 0 0 0 0 0 0  0
           0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0".

### bands, b
           Set the custom bands from where custon equalizer gains are set.  This must be in strictly
           increasing order. Only used if the preset option is set to "custom".  Bands are separated
           by  white  spaces  and each band represent frequency in Hz.  Default is "25 40 63 100 160
           250 400 630 1000 1600 2500 4000 6300 10000 16000 24000".

### taps, t
           Set number of filter coefficents in output audio stream.  Default value is 4096.

### sample_rate, r
           Set sample rate of output audio stream, default is 44100.

### nb_samples, n
           Set number of samples per each frame in output audio stream. Default is 1024.

### interp, i
           Set interpolation method for FIR equalizer coefficients. Can be "linear" or "cubic".

### phase, h
           Set phase type of FIR filter. Can  be  "linear"  or  "min":  minimum-phase.   Default  is
           minimum-phase filter.

### afirsrc
       Generate a FIR coefficients using frequency sampling method.

       The resulting stream can be used with **afir **filter for filtering the audio signal.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### taps, t
           Set number of filter coefficents in output audio stream.  Default value is 1025.

### frequency, f
           Set  frequency  points  from  where  magnitude  and  phase  are set.  This must be in non
           decreasing order, and first element must be 0, while last element must be 1. Elements are
           separated by white spaces.

### magnitude, m
           Set magnitude value for every frequency point set by **frequency**.  Number of values must be
           same as number of frequency points.  Values are separated by white spaces.

### phase, p
           Set phase value for every frequency point set by **frequency**.  Number  of  values  must  be
           same as number of frequency points.  Values are separated by white spaces.

### sample_rate, r
           Set sample rate, default is 44100.

### nb_samples, n
           Set number of samples per each frame. Default is 1024.

### win_func, w
           Set window function. Default is blackman.

### anullsrc
       The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful as a template and
       to  be  employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the source for filters which ignore the
       input data (for example the sox synth filter).

       This source accepts the following options:

### channel_layout, cl
           Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or  a  string  representing  a
           channel layout. The default value of _channel_layout_ is "stereo".

           Check  the  channel_layout_map  definition  in _libavutil/channel_layout.c_ for the mapping
           between strings and channel layout values.

### sample_rate, r
           Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.

### nb_samples, n
           Set the number of samples per requested frames.

### duration, d
           Set  the  duration  of  the  sourced  audio.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in   the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

           If  not  specified,  or  the  expressed duration is negative, the audio is supposed to be
           generated forever.

       _Examples_

       •   Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.

                   anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4

       •   Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:

                   anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono

       All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.

### flite
       Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libflite".

       Note that versions of the flite library prior to 2.0 are not thread-safe.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### list_voices
           If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit immediately.  Default  value
           is 0.

### nb_samples, n
           Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.

### textfile
           Set the filename containing the text to speak.

### text
           Set the text to speak.

### voice, v
           Set  the  voice  to  use  for  the speech synthesis. Default value is "kal". See also the
           _list_voices_ option.

       _Examples_

       •   Read from file _speech.txt_, and synthesize the text using the standard flite voice:

                   flite=textfile=speech.txt

       •   Read the specified text selecting the "slt" voice:

                   flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt

       •   Input text to ffmpeg:

                   ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt

       •   Make _ffplay_ speak the specified text, using "flite" and the "lavfi" device:

                   ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'

       For more information about libflite, check: <**<http://www.festvox.org/flite/>**>

### anoisesrc
       Generate a noise audio signal.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sample_rate, r
           Specify the sample rate. Default value is 48000 Hz.

### amplitude, a
           Specify the amplitude (0.0 - 1.0) of the generated audio stream. Default value is 1.0.

### duration, d
           Specify the duration of the generated audio stream. Not specifying this option results in
           noise with an infinite length.

### color, colour, c
           Specify the color of noise. Available noise colors are white, pink, brown,  blue,  violet
           and velvet. Default color is white.

### seed, s
           Specify a value used to seed the PRNG.

### nb_samples, n
           Set the number of samples per each output frame, default is 1024.

### density
           Set the density (0.0 - 1.0) for the velvet noise generator, default is 0.05.

       _Examples_

       •   Generate 60 seconds of pink noise, with a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and an amplitude of 0.5:

                   anoisesrc=d=60:c=pink:r=44100:a=0.5

### hilbert
       Generate odd-tap Hilbert transform FIR coefficients.

       The  resulting  stream  can  be  used  with  **afir  **filter for phase-shifting the signal by 90
       degrees.

       This is used in many matrix coding schemes and for analytic signal generation.   The  process
       is often written as a multiplication by i (or j), the imaginary unit.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sample_rate, s
           Set sample rate, default is 44100.

### taps, t
           Set length of FIR filter, default is 22051.

### nb_samples, n
           Set number of samples per each frame.

### win_func, w
           Set window function to be used when generating FIR coefficients.

### sinc
       Generate   a   sinc  kaiser-windowed  low-pass,  high-pass,  band-pass,  or  band-reject  FIR
       coefficients.

       The resulting stream can be used with **afir **filter for filtering the audio signal.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sample_rate, r
           Set sample rate, default is 44100.

### nb_samples, n
           Set number of samples per each frame. Default is 1024.

       **hp  **Set high-pass frequency. Default is 0.

       **lp  **Set low-pass frequency. Default is 0.  If high-pass  frequency  is  lower  than  low-pass
           frequency  and  low-pass  frequency  is  higher  than 0 then filter will create band-pass
           filter coefficients, otherwise band-reject filter coefficients.

### phase
           Set filter phase response. Default is 50. Allowed range is from 0 to 100.

### beta
           Set Kaiser window beta.

       **att **Set stop-band attenuation. Default is 120dB, allowed range is from 40 to 180 dB.

### round
           Enable rounding, by default is disabled.

### hptaps
           Set number of taps for high-pass filter.

### lptaps
           Set number of taps for low-pass filter.

### sine
       Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.

       The audio signal is bit-exact.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### frequency, f
           Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.

### beep_factor, b
           Enable a periodic  beep  every  second  with  frequency  _beep_factor_  times  the  carrier
           frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.

### sample_rate, r
           Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.

### duration, d
           Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.

### samples_per_frame
           Set the number of samples per output frame.

           The expression can contain the following constants:

           **n   **The (sequential) number of the output audio frame, starting from 0.

           **pts **The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the output audio frame, expressed in _TB_ units.

           **t   **The PTS of the output audio frame, expressed in seconds.

           **TB  **The timebase of the output audio frames.

           Default is 1024.

       _Examples_

       •   Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:

                   sine

       •   Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:

                   sine=220:4:d=5
                   sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
                   sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5

       •   Generate a 1 kHz sine wave following "1602,1601,1602,1601,1602" NTSC pattern:

                   sine=1000:samples_per_frame='st(0,mod(n,5)); 1602-not(not(eq([ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/0/markdown),1)+eq([ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/0/markdown),3)))'

## AUDIO SINKS
       Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.

### abuffersink
       Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.

       This  sink  is  mainly  intended  for  programmatic  use, in particular through the interface
       defined in _libavfilter/buffersink.h_ or the options system.

       It accepts a pointer  to  an  AVABufferSinkContext  structure,  which  defines  the  incoming
       buffers'  formats,  to  be  passed  as  the  opaque  parameter  to "avfilter_init_filter" for
       initialization.

### anullsink
       Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the  input  audio.  It  is  mainly  useful  as  a
       template and for use in analysis / debugging tools.

## VIDEO FILTERS
       When  you  configure  your  FFmpeg  build,  you can disable any of the existing filters using
       "--disable-filters".  The configure output will show  the  video  filters  included  in  your
       build.

       Below is a description of the currently available video filters.

### addroi
       Mark a region of interest in a video frame.

       The  frame data is passed through unchanged, but metadata is attached to the frame indicating
       regions of interest which can affect the behaviour of later encoding.  Multiple  regions  can
       be marked by applying the filter multiple times.

       **x   **Region distance in pixels from the left edge of the frame.

       **y   **Region distance in pixels from the top edge of the frame.

       **w   **Region width in pixels.

       **h   **Region height in pixels.

           The parameters _x_, _y_, _w_ and _h_ are expressions, and may contain the following variables:

           **iw  **Width of the input frame.

           **ih  **Height of the input frame.

### qoffset
           Quantisation offset to apply within the region.

           This  must  be  a real value in the range -1 to +1.  A value of zero indicates no quality
           change.  A negative value asks for better quality (less quantisation), while  a  positive
           value asks for worse quality (greater quantisation).

           The range is calibrated so that the extreme values indicate the largest possible offset -
           if  the  rest  of  the  frame is encoded with the worst possible quality, an offset of -1
           indicates that this region should be encoded  with  the  best  possible  quality  anyway.
           Intermediate values are then interpolated in some codec-dependent way.

           For  example,  in  10-bit  H.264 the quantisation parameter varies between -12 and 51.  A
           typical qoffset value of -1/10 therefore indicates that this  region  should  be  encoded
           with  a  QP around one-tenth of the full range better than the rest of the frame.  So, if
           most of the frame were to be encoded with a QP of around 30, this region would get  a  QP
           of around 24 (an offset of approximately -1/10 * (51 - -12) = -6.3).  An extreme value of
           -1  would  indicate  that  this  region  should be encoded with the best possible quality
           regardless of the treatment of the rest of the frame - that is, should be encoded at a QP
           of -12.

### clear
           If set to true, remove any existing regions of interest marked on the frame before adding
           the new one.

       _Examples_

       •   Mark the centre quarter of the frame as interesting.

                   addroi=iw/4:ih/4:iw/2:ih/2:-1/10

       •   Mark the 100-pixel-wide region on the left edge of the frame as very uninteresting (to be
           encoded at much lower quality than the rest of the frame).

                   addroi=0:0:100:ih:+1/5

### alphaextract
       Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This  is  especially  useful
       with the _alphamerge_ filter.

### alphamerge
       Add  or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the grayscale value of a second
       input. This is intended for use with _alphaextract_ to allow the  transmission  or  storage  of
       frame sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha channel.

       For  example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video and a separate video
       created with _alphaextract_, you might use:

               movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]

### amplify
       Amplify differences between current pixel  and  pixels  of  adjacent  frames  in  same  pixel
       location.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### radius
           Set  frame  radius. Default is 2. Allowed range is from 1 to 63.  For example radius of 3
           will instruct filter to calculate average of 7 frames.

### factor
           Set factor to amplify difference. Default is 2. Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.

### threshold
           Set threshold for difference amplification. Any difference greater or equal to this value
           will not alter source pixel. Default is 10.  Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.

### tolerance
           Set tolerance for difference amplification. Any difference lower to this value  will  not
           alter source pixel. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.

       **low **Set  lower  limit for changing source pixel. Default is 65535. Allowed range is from 0 to
           65535.  This option controls maximum possible  value  that  will  decrease  source  pixel
           value.

### high
           Set  high  limit  for changing source pixel. Default is 65535. Allowed range is from 0 to
           65535.  This option controls maximum possible  value  that  will  increase  source  pixel
           value.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following **commands **that corresponds to option of same name:

### factor
### threshold
### tolerance
### low
### high
### planes

### ass
       Same  as  the  **subtitles **filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec and libavformat to
       work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced Substation Alpha) subtitles files.

       This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from the **subtitles**
       filter:

### shaping
           Set the shaping engine

           Available values are:

           **auto**
               The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.

           **simple**
               Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions

           **complex**
               Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning

           The default is "auto".

### atadenoise
       Apply an Adaptive Temporal Averaging Denoiser to the video input.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **0a  **Set threshold A for 1st plane. Default is 0.02.  Valid range is 0 to 0.3.

       **0b  **Set threshold B for 1st plane. Default is 0.04.  Valid range is 0 to 5.

       **1a  **Set threshold A for 2nd plane. Default is 0.02.  Valid range is 0 to 0.3.

       **1b  **Set threshold B for 2nd plane. Default is 0.04.  Valid range is 0 to 5.

       **2a  **Set threshold A for 3rd plane. Default is 0.02.  Valid range is 0 to 0.3.

       **2b  **Set threshold B for 3rd plane. Default is 0.04.  Valid range is 0 to 5.

           Threshold A is designed to react on abrupt changes in the input signal and threshold B is
           designed to react on continuous changes in the input signal.

       **s   **Set number of frames filter will use for averaging. Default is 9. Must be odd  number  in
           range [5, 129].

       **p   **Set what planes of frame filter will use for averaging. Default is all.

       **a   **Set  what  variant  of  algorithm filter will use for averaging. Default is "p" parallel.
           Alternatively can be set to "s" serial.

           Parallel can be faster then serial, while other way around is never true.  Parallel  will
           abort  early  on  first  change being greater then thresholds, while serial will continue
           processing other side of frames if they are equal or below thresholds.

       **0s**
       **1s**
       **2s  **Set sigma for 1st plane, 2nd plane or 3rd plane. Default is 32767.  Valid range is from 0
           to 32767.  This options controls weight  for  each  pixel  in  radius  defined  by  size.
           Default  value  means every pixel have same weight.  Setting this option to 0 effectively
           disables filtering.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options except option "s".   The  command  accepts  the
       same syntax of the corresponding option.

### avgblur
       Apply average blur filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sizeX
           Set horizontal radius size.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.

### sizeY
           Set vertical radius size, if zero it will be same as "sizeX".  Default is 0.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same commands as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### backgroundkey
       Turns a static background into transparency.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### threshold
           Threshold for scene change detection.

### similarity
           Similarity percentage with the background.

### blend
           Set the blend amount for pixels that are not similar.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### bbox
       Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame luma plane.

       This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with  a  luma  value  greater
       than  the  minimum  allowed value.  The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on
       the filter log.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### min_val
           Set the minimal luma value. Default is 16.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### bilateral
       Apply bilateral filter, spatial smoothing while preserving edges.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sigmaS
           Set sigma of gaussian function to calculate spatial weight.  Allowed range is 0  to  512.
           Default is 0.1.

### sigmaR
           Set  sigma  of  gaussian  function  to  calculate range weight.  Allowed range is 0 to 1.
           Default is 0.1.

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### bilateral_cuda
       CUDA accelerated bilateral filter, an edge preserving filter.  This filter is  mathematically
       accurate  thanks  to  the  use  of GPU acceleration.  For best output quality, use one to one
       chroma subsampling, i.e. yuv444p format.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sigmaS
           Set sigma of gaussian function to calculate spatial  weight,  also  called  sigma  space.
           Allowed range is 0.1 to 512. Default is 0.1.

### sigmaR
           Set  sigma of gaussian function to calculate color range weight, also called sigma color.
           Allowed range is 0.1 to 512. Default is 0.1.

### window_size
           Set window size of the bilateral function to determine the number of neighbours  to  loop
           on.   If the number entered is even, one will be added automatically.  Allowed range is 1
           to 255. Default is 1.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply the bilateral filter on a video.

                   ./ffmpeg -v verbose \
                   -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -i input.mp4  \
                   -init_hw_device cuda \
                   -filter_complex \
                   " \
                   [0:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv444p[scaled_video];
                   [scaled_video]bilateral_cuda=window_size=9:sigmaS=3.0:sigmaR=50.0" \
                   -an -sn -c:v h264_nvenc -cq 20 out.mp4

### bitplanenoise
       Show and measure bit plane noise.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### bitplane
           Set which plane to analyze. Default is 1.

### filter
           Filter out noisy pixels from "bitplane" set above.  Default is disabled.

### blackdetect
       Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful  to  detect  chapter
       transitions, commercials, or invalid recordings.

       The  filter  outputs  its  detection analysis to both the log as well as frame metadata. If a
       black segment of at least the specified minimum duration is found, a line with the start  and
       end  timestamps  as  well as duration is printed to the log with level "info". In addition, a
       log line with level "debug" is printed per frame showing the black amount detected  for  that
       frame.

       The  filter  also  attaches  metadata  to  the  first  frame  of  a  black  segment  with key
       "lavfi.black_start"  and  to  the  first  frame  after  the  black  segment  ends  with   key
       "lavfi.black_end".  The  value is the frame's timestamp. This metadata is added regardless of
       the minimum duration specified.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### black_min_duration, d
           Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must be  a  non-negative
           floating point number.

           Default value is 2.0.

### picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
           Set  the  threshold for considering a picture "black".  Express the minimum value for the
           ratio:

                   <nb_black_pixels> / <nb_pixels>

           for which a picture is considered black.  Default value is 0.98.

### pixel_black_th, pix_th
           Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".

           The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luma value for  which  a  pixel  is  considered
           "black". The provided value is scaled according to the following equation:

                   <absolute_threshold> = <luma_minimum_value> + <pixel_black_th> * <luma_range_size>

           _luma_range_size_  and  _luma_minimum_value_  depend  on the input video format, the range is
           [0-255] for YUV full-range formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.

           Default value is 0.10.

       The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum value, and detects only
       black intervals of 2 or more seconds:

               blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00

### blackframe
       Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to detect chapter transitions
       or commercials. Output lines  consist  of  the  frame  number  of  the  detected  frame,  the
       percentage  of  blackness,  the  position  in  the  file  if known or -1 and the timestamp in
       seconds.

       In order to display the output  lines,  you  need  to  set  the  loglevel  at  least  to  the
       AV_LOG_INFO value.

       This  filter  exports  frame  metadata  "lavfi.blackframe.pblack".   The value represents the
       percentage of pixels in the picture that are below the threshold value.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### amount
           The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to 98.

### threshold, thresh
           The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to 32.

### blend
       Blend two video frames into each other.

       The "blend" filter takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the  first  input  is  the
       "top"  layer  and second input is "bottom" layer.  By default, the output terminates when the
       longest input terminates.

       The "tblend" (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames from  one  single  stream,  and
       outputs the result obtained by blending the new frame on top of the old frame.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### c0_mode
### c1_mode
### c2_mode
### c3_mode
### all_mode
           Set  blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case of _all_mode_.
           Default value is "normal".

           Available values for component modes are:

           **addition**
           **and**
           **average**
           **bleach**
           **burn**
           **darken**
           **difference**
           **divide**
           **dodge**
           **exclusion**
           **extremity**
           **freeze**
           **geometric**
           **glow**
           **grainextract**
           **grainmerge**
           **hardlight**
           **hardmix**
           **hardoverlay**
           **harmonic**
           **heat**
           **interpolate**
           **lighten**
           **linearlight**
           **multiply**
           **multiply128**
           **negation**
           **normal**
           **or**
           **overlay**
           **phoenix**
           **pinlight**
           **reflect**
           **screen**
           **softdifference**
           **softlight**
           **stain**
           **subtract**
           **vividlight**
           **xor**
### c0_opacity
### c1_opacity
### c2_opacity
### c3_opacity
### all_opacity
           Set blend opacity for specific pixel  component  or  all  pixel  components  in  case  of
           _all_opacity_. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.

### c0_expr
### c1_expr
### c2_expr
### c3_expr
### all_expr
           Set  blend  expression  for  specific  pixel component or all pixel components in case of
           _all_expr_. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.

           The expressions can use the following variables:

           **N   **The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.

           **X**
           **Y   **the coordinates of the current sample

           **W**
           **H   **the width and height of currently filtered plane

           **SW**
           **SH  **Width and height scale for the plane being filtered. It  is  the  ratio  between  the
               dimensions  of  the  current plane to the luma plane, e.g. for a "yuv420p" frame, the
               values are "1,1" for the luma plane and "0.5,0.5" for the chroma planes.

           **T   **Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.

           **TOP, A**
               Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).

           **BOTTOM, B**
               Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).

       The "blend" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:

                   blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'

       •   Apply linear horizontal transition from top layer to bottom layer:

                   blend=all_expr='A*(X/W)+B*(1-X/W)'

       •   Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:

                   blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'

       •   Apply uncover left effect:

                   blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'

       •   Apply uncover down effect:

                   blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'

       •   Apply uncover up-left effect:

                   blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'

       •   Split diagonally video and shows top and bottom layer on each side:

                   blend=all_expr='if(gt(X,Y*(W/H)),A,B)'

       •   Display differences between the current and the previous frame:

                   tblend=all_mode=grainextract

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### blockdetect
       Determines blockiness of frames without altering the input frames.

       Based on Remco Muijs and Ihor Kirenko: "A no-reference blocking artifact measure for adaptive
       video processing." 2005 13th European signal processing conference.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### period_min
### period_max
           Set minimum and maximum values for determining pixel grids (periods).  Default values are
           [3,24].

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

       _Examples_

       •   Determine blockiness for the first plane and search for periods within [8,32]:

                   blockdetect=period_min=8:period_max=32:planes=1

### blurdetect
       Determines blurriness of frames without altering the input frames.

       Based on Marziliano, Pina, et al. "A no-reference perceptual  blur  metric."   Allows  for  a
       block-based abbreviation.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### low
### high
           Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding algorithm.

           The  high  threshold  selects  the "strong" edge pixels, which are then connected through
           8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected by the low threshold.

           _low_ and _high_ threshold values must be chosen in the range [0,1], and _low_ should be lesser
           or equal to _high_.

           Default value for _low_ is "20/255", and default value for _high_ is "50/255".

### radius
           Define the radius to search around an edge pixel for local maxima.

### block_pct
           Determine blurriness only for the most significant blocks, given in percentage.

### block_width
           Determine blurriness for blocks of width _block_width_. If set to any value smaller  1,  no
           blocks are used and the whole image is processed as one no matter of _block_height_.

### block_height
           Determine blurriness for blocks of height _block_height_. If set to any value smaller 1, no
           blocks are used and the whole image is processed as one no matter of _block_width_.

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

       _Examples_

       •   Determine blur for 80% of most significant 32x32 blocks:

                   blurdetect=block_width=32:block_height=32:block_pct=80

### bm3d
       Denoise frames using Block-Matching 3D algorithm.

       The filter accepts the following options.

### sigma
           Set  denoising  strength.  Default  value  is  1.  Allowed range is from 0 to 999.9.  The
           denoising algorithm is very sensitive to sigma, so adjust it according to the source.

### block
           Set local patch size. This sets dimensions in 2D.

### bstep
           Set sliding step for processing blocks. Default value is 4.  Allowed range is from  1  to
           64.  Smaller values allows processing more reference blocks and is slower.

### group
           Set  maximal number of similar blocks for 3rd dimension. Default value is 1.  When set to
           1, no block matching is done. Larger values allows more blocks in single group.   Allowed
           range is from 1 to 256.

### range
           Set  radius  for  search  block  matching.  Default  is  9.   Allowed  range is from 1 to
           INT32_MAX.

### mstep
           Set step between two search locations for block matching. Default is 1.  Allowed range is
           from 1 to 64. Smaller is slower.

### thmse
           Set threshold of mean square error for block matching. Valid range is 0 to INT32_MAX.

### hdthr
           Set thresholding parameter for hard thresholding in 3D transformed domain.  Larger values
           results in stronger hard-thresholding filtering in frequency domain.

### estim
           Set filtering estimation mode. Can be "basic" or "final".  Default is "basic".

       **ref **If enabled, filter will use 2nd stream for  block  matching.   Default  is  disabled  for
           "basic" value of _estim_ option, and always enabled if value of _estim_ is "final".

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default is all available except alpha.

       _Examples_

       •   Basic filtering with bm3d:

                   bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=1:estim=basic

       •   Same as above, but filtering only luma:

                   bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=1:estim=basic:planes=1

       •   Same as above, but with both estimation modes:

                   split[a][b],[a]bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=1:estim=basic[a],[b][a]bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=16:estim=final:ref=1

       •   Same as above, but prefilter with **nlmeans **filter instead:

                   split[a][b],[a]nlmeans=s=3:r=7:p=3[a],[b][a]bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=16:estim=final:ref=1

### boxblur
       Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### luma_radius, lr
### luma_power, lp
### chroma_radius, cr
### chroma_power, cp
### alpha_radius, ar
### alpha_power, ap

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### luma_radius, lr
### chroma_radius, cr
### alpha_radius, ar
           Set  an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the corresponding input
           plane.

           The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be greater than the value of
           the expression "min(w,h)/2" for the luma and alpha planes, and of "min(cw,ch)/2" for  the
           chroma planes.

           Default  value  for  **luma_radius **is "2". If not specified, **chroma_radius **and **alpha_radius**
           default to the corresponding value set for **luma_radius**.

           The expressions can contain the following constants:

           **w**
           **h   **The input width and height in pixels.

           **cw**
           **ch  **The input chroma image width and height in pixels.

           **hsub**
           **vsub**
               The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample  values.  For  example,  for  the  pixel
               format "yuv422p", _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

### luma_power, lp
### chroma_power, cp
### alpha_power, ap
           Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the corresponding plane.

           Default value for **luma_power **is 2. If not specified, **chroma_power **and **alpha_power **default
           to the corresponding value set for **luma_power**.

           A value of 0 will disable the effect.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii set to 2:

                   boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
                   boxblur=2:1

       •   Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:

                   boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0

       •   Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:

                   boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1

### bwdif
       Deinterlace the input video ("bwdif" stands for "Bob Weaver Deinterlacing Filter").

       Motion  adaptive  deinterlacing based on yadif with the use of w3fdif and cubic interpolation
       algorithms.  It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **0, send_frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **1, send_field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           The default value is "send_field".

### parity
           The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts  one  of  the
           following values:

           **0, tff**
               Assume the top field is first.

           **1, bff**
               Assume the bottom field is first.

           **-1, auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The  default  value  is  "auto".   If  the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **0, all**
               Deinterlace all frames.

           **1, interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           The default value is "all".

### bwdif_cuda
       Deinterlace the input video using the **bwdif **algorithm, but implemented in CUDA so that it can
       work as part of a GPU accelerated pipeline with nvdec and/or nvenc.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **0, send_frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **1, send_field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           The default value is "send_field".

### parity
           The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts  one  of  the
           following values:

           **0, tff**
               Assume the top field is first.

           **1, bff**
               Assume the bottom field is first.

           **-1, auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The  default  value  is  "auto".   If  the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **0, all**
               Deinterlace all frames.

           **1, interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           The default value is "all".

### ccrepack
       Repack CEA-708 closed captioning side data

       This filter fixes various issues seen with commerical encoders related to upstream  malformed
       CEA-708  payloads,  specifically  incorrect  number  of tuples (wrong cc_count for the target
       FPS), and incorrect ordering of tuples (i.e. the CEA-608 tuples are not at the first  entries
       in the payload).

### cas
       Apply Contrast Adaptive Sharpen filter to video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### strength
           Set the sharpening strength. Default value is 0.

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default value is to filter all planes except alpha plane.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### chromahold
       Remove all color information for all colors except for certain one.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### color
           The color which will not be replaced with neutral chroma.

### similarity
           Similarity percentage with the above color.  0.01 matches only the exact key color, while
           1.0 matches everything.

### blend
           Blend percentage.  0.0 makes pixels either fully gray, or not gray at all.  Higher values
           result in more preserved color.

       **yuv **Signals that the color passed is already in YUV instead of RGB.

           Literal  colors  like  "green" or "red" don't make sense with this enabled anymore.  This
           can be used to pass exact YUV values as hexadecimal numbers.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### chromakey
       YUV colorspace color/chroma keying.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### color
           The color which will be replaced with transparency.

### similarity
           Similarity percentage with the key color.

           0.01 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.

### blend
           Blend percentage.

           0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent, or not transparent at all.

           Higher  values  result  in  semi-transparent  pixels, with a higher transparency the more
           similar the pixels color is to the key color.

       **yuv **Signals that the color passed is already in YUV instead of RGB.

           Literal colors like "green" or "red" don't make sense with this  enabled  anymore.   This
           can be used to pass exact YUV values as hexadecimal numbers.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

       _Examples_

       •   Make every green pixel in the input image transparent:

                   ffmpeg -i input.png -vf chromakey=green out.png

       •   Overlay a greenscreen-video on top of a static black background.

                   ffmpeg -f lavfi -i color=c=black:s=1280x720 -i video.mp4 -shortest -filter_complex "[1:v]chromakey=0x70de77:0.1:0.2[ckout];[0:v][ckout]overlay[out]" -map "[out]" output.mkv

### chromakey_cuda
       CUDA accelerated YUV colorspace color/chroma keying.

       This filter works like normal chromakey filter but operates on CUDA frames.  for more details
       and parameters see **chromakey**.

       _Examples_

       •   Make all the green pixels in the input video transparent and use it  as  an  overlay  for
           another video:

                   ./ffmpeg \
                       -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -i input_green.mp4  \
                       -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -i base_video.mp4 \
                       -init_hw_device cuda \
                       -filter_complex \
                       " \
                           [0:v]chromakey_cuda=0x25302D:0.1:0.12:1[overlay_video]; \
                           [1:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv420p[base]; \
                           [base][overlay_video]overlay_cuda" \
                       -an -sn -c:v h264_nvenc -cq 20 output.mp4

       •   Process two software sources, explicitly uploading the frames:

                   ./ffmpeg -init_hw_device cuda=cuda -filter_hw_device cuda \
                       -f lavfi -i color=size=800x600:color=white,format=yuv420p \
                       -f lavfi -i yuvtestsrc=size=200x200,format=yuv420p \
                       -filter_complex \
                       " \
                           [0]hwupload[under]; \
                           [1]hwupload,chromakey_cuda=green:0.1:0.12[over]; \
                           [under][over]overlay_cuda" \
                       -c:v hevc_nvenc -cq 18 -preset slow output.mp4

### chromanr
       Reduce chrominance noise.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### thres
           Set threshold for averaging chrominance values.  Sum of absolute difference of Y, U and V
           pixel  components of current pixel and neighbour pixels lower than this threshold will be
           used in averaging. Luma component is left unchanged and is  copied  to  output.   Default
           value is 30. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.

### sizew
           Set  horizontal  radius of rectangle used for averaging.  Allowed range is from 1 to 100.
           Default value is 5.

### sizeh
           Set vertical radius of rectangle used for averaging.  Allowed range is  from  1  to  100.
           Default value is 5.

### stepw
           Set  horizontal  step when averaging. Default value is 1.  Allowed range is from 1 to 50.
           Mostly useful to speed-up filtering.

### steph
           Set vertical step when averaging. Default value is 1.  Allowed range is  from  1  to  50.
           Mostly useful to speed-up filtering.

### threy
           Set  Y  threshold  for  averaging  chrominance values.  Set finer control for max allowed
           difference between Y components of current pixel and neigbour pixels.  Default  value  is
           200. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.

### threu
           Set  U  threshold  for  averaging  chrominance values.  Set finer control for max allowed
           difference between U components of current pixel and neigbour pixels.  Default  value  is
           200. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.

### threv
           Set  V  threshold  for  averaging  chrominance values.  Set finer control for max allowed
           difference between V components of current pixel and neigbour pixels.  Default  value  is
           200. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.

### distance
           Set distance type used in calculations.

           **manhattan**
               Absolute difference.

           **euclidean**
               Difference squared.

           Default distance type is manhattan.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

### chromashift
       Shift chroma pixels horizontally and/or vertically.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **cbh **Set amount to shift chroma-blue horizontally.

       **cbv **Set amount to shift chroma-blue vertically.

       **crh **Set amount to shift chroma-red horizontally.

       **crv **Set amount to shift chroma-red vertically.

### edge
           Set edge mode, can be _smear_, default, or _warp_.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### ciescope
       Display CIE color diagram with pixels overlaid onto it.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### system
           Set color system.

           **ntsc, 470m**
           **ebu, 470bg**
           **smpte**
           **240m**
           **apple**
           **widergb**
           **cie1931**
           **rec709, hdtv**
           **uhdtv, rec2020**
           **dcip3**
       **cie **Set CIE system.

           **xyy**
           **ucs**
           **luv**
### gamuts
           Set what gamuts to draw.

           See "system" option for available values.

### size, s
           Set ciescope size, by default set to 512.

### intensity, i
           Set intensity used to map input pixel values to CIE diagram.

### contrast
           Set contrast used to draw tongue colors that are out of active color system gamut.

### corrgamma
           Correct gamma displayed on scope, by default enabled.

### showwhite
           Show white point on CIE diagram, by default disabled.

### gamma
           Set input gamma. Used only with XYZ input color space.

### fill
           Fill with CIE colors. By default is enabled.

### codecview
       Visualize information exported by some codecs.

       Some codecs can export information  through  frames  using  side-data  or  other  means.  For
       example,  some  MPEG  based  codecs  export motion vectors through the _export_mvs_ flag in the
       codec **flags2 **option.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### block
           Display block partition structure using the luma plane.

       **mv  **Set motion vectors to visualize.

           Available flags for _mv_ are:

           **pf  **forward predicted MVs of P-frames

           **bf  **forward predicted MVs of B-frames

           **bb  **backward predicted MVs of B-frames

       **qp  **Display quantization parameters using the chroma planes.

### mv_type, mvt
           Set motion vectors type to visualize. Includes MVs from all frames  unless  specified  by
           _frame_type_ option.

           Available flags for _mv_type_ are:

           **fp  **forward predicted MVs

           **bp  **backward predicted MVs

### frame_type, ft
           Set frame type to visualize motion vectors of.

           Available flags for _frame_type_ are:

           **if  **intra-coded frames (I-frames)

           **pf  **predicted frames (P-frames)

           **bf  **bi-directionally predicted frames (B-frames)

       _Examples_

       •   Visualize forward predicted MVs of all frames using **ffplay**:

                   ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mp4 -vf codecview=mv_type=fp

       •   Visualize multi-directionals MVs of P and B-Frames using **ffplay**:

                   ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mp4 -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb

### colorbalance
       Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.

       The  filter  allows  an  input  frame  to  be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
       regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.

       A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color,  a  negative  value
       towards the complementary color.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **rs**
       **gs**
       **bs  **Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).

       **rm**
       **gm**
       **bm  **Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).

       **rh**
       **gh**
       **bh  **Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).

           Allowed ranges for options are "[-1.0, 1.0]". Defaults are 0.

       **pl  **Preserve lightness when changing color balance. Default is disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Add red color cast to shadows:

                   colorbalance=rs=.3

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### colorcontrast
       Adjust color contrast between RGB components.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **rc  **Set the red-cyan contrast. Defaults is 0.0. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.

       **gm  **Set the green-magenta contrast. Defaults is 0.0. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.

       **by  **Set the blue-yellow contrast. Defaults is 0.0. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.

### rcw
### gmw
       **byw **Set  the  weight  of  each  "rc", "gm", "by" option value. Default value is 0.0.  Allowed
           range is from 0.0 to 1.0. If all weights are 0.0 filtering is disabled.

       **pl  **Set the amount of preserving lightness. Default value is 0.0. Allowed range is  from  0.0
           to 1.0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### colorcorrect
       Adjust  color  white  balance selectively for blacks and whites.  This filter operates in YUV
       colorspace.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **rl  **Set the red shadow spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.  Default value is 0.

       **bl  **Set the blue shadow spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.  Default value is 0.

       **rh  **Set the red highlight spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.  Default value is 0.

       **bh  **Set the blue highlight spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.  Default value is 0.

### saturation
           Set the amount of saturation. Allowed range is from -3.0 to 3.0.  Default value is 1.

### analyze
           If set to anything other than "manual" it  will  analyze  every  frame  and  use  derived
           parameters for filtering output frame.

           Possible values are:

           **manual**
           **average**
           **minmax**
           **median**

           Default value is "manual".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### colorchannelmixer
       Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.

       This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to the other channels of
       the same pixels. For example if the value to modify is red, the output value will be:

               <red>=<red>*<rr> + <blue>*<rb> + <green>*<rg> + <alpha>*<ra>

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **rr**
       **rg**
       **rb**
       **ra  **Adjust  contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
           Default is 1 for _rr_, and 0 for _rg_, _rb_ and _ra_.

       **gr**
       **gg**
       **gb**
       **ga  **Adjust contribution of input red,  green,  blue  and  alpha  channels  for  output  green
           channel.  Default is 1 for _gg_, and 0 for _gr_, _gb_ and _ga_.

       **br**
       **bg**
       **bb**
       **ba  **Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
           Default is 1 for _bb_, and 0 for _br_, _bg_ and _ba_.

       **ar**
       **ag**
       **ab**
       **aa  **Adjust  contribution  of  input  red,  green,  blue  and  alpha channels for output alpha
           channel.  Default is 1 for _aa_, and 0 for _ar_, _ag_ and _ab_.

           Allowed ranges for options are "[-2.0, 2.0]".

       **pc  **Set preserve color mode. The accepted values are:

           **none**
               Disable color preserving, this is default.

           **lum **Preserve luminance.

           **max **Preserve max value of RGB triplet.

           **avg **Preserve average value of RGB triplet.

           **sum **Preserve sum value of RGB triplet.

           **nrm **Preserve normalized value of RGB triplet.

           **pwr **Preserve power value of RGB triplet.

       **pa  **Set the preserve color amount when changing colors. Allowed range is from  "[0.0,  1.0]".
           Default is 0.0, thus disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Convert source to grayscale:

                   colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3

       •   Simulate sepia tones:

                   colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### colorize
       Overlay a solid color on the video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **hue **Set the color hue. Allowed range is from 0 to 360.  Default value is 0.

### saturation
           Set the color saturation. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 0.5.

### lightness
           Set the color lightness. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 0.5.

       **mix **Set  the mix of source lightness. By default is set to 1.0.  Allowed range is from 0.0 to
           1.0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### colorkey
       RGB colorspace color keying.  This filter operates on 8-bit RGB format frames by setting  the
       alpha component of each pixel which falls within the similarity radius of the key color to 0.
       The  alpha  value  for pixels outside the similarity radius depends on the value of the blend
       option.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### color
           Set the color for which alpha will be set to 0 (full transparency).  See **"Color"  section**
           **in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default is "black".

### similarity
           Set  the radius from the key color within which other colors also have full transparency.
           The computed distance is related to the unit fractional distance in 3D space between  the
           RGB  values  of  the  key color and the pixel's color. Range is 0.01 to 1.0. 0.01 matches
           within a very small radius around the exact key  color,  while  1.0  matches  everything.
           Default is 0.01.

### blend
           Set  how  the alpha value for pixels that fall outside the similarity radius is computed.
           0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent or fully opaque.  Higher values result in semi-
           transparent pixels, with greater transparency the more similar the pixel color is to  the
           key color.  Range is 0.0 to 1.0. Default is 0.0.

       _Examples_

       •   Make every green pixel in the input image transparent:

                   ffmpeg -i input.png -vf colorkey=green out.png

       •   Overlay a greenscreen-video on top of a static background image.

                   ffmpeg -i background.png -i video.mp4 -filter_complex "[1:v]colorkey=0x3BBD1E:0.3:0.2[ckout];[0:v][ckout]overlay[out]" -map "[out]" output.flv

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### colorhold
       Remove all color information for all RGB colors except for certain one.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### color
           The color which will not be replaced with neutral gray.

### similarity
           Similarity percentage with the above color.  0.01 matches only the exact key color, while
           1.0 matches everything.

### blend
           Blend percentage. 0.0 makes pixels fully gray.  Higher values result  in  more  preserved
           color.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### colorlevels
       Adjust video input frames using levels.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### rimin
### gimin
### bimin
### aimin
           Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.   Allowed  ranges  for  options  are
           "[-1.0, 1.0]". Defaults are 0.

### rimax
### gimax
### bimax
### aimax
           Adjust  red,  green,  blue  and  alpha input white point.  Allowed ranges for options are
           "[-1.0, 1.0]". Defaults are 1.

           Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows (dark  tones),
           change the balance of bright and dark tones.

### romin
### gomin
### bomin
### aomin
           Adjust  red,  green,  blue  and alpha output black point.  Allowed ranges for options are
           "[0, 1.0]". Defaults are 0.

### romax
### gomax
### bomax
### aomax
           Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.  Allowed  ranges  for  options  are
           "[0, 1.0]". Defaults are 1.

           Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.

### preserve
           Set preserve color mode. The accepted values are:

           **none**
               Disable color preserving, this is default.

           **lum **Preserve luminance.

           **max **Preserve max value of RGB triplet.

           **avg **Preserve average value of RGB triplet.

           **sum **Preserve sum value of RGB triplet.

           **nrm **Preserve normalized value of RGB triplet.

           **pwr **Preserve power value of RGB triplet.

       _Examples_

       •   Make video output darker:

                   colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058

       •   Increase contrast:

                   colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96

       •   Make video output lighter:

                   colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902

       •   Increase brightness:

                   colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### colormap
       Apply custom color maps to video stream.

       This  filter  needs three input video streams.  First stream is video stream that is going to
       be filtered out.  Second and third video stream specify color patches  for  source  color  to
       target color mapping.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### patch_size
           Set the source and target video stream patch size in pixels.

### nb_patches
           Set the max number of used patches from source and target video stream.  Default value is
           number  of  patches available in additional video streams.  Max allowed number of patches
           is 64.

### type
           Set the adjustments used for target colors. Can be "relative" or "absolute".  Defaults is
           "absolute".

### kernel
           Set the kernel used to measure color differences between mapped colors.

           The accepted values are:

           **euclidean**
           **weuclidean**

           Default is "euclidean".

### colormatrix
       Convert color matrix.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### src
       **dst **Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be specified.

           The accepted values are:

           **bt709**
               BT.709

           **fcc **FCC

           **bt601**
               BT.601

           **bt470**
               BT.470

           **bt470bg**
               BT.470BG

           **smpte170m**
               SMPTE-170M

           **smpte240m**
               SMPTE-240M

           **bt2020**
               BT.2020

       For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:

               colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m

### colorspace
       Convert colorspace, transfer characteristics or color primaries.  Input video needs  to  have
       an even size.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **all **Specify all color properties at once.

           The accepted values are:

           **bt470m**
               BT.470M

           **bt470bg**
               BT.470BG

           **bt601-6-525**
               BT.601-6 525

           **bt601-6-625**
               BT.601-6 625

           **bt709**
               BT.709

           **smpte170m**
               SMPTE-170M

           **smpte240m**
               SMPTE-240M

           **bt2020**
               BT.2020

### space
           Specify output colorspace.

           The accepted values are:

           **bt709**
               BT.709

           **fcc **FCC

           **bt470bg**
               BT.470BG or BT.601-6 625

           **smpte170m**
               SMPTE-170M or BT.601-6 525

           **smpte240m**
               SMPTE-240M

           **ycgco**
               YCgCo

           **bt2020ncl**
               BT.2020 with non-constant luminance

       **trc **Specify output transfer characteristics.

           The accepted values are:

           **bt709**
               BT.709

           **bt470m**
               BT.470M

           **bt470bg**
               BT.470BG

           **gamma22**
               Constant gamma of 2.2

           **gamma28**
               Constant gamma of 2.8

           **smpte170m**
               SMPTE-170M, BT.601-6 625 or BT.601-6 525

           **smpte240m**
               SMPTE-240M

           **srgb**
               SRGB

           **iec61966-2-1**
               iec61966-2-1

           **iec61966-2-4**
               iec61966-2-4

           **xvycc**
               xvycc

           **bt2020-10**
               BT.2020 for 10-bits content

           **bt2020-12**
               BT.2020 for 12-bits content

### primaries
           Specify output color primaries.

           The accepted values are:

           **bt709**
               BT.709

           **bt470m**
               BT.470M

           **bt470bg**
               BT.470BG or BT.601-6 625

           **smpte170m**
               SMPTE-170M or BT.601-6 525

           **smpte240m**
               SMPTE-240M

           **film**
               film

           **smpte431**
               SMPTE-431

           **smpte432**
               SMPTE-432

           **bt2020**
               BT.2020

           **jedec-p22**
               JEDEC P22 phosphors

### range
           Specify output color range.

           The accepted values are:

           **tv  **TV (restricted) range

           **mpeg**
               MPEG (restricted) range

           **pc  **PC (full) range

           **jpeg**
               JPEG (full) range

### format
           Specify output color format.

           The accepted values are:

           **yuv420p**
               YUV 4:2:0 planar 8-bits

           **yuv420p10**
               YUV 4:2:0 planar 10-bits

           **yuv420p12**
               YUV 4:2:0 planar 12-bits

           **yuv422p**
               YUV 4:2:2 planar 8-bits

           **yuv422p10**
               YUV 4:2:2 planar 10-bits

           **yuv422p12**
               YUV 4:2:2 planar 12-bits

           **yuv444p**
               YUV 4:4:4 planar 8-bits

           **yuv444p10**
               YUV 4:4:4 planar 10-bits

           **yuv444p12**
               YUV 4:4:4 planar 12-bits

### fast
           Do  a fast conversion, which skips gamma/primary correction. This will take significantly
           less CPU, but will be mathematically  incorrect.  To  get  output  compatible  with  that
           produced by the colormatrix filter, use fast=1.

### dither
           Specify dithering mode.

           The accepted values are:

           **none**
               No dithering

           **fsb **Floyd-Steinberg dithering

### wpadapt
           Whitepoint adaptation mode.

           The accepted values are:

           **bradford**
               Bradford whitepoint adaptation

           **vonkries**
               von Kries whitepoint adaptation

           **identity**
               identity whitepoint adaptation (i.e. no whitepoint adaptation)

### iall
           Override all input properties at once. Same accepted values as **all**.

### ispace
           Override input colorspace. Same accepted values as **space**.

### iprimaries
           Override input color primaries. Same accepted values as **primaries**.

### itrc
           Override input transfer characteristics. Same accepted values as **trc**.

### irange
           Override input color range. Same accepted values as **range**.

       The  filter  converts  the  transfer  characteristics, color space and color primaries to the
       specified user values. The output value, if not specified, is set to a default value based on
       the "all" property. If that property is also not specified, the filter will log an error. The
       output color range and format default to the same value as the input color range and  format.
       The  input  transfer  characteristics, color space, color primaries and color range should be
       set on the input data. If any of these are missing, the filter  will  log  an  error  and  no
       conversion will take place.

       For example to convert the input to SMPTE-240M, use the command:

               colorspace=smpte240m

### colorspace_cuda
       CUDA accelerated implementation of the colorspace filter.

       It  is  by  no  means feature complete compared to the software colorspace filter, and at the
       current time only supports color range conversion between jpeg/full and mpeg/limited range.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### range
           Specify output color range.

           The accepted values are:

           **tv  **TV (restricted) range

           **mpeg**
               MPEG (restricted) range

           **pc  **PC (full) range

           **jpeg**
               JPEG (full) range

### colortemperature
       Adjust color temperature in video to simulate variations in ambient color temperature.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### temperature
           Set the temperature in Kelvin. Allowed range is from 1000 to  40000.   Default  value  is
           6500 K.

       **mix **Set mixing with filtered output. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 1.

       **pl  **Set  the  amount of preserving lightness. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is
           0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### convolution
       Apply convolution of 3x3, 5x5, 7x7 or horizontal/vertical up to 49 elements.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **0m**
       **1m**
       **2m**
       **3m  **Set matrix for each plane.  Matrix is sequence of 9, 25 or 49 signed integers  in  _square_
           mode, and from 1 to 49 odd number of signed integers in _row_ mode.

### 0rdiv
### 1rdiv
### 2rdiv
### 3rdiv
           Set multiplier for calculated value for each plane.  If unset or 0, it will be sum of all
           matrix elements.

### 0bias
### 1bias
### 2bias
### 3bias
           Set bias for each plane. This value is added to the result of the multiplication.  Useful
           for making the overall image brighter or darker. Default is 0.0.

### 0mode
### 1mode
### 2mode
### 3mode
           Set matrix mode for each plane. Can be _square_, _row_ or _column_.  Default is _square_.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply sharpen:

                   convolution="0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0"

       •   Apply blur:

                   convolution="1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1/9:1/9:1/9:1/9"

       •   Apply edge enhance:

                   convolution="0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:5:1:1:1:0:128:128:128"

       •   Apply edge detect:

                   convolution="0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:128"

       •   Apply laplacian edge detector which includes diagonals:

                   convolution="1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:0"

       •   Apply emboss:

                   convolution="-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2"

### convolve
       Apply 2D convolution of video stream in frequency domain using second stream as impulse.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set which planes to process.

### impulse
           Set which impulse video frames will be processed, can be _first_ or _all_. Default is _all_.

       The "convolve" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

### copy
       Copy  the  input  video  source  unchanged  to  the output. This is mainly useful for testing
       purposes.

### coreimage
       Video filtering on GPU using Apple's CoreImage API on OSX.

       Hardware acceleration is based on an OpenGL context. Usually, this means it is  processed  by
       video  hardware. However, software-based OpenGL implementations exist which means there is no
       guarantee for hardware processing. It depends on the respective OSX.

       There are many filters and image generators provided by Apple that come with a large  variety
       of options. The filter has to be referenced by its name along with its options.

       The coreimage filter accepts the following options:

### list_filters
           List all available filters and generators along with all their respective options as well
           as possible minimum and maximum values along with the default values.

                   list_filters=true

### filter
           Specify  all filters by their respective name and options.  Use _list_filters_ to determine
           all valid filter names and options.  Numerical options are specified by a float value and
           are automatically clamped to their respective value range.  Vector and color options have
           to be specified by a list of space separated float values. Character escaping has  to  be
           done.  A special option name "default" is available to use default options for a filter.

           It  is  required  to specify either "default" or at least one of the filter options.  All
           omitted options are used with their default values.  The syntax of the filter  string  is
           as follows:

                   filter=<NAME>@<OPTION>=<VALUE>[@<OPTION>=<VALUE>][@...][#<NAME>@<OPTION>=<VALUE>[@<OPTION>=<VALUE>][@...]][#...]

### output_rect
           Specify  a rectangle where the output of the filter chain is copied into the input image.
           It is given by a list of space separated float values:

                   output_rect=x\ y\ width\ height

           If not given, the output rectangle equals the dimensions of the input image.  The  output
           rectangle is automatically cropped at the borders of the input image. Negative values are
           valid for each component.

                   output_rect=25\ 25\ 100\ 100

       Several  filters can be chained for successive processing without GPU-HOST transfers allowing
       for fast processing of complex filter chains.  Currently, only filters with zero (generators)
       or exactly one (filters) input image and one output image  are  supported.  Also,  transition
       filters are not yet usable as intended.

       Some  filters  generate  output  images  with  additional padding depending on the respective
       filter kernel. The padding is automatically removed to ensure the filter output has the  same
       size as the input image.

       For image generators, the size of the output image is determined by the previous output image
       of the filter chain or the input image of the whole filterchain, respectively. The generators
       do  not  use  the  pixel  information  of  this  image to generate their output. However, the
       generated output is blended onto this image, resulting in partial or complete coverage of the
       output image.

       The **coreimagesrc **video source can be used for generating input images which are directly  fed
       into  the  filter  chain.  By  using it, providing input images by another video source or an
       input video is not required.

       _Examples_

       •   List all filters available:

                   coreimage=list_filters=true

       •   Use the CIBoxBlur filter with default options to blur an image:

                   coreimage=filter=CIBoxBlur@default

       •   Use a filter chain with CISepiaTone at  default  values  and  CIVignetteEffect  with  its
           center at 100x100 and a radius of 50 pixels:

                   coreimage=filter=CIBoxBlur@default#CIVignetteEffect@inputCenter=100\ 100@inputRadius=50

       •   Use  nullsrc  and CIQRCodeGenerator to create a QR code for the FFmpeg homepage, given as
           complete and escaped command-line for Apple's standard bash shell:

                   ffmpeg -f lavfi -i nullsrc=s=100x100,coreimage=filter=CIQRCodeGenerator@inputMessage=https\\\\\://FFmpeg.org/@inputCorrectionLevel=H -frames:v 1 QRCode.png

### corr
       Obtain the correlation between two input videos.

       This filter takes two input videos.

       Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format  for  this  filter  to  work
       correctly.  Also  it  assumes  that  both  inputs  have  the same number of frames, which are
       compared one by one.

       The obtained per component, average, min and max correlation is printed through  the  logging
       system.

       The filter stores the calculated correlation of each frame in frame metadata.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       In  the  below example the input file _main.mpg_ being processed is compared with the reference
       file _ref.mpg_.

               ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi corr -f null -

### cover_rect
       Cover a rectangular object

       It accepts the following options:

### cover
           Filepath of the optional cover image, needs to be in yuv420.

### mode
           Set covering mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **cover**
               cover it by the supplied image

           **blur**
               cover it by interpolating the surrounding pixels

           Default value is _blur_.

       _Examples_

       •   Cover a rectangular object by the supplied image of a given video using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i file.ts -vf find_rect=newref.pgm,cover_rect=cover.jpg:mode=cover new.mkv

### crop
       Crop the input video to given dimensions.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### w, out_w
           The width of the output video. It defaults to "iw".  This expression  is  evaluated  only
           once during the filter configuration, or when the **w **or **out_w **command is sent.

### h, out_h
           The  height  of the output video. It defaults to "ih".  This expression is evaluated only
           once during the filter configuration, or when the **h **or **out_h **command is sent.

       **x   **The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of  the  output  video.  It
           defaults to "(in_w-out_w)/2".  This expression is evaluated per-frame.

       **y   **The  vertical  position,  in  the  input  video, of the top edge of the output video.  It
           defaults to "(in_h-out_h)/2".  This expression is evaluated per-frame.

### keep_aspect
           If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio to be the same of  the  input,  by
           changing the output sample aspect ratio. It defaults to 0.

### exact
           Enable   exact  cropping.  If  enabled,  subsampled  videos  will  be  cropped  at  exact
           width/height/x/y as specified and will not be  rounded  to  nearest  smaller  value.   It
           defaults to 0.

       The _out_w_, _out_h_, _x_, _y_ parameters are expressions containing the following constants:

       **x**
       **y   **The computed values for _x_ and _y_. They are evaluated for each new frame.

### in_w
### in_h
           The input width and height.

       **iw**
       **ih  **These are the same as _in_w_ and _in_h_.

### out_w
### out_h
           The output (cropped) width and height.

       **ow**
       **oh  **These are the same as _out_w_ and _out_h_.

       **a   **same as _iw_ / _ih_

       **sar **input sample aspect ratio

       **dar **input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_iw_ / _ih_) * _sar_

### hsub
### vsub
           horizontal  and  vertical  chroma  subsample  values.  For  example  for the pixel format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       **n   **The number of the input frame, starting from 0.

       **pos **the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated, do not use

       **t   **The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.

       The expression for _out_w_ may depend on the value of _out_h_, and the expression for  _out_h_  may
       depend  on _out_w_, but they cannot depend on _x_ and _y_, as _x_ and _y_ are evaluated after _out_w_ and
       _out_h_.

       The _x_ and _y_ parameters specify the expressions for the position of the top-left corner of the
       output (non-cropped) area. They are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value  is  not
       valid, it is approximated to the nearest valid value.

       The expression for _x_ may depend on _y_, and the expression for _y_ may depend on _x_.

       _Examples_

       •   Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).

                   crop=100:100:12:34

           Using named options, the example above becomes:

                   crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34

       •   Crop the central input area with size 100x100:

                   crop=100:100

       •   Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:

                   crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h

       •   Crop the input video central square:

                   crop=out_w=in_h
                   crop=in_h

       •   Delimit  the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position 100:100 and the right-
           bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom corner of the input image.

                   crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100

       •   Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from  the  top  and  bottom
           borders

                   crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20

       •   Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:

                   crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2

       •   Crop height for getting Greek harmony:

                   crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w

       •   Apply trembling effect:

                   crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)

       •   Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:

                   crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)

       •   Set x depending on the value of y:

                   crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### w, out_w
### h, out_h
       **x**
       **y   **Set  width/height  of  the output video and the horizontal/vertical position in the input
           video.  The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### cropdetect
       Auto-detect the crop size.

       It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the recommended parameters via the
       logging system. The detected dimensions correspond to the non-black  or  video  area  of  the
       input video according to _mode_.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           Depending  on  _mode_ crop detection is based on either the mere black value of surrounding
           pixels or a combination of motion vectors and edge pixels.

           **black**
               Detect black pixels surrounding the playing video. For fine control use option _limit_.

           **mvedges**
               Detect the playing video by the motion vectors inside the video and scanning for edge
               pixels typically forming the border of a playing video.

### limit
           Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified from nothing  (0)  to
           everything  (255 for 8-bit based formats). An intensity value greater to the set value is
           considered non-black. It defaults to 24.  You can also specify a value  between  0.0  and
           1.0 which will be scaled depending on the bitdepth of the pixel format.

### round
           The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to 16. The offset is
           automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to get only even dimensions (needed for
           4:2:2 video). 16 is best when encoding to most video codecs.

### skip
           Set the number of initial frames for which evaluation is skipped.  Default is 2. Range is
           0 to INT_MAX.

### reset_count, reset
           Set  the  counter  that  determines  after  how  many  frames  cropdetect  will reset the
           previously detected largest video area and start over to detect the current optimal  crop
           area. Default value is 0.

           This  can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0 indicates 'never reset',
           and returns the largest area encountered during playback.

### mv_threshold
           Set motion in pixel units as threshold for motion detection. It defaults to 8.

### low
### high
           Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding algorithm.

           The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which  are  then  connected  through
           8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected by the low threshold.

           _low_ and _high_ threshold values must be chosen in the range [0,1], and _low_ should be lesser
           or equal to _high_.

           Default value for _low_ is "5/255", and default value for _high_ is "15/255".

       _Examples_

       •   Find video area surrounded by black borders:

                   ffmpeg -i file.mp4 -vf cropdetect,metadata=mode=print -f null -

       •   Find an embedded video area, generate motion vectors beforehand:

                   ffmpeg -i file.mp4 -vf mestimate,cropdetect=mode=mvedges,metadata=mode=print -f null -

       •   Find an embedded video area, use motion vectors from decoder:

                   ffmpeg -flags2 +export_mvs -i file.mp4 -vf cropdetect=mode=mvedges,metadata=mode=print -f null -

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### limit
           The  command  accepts  the  same  syntax  of  the corresponding option.  If the specified
           expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### cue
       Delay video filtering until a given wallclock timestamp. The filter first passes  on  **preroll**
       amount  of  frames,  then  it  buffers at most **buffer **amount of frames and waits for the cue.
       After reaching the cue it forwards the buffered frames and also any subsequent frames  coming
       in its input.

       The  filter  can  be  used  synchronize  the output of multiple ffmpeg processes for realtime
       output devices like decklink. By putting the delay in the filtering chain  and  pre-buffering
       frames  the  process can pass on data to output almost immediately after the target wallclock
       timestamp is reached.

       Perfect frame accuracy cannot be guaranteed, but the result  is  good  enough  for  some  use
       cases.

       **cue **The cue timestamp expressed in a UNIX timestamp in microseconds. Default is 0.

### preroll
           The duration of content to pass on as preroll expressed in seconds. Default is 0.

### buffer
           The  maximum  duration  of  content  to  buffer  before  waiting for the cue expressed in
           seconds. Default is 0.

### curves
       Apply color adjustments using curves.

       This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves  tools.  Each  component  (red,
       green  and  blue)  has its values defined by _N_ key points tied from each other using a smooth
       curve. The x-axis represents the pixel values from the input frame, and the  y-axis  the  new
       pixel values to be set for the output frame.

       By  default,  a  component curve is defined by the two points _(0;0)_ and _(1;1)_. This creates a
       straight line where each original pixel value is "adjusted" to its own value, which means  no
       change to the image.

       The  filter  allows  you  to redefine these two points and add some more. A new curve will be
       define to pass smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
       strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their _x_ and _y_ values must be in the _[0;1]_  interval.
       The  curve is formed by using a natural or monotonic cubic spline interpolation, depending on
       the _interp_ option (default: "natural"). The "natural" spline produces  a  smoother  curve  in
       general while the monotonic ("pchip") spline guarantees the transitions between the specified
       points  to be monotonic. If the computed curves happened to go outside the vector spaces, the
       values will be clipped accordingly.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### preset
           Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition to the  **r**,
           **g**,  **b  **parameters;  in  this case, the later options takes priority on the preset values.
           Available presets are:

           **none**
           **color_negative**
           **cross_process**
           **darker**
           **increase_contrast**
           **lighter**
           **linear_contrast**
           **medium_contrast**
           **negative**
           **strong_contrast**
           **vintage**

           Default is "none".

### master, m
           Set the master key points. These  points  will  define  a  second  pass  mapping.  It  is
           sometimes  called  a  "luminance"  or "value" mapping. It can be used with **r**, **g**, **b **or **all**
           since it acts like a post-processing LUT.

### red, r
           Set the key points for the red component.

### green, g
           Set the key points for the green component.

### blue, b
           Set the key points for the blue component.

       **all **Set the key points for all components (not including master).  Can be used in addition to
           the other key points component  options.  In  this  case,  the  unset  component(s)  will
           fallback on this **all **setting.

### psfile
           Specify a Photoshop curves file (".acv") to import the settings from.

### plot
           Save Gnuplot script of the curves in specified file.

### interp
           Specify the kind of interpolation. Available algorithms are:

           **natural**
               Natural  cubic  spline using a piece-wise cubic polynomial that is twice continuously
               differentiable.

           **pchip**
               Monotonic cubic spline using  a  piecewise  cubic  Hermite  interpolating  polynomial
               (PCHIP).

       To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be defined using the
       following syntax: "x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

       _Examples_

       •   Increase slightly the middle level of blue:

                   curves=blue='0/0 0.5/0.58 1/1'

       •   Vintage effect:

                   curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0/0 0.50/0.48 1/1':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'

           Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:

           _red_ "(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)"

           _green_
               "(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)"

           _blue_
               "(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)"

       •   The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:

                   curves=preset=vintage

       •   Or simply:

                   curves=vintage

       •   Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:

                   curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.acv':green='0/0 0.45/0.53 1/1'

       •   Check out the curves of the "cross_process" profile using **ffmpeg **and **gnuplot**:

                   ffmpeg -f lavfi -i color -vf curves=cross_process:plot=/tmp/curves.plt -frames:v 1 -f null -
                   gnuplot -p /tmp/curves.plt

### datascope
       Video data analysis filter.

       This filter shows hexadecimal pixel values of part of video.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Set output video size.

       **x   **Set x offset from where to pick pixels.

       **y   **Set y offset from where to pick pixels.

### mode
           Set scope mode, can be one of the following:

           **mono**
               Draw hexadecimal pixel values with white color on black background.

           **color**
               Draw hexadecimal pixel values with input video pixel color on black background.

           **color2**
               Draw  hexadecimal  pixel values on color background picked from input video, the text
               color is picked in such way so its always visible.

### axis
           Draw rows and columns numbers on left and top of video.

### opacity
           Set background opacity.

### format
           Set display number format. Can be "hex", or "dec". Default is "hex".

### components
           Set pixel components to display. By default all pixel components are displayed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options excluding "size" option.

### dblur
       Apply Directional blur filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### angle
           Set angle of directional blur. Default is 45.

### radius
           Set radius of directional blur. Default is 5.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### dctdnoiz
       Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).

       This filter is not designed for real time.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sigma, s
           Set the noise sigma constant.

           This  _sigma_  defines  a  hard  threshold  of "3 * sigma"; every DCT coefficient (absolute
           value) below this threshold with be dropped.

           If you need a more advanced filtering, see **expr**.

           Default is 0.

### overlap
           Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you may  want
           to  reduce  this  value,  at  the cost of a less effective filter and the risk of various
           artefacts.

           If the overlapping value doesn't permit processing the whole input  width  or  height,  a
           warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.

           Default value is _blocksize_-1, which is the best possible setting.

### expr, e
           Set the coefficient factor expression.

           For  each  coefficient  of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a multiplier
           value for the coefficient.

           If this is option is set, the **sigma **option will be ignored.

           The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the _c_ variable.

       **n   **Set the _blocksize_ using the number of bits. "1<<_n_" defines the _blocksize_,  which  is  the
           width and height of the processed blocks.

           The  default  value is _3_ (8x8) and can be raised to _4_ for a _blocksize_ of 16x16. Note that
           changing this setting has huge consequences on the speed processing. Also, a larger block
           size does not necessarily means a better de-noising.

       _Examples_

       Apply a denoise with a **sigma **of 4.5:

               dctdnoiz=4.5

       The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:

               dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'

       Violent denoise using a block size of "16x16":

               dctdnoiz=15:n=4

### deband
       Remove banding artifacts from input video.  It works by replacing banded pixels with  average
       value of referenced pixels.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### 1thr
### 2thr
### 3thr
### 4thr
           Set  banding detection threshold for each plane. Default is 0.02.  Valid range is 0.00003
           to 0.5.  If difference between current pixel and reference pixel is less than  threshold,
           it will be considered as banded.

### range, r
           Banding  detection  range in pixels. Default is 16. If positive, random number in range 0
           to set value will be used. If negative, exact absolute value will  be  used.   The  range
           defines square of four pixels around current pixel.

### direction, d
           Set  direction  in  radians  from  which four pixel will be compared. If positive, random
           direction from 0 to set direction will be picked. If negative, exact  of  absolute  value
           will  be  picked.  For example direction 0, -PI or -2*PI radians will pick only pixels on
           same row and -PI/2 will pick only pixels on same column.

### blur, b
           If enabled, current pixel is compared with average value of all four surrounding  pixels.
           The  default  is enabled. If disabled current pixel is compared with all four surrounding
           pixels. The pixel is considered banded if only  all  four  differences  with  surrounding
           pixels are less than threshold.

### coupling, c
           If enabled, current pixel is changed if and only if all pixel components are banded, e.g.
           banding  detection  threshold  is  triggered  for  all  color components.  The default is
           disabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### deblock
       Remove blocking artifacts from input video.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### filter
           Set filter type, can be _weak_ or _strong_. Default is _strong_.  This controls  what  kind  of
           deblocking is applied.

### block
           Set size of block, allowed range is from 4 to 512. Default is _8_.

### alpha
### beta
### gamma
### delta
           Set  blocking  detection  thresholds.  Allowed  range is 0 to 1.  Defaults are: _0.098_ for
           _alpha_ and _0.05_ for the rest.  Using higher  threshold  gives  more  deblocking  strength.
           Setting  _alpha_  controls  threshold  detection at exact edge of block.  Remaining options
           controls threshold detection near the edge.  Each  one  for  below/above  or  left/right.
           Setting any of those to _0_ disables deblocking.

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default is to filter all available planes.

       _Examples_

       •   Deblock using weak filter and block size of 4 pixels.

                   deblock=filter=weak:block=4

       •   Deblock  using strong filter, block size of 4 pixels and custom thresholds for deblocking
           more edges.

                   deblock=filter=strong:block=4:alpha=0.12:beta=0.07:gamma=0.06:delta=0.05

       •   Similar as above, but filter only first plane.

                   deblock=filter=strong:block=4:alpha=0.12:beta=0.07:gamma=0.06:delta=0.05:planes=1

       •   Similar as above, but filter only second and third plane.

                   deblock=filter=strong:block=4:alpha=0.12:beta=0.07:gamma=0.06:delta=0.05:planes=6

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### decimate
       Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### cycle
           Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting  this  to  _N_  means  one
           frame in every batch of _N_ frames will be dropped.  Default is 5.

### dupthresh
           Set  the  threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame is less
           than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default is 1.1

### scthresh
           Set scene change threshold. Default is 15.

### blockx
### blocky
           Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.   Larger  blocks
           give  better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of small movements. Must be
           a power of two. Default is 32.

### ppsrc
           Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean  source  input  stream.  This
           allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help the metrics calculation
           while  keeping  the  frame selection lossless. When set to 1, the first stream is for the
           pre-processed input, and the second stream is the clean source from where the kept frames
           are chosen. Default is 0.

### chroma
           Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is 1.

### mixed
           Set whether or not the input only partially contains content to be decimated.  Default is
           "false".  If enabled video output stream will be in variable frame rate.

### deconvolve
       Apply 2D deconvolution of video stream in frequency domain using second stream as impulse.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set which planes to process.

### impulse
           Set which impulse video frames will be processed, can be _first_ or _all_. Default is _all_.

### noise
           Set noise when doing divisions. Default is _0.0000001_. Useful when width  and  height  are
           not same and not power of 2 or if stream prior to convolving had noise.

       The "deconvolve" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

### dedot
       Reduce cross-luminance (dot-crawl) and cross-color (rainbows) from video.

       It accepts the following options:

       **m   **Set  mode  of  operation.  Can  be  combination of _dotcrawl_ for cross-luminance reduction
           and/or _rainbows_ for cross-color reduction.

       **lt  **Set spatial luma threshold. Lower values increases reduction of cross-luminance.

       **tl  **Set tolerance for temporal luma. Higher values increases reduction of cross-luminance.

       **tc  **Set tolerance for chroma temporal variation. Higher values increases reduction of  cross-
           color.

       **ct  **Set temporal chroma threshold. Lower values increases reduction of cross-color.

### deflate
       Apply deflate effect to the video.

       This  filter  replaces the pixel by the [local(3x3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/local/3x3/markdown) average by taking into account only values
       lower than the pixel.

       It accepts the following options:

### threshold0
### threshold1
### threshold2
### threshold3
           Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is  65535.   If  0,  plane  will  remain
           unchanged.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### deflicker
       Remove temporal frame luminance variations.

       It accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Set moving-average filter size in frames. Default is 5. Allowed range is 2 - 129.

### mode, m
           Set averaging mode to smooth temporal luminance variations.

           Available values are:

           **am  **Arithmetic mean

           **gm  **Geometric mean

           **hm  **Harmonic mean

           **qm  **Quadratic mean

           **cm  **Cubic mean

           **pm  **Power mean

           **median**
               Median

### bypass
           Do not actually modify frame. Useful when one only wants metadata.

### dejudder
       Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.

       Judder  can  be  introduced,  for  instance,  by  **pullup  **filter.  If the original source was
       partially telecined content then the output of "pullup,dejudder" will have a  variable  frame
       rate.  May  change  the  recorded  frame  rate of the container. Aside from that change, this
       filter will not affect constant frame rate video.

       The option available in this filter is:

### cycle
           Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.

           Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:

           **4   **If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).

           **5   **If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).

           **20  **If a mixture of the two.

           The default is **4**.

### delogo
       Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding pixels.  Just  set  a
       rectangle  covering  the  logo  and  watch  it disappear (and sometimes something even uglier
       appear - your mileage may vary).

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **x**
       **y   **Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be specified.

       **w**
       **h   **Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be specified.

### show
           When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify finding the right  _x_,
           _y_, _w_, and _h_ parameters.  The default value is 0.

           The  rectangle  is  drawn  on  the  outermost pixels which will be (partly) replaced with
           interpolated values. The values of the next pixels immediately outside this rectangle  in
           each  direction  will  be  used  to  compute  the  interpolated  pixel  values inside the
           rectangle.

       _Examples_

       •   Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0 and size 100x77:

                   delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77

### derain
       Remove  the  rain  in  the  input  image/video  by  applying  the  derain  methods  based  on
       convolutional neural networks. Supported models:

       •   Recurrent    Squeeze-and-Excitation    Context    Aggregation    Net    (RESCAN).     See
           <**<http://openaccess.thecvf.com/content_ECCV_2018/papers/Xia_Li_Recurrent_Squeeze-and-Excitation_Context_ECCV_2018_paper.pdf>**>.

       Training  as  well  as  model  generation  scripts  are  provided  in   the   repository   at
       <**<https://github.com/XueweiMeng/derain_filter.git>**>.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### filter_type
           Specify which filter to use. This option accepts the following values:

           **derain**
               Derain filter. To conduct derain filter, you need to use a derain model.

           **dehaze**
               Dehaze filter. To conduct dehaze filter, you need to use a dehaze model.

           Default value is **derain**.

### dnn_backend
           Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts the
           following values:

           **tensorflow**
               TensorFlow  backend.  To enable this backend you need to install the TensorFlow for C
               library (see <**<https://www.tensorflow.org/install/lang_c>**>) and configure  FFmpeg  with
               "--enable-libtensorflow"

### model
           Set  path  to  model  file specifying network architecture and its parameters.  Note that
           different backends use different file formats. TensorFlow can load  files  for  only  its
           format.

       To get full functionality (such as async execution), please use the **dnn_processing **filter.

### deshake
       Attempt  to  fix  small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This filter helps remove
       camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **x**
       **y**
       **w**
       **h   **Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion vectors.  If desired  the
           search  for  motion  vectors can be limited to a rectangular area of the frame defined by
           its top left corner, width and height. These parameters have  the  same  meaning  as  the
           drawbox filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding box.

           This  is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame might be confused
           for camera motion by the motion vector search.

           If any or all of _x_, _y_, _w_ and _h_ are set to -1 then the full frame  is  used.  This  allows
           later options to be set without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.

           Default - search the whole frame.

       **rx**
       **ry  **Specify  the  maximum  extent of movement in x and y directions in the range 0-64 pixels.
           Default 16.

### edge
           Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the frame. Available  values
           are:

           **blank, 0**
               Fill zeroes at blank locations

           **original, 1**
               Original image at blank locations

           **clamp, 2**
               Extruded edge value at blank locations

           **mirror, 3**
               Mirrored edge at blank locations

           Default value is **mirror**.

### blocksize
           Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels, default 8.

### contrast
           Specify  the  contrast  threshold  for  blocks.  Only blocks with more than the specified
           contrast (difference between darkest and  lightest  pixels)  will  be  considered.  Range
           1-255, default 125.

### search
           Specify the search strategy. Available values are:

           **exhaustive, 0**
               Set exhaustive search

           **less, 1**
               Set less exhaustive search.

           Default value is **exhaustive**.

### filename
           If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the specified file.

### despill
       Remove  unwanted contamination of foreground colors, caused by reflected color of greenscreen
       or bluescreen.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### type
           Set what type of despill to use.

       **mix **Set how spillmap will be generated.

### expand
           Set how much to get rid of still remaining spill.

       **red **Controls amount of red in spill area.

### green
           Controls amount of green in spill area.  Should be -1 for greenscreen.

### blue
           Controls amount of blue in spill area.  Should be -1 for bluescreen.

### brightness
           Controls brightness of spill area, preserving colors.

### alpha
           Modify alpha from generated spillmap.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### detelecine
       Apply an exact inverse of the telecine operation. It requires a predefined pattern  specified
       using the pattern option which must be the same as that passed to the telecine filter.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### first_field
           **top, t**
               top field first

           **bottom, b**
               bottom field first The default value is "top".

### pattern
           A  string  of  numbers  representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.  The default
           value is 23.

### start_frame
           A number representing position of the first frame with respect to the  telecine  pattern.
           This is to be used if the stream is cut. The default value is 0.

### dilation
       Apply dilation effect to the video.

       This filter replaces the pixel by the [local(3x3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/local/3x3/markdown) maximum.

       It accepts the following options:

### threshold0
### threshold1
### threshold2
### threshold3
           Limit  the  maximum  change  for  each  plane, default is 65535.  If 0, plane will remain
           unchanged.

### coordinates
           Flag which specifies the pixel to refer to. Default is 255  i.e.  all  eight  pixels  are
           used.

           Flags to local 3x3 coordinates maps like this:

               1 2 3
               4   5
               6 7 8

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### displace
       Displace pixels as indicated by second and third input stream.

       It  takes  three  input  streams  and  outputs one stream, the first input is the source, and
       second and third input are displacement maps.

       The second input specifies how much to displace pixels along  the  x-axis,  while  the  third
       input  specifies  how  much  to displace pixels along the y-axis.  If one of displacement map
       streams terminates, last frame from that displacement map will be used.

       Note that once generated, displacements maps can be reused over and over again.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### edge
           Set displace behavior for pixels that are out of range.

           Available values are:

           **blank**
               Missing pixels are replaced by black pixels.

           **smear**
               Adjacent pixels will spread out to replace missing pixels.

           **wrap**
               Out of range pixels are wrapped so they point to pixels of other side.

           **mirror**
               Out of range pixels will be replaced with mirrored pixels.

           Default is **smear**.

       _Examples_

       •   Add ripple effect to rgb input of video size hd720:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -f lavfi -i nullsrc=s=hd720,lutrgb=128:128:128 -f lavfi -i nullsrc=s=hd720,geq='r=128+30*sin(2*PI*X/400+T):g=128+30*sin(2*PI*X/400+T):b=128+30*sin(2*PI*X/400+T)' -lavfi '[0][1][2]displace' OUTPUT

       •   Add wave effect to rgb input of video size hd720:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -f lavfi -i nullsrc=hd720,geq='r=128+80*(sin(sqrt((X-W/2)*(X-W/2)+(Y-H/2)*(Y-H/2))/220*2*PI+T)):g=128+80*(sin(sqrt((X-W/2)*(X-W/2)+(Y-H/2)*(Y-H/2))/220*2*PI+T)):b=128+80*(sin(sqrt((X-W/2)*(X-W/2)+(Y-H/2)*(Y-H/2))/220*2*PI+T))' -lavfi '[1]split[x][y],[0][x][y]displace' OUTPUT

### dnn_classify
       Do classification with deep neural networks based on bounding boxes.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### dnn_backend
           Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and  execution.  This  option  accepts
           only openvino now, tensorflow backends will be added.

### model
           Set  path  to  model  file specifying network architecture and its parameters.  Note that
           different backends use different file formats.

### input
           Set the input name of the dnn network.

### output
           Set the output name of the dnn network.

### confidence
           Set the confidence threshold (default: 0.5).

### labels
           Set path to label file specifying the mapping between label id and name.  Each label name
           is written in one line, tailing spaces and empty lines are skipped.  The  first  line  is
           the name of label id 0, and the second line is the name of label id 1, etc.  The label id
           is considered as name if the label file is not provided.

### backend_configs
           Set the configs to be passed into backend

           For  tensorflow  backend,  you  can  set its configs with **sess_config **options, please use
           tools/python/tf_sess_config.py to get the configs for your system.

### dnn_detect
       Do object detection with deep neural networks.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### dnn_backend
           Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and  execution.  This  option  accepts
           only openvino now, tensorflow backends will be added.

### model
           Set  path  to  model  file specifying network architecture and its parameters.  Note that
           different backends use different file formats.

### input
           Set the input name of the dnn network.

### output
           Set the output name of the dnn network.

### confidence
           Set the confidence threshold (default: 0.5).

### labels
           Set path to label file specifying the mapping between label id and name.  Each label name
           is written in one line, tailing spaces and empty lines are skipped.  The  first  line  is
           the  name  of label id 0 (usually it is 'background'), and the second line is the name of
           label id 1, etc.  The label id is considered as name if the label file is not provided.

### backend_configs
           Set the configs to be passed into backend. To use async execution,  set  async  (default:
           set).  Roll back to sync execution if the backend does not support async.

### dnn_processing
       Do  image  processing  with deep neural networks. It works together with another filter which
       converts the pixel format of the Frame to what the dnn network requires.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### dnn_backend
           Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts the
           following values:

           **tensorflow**
               TensorFlow backend. To enable this backend you need to install the TensorFlow  for  C
               library  (see  <**<https://www.tensorflow.org/install/lang_c>**>) and configure FFmpeg with
               "--enable-libtensorflow"

           **openvino**
               OpenVINO backend. To enable this backend you need to build and install  the  OpenVINO
               for                        C                       library                       (see
               <**<https://github.com/openvinotoolkit/openvino/blob/master/build-instruction.md>**>)   and
               configure      FFmpeg      with      "--enable-libopenvino"     (--extra-cflags=-I...
               --extra-ldflags=-L... might be needed if the  header  files  and  libraries  are  not
               installed into system path)

### model
           Set  path  to  model  file specifying network architecture and its parameters.  Note that
           different backends use different file formats.  TensorFlow,  OpenVINO  backend  can  load
           files for only its format.

### input
           Set the input name of the dnn network.

### output
           Set the output name of the dnn network.

### backend_configs
           Set  the  configs  to be passed into backend. To use async execution, set async (default:
           set).  Roll back to sync execution if the backend does not support async.

           For tensorflow backend, you can set its configs  with  **sess_config  **options,  please  use
           tools/python/tf_sess_config.py to get the configs of TensorFlow backend for your system.

       _Examples_

       •   Remove rain in rgb24 frame with can.pb (see **derain **filter):

                   ./ffmpeg -i rain.jpg -vf format=rgb24,dnn_processing=dnn_backend=tensorflow:model=can.pb:input=x:output=y derain.jpg

       •   Handle  the  Y  channel  with srcnn.pb (see **sr **filter) for frame with yuv420p (planar YUV
           formats supported):

                   ./ffmpeg -i 480p.jpg -vf format=yuv420p,scale=w=iw*2:h=ih*2,dnn_processing=dnn_backend=tensorflow:model=srcnn.pb:input=x:output=y -y srcnn.jpg

       •   Handle the Y channel with espcn.pb (see **sr **filter), which changes frame size, for  format
           yuv420p  (planar YUV formats supported), please use tools/python/tf_sess_config.py to get
           the configs of TensorFlow backend for your system.

                   ./ffmpeg -i 480p.jpg -vf format=yuv420p,dnn_processing=dnn_backend=tensorflow:model=espcn.pb:input=x:output=y:backend_configs=sess_config=0x10022805320e09cdccccccccccec3f20012a01303801 -y tmp.espcn.jpg

### drawbox
       Draw a colored box on the input image.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **x**
       **y   **The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults  to
           0.

### width, w
### height, h
           The  expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted
           as the input width and height. It defaults to 0.

### color, c
           Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,  check  the
           **"Color"  section  in  the ffmpeg-utils manual**. If the special value "invert" is used, the
           box edge color is the same as the video with inverted luma.

### thickness, t
           The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge.  A value of "fill" will create a
           filled box. Default value is 3.

           See below for the list of accepted constants.

### replace
           Applicable if the input has alpha. With value 1, the  pixels  of  the  painted  box  will
           overwrite  the  video's  color  and alpha pixels.  Default is 0, which composites the box
           onto the input, leaving the video's alpha intact.

       The parameters for _x_, _y_, _w_ and _h_ and _t_ are expressions containing the following constants:

       **dar **The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_w_ / _h_) * _sar_.

### hsub
### vsub
           horizontal and vertical chroma  subsample  values.  For  example  for  the  pixel  format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

### in_h, ih
### in_w, iw
           The input width and height.

       **sar **The input sample aspect ratio.

       **x**
       **y   **The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.

       **w**
       **h   **The width and height of the drawn box.

### box_source
           Box  source  can  be  set  as  side_data_detection_bboxes  if you want to use box data in
           detection bboxes of side data.

           If _box_source_ is set, the _x_, _y_, _width_ and _height_ will be ignored and still use  box  data
           in  detection  bboxes  of  side data. So please do not use this parameter if you were not
           sure about the box source.

       **t   **The thickness of the drawn box.

           These constants allow the _x_, _y_, _w_, _h_ and _t_ expressions to refer to each other, so you may
           for example specify "y=x/dar" or "h=w/dar".

       _Examples_

       •   Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:

                   drawbox

       •   Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:

                   drawbox=10:20:200:60:<red@0.5>

           The previous example can be specified as:

                   drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=<red@0.5>

       •   Fill the box with pink color:

                   drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=<pink@0.5>:t=fill

       •   Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:

                   drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same commands as options.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### drawgraph
       Draw a graph using input video metadata.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **m1  **Set 1st frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.

       **fg1 **Set 1st foreground color expression.

       **m2  **Set 2nd frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.

       **fg2 **Set 2nd foreground color expression.

       **m3  **Set 3rd frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.

       **fg3 **Set 3rd foreground color expression.

       **m4  **Set 4th frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.

       **fg4 **Set 4th foreground color expression.

       **min **Set minimal value of metadata value.

       **max **Set maximal value of metadata value.

       **bg  **Set graph background color. Default is white.

### mode
           Set graph mode.

           Available values for mode is:

           **bar**
           **dot**
           **line**

           Default is "line".

### slide
           Set slide mode.

           Available values for slide is:

           **frame**
               Draw new frame when right border is reached.

           **replace**
               Replace old columns with new ones.

           **scroll**
               Scroll from right to left.

           **rscroll**
               Scroll from left to right.

           **picture**
               Draw single picture.

           Default is "frame".

### size
           Set size of graph video. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in**
           **the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  The default value is "900x256".

### rate, r
           Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.

           The foreground color expressions can use the following variables:

           **MIN **Minimal value of metadata value.

           **MAX **Maximal value of metadata value.

           **VAL **Current metadata key value.

           The color is defined as 0xAABBGGRR.

       Example using metadata from **signalstats **filter:

               signalstats,drawgraph=lavfi.signalstats.YAVG:min=0:max=255

       Example using metadata from **ebur128 **filter:

               ebur128=metadata=1,adrawgraph=lavfi.r128.M:min=-120:max=5

### drawgrid
       Draw a grid on the input image.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **x**
       **y   **The  expressions  which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant
           to configure offset). Both default to 0.

### width, w
### height, h
           The expressions which specify the width and height of  the  grid  cell,  if  0  they  are
           interpreted as the input width and height, respectively, minus "thickness", so image gets
           framed. Default to 0.

### color, c
           Specify  the  color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option, check the **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**. If the special value "invert" is used, the grid color
           is the same as the video with inverted luma.

### thickness, t
           The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is 1.

           See below for the list of accepted constants.

### replace
           Applicable if the input has alpha. With 1 the pixels of the painted grid  will  overwrite
           the  video's  color  and  alpha pixels.  Default is 0, which composites the grid onto the
           input, leaving the video's alpha intact.

       The parameters for _x_, _y_, _w_ and _h_ and _t_ are expressions containing the following constants:

       **dar **The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_w_ / _h_) * _sar_.

### hsub
### vsub
           horizontal and vertical chroma  subsample  values.  For  example  for  the  pixel  format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

### in_h, ih
### in_w, iw
           The input grid cell width and height.

       **sar **The input sample aspect ratio.

       **x**
       **y   **The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).

       **w**
       **h   **The width and height of the drawn cell.

       **t   **The thickness of the drawn cell.

           These constants allow the _x_, _y_, _w_, _h_ and _t_ expressions to refer to each other, so you may
           for example specify "y=x/dar" or "h=w/dar".

       _Examples_

       •   Draw  a  grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity
           of 50%:

                   drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=<red@0.5>

       •   Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:

                   drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=<white@0.5>

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same commands as options.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### drawtext
       Draw  a  text  string  or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the libfreetype
       library.

       To   enable   compilation   of   this   filter,   you   need   to   configure   FFmpeg   with
       "--enable-libfreetype"  and  "--enable-libharfbuzz".  To enable default font fallback and the
       _font_ option you need to  configure  FFmpeg  with  "--enable-libfontconfig".   To  enable  the
       _text_shaping_ option, you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libfribidi".

       _Syntax_

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **box **Used  to  draw  a box around text using the background color.  The value must be either 1
           (enable) or 0 (disable).  The default value of _box_ is 0.

### boxborderw
           Set the width of the border to be drawn around the box using _boxcolor_.  The value must be
           specified using one of the following formats:

           *<"boxborderw=10" set the width of all the borders to 10>
           *<"boxborderw=10|20" set the width of the top and bottom borders to 10>
                   and the width of the left and right borders to 20

           *<"boxborderw=10|20|30" set the width of the top border to 10, the width>
                   of the bottom border to 30 and the width of the left and right borders to 20

           *<"boxborderw=10|20|30|40" set the borders width to 10 (top), 20 (right),>
                   30 (bottom), 40 (left)

           The default value of _boxborderw_ is "0".

### boxcolor
           The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of  this  option,  check
           the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           The default value of _boxcolor_ is "white".

### line_spacing
           Set the line spacing in pixels. The default value of _line_spacing_ is 0.

### text_align
           Set the vertical and horizontal alignment of the text with respect to the box boundaries.
           The  value  is  combination  of  flags,  one for the vertical alignment (T=top, M=middle,
           B=bottom) and one for the horizontal alignment (L=left, C=center, R=right).  Please  note
           that tab characters are only supported with the left horizontal alignment.

### y_align
           Specify what the _y_ value is referred to. Possible values are:

           *<"text" the top of the highest glyph of the first text line is placed at _y_>
           *<"baseline" the baseline of the first text line is placed at _y_>
           *<"font" the baseline of the first text line is placed at _y_ plus the>
                   ascent (in pixels) defined in the font metrics

           The default value of _y_align_ is "text" for backward compatibility.

### borderw
           Set  the  width of the border to be drawn around the text using _bordercolor_.  The default
           value of _borderw_ is 0.

### bordercolor
           Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of  this  option,
           check the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           The default value of _bordercolor_ is "black".

### expansion
           Select  how  the  _text_  is  expanded.  Can  be  either "none", "strftime" (deprecated) or
           "normal" (default). See the **drawtext_expansion, Text expansion **section below for details.

### basetime
           Set a start time for the count. Value is in microseconds. Only applied in the  deprecated
           "strftime"  expansion  mode.  To emulate in normal expansion mode use the "pts" function,
           supplying the start time (in seconds) as the second argument.

### fix_bounds
           If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.

### fontcolor
           The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check the  **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           The default value of _fontcolor_ is "black".

### fontcolor_expr
           String  which  is  expanded  the  same  way as _text_ to obtain dynamic _fontcolor_ value. By
           default this option has empty value and is not processed. When this  option  is  set,  it
           overrides _fontcolor_ option.

### font
           The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.

### fontfile
           The  font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.  This parameter is
           mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.

### alpha
           Draw the text applying alpha blending. The value can be a number  between  0.0  and  1.0.
           The  expression accepts the same variables _x,_ _y_ as well.  The default value is 1.  Please
           see _fontcolor_expr_.

### fontsize
           The font size to be used for drawing text.  The default value of _fontsize_ is 16.

### text_shaping
           If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order  of  right-to-left
           text  and  join  Arabic  characters)  before  drawing  it.  Otherwise, just draw the text
           exactly as given.  By default 1 (if supported).

### ft_load_flags
           The flags to be used for loading the fonts.

           The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are a combination  of
           the following values:

           _default_
           _no_scale_
           _no_hinting_
           _render_
           _no_bitmap_
           _vertical_layout_
           _force_autohint_
           _crop_bitmap_
           _pedantic_
           _ignore_global_advance_width_
           _no_recurse_
           _ignore_transform_
           _monochrome_
           _linear_design_
           _no_autohint_

           Default value is "default".

           For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_* libfreetype flags.

### shadowcolor
           The  color  to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the syntax of this
           option, check the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           The default value of _shadowcolor_ is "black".

### boxw
           Set the width of the box to be drawn around text.  The default value of _boxw_ is  computed
           automatically to match the text width

### boxh
           Set the height of the box to be drawn around text.  The default value of _boxh_ is computed
           automatically to match the text height

### shadowx
### shadowy
           The  x  and  y  offsets  for the text shadow position with respect to the position of the
           text. They can be either positive or negative values. The default value for both is "0".

### start_number
           The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value is "0".

### tabsize
           The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.  Default value is 4.

### timecode
           Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff" format. It can be used  with
           or without text parameter. _timecode_rate_ option must be specified.

### timecode_rate, rate, r
           Set  the  timecode  frame rate (timecode only). Value will be rounded to nearest integer.
           Minimum value is "1".  Drop-frame timecode is supported for frame rates 30 & 60.

### tc24hmax
           If set to 1, the output of the timecode option will wrap around at 24 hours.  Default  is
           0 (disabled).

### text
           The  text  string  to  be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8 encoded characters.
           This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter _textfile_.

### textfile
           A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a  sequence  of  UTF-8  encoded
           characters.

           This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the parameter _text_.

           If both _text_ and _textfile_ are specified, an error is thrown.

### text_source
           Text  source  should be set as side_data_detection_bboxes if you want to use text data in
           detection bboxes of side data.

           If text source is set, _text_ and _textfile_ will be ignored  and  still  use  text  data  in
           detection  bboxes  of  side data. So please do not use this parameter if you are not sure
           about the text source.

### reload
           The _textfile_ will be reloaded at specified frame interval.  Be sure  to  update  _textfile_
           atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.  Range is 0 to INT_MAX. Default is
           0.

       **x**
       **y   **The  expressions  which  specify  the  offsets  where text will be drawn within the video
           frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the output image.

           The default value of _x_ and _y_ is "0".

           See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.

       The parameters for _x_ and _y_ are expressions containing the following constants and functions:

       **dar **input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_w_ / _h_) * _sar_

### hsub
### vsub
           horizontal and vertical chroma  subsample  values.  For  example  for  the  pixel  format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

### line_h, lh
           the height of each text line

### main_h, h, H
           the input height

### main_w, w, W
           the input width

### max_glyph_a, ascent
           the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid coordinate used to place
           a  glyph  outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.  It is a positive value, due to the
           grid's orientation with the Y axis upwards.

### max_glyph_d, descent
           the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid  coordinate  used  to  place  a
           glyph  outline  point, for all the rendered glyphs.  This is a negative value, due to the
           grid's orientation, with the Y axis upwards.

### max_glyph_h
           maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all  the  glyphs  contained  in  the
           rendered text, it is equivalent to _ascent_ - _descent_.

### max_glyph_w
           maximum  glyph  width,  that  is  the  maximum  width for all the glyphs contained in the
           rendered text

### font_a
           the ascent size defined in the font metrics

### font_d
           the descent size defined in the font metrics

### top_a
           the maximum ascender of the glyphs of the first text line

### bottom_d
           the maximum descender of the glyphs of the last text line

       **n   **the number of input frame, starting from 0

### rand(min, max)
           return a random number included between _min_ and _max_

       **sar **The input sample aspect ratio.

       **t   **timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown

### text_h, th
           the height of the rendered text

### text_w, tw
           the width of the rendered text

       **x**
       **y   **the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.

           These parameters allow the _x_ and _y_ expressions to refer to each other,  so  you  can  for
           example specify "y=x/dar".

### pict_type
           A one character description of the current frame's picture type.

### pkt_pos
           The  current  packet's  position in the input file or stream (in bytes, from the start of
           the input). A value of -1 indicates this info is not available.

### duration
           The current packet's duration, in seconds.

### pkt_size
           The current packet's size (in bytes).

       _Text_ _expansion_

       If **expansion **is set to "strftime", the filter recognizes sequences accepted by the "strftime"
       C function in the provided text and expands them  accordingly.  Check  the  documentation  of
       "strftime".  This  feature  is deprecated in favor of "normal" expansion with the "gmtime" or
       "localtime" expansion functions.

       If **expansion **is set to "none", the text is printed verbatim.

       If **expansion **is set to "normal" (which is the default), the following expansion mechanism  is
       used.

       The backslash character **\**, followed by any character, always expands to the second character.

       Sequences  of the form "%{...}" are expanded. The text between the braces is a function name,
       possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.  If the arguments contain special characters
       or delimiters (':' or '}'), they should be escaped.

       Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the **text **option in  the  filter
       argument  string and as the filter argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also
       for the shell, that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file with the  **textfile**
       option avoids these problems.

       The following functions are available:

### expr, e
           The expression evaluation result.

           It  must  take  one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated, which accepts the
           same constants and functions as the _x_ and _y_ values. Note that not all constants should be
           used, for example the text size is not known  when  evaluating  the  expression,  so  the
           constants _text_w_ and _text_h_ will have an undefined value.

### expr_int_format, eif
           Evaluate the expression's value and output as formatted integer.

           The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the _expr_ function.  The
           second  argument  specifies the output format. Allowed values are **x**, **X**, **d **and **u**. They are
           treated exactly as in the "printf" function.  The third parameter is  optional  and  sets
           the  number  of  positions taken by the output.  It can be used to add padding with zeros
           from the left.

### gmtime
           The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.  It can accept an argument:  a
           "strftime"  C  function  format  string.   The  format  string is extended to support the
           variable _%[1-6]N_ which prints fractions of the second with optionally specified number of
           digits.

### localtime
           The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.  It can accept
           an argument: a "strftime" C function format string.  The format  string  is  extended  to
           support  the  variable  _%[1-6]N_  which  prints  fractions  of  the second with optionally
           specified number of digits.

### metadata
           Frame metadata. Takes one or two arguments.

           The first argument is mandatory and specifies the metadata key.

           The second argument is optional and specifies a default value, used when the metadata key
           is not found or empty.

           Available metadata can be identified by inspecting entries  starting  with  TAG  included
           within each frame section printed by running "ffprobe -show_frames".

           String metadata generated in filters leading to the drawtext filter are also available.

### n, frame_num
           The frame number, starting from 0.

### pict_type
           A one character description of the current picture type.

       **pts **The timestamp of the current frame.  It can take up to three arguments.

           The  first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to "flt" for seconds as a
           decimal number with microsecond accuracy; "hms" stands for  a  formatted  _[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm_
           timestamp  with  millisecond  accuracy.   "gmtime"  stands for the timestamp of the frame
           formatted as UTC time; "localtime" stands for the timestamp of  the  frame  formatted  as
           local time zone time.

           The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.

           If  the  format  is  set to "hms", a third argument "24HH" may be supplied to present the
           hour part of the formatted timestamp in 24h format (00-23).

           If the format is set to "localtime" or "gmtime", a third  argument  may  be  supplied:  a
           "strftime"  C  function  format  string.   By default, _YYYY-MM-DD_ _HH:MM:SS_ format will be
           used.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports altering parameters via commands:

### reinit
           Alter existing filter parameters.

           Syntax for the argument is the same as for filter invocation, e.g.

                   fontsize=56:fontcolor=green:text='Hello World'

           Full filter invocation with sendcmd would look like this:

                   sendcmd=c='56.0 drawtext reinit fontsize=56\:fontcolor=green\:text=Hello\\ World'

           If the entire argument can't be parsed or applied as valid values then  the  filter  will
           continue with its existing parameters.

       The following options are also supported as **commands**:

       *<x>
       *<y>
       *<alpha>
       *<fontsize>
       *<fontcolor>
       *<boxcolor>
       *<bordercolor>
       *<shadowcolor>
       *<box>
       *<boxw>
       *<boxh>
       *<boxborderw>
       *<line_spacing>
       *<text_align>
       *<shadowx>
       *<shadowy>
       *<borderw>

       _Examples_

       •   Draw  "Test  Text"  with  font  FreeSerif,  using  the  default  values  for the optional
           parameters.

                   drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"

       •   Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100 and y=50 (counting from
           the top-left corner of the screen), text is yellow with a red box  around  it.  Both  the
           text and the box have an opacity of 20%.

                   drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
                             x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=<yellow@0.2>: box=1: boxcolor=<red@0.2>"

           Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used within the parameter
           list.

       •   Show the text at the center of the video frame:

                   drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h)/2"

       •   Show the text at a random position, switching to a new position every 30 seconds:

                   drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=if(eq(mod(t\,30)\,0)\,rand(0\,(w-text_w))\,x):y=if(eq(mod(t\,30)\,0)\,rand(0\,(h-text_h))\,y)"

       •   Show  a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video frame. The file
           _LONG_LINE_ is assumed to contain a single line with no newlines.

                   drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"

       •   Show the content of file _CREDITS_ off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.

                   drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"

       •   Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.  The glyph baseline  is
           placed at half screen height.

                   drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"

       •   Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:

                   drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"

       •   Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.

                   drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'

       •   Draw "Test Text" with font size dependent on height of the video.

                   drawtext="text='Test Text': fontsize=h/30: x=(w-text_w)/2: y=(h-text_h*2)"

       •   Print the date of a real-time encoding (see documentation for the "strftime" C function):

                   drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%{localtime\:%a %b %d %Y}'

       •   Show text fading in and out (appearing/disappearing):

                   #!/bin/sh
                   DS=1.0 # display start
                   DE=10.0 # display end
                   FID=1.5 # fade in duration
                   FOD=5 # fade out duration
                   ffplay -f lavfi "color,drawtext=text=TEST:fontsize=50:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor_expr=ff0000%{eif\\\\: clip(255*(1*between(t\\, $DS + $FID\\, $DE - $FOD) + ((t - $DS)/$FID)*between(t\\, $DS\\, $DS + $FID) + (-(t - $DE)/$FOD)*between(t\\, $DE - $FOD\\, $DE) )\\, 0\\, 255) \\\\: x\\\\: 2 }"

       •   Horizontally  align multiple separate texts. Note that **max_glyph_a **and the **fontsize **value
           are included in the **y **offset.

                   drawtext=fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=DOG:fontsize=24:x=10:y=20+24-max_glyph_a,
                   drawtext=fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=cow:fontsize=24:x=80:y=20+24-max_glyph_a

       •   Plot special _lavf.image2dec.source_basename_ metadata onto each  frame  if  such  metadata
           exists.  Otherwise,  plot  the  string  "NA".  Note  that image2 demuxer must have option
           **-export_path_metadata 1 **for the special metadata fields to be available for filters.

                   drawtext="fontsize=20:fontcolor=white:fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text='%{metadata\:lavf.image2dec.source_basename\:NA}':x=10:y=10"

       For more information about libfreetype, check: <**<http://www.freetype.org/>**>.

       For          more          information           about           fontconfig,           check:
       <**<http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html>**>.

       For more information about libfribidi, check: <**<http://fribidi.org/>**>.

       For more information about libharfbuzz, check: <**<https://github.com/harfbuzz/harfbuzz>**>.

### edgedetect
       Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### low
### high
           Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding algorithm.

           The  high  threshold  selects  the "strong" edge pixels, which are then connected through
           8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected by the low threshold.

           _low_ and _high_ threshold values must be chosen in the range [0,1], and _low_ should be lesser
           or equal to _high_.

           Default value for _low_ is "20/255", and default value for _high_ is "50/255".

### mode
           Define the drawing mode.

           **wires**
               Draw white/gray wires on black background.

           **colormix**
               Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.

           **canny**
               Apply Canny edge detector on all selected planes.

           Default value is _wires_.

### planes
           Select planes for filtering. By default all available planes are filtered.

       _Examples_

       •   Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:

                   edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4

       •   Painting effect without thresholding:

                   edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0

### elbg
       Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.

       For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal  mapping  from  the  input  to  the
       output given the codebook length, that is the number of distinct output colors.

       This filter accepts the following options.

### codebook_length, l
           Set  codebook  length. The value must be a positive integer, and represents the number of
           distinct output colors. Default value is 256.

### nb_steps, n
           Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for  computing  the  optimal  mapping.  The
           higher the value the better the result and the higher the computation time. Default value
           is 1.

### seed, s
           Set  a  random  seed,  must  be  an  integer  included  between  0 and UINT32_MAX. If not
           specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a
           best effort basis.

### pal8
           Set pal8 output pixel format. This option does not work with codebook length greater than
           256. Default is disabled.

### use_alpha
           Include alpha values in the quantization calculation. Allows creating  palettized  output
           images (e.g. PNG8) with multiple alpha smooth blending.

### entropy
       Measure graylevel entropy in histogram of color channels of video frames.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           Can be either _normal_ or _diff_. Default is _normal_.

           _diff_  mode  measures  entropy  of  histogram  delta  values, absolute differences between
           neighbour histogram values.

### epx
       Apply the EPX magnification filter which is designed for pixel art.

       It accepts the following option:

       **n   **Set the scaling dimension: 2 for "2xEPX", 3 for "3xEPX".  Default is 3.

   **eq**
       Set brightness, contrast, saturation and approximate gamma adjustment.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### contrast
           Set the contrast expression. The value must be a float value in range -1000.0 to  1000.0.
           The default value is "1".

### brightness
           Set  the brightness expression. The value must be a float value in range -1.0 to 1.0. The
           default value is "0".

### saturation
           Set the saturation expression. The value must be a float in range 0.0 to 3.0. The default
           value is "1".

### gamma
           Set the gamma expression. The value must be a float in range 0.1 to  10.0.   The  default
           value is "1".

### gamma_r
           Set  the  gamma  expression  for red. The value must be a float in range 0.1 to 10.0. The
           default value is "1".

### gamma_g
           Set the gamma expression for green. The value must be a float in range 0.1 to  10.0.  The
           default value is "1".

### gamma_b
           Set  the  gamma  expression for blue. The value must be a float in range 0.1 to 10.0. The
           default value is "1".

### gamma_weight
           Set the gamma weight expression. It can be used to reduce the  effect  of  a  high  gamma
           value  on  bright  image  areas, e.g. keep them from getting overamplified and just plain
           white. The value must be a float in range 0.0 to 1.0. A value  of  0.0  turns  the  gamma
           correction all the way down while 1.0 leaves it at its full strength. Default is "1".

### eval
           Set  when  the expressions for brightness, contrast, saturation and gamma expressions are
           evaluated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command  is
               processed

           **frame**
               evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

           Default value is **init**.

       The expressions accept the following parameters:

       **n   **frame count of the input frame starting from 0

       **pos **byte  position  of  the  corresponding  packet  in  the  input  file, NAN if unspecified;
           deprecated, do not use

       **r   **frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown

       **t   **timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown

       _Commands_

       The filter supports the following commands:

### contrast
           Set the contrast expression.

### brightness
           Set the brightness expression.

### saturation
           Set the saturation expression.

### gamma
           Set the gamma expression.

### gamma_r
           Set the gamma_r expression.

### gamma_g
           Set gamma_g expression.

### gamma_b
           Set gamma_b expression.

### gamma_weight
           Set gamma_weight expression.

           The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### erosion
       Apply erosion effect to the video.

       This filter replaces the pixel by the [local(3x3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/local/3x3/markdown) minimum.

       It accepts the following options:

### threshold0
### threshold1
### threshold2
### threshold3
           Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is  65535.   If  0,  plane  will  remain
           unchanged.

### coordinates
           Flag  which  specifies  the  pixel  to refer to. Default is 255 i.e. all eight pixels are
           used.

           Flags to local 3x3 coordinates maps like this:

               1 2 3
               4   5
               6 7 8

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### estdif
       Deinterlace the input video ("estdif" stands for "Edge Slope Tracing Deinterlacing Filter").

       Spatial only filter that uses edge slope tracing algorithm to interpolate missing lines.   It
       accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           The default value is "field".

### parity
           The  picture  field  parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one of the
           following values:

           **tff **Assume the top field is first.

           **bff **Assume the bottom field is first.

           **auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The default value is "auto".  If the interlacing is  unknown  or  the  decoder  does  not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **all **Deinterlace all frames.

           **interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           The default value is "all".

### rslope
           Specify  the  search radius for edge slope tracing. Default value is 1.  Allowed range is
           from 1 to 15.

### redge
           Specify the search radius for best edge matching. Default value is 2.  Allowed  range  is
           from 0 to 15.

### ecost
           Specify  the edge cost for edge matching. Default value is 2.  Allowed range is from 0 to
           50.

### mcost
           Specify the middle cost for edge matching. Default value is 1.  Allowed range is  from  0
           to 50.

### dcost
           Specify the distance cost for edge matching. Default value is 1.  Allowed range is from 0
           to 50.

### interp
           Specify  the  interpolation used. Default is 4-point interpolation. It accepts one of the
           following values:

           **2p  **Two-point interpolation.

           **4p  **Four-point interpolation.

           **6p  **Six-point interpolation.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### exposure
       Adjust exposure of the video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### exposure
           Set the exposure correction in EV. Allowed range is from -3.0 to 3.0 EV Default value  is
           0 EV.

### black
           Set the black level correction. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.  Default value is 0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### extractplanes
       Extract  color  channel  components  from  input  video  stream into separate grayscale video
       streams.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set plane(s) to extract.

           Available values for planes are:

           **y**
           **u**
           **v**
           **a**
           **r**
           **g**
           **b**

           Choosing planes not available in the input will result  in  an  error.   That  means  you
           cannot select "r", "g", "b" planes with "y", "u", "v" planes at same time.

       _Examples_

       •   Extract  luma,  u  and  v color channel component from input video frame into 3 grayscale
           outputs:

                   ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi

### fade
       Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### type, t
           The effect type can be either "in" for  a  fade-in,  or  "out"  for  a  fade-out  effect.
           Default is "in".

### start_frame, s
           Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade effect at. Default is 0.

### nb_frames, n
           The  number  of  frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the fade-in effect, the
           output video will have the same intensity as the input video.  At the end of the fade-out
           transition, the output video will be filled with the selected **color**.  Default is 25.

### alpha
           If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.  Default value is 0.

### start_time, st
           Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply  the  fade  effect.  If
           both  start_frame  and  start_time  are specified, the fade will start at whichever comes
           last.  Default is 0.

### duration, d
           The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end  of  the  fade-in
           effect  the  output  video will have the same intensity as the input video, at the end of
           the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the selected **color**.  If both
           duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0 (nb_frames  is  used
           by default).

### color, c
           Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".

       _Examples_

       •   Fade in the first 30 frames of video:

                   fade=in:0:30

           The command above is equivalent to:

                   fade=t=in:s=0:n=30

       •   Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:

                   fade=out:155:45
                   fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45

       •   Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:

                   fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25

       •   Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:

                   fade=in:5:20:color=yellow

       •   Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:

                   fade=in:0:25:alpha=1

       •   Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:

                   fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5

### feedback
       Apply feedback video filter.

       This  filter  pass  cropped  input  frames to 2nd output.  From there it can be filtered with
       other video filters.  After filter receives frame from 2nd input, that frame is  combined  on
       top of original frame from 1st input and passed to 1st output.

       The typical usage is filter only part of frame.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **x**
       **y   **Set the top left crop position.

       **w**
       **h   **Set the crop size.

       _Examples_

       •   Blur only top left rectangular part of video frame size 100x100 with gblur filter.

                   [in][blurin]feedback=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=100[out][blurout];[blurout]gblur=8[blurin]

       •   Draw black box on top left part of video frame of size 100x100 with drawbox filter.

                   [in][blurin]feedback=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=100[out][blurout];[blurout]drawbox=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=100:t=100[blurin]

### fftdnoiz
       Denoise frames using 3D FFT (frequency domain filtering).

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sigma
           Set  the noise sigma constant. This sets denoising strength.  Default value is 1. Allowed
           range is from 0 to 30.  Using  very  high  sigma  with  low  overlap  may  give  blocking
           artifacts.

### amount
           Set  amount  of denoising. By default all detected noise is reduced.  Default value is 1.
           Allowed range is from 0 to 1.

### block
           Set size of block in pixels, Default is 32, can be 8 to 256.

### overlap
           Set block overlap. Default is 0.5. Allowed range is from 0.2 to 0.8.

### method
           Set denoising method. Default is "wiener", can also be "hard".

### prev
           Set number of previous frames to use for denoising. By default is set to 0.

### next
           Set number of next frames to to use for denoising. By default is set to 0.

### planes
           Set planes which will be filtered, by default are all available filtered except alpha.

### fftfilt
       Apply arbitrary expressions to samples in frequency domain

### dc_Y
           Adjust the dc value (gain) of the luma plane of the image. The filter accepts an  integer
           value in range 0 to 1000. The default value is set to 0.

### dc_U
           Adjust  the  dc  value (gain) of the 1st chroma plane of the image. The filter accepts an
           integer value in range 0 to 1000. The default value is set to 0.

### dc_V
           Adjust the dc value (gain) of the 2nd chroma plane of the image. The  filter  accepts  an
           integer value in range 0 to 1000. The default value is set to 0.

### weight_Y
           Set the frequency domain weight expression for the luma plane.

### weight_U
           Set the frequency domain weight expression for the 1st chroma plane.

### weight_V
           Set the frequency domain weight expression for the 2nd chroma plane.

### eval
           Set when the expressions are evaluated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization.

           **frame**
               Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.

           Default value is **init**.

           The filter accepts the following variables:

       **X**
       **Y   **The coordinates of the current sample.

       **W**
       **H   **The width and height of the image.

       **N   **The number of input frame, starting from 0.

       **WS**
       **HS  **The size of FFT array for horizontal and vertical processing.

       _Examples_

       •   High-pass:

                   fftfilt=dc_Y=128:weight_Y='squish(1-(Y+X)/100)'

       •   Low-pass:

                   fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='squish((Y+X)/100-1)'

       •   Sharpen:

                   fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='1+squish(1-(Y+X)/100)'

       •   Blur:

                   fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='exp(-4 * ((Y+X)/(W+H)))'

### field
       Extract  a single field from an interlaced image using stride arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU
       time. The output frames are marked as non-interlaced.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### type
           Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is 0 or "top") or the bottom  field  (if
           the value is 1 or "bottom").

### fieldhint
       Create  new  frames  by copying the top and bottom fields from surrounding frames supplied as
       numbers by the hint file.

### hint
           Set file containing hints: absolute/relative frame numbers.

           There must be one line for each frame in a clip.  Each  line  must  contain  two  numbers
           separated by the comma, optionally followed by "-" or "+".  Numbers supplied on each line
           of  file  can not be out of [N-1,N+1] where N is current frame number for "absolute" mode
           or out of [-1, 1] range for "relative" mode. First number tells from which frame to  pick
           up top field and second number tells from which frame to pick up bottom field.

           If optionally followed by "+" output frame will be marked as interlaced, else if followed
           by  "-"  output frame will be marked as progressive, else it will be marked same as input
           frame.  If optionally followed by "t" output frame will use only top field, or in case of
           "b" it will use only bottom field.  If line starts with "#" or ";" that line is skipped.

### mode
           Can be item "absolute" or "relative" or "pattern". Default is "absolute".  The  "pattern"
           mode is same as "relative" mode, except at last entry of file if there are more frames to
           process than "hint" file is seek back to start.

       Example of first several lines of "hint" file for "relative" mode:

               0,0 - # first frame
               1,0 - # second frame, use third's frame top field and second's frame bottom field
               1,0 - # third frame, use fourth's frame top field and third's frame bottom field
               1,0 -
               0,0 -
               0,0 -
               1,0 -
               1,0 -
               1,0 -
               0,0 -
               0,0 -
               1,0 -
               1,0 -
               1,0 -
               0,0 -

### fieldmatch
       Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the progressive frames
       from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated frames, so to achieve a complete
       inverse telecine "fieldmatch" needs to be followed by a decimation filter such as **decimate **in
       the filtergraph.

       The  separation  of  the  field  matching  and  the  decimation  is  notably motivated by the
       possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.  If the source has
       mixed telecined and real interlaced content, "fieldmatch" will not be able  to  match  fields
       for  the  interlaced  parts.  But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced,
       and thus can be de-interlaced by a later filter such as **yadif **before decimation.

       In addition to the various configuration options, "fieldmatch" can take  an  optional  second
       stream,  activated  through  the  **ppsrc **option. If enabled, the frames reconstruction will be
       based on the fields and frames from this second stream. This allows the  first  input  to  be
       pre-processed in order to help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output
       lossless  (assuming  the  fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser, or
       brightness/contrast adjustments can help.

       Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project) and  VIVTC/VFM
       (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from which "fieldmatch" is based on.
       While the semantic and usage are very close, some behaviour and options names can differ.

       The  **decimate  **filter  currently only works for constant frame rate input.  If your input has
       mixed telecined (30fps) and progressive content with a lower framerate  like  24fps  use  the
       following      filterchain      to      produce      the      necessary      cfr      stream:
       "dejudder,fps=30000/1001,fieldmatch,decimate".

       The filter accepts the following options:

### order
           Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:

           **auto**
               Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).

           **bff **Assume bottom field first.

           **tff **Assume top field first.

           Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the stream.

           Default value is _auto_.

### mode
           Set the matching mode or strategy to use. **pc **mode is the safest  in  the  sense  that  it
           won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when possible, but if there are bad
           edits  or  blended fields it will end up outputting combed frames when a good match might
           actually exist. On the other hand, **pcn_ub **mode is the most risky  in  terms  of  creating
           jerkiness, but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
           all  somewhere  in  between  **pc  **and  **pcn_ub  **in  terms of risking jerkiness and creating
           duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections with bad edits, orphaned fields,
           blended fields, etc.

           More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in **p/c/n/u/b meaning **section.

           Available values are:

           **pc  **2-way matching (p/c)

           **pc_n**
               2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)

           **pc_u**
               2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)

           **pc_n_ub**
               2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if still
               combed (p/c + n + u/b)

           **pcn **3-way matching (p/c/n)

           **pcn_ub**
               3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all  3  of  the  original  matches  are
               detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)

           The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that mode assuming
           **order**=_tff_ (and **field **on _auto_ or _top_).

           In terms of speed **pc **mode is by far the fastest and **pcn_ub **is the slowest.

           Default value is _pc_n_.

### ppsrc
           Mark  the  main  input  stream  as  a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary input
           stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter introduction for  more
           details. It is similar to the **clip2 **feature from VFM/TFM.

           Default value is 0 (disabled).

### field
           Set  the  field  to  match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as **order**
           unless you experience matching failures  with  that  setting.  In  certain  circumstances
           changing  the  field  that  is  used  to  match  from can have a large impact on matching
           performance. Available values are:

           **auto**
               Automatic (same value as **order**).

           **bottom**
               Match from the bottom field.

           **top **Match from the top field.

           Default value is _auto_.

### mchroma
           Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most cases  it  is
           recommended  to  leave  this  enabled. You should set this to 0 only if your clip has bad
           chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other artifacts. Setting this to 0 could also
           be used to speed things up at the cost of some accuracy.

           Default value is 1.

       **y0**
       **y1  **These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between  **y0  **and  **y1  **from  being
           included  in  the  field  matching  decision.  An  exclusion  band  can be used to ignore
           subtitles, a logo, or other things that may interfere with  the  matching.  **y0  **sets  the
           starting scan line and **y1 **sets the ending line; all lines in between **y0 **and **y1 **(including
           **y0 **and **y1**) will be ignored. Setting **y0 **and **y1 **to the same value will disable the feature.
           **y0 **and **y1 **defaults to 0.

### scthresh
           Set  the  scene  change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on the luma
           plane. Good values are in the  "[8.0,  14.0]"  range.  Scene  change  detection  is  only
           relevant in case **combmatch**=_sc_.  The range for **scthresh **is "[0.0, 100.0]".

           Default value is 12.0.

### combmatch
           When  **combatch  **is  not  _none_,  "fieldmatch"  will take into account the combed scores of
           matches when deciding what match to use as the final match. Available values are:

           **none**
               No final matching based on combed scores.

           **sc  **Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.

           **full**
               Use combed scores all the time.

           Default is _sc_.

### combdbg
           Force "fieldmatch" to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches  and  print  them.
           This setting is known as **micout **in TFM/VFM vocabulary.  Available values are:

           **none**
               No forced calculation.

           **pcn **Force p/c/n calculations.

           **pcnub**
               Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.

           Default value is _none_.

### cthresh
           This  is  the  area  combing  threshold used for combed frame detection. This essentially
           controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.   Larger  values  mean
           combing  must  be  more  visible  and  smaller values mean combing can be less visible or
           strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from -1 (every pixel will be detected as
           combed) to 255 (no pixel  will  be  detected  as  combed).  This  is  basically  a  pixel
           difference value. A good range is "[8, 12]".

           Default value is 9.

### chroma
           Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision.  Only disable this
           if  your  source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are causing problems for the
           combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,  using  **chroma**=_0_  is  usually  more
           reliable, except for the case where there is chroma only combing in the source.

           Default value is 0.

### blockx
### blocky
           Respectively  set  the  x-axis  and  y-axis  size  of the window used during combed frame
           detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which **combpel **pixels are  required
           to  be  detected  as  combed for a frame to be declared combed. See the **combpel **parameter
           description for more info.  Possible values are any number that is a power of 2  starting
           at 4 and going up to 512.

           Default value is 16.

### combpel
           The  number  of combed pixels inside any of the **blocky **by **blockx **size blocks on the frame
           for the frame to be detected as combed. While **cthresh **controls how "visible" the  combing
           must  be, this setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
           window defined by the **blockx **and **blocky **settings) on the frame. Minimum value  is  0  and
           maximum  is "blocky x blockx" (at which point no frames will ever be detected as combed).
           This setting is known as **MI **in TFM/VFM vocabulary.

           Default value is 80.

       _p/c/n/u/b_ _meaning_

       p/c/n

       We assume the following telecined stream:

               Top fields:     1 2 2 3 4
               Bottom fields:  1 2 3 4 4

       The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to.  Here,  the  first  two
       frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.

       When "fieldmatch" is configured to run a matching from bottom (**field**=_bottom_) this is how this
       input stream get transformed:

               Input stream:
                               T     1 2 2 3 4
                               B     1 2 3 4 4   <-- matching reference

               Matches:              c c n n c

               Output stream:
                               T     1 2 3 4 4
                               B     1 2 3 4 4

       As  a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.  To perform a
       complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter after this operation.  See
       for instance the **decimate **filter.

       The same operation now matching from top fields (**field**=_top_) looks like this:

               Input stream:
                               T     1 2 2 3 4   <-- matching reference
                               B     1 2 3 4 4

               Matches:              c c p p c

               Output stream:
                               T     1 2 2 3 4
                               B     1 2 2 3 4

       In  these  examples,  we can see what _p_, _c_ and _n_ mean; basically, they refer to the frame and
       field of the opposite parity:

       *<_p_ matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame>
       *<_c_ matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame>
       *<_n_ matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame>

       u/b

       The _u_ and _b_ matching are a bit special in the sense that they match from the opposite  parity
       flag.  In  the  following  examples,  we  assume that we are currently matching the 2nd frame
       (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a 'x' is  placed  above  and  below  each  matched
       fields.

       With bottom matching (**field**=_bottom_):

               Match:           c         p           n          b          u

                                x       x               x        x          x
                 Top          1 2 2     1 2 2       1 2 2      1 2 2      1 2 2
                 Bottom       1 2 3     1 2 3       1 2 3      1 2 3      1 2 3
                                x         x           x        x              x

               Output frames:
                                2          1          2          2          2
                                2          2          2          1          3

       With top matching (**field**=_top_):

               Match:           c         p           n          b          u

                                x         x           x        x              x
                 Top          1 2 2     1 2 2       1 2 2      1 2 2      1 2 2
                 Bottom       1 2 3     1 2 3       1 2 3      1 2 3      1 2 3
                                x       x               x        x          x

               Output frames:
                                2          2          2          1          2
                                2          1          3          2          2

       _Examples_

       Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:

               fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate

       Advanced IVTC, with fallback on **yadif **for still combed frames:

               fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate

### fieldorder
       Transform the field order of the input video.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### order
           The  output field order. Valid values are _tff_ for top field first or _bff_ for bottom field
           first.

       The default value is **tff**.

       The transformation is done by shifting the picture content  up  or  down  by  one  line,  and
       filling  the remaining line with appropriate picture content.  This method is consistent with
       most broadcast field order converters.

       If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already flagged as  being  of
       the required output field order, then this filter does not alter the incoming video.

       It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material, which is bottom field first.

       For example:

               ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv

### fifo, afifo
       Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.

       It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter framework.

       It does not take parameters.

### fillborders
       Fill  borders  of the input video, without changing video stream dimensions.  Sometimes video
       can have garbage at the four edges and you may not want to crop  video  input  to  keep  size
       multiple of some number.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### left
           Number of pixels to fill from left border.

### right
           Number of pixels to fill from right border.

       **top **Number of pixels to fill from top border.

### bottom
           Number of pixels to fill from bottom border.

### mode
           Set fill mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **smear**
               fill pixels using outermost pixels

           **mirror**
               fill pixels using mirroring (half sample symmetric)

           **fixed**
               fill pixels with constant value

           **reflect**
               fill pixels using reflecting (whole sample symmetric)

           **wrap**
               fill pixels using wrapping

           **fade**
               fade pixels to constant value

           **margins**
               fill pixels at top and bottom with weighted averages pixels near borders

           Default is _smear_.

### color
           Set color for pixels in fixed or fade mode. Default is _black_.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### find_rect
       Find a rectangular object in the input video.

       The object to search for must be specified as a gray8 image specified with the **object **option.

       For each possible match, a score is computed. If the score reaches the  specified  threshold,
       the object is considered found.

       If  the  input video contains multiple instances of the object, the filter will find only one
       of them.

       When an object is found, the following metadata entries are set in the matching frame:

### lavfi.rect.w
           width of object

### lavfi.rect.h
           height of object

### lavfi.rect.x
           x position of object

### lavfi.rect.y
           y position of object

### lavfi.rect.score
           match score of the found object

       It accepts the following options:

### object
           Filepath of the object image, needs to be in gray8.

### threshold
           Detection threshold, expressed as a decimal number in the range 0-1.

           A threshold value of 0.01 means only exact matches, a  threshold  of  0.99  means  almost
           everything matches.

           Default value is 0.5.

### mipmaps
           Number of mipmaps, default is 3.

### xmin, ymin, xmax, ymax
           Specifies the rectangle in which to search.

### discard
           Discard frames where object is not detected. Default is disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Cover a rectangular object by the supplied image of a given video using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i file.ts -vf find_rect=newref.pgm,cover_rect=cover.jpg:mode=cover new.mkv

       •   Find the position of an object in each frame using **ffprobe **and write it to a log file:

                   ffprobe -f lavfi movie=test.mp4,find_rect=object=object.pgm:threshold=0.3 \
                     -show_entries frame=pkt_pts_time:frame_tags=lavfi.rect.x,lavfi.rect.y \
                     -of csv -o find_rect.csv

### floodfill
       Flood area with values of same pixel components with another values.

       It accepts the following options:

       **x   **Set pixel x coordinate.

       **y   **Set pixel y coordinate.

       **s0  **Set source #0 component value.

       **s1  **Set source #1 component value.

       **s2  **Set source #2 component value.

       **s3  **Set source #3 component value.

       **d0  **Set destination #0 component value.

       **d1  **Set destination #1 component value.

       **d2  **Set destination #2 component value.

       **d3  **Set destination #3 component value.

### format
       Convert  the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.  Libavfilter will try to pick
       one that is suitable as input to the next filter.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### pix_fmts
           A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".

       _Examples_

       •   Convert the input video to the _yuv420p_ format

                   format=pix_fmts=yuv420p

           Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list

                   format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p

### fps
       Convert the video to specified constant frame rate  by  duplicating  or  dropping  frames  as
       necessary.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **fps **The desired output frame rate. It accepts expressions containing the following constants:

           **source_fps**
               The input's frame rate

           **ntsc**
               NTSC frame rate of "30000/1001"

           **pal **PAL frame rate of 25.0

           **film**
               Film frame rate of 24.0

           **ntsc_film**
               NTSC-film frame rate of "24000/1001"

           The default is 25.

### start_time
           Assume   the  first  PTS  should  be  the  given  value,  in  seconds.  This  allows  for
           padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no  assumption  is  made  about  the
           first  frame's  expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.  For example, this could
           be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of the first frame  if  a  video  stream
           starts after the audio stream or to trim any frames with a negative PTS.

### round
           Timestamp (PTS) rounding method.

           Possible values are:

           **zero**
               round towards 0

           **inf **round away from 0

           **down**
               round towards -infinity

           **up  **round towards +infinity

           **near**
               round to nearest

           The default is "near".

### eof_action
           Action performed when reading the last frame.

           Possible values are:

           **round**
               Use same timestamp rounding method as used for other frames.

           **pass**
               Pass through last frame if input duration has not been reached yet.

           The default is "round".

       Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string: _fps_[:_start_time_[:_round_]].

       See also the **setpts **filter.

       _Examples_

       •   A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:

                   fps=fps=25

       •   Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:

                   fps=fps=film:round=near

### framepack
       Pack  two  different  video  streams  into  a  stereoscopic video, setting proper metadata on
       supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and framerate and  processing  will
       stop  when  the  shorter  video  ends.  Please  note  that  you  may conveniently adjust view
       properties with the **scale **and **fps **filters.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### format
           The desired packing format. Supported values are:

           **sbs **The views are next to each other (default).

           **tab **The views are on top of each other.

           **lines**
               The views are packed by line.

           **columns**
               The views are packed by column.

           **frameseq**
               The views are temporally interleaved.

       Some examples:

               # Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
               ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT

               # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
               ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT

### framerate
       Change the frame rate by interpolating new video output frames from the source frames.

       This filter is not designed to function correctly with  interlaced  media.  If  you  wish  to
       change  the  frame  rate of interlaced media then you are required to deinterlace before this
       filter and re-interlace after this filter.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

       **fps **Specify the output frames per second. This option can also be specified as a value alone.
           The default is 50.

### interp_start
           Specify the start of a range  where  the  output  frame  will  be  created  as  a  linear
           interpolation of two frames. The range is [0-255], the default is 15.

### interp_end
           Specify  the  end  of  a  range  where  the  output  frame  will  be  created as a linear
           interpolation of two frames. The range is [0-255], the default is 240.

### scene
           Specify the level at which a scene change is detected as a value between  0  and  100  to
           indicate  a  new  scene;  a low value reflects a low probability for the current frame to
           introduce a new scene, while a higher value means the current frame is more likely to  be
           one.  The default is 8.2.

### flags
           Specify flags influencing the filter process.

           Available value for _flags_ is:

           **scene_change_detect, scd**
               Enable  scene  change  detection  using  the value of the option _scene_.  This flag is
               enabled by default.

### framestep
       Select one frame every N-th frame.

       This filter accepts the following option:

### step
           Select frame after every "step" frames.  Allowed values are positive integers higher than
           0. Default value is 1.

### freezedetect
       Detect frozen video.

       This filter logs a message and sets frame metadata when it detects that the input  video  has
       no  significant  change  in  content  during  a  specified  duration.  Video freeze detection
       calculates the mean average absolute difference of all the components  of  video  frames  and
       compares it to a noise floor.

       The     printed     times     and     duration     are     expressed    in    seconds.    The
       "lavfi.freezedetect.freeze_start" metadata key is set on  the  first  frame  whose  timestamp
       equals  or exceeds the detection duration and it contains the timestamp of the first frame of
       the  freeze.  The  "lavfi.freezedetect.freeze_duration"  and  "lavfi.freezedetect.freeze_end"
       metadata keys are set on the first frame after the freeze.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### noise, n
           Set  noise  tolerance.  Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified
           value) or as a difference ratio between 0 and 1. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.

### duration, d
           Set freeze duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).

### freezeframes
       Freeze video frames.

       This filter freezes video frames using frame from 2nd input.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### first
           Set number of first frame from which to start freeze.

### last
           Set number of last frame from which to end freeze.

### replace
           Set number of frame from 2nd input which will be used instead of replaced frames.

### frei0r
       Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.

       To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r header and configure
       FFmpeg with "--enable-frei0r".

       It accepts the following parameters:

### filter_name
           The name of the frei0r effect  to  load.  If  the  environment  variable  **FREI0R_PATH  **is
           defined,  the  frei0r  effect is searched for in each of the directories specified by the
           colon-separated list in **FREI0R_PATH**.  Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are  searched,
           in this order: _HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/_, _/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/_, _/usr/lib/frei0r-1/_.

### filter_params
           A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.

       A  frei0r  effect  parameter  can  be a boolean (its value is either "y" or "n"), a double, a
       color (specified as _R_/_G_/_B_, where _R_, _G_, and _B_ are floating point numbers between 0.0 and  1.0,
       inclusive)  or  a  color  description as specified in the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils**
       **manual**, a position (specified as _X_/_Y_, where _X_ and _Y_ are  floating  point  numbers)  and/or  a
       string.

       The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an effect parameter is not
       specified, the default value is set.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:

                   frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01

       •   Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:

                   frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
                   frei0r=colordistance:violet
                   frei0r=colordistance:0x112233

       •   Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image positions:

                   frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2

       For more information, see <**<http://frei0r.dyne.org>**>

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the **filter_params **option as **commands**.

### fspp
       Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of **spp**.

       It  splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post- processing filter,
       one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.  This allows for much higher speed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### quality
           Set quality. This option defines the number  of  levels  for  averaging.  It  accepts  an
           integer in the range 4-5. Default value is 4.

       **qp  **Force  a  constant  quantization  parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.  If not
           set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).

### strength
           Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32.  Lower  values  mean  more
           details  but  also  more  artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother but also
           blurrier. Default value is 0 − PSNR optimal.

### use_bframe_qp
           Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to  1.  Using  this  option  may  cause
           flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is 0 (not enabled).

### gblur
       Apply Gaussian blur filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sigma
           Set horizontal sigma, standard deviation of Gaussian blur. Default is 0.5.

### steps
           Set number of steps for Gaussian approximation. Default is 1.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.

### sigmaV
           Set vertical sigma, if negative it will be same as "sigma".  Default is -1.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same commands as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### geq
       Apply generic equation to each pixel.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### lum_expr, lum
           Set the luma expression.

### cb_expr, cb
           Set the chrominance blue expression.

### cr_expr, cr
           Set the chrominance red expression.

### alpha_expr, a
           Set the alpha expression.

### red_expr, r
           Set the red expression.

### green_expr, g
           Set the green expression.

### blue_expr, b
           Set the blue expression.

       The colorspace is selected according to the  specified  options.  If  one  of  the  **lum_expr**,
       **cb_expr**,  or  **cr_expr  **options  is  specified,  the  filter will automatically select a YCbCr
       colorspace. If one of the **red_expr**, **green_expr**, or **blue_expr **options is  specified,  it  will
       select an RGB colorspace.

       If  one  of  the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other one. If no
       alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to  opaque  value.   If  none  of  chrominance
       expressions are specified, they will evaluate to the luma expression.

       The expressions can use the following variables and functions:

       **N   **The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.

       **X**
       **Y   **The coordinates of the current sample.

       **W**
       **H   **The width and height of the image.

       **SW**
       **SH  **Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the ratio between
           the  corresponding  luma  plane  number  of  pixels  and the current plane ones. E.g. for
           YUV4:2:0 the values are "1,1" for the luma plane, and "0.5,0.5" for chroma planes.

       **T   **Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.

### p(x, y)
           Return the value of the pixel at location (_x_,_y_) of the current plane.

### lum(x, y)
           Return the value of the pixel at location (_x_,_y_) of the luma plane.

### cb(x, y)
           Return the value of the pixel at location (_x_,_y_)  of  the  blue-difference  chroma  plane.
           Return 0 if there is no such plane.

### cr(x, y)
           Return  the  value  of  the  pixel  at location (_x_,_y_) of the red-difference chroma plane.
           Return 0 if there is no such plane.

### r(x, y)
### g(x, y)
### b(x, y)
           Return the value of the pixel at location (_x_,_y_) of the red/green/blue component. Return 0
           if there is no such component.

### alpha(x, y)
           Return the value of the pixel at location (_x_,_y_) of the alpha plane. Return 0 if there  is
           no such plane.

### psum(x,y), lumsum(x, y), cbsum(x,y), crsum(x,y), rsum(x,y), gsum(x,y), bsum(x,y),
### alphasum(x,y)
           Sum  of sample values in the rectangle from (0,0) to (x,y), this allows obtaining sums of
           samples within a rectangle. See the functions without the sum postfix.

### interpolation
           Set one of interpolation methods:

           **nearest, n**
           **bilinear, b**

           Default is bilinear.

       For functions, if _x_ and _y_ are outside the area, the value will be  automatically  clipped  to
       the closer edge.

       Please  note that this filter can use multiple threads in which case each slice will have its
       own expression state. If you want  to  use  only  a  single  expression  state  because  your
       expressions depend on previous state then you should limit the number of filter threads to 1.

       _Examples_

       •   Flip the image horizontally:

                   geq=p(W-X\,Y)

       •   Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle "PI/3" and a wavelength of 100 pixels:

                   geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128

       •   Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:

                   nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=[random(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/random/1/markdown)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128

       •   Generate a quick emboss effect:

                   format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'

       •   Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:

                   geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'

       •   Create  a  radial  gradient  that  is  the  same size as the input (also see the **vignette**
           filter):

                   geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/[gauss(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/gauss/0/markdown)/[gauss(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/gauss/0/markdown),format=gray

### gradfun
       Fix the banding  artifacts  that  are  sometimes  introduced  into  nearly  flat  regions  by
       truncation  to  8-bit  color depth.  Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands
       are, and dither them.

       It is designed for playback only.   Do  not  use  it  prior  to  lossy  compression,  because
       compression tends to lose the dither and bring back the bands.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### strength
           The  maximum  amount  by  which  the  filter  will change any one pixel. This is also the
           threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from .51 to 64;  the
           default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the valid range.

### radius
           The  neighborhood  to  fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother gradients,
           but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed regions.  Acceptable
           values  are  8-32;  the  default  value is 16. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
           valid range.

       Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string: _strength_[:_radius_]

       _Examples_

       •   Apply the filter with a 3.5 strength and radius of 8:

                   gradfun=3.5:8

       •   Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default value):

                   gradfun=radius=8

### graphmonitor
       Show various filtergraph stats.

       With this filter one can debug complete filtergraph.  Especially issues  with  links  filling
       with queued frames.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Set video output size. Default is _hd720_.

### opacity, o
           Set video opacity. Default is _0.9_. Allowed range is from _0_ to _1_.

### mode, m
           Set output mode flags.

           Available values for flags are:

           **full**
               No any filtering. Default.

           **compact**
               Show only filters with queued frames.

           **nozero**
               Show only filters with non-zero stats.

           **noeof**
               Show only filters with non-eof stat.

           **nodisabled**
               Show only filters that are enabled in timeline.

### flags, f
           Set flags which enable which stats are shown in video.

           Available values for flags are:

           **none**
               All flags turned off.

           **all **All flags turned on.

           **queue**
               Display number of queued frames in each link.

           **frame_count_in**
               Display number of frames taken from filter.

           **frame_count_out**
               Display number of frames given out from filter.

           **frame_count_delta**
               Display delta number of frames between above two values.

           **pts **Display current filtered frame pts.

           **pts_delta**
               Display pts delta between current and previous frame.

           **time**
               Display current filtered frame time.

           **time_delta**
               Display time delta between current and previous frame.

           **timebase**
               Display time base for filter link.

           **format**
               Display used format for filter link.

           **size**
               Display video size or number of audio channels in case of audio used by filter link.

           **rate**
               Display video frame rate or sample rate in case of audio used by filter link.

           **eof **Display link output status.

           **sample_count_in**
               Display number of samples taken from filter.

           **sample_count_out**
               Display number of samples given out from filter.

           **sample_count_delta**
               Display delta number of samples between above two values.

           **disabled**
               Show the timeline filter status.

### rate, r
           Set  upper  limit  for  video rate of output stream, Default value is _25_.  This guarantee
           that output video frame rate will not be higher than this value.

### grayworld
       A color constancy filter that applies color correction based on the grayworld assumption

       See:
       <**<https://www.researchgate.net/publication/275213614_A_New_Color_Correction_Method_for_Underwater_Imaging>**>

       The algorithm  uses linear light, so input data should be linearized beforehand (and possibly
       correctly tagged).

               ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf zscale=transfer=linear,grayworld,zscale=transfer=bt709,format=yuv420p OUTPUT

### greyedge
       A color constancy variation filter which estimates scene illumination via grey edge algorithm
       and corrects the scene colors accordingly.

       See: <**<https://staff.science.uva.nl/th.gevers/pub/GeversTIP07.pdf>**>

       The filter accepts the following options:

### difford
           The order of differentiation to be applied on the scene. Must  be  chosen  in  the  range
           [0,2] and default value is 1.

### minknorm
           The Minkowski parameter to be used for calculating the Minkowski distance. Must be chosen
           in  the  range  [0,20]  and default value is 1. Set to 0 for getting max value instead of
           calculating Minkowski distance.

### sigma
           The standard deviation of Gaussian blur to be applied on the scene. Must be chosen in the
           range [0,1024.0] and default value = 1. floor( _sigma_  *  [**break_off_sigma**(3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/breakoffsigma/3/markdown)  )  can't  be
           equal to 0 if _difford_ is greater than 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Grey Edge:

                   greyedge=difford=1:minknorm=5:sigma=2

       •   Max Edge:

                   greyedge=difford=1:minknorm=0:sigma=2

### guided
       Apply guided filter for edge-preserving smoothing, dehazing and so on.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### radius
           Set the box radius in pixels.  Allowed range is 1 to 20. Default is 3.

       **eps **Set regularization parameter (with square).  Allowed range is 0 to 1. Default is 0.01.

### mode
           Set filter mode. Can be "basic" or "fast".  Default is "basic".

       **sub **Set  subsampling  ratio for "fast" mode.  Range is 2 to 64. Default is 4.  No subsampling
           occurs in "basic" mode.

### guidance
           Set guidance mode. Can be "off" or "on". Default is "off".  If  "off",  single  input  is
           required.  If "on", two inputs of the same resolution and pixel format are required.  The
           second input serves as the guidance.

### planes
           Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Edge-preserving smoothing with guided filter:

                   ffmpeg -i in.png -vf guided out.png

       •   Dehazing,  structure-transferring  filtering, detail enhancement with guided filter.  For
           the generation of  guidance  image,  refer  to  paper  "Guided  Image  Filtering".   See:
           <**<http://kaiminghe.com/publications/pami12guidedfilter.pdf>**>.

                   ffmpeg -i in.png -i guidance.png -filter_complex guided=guidance=on out.png

### haldclut
       Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.

       First  input  is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.  The Hald CLUT
       input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### clut
           Set which CLUT video frames will be processed from second input stream, can be  _first_  or
           _all_. Default is _all_.

### shortest
           Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is 0.

### repeatlast
           Continue  applying  the  last  CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of 0 disable the
           filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.  Default is 1.

       "haldclut" also has the same interpolation options as **lut3d  **(both  filters  share  the  same
       internals).

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       More  information  about  the  Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website (Hald CLUT
       author) at <**<http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html>**>.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the "interp" option as **commands**.

       _Workflow_ _examples_

       Hald CLUT video stream

       Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:

               ffmpeg -f lavfi -i B<haldclutsrc>=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut

       Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.

       Then use it with "haldclut" to apply it on some random stream:

               ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv

       The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of _clut.nut_), then the latest
       picture of that CLUT stream will be applied to  the  remaining  frames  of  the  "mandelbrot"
       stream.

       Hald CLUT with preview

       A  Hald  CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of "Level*Level*Level" by "Level*Level*Level"
       pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the biggest possible square starting at the
       top left of the picture. The remaining padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This
       area can be used to add a preview of the Hald CLUT.

       Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the "haldclut" filter:

               ffmpeg -f lavfi -i B<haldclutsrc>=8 -vf "
                  pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
                  smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
                  [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
                  [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png

       It contains the original and a preview of the effect  of  the  CLUT:  SMPTE  color  bars  are
       displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by the color changes.

       Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:

               ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"

### hflip
       Flip the input video horizontally.

       For example, to horizontally flip the input video with **ffmpeg**:

               ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi

### histeq
       This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a per-frame basis.

       It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel intensities.  The filter
       redistributes  the  pixel  intensities  to  equalize  their distribution across the intensity
       range. It may be viewed as an "automatically  adjusting  contrast  filter".  This  filter  is
       useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source video.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### strength
           Determine  the  amount  of  equalization  to be applied.  As the strength is reduced, the
           distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more approaches that of the input  frame.  The
           value must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.

### intensity
           Set  the  maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output values appropriately.
           The strength should be set as desired and then the intensity can be limited if needed  to
           avoid  washing-out.  The  value must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to
           0.210.

### antibanding
           Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will  randomly  vary  the  luminance  of
           output  pixels  by  a small amount to avoid banding of the histogram. Possible values are
           "none", "weak" or "strong". It defaults to "none".

### histogram
       Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.

       The computed histogram is a representation of the color component distribution in an image.

       Standard histogram displays the color components distribution in an  image.   Displays  color
       graph  for  each color component. Shows distribution of the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components,
       depending on input format, in the current frame. Below each graph  a  color  component  scale
       meter is shown.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### level_height
           Set height of level. Default value is 200.  Allowed range is [50, 2048].

### scale_height
           Set height of color scale. Default value is 12.  Allowed range is [0, 40].

### display_mode
           Set display mode.  It accepts the following values:

           **stack**
               Per color component graphs are placed below each other.

           **parade**
               Per color component graphs are placed side by side.

           **overlay**
               Presents  information  identical  to  that  in  the  "parade", except that the graphs
               representing color components are superimposed directly over one another.

           Default is "stack".

### levels_mode
           Set mode. Can be either "linear", or "logarithmic".  Default is "linear".

### components
           Set what color components to display.  Default is 7.

### fgopacity
           Set foreground opacity. Default is 0.7.

### bgopacity
           Set background opacity. Default is 0.5.

### colors_mode
           Set colors mode.  It accepts the following values:

           **whiteonblack**
           **blackonwhite**
           **whiteongray**
           **blackongray**
           **coloronblack**
           **coloronwhite**
           **colorongray**
           **blackoncolor**
           **whiteoncolor**
           **grayoncolor**

           Default is "whiteonblack".

       _Examples_

       •   Calculate and draw histogram:

                   ffplay -i input -vf histogram

### hqdn3d
       This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce image noise,  producing
       smooth images and making still images really still. It should enhance compressibility.

       It accepts the following optional parameters:

### luma_spatial
           A  non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.  It defaults
           to 4.0.

### chroma_spatial
           A non-negative floating  point  number  which  specifies  spatial  chroma  strength.   It
           defaults to 3.0*_luma_spatial_/4.0.

### luma_tmp
           A  floating  point  number  which  specifies  luma  temporal  strength.  It  defaults  to
           6.0*_luma_spatial_/4.0.

### chroma_tmp
           A floating point  number  which  specifies  chroma  temporal  strength.  It  defaults  to
           _luma_tmp_*_chroma_spatial_/_luma_spatial_.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### hwdownload
       Download hardware frames to system memory.

       The input must be in hardware frames, and the output a non-hardware format.  Not all  formats
       will  be  supported on the output - it may be necessary to insert an additional **format **filter
       immediately following in the graph to get the output in a supported format.

### hwmap
       Map hardware frames to system memory or to another device.

       This filter has several different modes of operation; which one is used depends on the  input
       and output formats:

       •   Hardware frame input, normal frame output

           Map  the  input  frames  to  system  memory and pass them to the output.  If the original
           hardware frame is later required (for example, after overlaying something else on part of
           it), the **hwmap **filter can be used again in the next mode to retrieve it.

       •   Normal frame input, hardware frame output

           If the input is actually a software-mapped hardware frame,  then  unmap  it  -  that  is,
           return the original hardware frame.

           Otherwise,  a  device  must be provided.  Create new hardware surfaces on that device for
           the output, then map them back to the software format at the input and give those  frames
           to the preceding filter.  This will then act like the **hwupload **filter, but may be able to
           avoid an additional copy when the input is already in a compatible format.

       •   Hardware frame input and output

           A  device  must  be  supplied  for  the output, either directly or with the **derive_device**
           option.  The input and output devices must be of different types  and  compatible  -  the
           exact meaning of this is system-dependent, but typically it means that they must refer to
           the same underlying hardware context (for example, refer to the same graphics card).

           If  the input frames were originally created on the output device, then unmap to retrieve
           the original frames.

           Otherwise, map the frames to the output device - create new hardware frames on the output
           corresponding to the frames on the input.

       The following additional parameters are accepted:

### mode
           Set the frame mapping mode.  Some combination of:

           _read_
               The mapped frame should be readable.

           _write_
               The mapped frame should be writeable.

           _overwrite_
               The mapping will always overwrite the entire frame.

               This may improve performance in some cases, as the original  contents  of  the  frame
               need not be loaded.

           _direct_
               The mapping must not involve any copying.

               Indirect  mappings  to copies of frames are created in some cases where either direct
               mapping is not possible or it would have unexpected properties.   Setting  this  flag
               ensures that the mapping is direct and will fail if that is not possible.

           Defaults to _read+write_ if not specified.

       **derive_device _**type_
           Rather  than  using the device supplied at initialisation, instead derive a new device of
           type _type_ from the device the input frames exist on.

### reverse
           In a hardware to hardware mapping, map in reverse - create frames in  the  sink  and  map
           them  back  to  the  source.   This may be necessary in some cases where a mapping in one
           direction is required but only the opposite direction is supported by the  devices  being
           used.

           This  option  is dangerous - it may break the preceding filter in undefined ways if there
           are any additional constraints on that filter's output.  Do  not  use  it  without  fully
           understanding the implications of its use.

### hwupload
       Upload system memory frames to hardware surfaces.

       The  device  to  upload to must be supplied when the filter is initialised.  If using ffmpeg,
       select the appropriate device with the **-filter_hw_device **option  or  with  the  **derive_device**
       option.   The  input and output devices must be of different types and compatible - the exact
       meaning of this is system-dependent, but typically it means that they must refer to the  same
       underlying hardware context (for example, refer to the same graphics card).

       The following additional parameters are accepted:

       **derive_device _**type_
           Rather  than  using the device supplied at initialisation, instead derive a new device of
           type _type_ from the device the input frames exist on.

### hwupload_cuda
       Upload system memory frames to a CUDA device.

       It accepts the following optional parameters:

### device
           The number of the CUDA device to use

### hqx
       Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter was  originally
       created by Maxim Stepin.

       It accepts the following option:

       **n   **Set the scaling dimension: 2 for "hq2x", 3 for "hq3x" and 4 for "hq4x".  Default is 3.

### hstack
       Stack input videos horizontally.

       All streams must be of same pixel format and of same height.

       Note that this filter is faster than using **overlay **and **pad **filter to create same output.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### inputs
           Set number of input streams. Default is 2.

### shortest
           If  set  to  1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input terminates. Default
           value is 0.

### hsvhold
       Turns a certain HSV range into gray values.

       This filter measures color difference between set HSV color in options and ones  measured  in
       video stream. Depending on options, output colors can be changed to be gray or not.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **hue **Set  the  hue value which will be used in color difference calculation.  Allowed range is
           from -360 to 360. Default value is 0.

       **sat **Set the saturation value which will be used in  color  difference  calculation.   Allowed
           range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 0.

       **val **Set  the value which will be used in color difference calculation.  Allowed range is from
           -1 to 1. Default value is 0.

### similarity
           Set similarity percentage with the key color.  Allowed range is  from  0  to  1.  Default
           value is 0.01.

           0.00001 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.

### blend
           Blend percentage.  Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.

           0.0 makes pixels either fully gray, or not gray at all.

           Higher  values  result in more gray pixels, with a higher gray pixel the more similar the
           pixels color is to the key color.

### hsvkey
       Turns a certain HSV range into transparency.

       This filter measures color difference between set HSV color in options and ones  measured  in
       video  stream.  Depending  on  options, output colors can be changed to transparent by adding
       alpha channel.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **hue **Set the hue value which will be used in color difference calculation.  Allowed  range  is
           from -360 to 360. Default value is 0.

       **sat **Set  the  saturation  value  which will be used in color difference calculation.  Allowed
           range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 0.

       **val **Set the value which will be used in color difference calculation.  Allowed range is  from
           -1 to 1. Default value is 0.

### similarity
           Set  similarity  percentage  with  the  key color.  Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default
           value is 0.01.

           0.00001 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.

### blend
           Blend percentage.  Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.

           0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent, or not transparent at all.

           Higher values result in semi-transparent pixels, with  a  higher  transparency  the  more
           similar the pixels color is to the key color.

### hue
       Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **h   **Specify  the  hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression, and defaults to
           "0".

       **s   **Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression  and  defaults  to
           "1".

       **H   **Specify  the  hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an expression, and defaults to
           "0".

       **b   **Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression  and  defaults  to
           "0".

       **h **and **H **are mutually exclusive, and can't be specified at the same time.

       The **b**, **h**, **H **and **s **option values are expressions containing the following constants:

       **n   **frame count of the input frame starting from 0

       **pts **presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units

       **r   **frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown

       **t   **timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown

       **tb  **time base of the input video

       _Examples_

       •   Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:

                   hue=h=90:s=1

       •   Same command but expressing the hue in radians:

                   hue=H=PI/2:s=1

       •   Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0 and 2 over a period of 1 second:

                   hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"

       •   Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:

                   hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"

           The general fade-in expression can be written as:

                   hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"

       •   Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:

                   hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"

           The general fade-out expression can be written as:

                   hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

       **b**
       **s**
       **h**
       **H   **Modify  the  hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.  The command
           accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### huesaturation
       Apply hue-saturation-intensity adjustments to input video stream.

       This filter operates in RGB colorspace.

       This filter accepts the following options:

       **hue **Set the hue shift in degrees to apply. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from -180 to 180.

### saturation
           Set the saturation shift. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### intensity
           Set the intensity shift. Default is 0.  Allowed range is from -1 to 1.

### colors
           Set which primary and complementary colors are going to be adjusted.  This options is set
           by providing one or multiple values.  This can select multiple colors at once. By default
           all colors are selected.

           **r   **Adjust reds.

           **y   **Adjust yellows.

           **g   **Adjust greens.

           **c   **Adjust cyans.

           **b   **Adjust blues.

           **m   **Adjust magentas.

           **a   **Adjust all colors.

### strength
           Set strength of filtering. Allowed range is from 0 to 100.  Default value is 1.

### rw, gw, bw
           Set weight for each RGB component. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  By default  is  set  to
           0.333, 0.334, 0.333.  Those options are used in saturation and lightess processing.

### lightness
           Set  preserving  lightness,  by default is disabled.  Adjusting hues can change lightness
           from original RGB triplet, with this option enabled lightness is kept at same value.

### hysteresis
       Grow first stream into second stream by connecting components.  This  makes  it  possible  to
       build more robust edge masks.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set  which  planes  will  be  processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be copied from
           first stream.  By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

### threshold
           Set threshold which is used in filtering. If pixel component value is  higher  than  this
           value filter algorithm for connecting components is activated.  By default value is 0.

       The "hysteresis" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

### iccdetect
       Detect the colorspace  from an embedded ICC profile (if present), and update the frame's tags
       accordingly.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### force
           If  true,  the  frame's  existing  colorspace  tags  will  always be overridden by values
           detected from an ICC profile. Otherwise, they will  only  be  assigned  if  they  contain
           "unknown". Enabled by default.

### iccgen
       Generate ICC profiles and attach them to frames.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### color_primaries
### color_trc
           Configure the colorspace that the ICC profile will be generated for. The default value of
           "auto"  infers  the  value  from the input frame's metadata, defaulting to BT.709/sRGB as
           appropriate.

           See the **setparams **filter for a list of possible values, but note that "unknown"  are  not
           valid values for this filter.

### force
           If  true, an ICC profile will be generated even if it would overwrite an already existing
           ICC profile. Disabled by default.

### identity
       Obtain the identity score between two input videos.

       This filter takes two input videos.

       Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format  for  this  filter  to  work
       correctly.  Also  it  assumes  that  both  inputs  have  the same number of frames, which are
       compared one by one.

       The obtained per component, average, min and  max  identity  score  is  printed  through  the
       logging system.

       The filter stores the calculated identity scores of each frame in frame metadata.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       In  the  below example the input file _main.mpg_ being processed is compared with the reference
       file _ref.mpg_.

               ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi identity -f null -

### idet
       Detect video interlacing type.

       This filter tries to detect if the input frames are interlaced, progressive,  top  or  bottom
       field  first.  It will also try to detect fields that are repeated between adjacent frames (a
       sign of telecine).

       Single frame detection considers only  immediately  adjacent  frames  when  classifying  each
       frame.  Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.

       The filter will log these metadata values:

### single.current_frame
           Detected  type  of current frame using single-frame detection. One of: ``tff'' (top field
           first), ``bff'' (bottom field first), ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''

### single.tff
           Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.

### multiple.tff
           Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.

### single.bff
           Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.

### multiple.current_frame
           Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of: ``tff'' (top field
           first), ``bff'' (bottom field first), ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''

### multiple.bff
           Cumulative  number  of  frames  detected  as  bottom  field  first  using  multiple-frame
           detection.

### single.progressive
           Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.

### multiple.progressive
           Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.

### single.undetermined
           Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.

### multiple.undetermined
           Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.

### repeated.current_frame
           Which  field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of ``neither'', ``top'',
           or ``bottom''.

### repeated.neither
           Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.

### repeated.top
           Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from  the  previous  frame's  top
           field.

### repeated.bottom
           Cumulative  number  of  frames  with  the bottom field repeated from the previous frame's
           bottom field.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### intl_thres
           Set interlacing threshold.

### prog_thres
           Set progressive threshold.

### rep_thres
           Threshold for repeated field detection.

### half_life
           Number of frames after which a given frame's contribution to  the  statistics  is  halved
           (i.e.,  it  contributes  only 0.5 to its classification). The default of 0 means that all
           frames seen are given full weight of 1.0 forever.

### analyze_interlaced_flag
           When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine if  the
           interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.  If the flag is found
           to  be  accurate  it  will be used without any further computations, if it is found to be
           inaccurate it will be cleared without any further computations. This allows inserting the
           idet filter as a low computational method to clean up the interlaced flag

   **il**
       Deinterleave or interleave fields.

       This filter allows one to  process  interlaced  images  fields  without  deinterlacing  them.
       Deinterleaving  splits the input frame into 2 fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are
       moved to the top half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.   You  can  process
       (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### luma_mode, l
### chroma_mode, c
### alpha_mode, a
           Available values for _luma_mode_, _chroma_mode_ and _alpha_mode_ are:

           **none**
               Do nothing.

           **deinterleave, d**
               Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.

           **interleave, i**
               Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.

           Default value is "none".

### luma_swap, ls
### chroma_swap, cs
### alpha_swap, as
           Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is 0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### inflate
       Apply inflate effect to the video.

       This  filter  replaces the pixel by the [local(3x3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/local/3x3/markdown) average by taking into account only values
       higher than the pixel.

       It accepts the following options:

### threshold0
### threshold1
### threshold2
### threshold3
           Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is  65535.   If  0,  plane  will  remain
           unchanged.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### interlace
       Simple  interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or lower) lines
       from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,  halving  the  frame  rate  and
       preserving image height.

                  Original        Original             New Frame
                  Frame 'j'      Frame 'j+1'             (tff)
                 ==========      ===========       ==================
                   Line 0  -------------------->    Frame 'j' Line 0
                   Line 1          Line 1  ---->   Frame 'j+1' Line 1
                   Line 2 --------------------->    Frame 'j' Line 2
                   Line 3          Line 3  ---->   Frame 'j+1' Line 3
                    ...             ...                   ...
               New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on

       It accepts the following optional parameters:

### scan
           This  determines  whether  the interlaced frame is taken from the even (tff - default) or
           odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.

### lowpass
           Vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter interlacing and reduce moire patterns.

           **0, off**
               Disable vertical lowpass filter

           **1, linear**
               Enable linear filter (default)

           **2, complex**
               Enable complex filter. This will slightly less reduce twitter and  moire  but  better
               retain detail and subjective sharpness impression.

### kerndeint
       Deinterlace  input  video  by  applying  Donald  Graft's adaptive kernel deinterling. Work on
       interlaced parts of a video to produce progressive frames.

       The description of the accepted parameters follows.

### thresh
           Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when determining if a  pixel  line
           must be processed. It must be an integer in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value
           of 0 will result in applying the process on every pixels.

       **map **Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.  Default is 0.

### order
           Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if 0. Default is 0.

### sharp
           Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.

### twoway
           Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply default values:

                   kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0

       •   Enable additional sharpening:

                   kerndeint=sharp=1

       •   Paint processed pixels in white:

                   kerndeint=map=1

### kirsch
       Apply kirsch operator to input video stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set  which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### lagfun
       Slowly update darker pixels.

       This filter makes short flashes of light appear longer.  This filter  accepts  the  following
       options:

### decay
           Set factor for decaying. Default is .95. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### lenscorrection
       Correct radial lens distortion

       This  filter  can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use of wide
       angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the  right  parameters  one  can  use
       tools  available  for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.  To use opencv use
       the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources and extract the k1 and  k2
       coefficients from the resulting matrix.

       Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and Digikam
       from the KDE project.

       In  contrast  to  the **vignette **filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors, this
       filter corrects the distortion  of  the  image,  whereas  **vignette  **corrects  the  brightness
       distribution,  so you may want to use both filters together in certain cases, though you will
       have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should be applied before or after lens
       correction.

       _Options_

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **cx  **Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and  thereby  the  center  of  the
           distortion.  This  value  has  a  range  [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
           width. Default is 0.5.

       **cy  **Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and  thereby  the  center  of  the
           distortion.  This  value  has  a  range  [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
           height. Default is 0.5.

       **k1  **Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. This value has a range [-1,1]. 0  means  no
           correction. Default is 0.

       **k2  **Coefficient  of  the  double quadratic correction term. This value has a range [-1,1].  0
           means no correction. Default is 0.

       **i   **Set interpolation type. Can be "nearest" or "bilinear".  Default is "nearest".

       **fc  **Specify the color of the unmapped pixels. For  the  syntax  of  this  option,  check  the
           **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default color is "black@0".

       The formula that generates the correction is:

       _r_src_ = _r_tgt_ * (1 + _k1_ * (_r_tgt_ / _r_0_)^2 + _k2_ * (_r_tgt_ / _r_0_)^4)

       where _r_0_ is halve of the image diagonal and _r_src_ and _r_tgt_ are the distances from the focal
       point in the source and target images, respectively.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### lensfun
       Apply lens correction via the lensfun library (<**<http://lensfun.sourceforge.net/>**>).

       The "lensfun" filter requires the camera make, camera model, and lens model to apply the lens
       correction.  The filter will load the lensfun database and query it to find the corresponding
       camera and lens entries in the database. As long as these entries can be found with the given
       options, the filter can perform corrections on frames.  Note  that  incomplete  strings  will
       result  in  the  filter  choosing  the best match with the given options, and the filter will
       output the chosen camera and lens models (logged with level "info").  You  must  provide  the
       make, camera model, and lens model as they are required.

       To  obtain  a list of available makes and models, leave out one or both of "make" and "model"
       options. The filter will send the full list to the log with level "INFO".  The  first  column
       is  the  make  and the second column is the model.  To obtain a list of available lenses, set
       any values for make and model and leave out the "lens_model" option. The filter will send the
       full list of lenses in the log with level "INFO". The ffmpeg tool will exit after the list is
       printed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### make
           The make of the camera (for example, "Canon"). This option is required.

### model
           The model of the camera (for example, "Canon EOS 100D"). This option is required.

### lens_model
           The model of the lens (for example, "Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM").  This  option
           is required.

### db_path
           The  full  path  to the lens database folder. If not set, the filter will attempt to load
           the database from the install path when the library was built. Default is unset.

### mode
           The type of correction to apply. The following values are valid options:

           **vignetting**
               Enables fixing lens vignetting.

           **geometry**
               Enables fixing lens geometry. This is the default.

           **subpixel**
               Enables fixing chromatic aberrations.

           **vig_geo**
               Enables fixing lens vignetting and lens geometry.

           **vig_subpixel**
               Enables fixing lens vignetting and chromatic aberrations.

           **distortion**
               Enables fixing both lens geometry and chromatic aberrations.

           **all **Enables all possible corrections.

### focal_length
           The focal length of the image/video (zoom; expected constant for video). For  example,  a
           18--55mm  lens  has  focal  length  range of [18--55], so a value in that range should be
           chosen when using that lens. Default 18.

### aperture
           The aperture of the image/video (expected constant for video). Note that aperture is only
           used for vignetting correction. Default 3.5.

### focus_distance
           The focus distance of the image/video (expected constant  for  video).  Note  that  focus
           distance  is only used for vignetting and only slightly affects the vignetting correction
           process. If unknown, leave it at the default value (which is 1000).

### scale
           The scale factor which is applied after transformation. After correction the video is  no
           longer  necessarily  rectangular. This parameter controls how much of the resulting image
           is visible. The value 0 means that a value will be chosen automatically such  that  there
           is  little  or no unmapped area in the output image. 1.0 means that no additional scaling
           is done. Lower values may result in more of the  corrected  image  being  visible,  while
           higher values may avoid unmapped areas in the output.

### target_geometry
           The target geometry of the output image/video. The following values are valid options:

           **rectilinear (default)**
           **fisheye**
           **panoramic**
           **equirectangular**
           **fisheye_orthographic**
           **fisheye_stereographic**
           **fisheye_equisolid**
           **fisheye_thoby**
### reverse
           Apply the reverse of image correction (instead of correcting distortion, apply it).

### interpolation
           The type of interpolation used when correcting distortion. The following values are valid
           options:

           **nearest**
           **linear (default)**
           **lanczos**

       _Examples_

       •   Apply  lens  correction  with make "Canon", camera model "Canon EOS 100D", and lens model
           "Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM" with focal length of "18" and aperture of "8.0".

                   ffmpeg -i input.mov -vf lensfun=make=Canon:model="Canon EOS 100D":lens_model="Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM":focal_length=18:aperture=8 -c:v h264 -b:v 8000k output.mov

       •   Apply the same as before, but only for the first 5 seconds of video.

                   ffmpeg -i input.mov -vf lensfun=make=Canon:model="Canon EOS 100D":lens_model="Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM":focal_length=18:aperture=8:enable='lte(t\,5)' -c:v h264 -b:v 8000k output.mov

### libplacebo
       Flexible      GPU-accelerated      processing      filter      based      on       libplacebo
       (<**<https://code.videolan.org/videolan/libplacebo>**>).

       _Options_

       The options for this filter are divided into the following sections:

       Output mode

       These  options  control  the overall output mode. By default, libplacebo will try to preserve
       the source colorimetry and size as best as it can, but it will apply any embedded film grain,
       dolby vision metadata or anamorphic SAR present in source frames.

### inputs
           Set the number of inputs. This can be  used,  alongside  the  "idx"  variable,  to  allow
           placing/blending  multiple  inputs  inside  the  output  frame.  This effectively enables
           functionality similar to **hstack**, **overlay**, etc.

       **w**
       **h   **Set the output video dimension expression. Default values are "iw" and "ih".

           Allows for the same expressions as the **scale **filter.

### crop_x
### crop_y
           Set the input crop x/y expressions, default values are "(iw-cw)/2" and "(ih-ch)/2".

### crop_w
### crop_h
           Set the input crop width/height expressions, default values are "iw" and "ih".

### pos_x
### pos_y
           Set the output placement x/y expressions, default values are "(ow-pw)/2" and "(oh-ph)/2".

### pos_w
### pos_h
           Set the output placement width/height expressions, default values are "ow" and "oh".

       **fps **Set the output frame rate. This can be rational, e.g. "60000/1001". If set to the special
           string "none" (the default), input timestamps will  instead  be  passed  through  to  the
           output unmodified. Otherwise, the input video frames will be interpolated as necessary to
           rescale  the  video  to  the specified target framerate, in a manner as determined by the
           **frame_mixer **option.

### format
           Set the output format override. If unset (the default), frames will be output in the same
           format as the respective input frames. Otherwise, format conversion will be performed.

### force_original_aspect_ratio
### force_divisible_by
           Work the same as the identical **scale **filter options.

### normalize_sar
           If enabled, output frames will always have  a  pixel  aspect  ratio  of  1:1.  This  will
           introduce additional padding/cropping as necessary. If disabled (the default), any aspect
           ratio  mismatches,  including  those from e.g. anamorphic video sources, are forwarded to
           the output pixel aspect ratio.

### pad_crop_ratio
           Specifies a ratio (between 0.0 and 1.0) between  padding  and  cropping  when  the  input
           aspect  ratio  does not match the output aspect ratio and **normalize_sar **is in effect. The
           default of 0.0 always pads the content with black borders, while a value  of  1.0  always
           crops off parts of the content. Intermediate values are possible, leading to a mix of the
           two approaches.

### fillcolor
           Set  the  color used to fill the output area not covered by the output image, for example
           as a result of **normalize_sar**. For the general syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**. Defaults to "black".

### corner_rounding
           Render  frames with rounded corners. The value, given as a float ranging from 0.0 to 1.0,
           indicates the relative degree of rounding, from fully square to fully circular. In  other
           words, it gives the radius divided by half the smaller side length. Defaults to 0.0.

### extra_opts
           Pass extra libplacebo internal configuration options. These can be specified as a list of
           _key_=_value_  pairs  separated by ':'. The following example shows how to configure a custom
           filter kernel ("EWA LanczosSharp") and use it to double the input image resolution:

                   -vf "libplacebo=w=iw*2:h=ih*2:extra_opts='upscaler=custom\:upscaler_preset=ewa_lanczos\:upscaler_blur=0.9812505644269356'"

### colorspace
### color_primaries
### color_trc
### range
           Configure the colorspace that output frames will be delivered in. The  default  value  of
           "auto"  outputs  frames in the same format as the input frames, leading to no change. For
           any other value, conversion will be performed.

           See the **setparams **filter for a list of possible values.

### apply_filmgrain
           Apply film grain (e.g. AV1 or H.274) if present in source frames, and strip it  from  the
           output. Enabled by default.

### apply_dolbyvision
           Apply  Dolby  Vision  RPU  metadata  if  present  in source frames, and strip it from the
           output. Enabled by default.  Note  that  Dolby  Vision  will  always  output  BT.2020+PQ,
           overriding  the  usual  input  frame metadata. These will also be picked as the values of
           "auto" for the respective frame output options.

       In addition to the expression constants documented for the **scale **filter, the **crop_w**,  **crop_h**,
       **crop_x**,  **crop_y**,  **pos_w**,  **pos_h**,  **pos_x  **and  **pos_y  **options  can  also contain the following
       constants:

### in_idx, idx
           The (0-based) numeric index of the currently active input stream.

### crop_w, cw
### crop_h, ch
           The computed values of **crop_w **and **crop_h**.

### pos_w, pw
### pos_h, ph
           The computed values of **pos_w **and **pos_h**.

### in_t, t
           The input frame timestamp, in seconds. NAN if input timestamp is unknown.

### out_t, ot
           The input frame timestamp, in seconds. NAN if input timestamp is unknown.

       **n   **The input frame number, starting with 0.

       Scaling

       The options in this section control how libplacebo  performs  upscaling  and  (if  necessary)
       downscaling.  Note  that  libplacebo  will always internally operate on 4:4:4 content, so any
       sub-sampled chroma formats such as "yuv420p" will necessarily be upsampled and downsampled as
       part of the rendering process. That means scaling might be in effect even if the  source  and
       destination resolution are the same.

### upscaler
### downscaler
           Configure  the  filter kernel used for upscaling and downscaling. The respective defaults
           are "spline36" and "mitchell". For a full list of possible values, pass "help"  to  these
           options. The most important values are:

           **none**
               Forces  the use of built-in GPU texture sampling (typically bilinear). Extremely fast
               but poor quality, especially when downscaling.

           **bilinear**
               Bilinear interpolation. Can generally be done for free on GPUs, except when doing  so
               would lead to aliasing. Fast and low quality.

           **nearest**
               Nearest-neighbour interpolation. Sharp but highly aliasing.

           **oversample**
               Algorithm that looks visually similar to nearest-neighbour interpolation but tries to
               preserve  pixel  aspect  ratio.  Good  for  pixel  art,  since  it results in minimal
               distortion of the artistic appearance.

           **lanczos**
               Standard sinc-sinc interpolation kernel.

           **spline36**
               Cubic spline approximation of lanczos. No difference in  performance,  but  has  very
               slightly less ringing.

           **ewa_lanczos**
               Elliptically  weighted average version of lanczos, based on a jinc-sinc kernel.  This
               is also popularly referred to as just "Jinc scaling". Slow but very high quality.

           **gaussian**
               Gaussian kernel. Has certain ideal mathematical  properties,  but  subjectively  very
               blurry.

           **mitchell**
               Cubic  BC  spline  with parameters recommended by Mitchell and Netravali. Very little
               ringing.

### frame_mixer
           Controls the kernel used for mixing frames temporally. The default value is "none", which
           disables frame mixing. For a full list of possible values, pass "help"  to  this  option.
           The most important values are:

           **none**
               Disables frame mixing, giving a result equivalent to "nearest neighbour" semantics.

           **oversample**
               Oversamples  the  input  video  to create a "Smooth Motion"-type effect: if an output
               frame would exactly fall on the transition between two video frames,  it  is  blended
               according to the relative overlap. This is the recommended option whenever preserving
               the original subjective appearance is desired.

           **mitchell_clamp**
               Larger  filter kernel that smoothly interpolates multiple frames in a manner designed
               to eliminate ringing and other artefacts as much as possible. This is the recommended
               option wherever maximum visual smoothness is desired.

           **linear**
               Linear  blend/fade  between  frames.  Especially   useful   for   constructing   e.g.
               slideshows.

### lut_entries
           Configures  the  size  of  scaler LUTs, ranging from 1 to 256. The default of 0 will pick
           libplacebo's internal default, typically 64.

### antiringing
           Enables anti-ringing (for non-EWA filters). The value (between 0.0  and  1.0)  configures
           the  strength  of  the  anti-ringing  algorithm.  May  increase aliasing if set too high.
           Disabled by default.

### sigmoid
           Enable sigmoidal compression during upscaling.  Reduces  ringing  slightly.   Enabled  by
           default.

       Debanding

       Libplacebo  comes  with a built-in debanding filter that is good at counteracting many common
       sources of banding and blocking. Turning this on is highly recommended  whenever  quality  is
       desired.

### deband
           Enable (fast) debanding algorithm. Disabled by default.

### deband_iterations
           Number  of deband iterations of the debanding algorithm. Each iteration is performed with
           progressively increased radius (and diminished threshold).  Recommended values are in the
           range 1 to 4. Defaults to 1.

### deband_threshold
           Debanding filter strength. Higher numbers lead to more aggressive debanding.  Defaults to
           4.0.

### deband_radius
           Debanding filter radius. A higher radius is better for  slow  gradients,  while  a  lower
           radius is better for steep gradients. Defaults to 16.0.

### deband_grain
           Amount of extra output grain to add. Helps hide imperfections. Defaults to 6.0.

       Color adjustment

       A  collection  of subjective color controls. Not very rigorous, so the exact effect will vary
       somewhat depending on the input primaries and colorspace.

### brightness
           Brightness boost, between -1.0 and 1.0. Defaults to 0.0.

### contrast
           Contrast gain, between 0.0 and 16.0. Defaults to 1.0.

### saturation
           Saturation gain, between 0.0 and 16.0. Defaults to 1.0.

       **hue **Hue shift in radians, between -3.14 and 3.14. Defaults to 0.0. This will  rotate  the  UV
           subvector, defaulting to BT.709 coefficients for RGB inputs.

### gamma
           Gamma adjustment, between 0.0 and 16.0. Defaults to 1.0.

### cones
           Cone model to use for color blindness simulation. Accepts any combination of "l", "m" and
           "s". Here are some examples:

           **m   **Deuteranomaly / deuteranopia (affecting 3%-4% of the population)

           **l   **Protanomaly / protanopia (affecting 1%-2% of the population)

           **l+m **Monochromacy (very rare)

           **l+m+s**
               Achromatopsy (complete loss of daytime vision, extremely rare)

### cone-strength
           Gain  factor  for  the  cones  specified by "cones", between 0.0 and 10.0. A value of 1.0
           results in no change to color vision. A value of 0.0  (the  default)  simulates  complete
           loss  of  those  cones.  Values  above 1.0 result in exaggerating the differences between
           cones, which may help compensate for reduced color vision.

       Peak detection

       To help deal with sources that only have static HDR10 metadata (or  no  tagging  whatsoever),
       libplacebo  uses  its own internal frame analysis compute shader to analyze source frames and
       adapt the tone mapping function in realtime. If this is too slow, or if exactly  reproducible
       frame-perfect results are needed, it's recommended to turn this feature off.

### peak_detect
           Enable  HDR  peak  detection.  Ignores  static  MaxCLL/MaxFALL values in favor of dynamic
           detection from the input. Note that the detected values do not get written  back  to  the
           output frames, they merely guide the internal tone mapping process. Enabled by default.

### smoothing_period
           Peak  detection  smoothing  period,  between 0.0 and 1000.0. Higher values result in peak
           detection becoming less responsive to changes in the input. Defaults to 100.0.

### minimum_peak
           Lower bound on the detected peak (relative to SDR white), between 0.0 and 100.0. Defaults
           to 1.0.

### scene_threshold_low
### scene_threshold_high
           Lower and upper thresholds for scene change detection. Expressed in a  logarithmic  scale
           between  0.0  and  100.0.  Default  to  5.5  and  10.0, respectively. Setting either to a
           negative value disables this functionality.

### percentile
           Which percentile of the frame brightness histogram to use as the source  peak  for  tone-
           mapping. Defaults to 99.995, a fairly conservative value.  Setting this to 100.0 disables
           frame histogram measurement and instead uses the true peak brightness for tone-mapping.

       Tone mapping

       The  options  in  this section control how libplacebo performs tone-mapping and gamut-mapping
       when dealing with mismatches between wide-gamut  or  HDR  content.   In  general,  libplacebo
       relies on accurate source tagging and mastering display gamut information to produce the best
       results.

### gamut_mode
           How  to  handle  out-of-gamut  colors  that  can  occur as a result of colorimetric gamut
           mapping.

           **clip**
               Do nothing, simply clip out-of-range colors  to  the  RGB  volume.  Low  quality  but
               extremely fast.

           **perceptual**
               Perceptually soft-clip colors to the gamut volume. This is the default.

           **relative**
               Relative colorimetric hard-clip. Similar to "perceptual" but without the soft knee.

           **saturation**
               Saturation  mapping,  maps  primaries  directly  to  primaries  in  RGB  space.   Not
               recommended except for artificial computer graphics for  which  a  bright,  saturated
               display is desired.

           **absolute**
               Absolute colorimetric hard-clip. Performs no adjustment of the white point.

           **desaturate**
               Hard-desaturates  out-of-gamut  colors towards white, while preserving the luminance.
               Has a tendency to distort the visual appearance of bright objects.

           **darken**
               Linearly reduces content brightness  to  preserves  saturated  details,  followed  by
               clipping the remaining out-of-gamut colors.

           **warn**
               Highlight out-of-gamut pixels (by inverting/marking them).

           **linear**
               Linearly  reduces  chromaticity  of the entire image to make it fit within the target
               color volume. Be careful when using this on BT.2020 sources without proper  mastering
               metadata, as doing so will lead to excessive desaturation.

### tonemapping
           Tone-mapping algorithm to use. Available values are:

           **auto**
               Automatic selection based on internal heuristics. This is the default.

           **clip**
               Performs  no  tone-mapping,  just  clips  out-of-range  colors. Retains perfect color
               accuracy for in-range colors but completely destroys out-of-range information.   Does
               not perform any black point adaptation. Not configurable.

           **st2094-40**
               EETF  from  SMPTE  ST  2094-40  Annex  B, which applies the Bezier curves from HDR10+
               dynamic metadata based on Bezier curves to perform tone-mapping.  The  OOTF  used  is
               adjusted based on the ratio between the targeted and actual display peak luminances.

           **st2094-10**
               EETF  from  SMPTE  ST  2094-10  Annex  B.2, which takes into account the input signal
               average luminance in addition  to  the  maximum/minimum.  The  configurable  contrast
               parameter influences the slope of the linear output segment, defaulting to 1.0 for no
               increase/decrease  in  contrast.  Note  that  this  does  not  currently  include the
               subjective gain/offset/gamma controls defined in Annex B.3.

           **bt.2390**
               EETF from the ITU-R Report BT.2390, a hermite spline roll-off  with  linear  segment.
               The  knee  point  offset  is  configurable. Note that this parameter defaults to 1.0,
               rather than the value of 0.5 from the ITU-R spec.

           **bt.2446a**
               EETF from ITU-R Report BT.2446, method A. Designed for well-mastered HDR sources. Can
               be used for both forward and inverse tone mapping. Not configurable.

           **spline**
               Simple spline consisting of two polynomials, joined by a  single  pivot  point.   The
               parameter  gives  the pivot point (in PQ space), defaulting to 0.30.  Can be used for
               both forward and inverse tone mapping.

           **reinhard**
               Simple non-linear, global tone mapping algorithm. The parameter specifies  the  local
               contrast  coefficient  at  the  display peak. Essentially, a parameter of 0.5 implies
               that the reference white will be about half as bright as when clipping.  Defaults  to
               0.5, which results in the simplest formulation of this function.

           **mobius**
               Generalization of the reinhard tone mapping algorithm to support an additional linear
               slope  near  black.  The  tone  mapping parameter indicates the trade-off between the
               linear section and the non-linear section. Essentially,  for  a  given  parameter  _x_,
               every  color  value  below  _x_  will  be mapped linearly, while higher values get non-
               linearly tone-mapped. Values near 1.0 make  this  curve  behave  like  "clip",  while
               values  near  0.0  make  this curve behave like "reinhard". The default value is 0.3,
               which provides a good balance between colorimetric accuracy  and  preserving  out-of-
               gamut details.

           **hable**
               Piece-wise,  filmic  tone-mapping  algorithm  developed  by  John  Hable  for  use in
               Uncharted 2, inspired by a similar tone-mapping algorithm used by Kodak.  Popularized
               by its use in video games with HDR rendering. Preserves both dark and bright  details
               very  well,  but  comes  with  the  drawback of changing the average brightness quite
               significantly. This is sort of similar to "reinhard" with parameter 0.24.

           **gamma**
               Fits a gamma (power) function to transfer between the source and target color spaces,
               effectively resulting in a perceptual hard-knee joining two roughly linear  sections.
               This  preserves  details  at all scales fairly accurately, but can result in an image
               with a muted or  dull  appearance.  The  parameter  is  used  as  the  cutoff  point,
               defaulting to 0.5.

           **linear**
               Linearly  stretches  the  input  range  to  the  output range, in PQ space. This will
               preserve all details accurately, but results in  a  significantly  different  average
               brightness. Can be used for inverse tone-mapping in addition to regular tone-mapping.
               The  parameter  can  be  used as an additional linear gain coefficient (defaulting to
               1.0).

### tonemapping_param
           For tunable tone mapping functions, this parameter can be used  to  fine-tune  the  curve
           behavior.  Refer  to  the  documentation  of  "tonemapping".  The default value of 0.0 is
           replaced by the curve's preferred default setting.

### inverse_tonemapping
           If enabled, this filter will also attempt stretching SDR signals to fill HDR output color
           volumes. Disabled by default.

### tonemapping_lut_size
           Size of the tone-mapping LUT, between 2 and 1024. Defaults to 256. Note that this  figure
           is squared when combined with "peak_detect".

### contrast_recovery
           Contrast recovery strength. If set to a value above 0.0, the source image will be divided
           into  high-frequency  and  low-frequency  components, and a portion of the high-frequency
           image is added back onto the tone-mapped output.  May cause excessive  ringing  artifacts
           for  some  HDR  sources, but can improve the subjective sharpness and detail left over in
           the image after tone-mapping.  Defaults to 0.30.

### contrast_smoothness
           Contrast recovery lowpass kernel size. Defaults to 3.5.  Increasing  or  decreasing  this
           will  affect  the visual appearance substantially. Has no effect when "contrast_recovery"
           is disabled.

       Dithering

       By default, libplacebo will dither  whenever  necessary,  which  includes  rendering  to  any
       integer  format  below  16-bit precision. It's recommended to always leave this on, since not
       doing so may result in visible banding in the output,  even  if  the  "debanding"  filter  is
       enabled.  If  maximum  performance  is  needed,  use  "ordered_fixed"  instead  of  disabling
       dithering.

### dithering
           Dithering method to use. Accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Disables dithering completely. May result in visible banding.

           **blue**
               Dither with pseudo-blue noise. This is the default.

           **ordered**
               Tunable ordered dither pattern.

           **ordered_fixed**
               Faster ordered dither with a fixed size of 6. Texture-less.

           **white**
               Dither with white noise. Texture-less.

### dither_lut_size
           Dither LUT size, as log base2 between 1 and 8. Defaults to 6, corresponding to a LUT size
           of "64x64".

### dither_temporal
           Enables temporal dithering. Disabled by default.

       Custom shaders

       libplacebo supports a number of custom  shaders  based  on  the  mpv  .hook  GLSL  syntax.  A
       collection        of        such        shaders        can        be        found       here:
       <**<https://github.com/mpv-player/mpv/wiki/User-Scripts#user-shaders>**>

       A full description of the mpv shader format is beyond  the  scope  of  this  section,  but  a
       summary can be found here: <**<https://mpv.io/manual/master/#options-glsl-shader>**>

### custom_shader_path
           Specifies a path to a custom shader file to load at runtime.

### custom_shader_bin
           Specifies a complete custom shader as a raw string.

       Debugging / performance

       All  of the options in this section default off. They may be of assistance when attempting to
       squeeze the maximum performance at the cost of quality.

### skip_aa
           Disable anti-aliasing when downscaling.

### polar_cutoff
           Truncate polar (EWA) scaler kernels below this absolute magnitude, between 0.0 and 1.0.

### disable_linear
           Disable linear light scaling.

### disable_builtin
           Disable built-in GPU sampling (forces LUT).

### disable_fbos
           Forcibly disable FBOs, resulting in loss of almost all functionality,  but  offering  the
           maximum possible speed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports almost all of the above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Tone-map input to standard gamut BT.709 output:

                   libplacebo=colorspace=bt709:color_primaries=bt709:color_trc=bt709:range=tv

       •   Rescale input to fit into standard 1080p, with high quality scaling:

                   libplacebo=w=1920:h=1080:force_original_aspect_ratio=decrease:normalize_sar=true:upscaler=ewa_lanczos:downscaler=ewa_lanczos

       •   Interpolate low FPS / VFR input to smoothed constant 60 fps output:

                   libplacebo=fps=60:frame_mixer=mitchell_clamp

       •   Convert input to standard sRGB JPEG:

                   libplacebo=format=yuv420p:colorspace=bt470bg:color_primaries=bt709:color_trc=iec61966-2-1:range=pc

       •   Use higher quality debanding settings:

                   libplacebo=deband=true:deband_iterations=3:deband_radius=8:deband_threshold=6

       •   Run  this  filter on the CPU, on systems with Mesa installed (and with the most expensive
           options disabled):

                   ffmpeg ... -init_hw_device vulkan:llvmpipe ... -vf libplacebo=upscaler=none:downscaler=none:peak_detect=false

       •   Suppress CPU-based AV1/H.274 film grain application in the decoder, in favor of doing  it
           with  this  filter. Note that this is only a gain if the frames are either already on the
           GPU, or if you're using libplacebo for other purposes, since otherwise the VRAM roundtrip
           will more than offset any expected speedup.

                   ffmpeg -export_side_data +film_grain ... -vf libplacebo=apply_filmgrain=true

       •   Interop with VAAPI hwdec to avoid round-tripping through RAM:

                   ffmpeg -init_hw_device vulkan -hwaccel vaapi -hwaccel_output_format vaapi ... -vf libplacebo

### libvmaf
       Calulate the VMAF (Video Multi-Method Assessment Fusion) score for a reference/distorted pair
       of input videos.

       The first input is the distorted video, and the second input is the reference video.

       The obtained VMAF score is printed through the logging system.

       It requires Netflix's vmaf library  (libvmaf)  as  a  pre-requisite.   After  installing  the
       library it can be enabled using: "./configure --enable-libvmaf".

       The filter has following options:

### model
           A  `|`  delimited  list  of  vmaf  models.  Each model can be configured with a number of
           parameters.  Default value: "version=vmaf_v0.6.1"

### feature
           A `|` delimited list of features. Each  feature  can  be  configured  with  a  number  of
           parameters.

### log_path
           Set the file path to be used to store log files.

### log_fmt
           Set the format of the log file (xml, json, csv, or sub).

### n_threads
           Set  number  of  threads  to  be  used  when  initializing libvmaf.  Default value: 0, no
           threads.

### n_subsample
           Set frame subsampling interval to be used.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       _Examples_

       •   In the examples below, a distorted video _distorted.mpg_ is compared with a reference  file
           _reference.mpg_.

       •   Basic usage:

                   ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mpg -lavfi libvmaf=log_path=output.xml -f null -

       •   Example with multiple models:

                   ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mpg -lavfi libvmaf='model=version=vmaf_v0.6.1\\:name=vmaf|version=vmaf_v0.6.1neg\\:name=vmaf_neg' -f null -

       •   Example with multiple addtional features:

                   ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mpg -lavfi libvmaf='feature=name=psnr|name=ciede' -f null -

       •   Example with options and different containers:

                   ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mkv -lavfi "[0:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[main];[1:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[ref];[main][ref]libvmaf=log_fmt=json:log_path=output.json" -f null -

### libvmaf_cuda
       This is the CUDA variant of the **libvmaf **filter. It only accepts CUDA frames.

       It  requires  Netflix's  vmaf  library  (libvmaf)  as  a pre-requisite.  After installing the
       library  it  can  be  enabled   using:   "./configure   --enable-nonfree   --enable-ffnvcodec
       --enable-libvmaf".

       _Examples_

       •   Basic usage showing CUVID hardware decoding and CUDA scaling with **scale_cuda**:

                   ffmpeg \
                       -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -codec:v av1_cuvid -i dis.obu \
                       -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -codec:v av1_cuvid -i ref.obu \
                       -filter_complex "
                           [0:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv420p[ref]; \
                           [1:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv420p[dis]; \
                           [dis][ref]libvmaf_cuda=log_fmt=json:log_path=output.json
                       " \
                       -f null -

### limitdiff
       Apply limited difference filter using second and optionally third video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### threshold
           Set  the  threshold  to use when allowing certain differences between video streams.  Any
           absolute difference value lower or exact than this threshold will pick  pixel  components
           from first video stream.

### elasticity
           Set  the  elasticity  of  soft  thresholding  when  processing video streams.  This value
           multiplied with first one sets second threshold.  Any absolute difference  value  greater
           or  exact  than second threshold will pick pixel components from second video stream. For
           values between those two threshold linear interpolation between first  and  second  video
           stream will be used.

### reference
           Enable  the  reference  (third) video stream processing. By default is disabled.  If set,
           this video stream will be used for  calculating  absolute  difference  with  first  video
           stream.

### planes
           Specify which planes will be processed. Defaults to all available.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands **except option **reference**.

### limiter
       Limits the pixel components values to the specified range [min, max].

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **min **Lower bound. Defaults to the lowest allowed value for the input.

       **max **Upper bound. Defaults to the highest allowed value for the input.

### planes
           Specify which planes will be processed. Defaults to all available.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### loop
       Loop video frames.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### loop
           Set the number of loops. Setting this value to -1 will result in infinite loops.  Default
           is 0.

### size
           Set maximal size in number of frames. Default is 0.

### start
           Set first frame of loop. Default is 0.

### time
           Set the time of loop start in seconds.  Only used if option named _start_ is set to -1.

       _Examples_

       •   Loop single first frame infinitely:

                   loop=loop=-1:size=1:start=0

       •   Loop single first frame 10 times:

                   loop=loop=10:size=1:start=0

       •   Loop 10 first frames 5 times:

                   loop=loop=5:size=10:start=0

### lut1d
       Apply a 1D LUT to an input video.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### file
           Set the 1D LUT file name.

           Currently supported formats:

           **cube**
               Iridas

           **csp **cineSpace

### interp
           Select interpolation mode.

           Available values are:

           **nearest**
               Use values from the nearest defined point.

           **linear**
               Interpolate values using the linear interpolation.

           **cosine**
               Interpolate values using the cosine interpolation.

           **cubic**
               Interpolate values using the cubic interpolation.

           **spline**
               Interpolate values using the spline interpolation.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### lut3d
       Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### file
           Set the 3D LUT file name.

           Currently supported formats:

           **3dl **AfterEffects

           **cube**
               Iridas

           **dat **DaVinci

           **m3d **Pandora

           **csp **cineSpace

### interp
           Select interpolation mode.

           Available values are:

           **nearest**
               Use values from the nearest defined point.

           **trilinear**
               Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.

           **tetrahedral**
               Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.

           **pyramid**
               Interpolate values using a pyramid.

           **prism**
               Interpolate values using a prism.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the "interp" option as **commands**.

### lumakey
       Turn certain luma values into transparency.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### threshold
           Set the luma which will be used as base for transparency.  Default value is 0.

### tolerance
           Set the range of luma values to be keyed out.  Default value is 0.01.

### softness
           Set  the  range  of softness. Default value is 0.  Use this to control gradual transition
           from zero to full transparency.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
       Compute  a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value to an output value, and
       apply it to the input video.

       _lutyuv_ applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, _lutrgb_ to an RGB input video.

       These filters accept the following parameters:

       **c0  **set first pixel component expression

       **c1  **set second pixel component expression

       **c2  **set third pixel component expression

       **c3  **set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component

       **r   **set red component expression

       **g   **set green component expression

       **b   **set blue component expression

       **a   **alpha component expression

       **y   **set Y/luma component expression

       **u   **set U/Cb component expression

       **v   **set V/Cr component expression

       Each of them specifies the  expression  to  use  for  computing  the  lookup  table  for  the
       corresponding pixel component values.

       The exact component associated to each of the _c*_ options depends on the format in input.

       The  _lut_  filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input, _lutrgb_ requires RGB pixel
       formats in input, and _lutyuv_ requires YUV.

       The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:

       **w**
       **h   **The input width and height.

       **val **The input value for the pixel component.

### clipval
           The input value, clipped to the _minval_-_maxval_ range.

### maxval
           The maximum value for the pixel component.

### minval
           The minimum value for the pixel component.

### negval
           The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the _minval_-_maxval_  range;  it
           corresponds to the expression "maxval-clipval+minval".

### clip(val)
           The computed value in _val_, clipped to the _minval_-_maxval_ range.

### gammaval(gamma)
           The  computed  gamma  correction  value  of  the  pixel  component  value, clipped to the
           _minval_-_maxval_       range.       It       corresponds       to       the       expression
           "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,_gamma_)*(maxval-minval)+minval"

       All expressions default to "clipval".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

       _Examples_

       •   Negate input video:

                   lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
                   lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"

           The above is the same as:

                   lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
                   lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"

       •   Negate luma:

                   lutyuv=y=negval

       •   Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:

                   lutyuv="u=128:v=128"

       •   Apply a luma burning effect:

                   lutyuv="y=2*val"

       •   Remove green and blue components:

                   lutrgb="g=0:b=0"

       •   Set a constant alpha channel value on input:

                   format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"

       •   Correct luma gamma by a factor of 0.5:

                   lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)

       •   Discard least significant bits of luma:

                   lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'

       •   Technicolor like effect:

                   lutyuv=u='(val-maxval/2)*2+maxval/2':v='(val-maxval/2)*2+maxval/2'

### lut2, tlut2
       The "lut2" filter takes two input streams and outputs one stream.

       The "tlut2" (time lut2) filter takes two consecutive frames from one single stream.

       This filter accepts the following parameters:

       **c0  **set first pixel component expression

       **c1  **set second pixel component expression

       **c2  **set third pixel component expression

       **c3  **set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component

       **d   **set  output bit depth, only available for "lut2" filter. By default is 0, which means bit
           depth is automatically picked from first input format.

       The "lut2" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       Each of them specifies the  expression  to  use  for  computing  the  lookup  table  for  the
       corresponding pixel component values.

       The exact component associated to each of the _c*_ options depends on the format in inputs.

       The expressions can contain the following constants:

       **w**
       **h   **The input width and height.

       **x   **The first input value for the pixel component.

       **y   **The second input value for the pixel component.

       **bdx **The first input video bit depth.

       **bdy **The second input video bit depth.

       All expressions default to "x".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands **except option "d".

       _Examples_

       •   Highlight differences between two RGB video streams:

                   lut2='ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1)'

       •   Highlight differences between two YUV video streams:

                   lut2='ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,pow(2,bdx-1),pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,pow(2,bdx-1),pow(2,bdx)-1)'

       •   Show max difference between two video streams:

                   lut2='if(lt(x,y),0,if(gt(x,y),pow(2,bdx)-1,pow(2,bdx-1))):if(lt(x,y),0,if(gt(x,y),pow(2,bdx)-1,pow(2,bdx-1))):if(lt(x,y),0,if(gt(x,y),pow(2,bdx)-1,pow(2,bdx-1)))'

### maskedclamp
       Clamp the first input stream with the second input and third input stream.

       Returns  the value of first stream to be between second input stream - "undershoot" and third
       input stream + "overshoot".

       This filter accepts the following options:

### undershoot
           Default value is 0.

### overshoot
           Default value is 0.

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed  planes  will  be  copied  from
           first stream.  By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### maskedmax
       Merge the second and third input stream into output stream using absolute differences between
       second input stream and first input stream and absolute difference between third input stream
       and  first input stream. The picked value will be from second input stream if second absolute
       difference is greater than first one or from third input stream otherwise.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed  planes  will  be  copied  from
           first stream.  By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### maskedmerge
       Merge  the  first  input  stream  with the second input stream using per pixel weights in the
       third input stream.

       A value of 0 in the third stream pixel component means that pixel component from first stream
       is returned unchanged, while maximum value (eg.  255  for  8-bit  videos)  means  that  pixel
       component  from second stream is returned unchanged. Intermediate values define the amount of
       merging between both input stream's pixel components.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed  planes  will  be  copied  from
           first stream.  By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### maskedmin
       Merge the second and third input stream into output stream using absolute differences between
       second input stream and first input stream and absolute difference between third input stream
       and  first input stream. The picked value will be from second input stream if second absolute
       difference is less than first one or from third input stream otherwise.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed  planes  will  be  copied  from
           first stream.  By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### maskedthreshold
       Pick pixels comparing absolute difference of two video streams with fixed threshold.

       If  absolute  difference between pixel component of first and second video stream is equal or
       lower than user supplied threshold than pixel component from first video  stream  is  picked,
       otherwise pixel component from second video stream is picked.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### threshold
           Set  threshold  used  when  picking  pixels from absolute difference from two input video
           streams.

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed  planes  will  be  copied  from
           second stream.  By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

### mode
           Set mode of filter operation. Can be "abs" or "diff".  Default is "abs".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### maskfun
       Create mask from input video.

       For example it is useful to create motion masks after "tblend" filter.

       This filter accepts the following options:

       **low **Set low threshold. Any pixel component lower or exact than this value will be set to 0.

### high
           Set  high  threshold. Any pixel component higher than this value will be set to max value
           allowed for current pixel format.

### planes
           Set planes to filter, by default all available planes are filtered.

### fill
           Fill all frame pixels with this value.

       **sum **Set max average pixel value for frame. If sum of all pixel components is higher that this
           average, output frame will be completely filled with value set by _fill_ option.  Typically
           useful for scene changes when used in combination with "tblend" filter.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### mcdeint
       Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.

       It needs one field per frame as input and must  thus  be  used  together  with  yadif=1/3  or
       equivalent.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### mode
           Set the deinterlacing mode.

           It accepts one of the following values:

           **fast**
           **medium**
           **slow**
               use iterative motion estimation

           **extra_slow**
               like **slow**, but use multiple reference frames.

           Default value is **fast**.

### parity
           Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be one of the following
           values:

           **0, tff**
               assume top field first

           **1, bff**
               assume bottom field first

           Default value is **bff**.

       **qp  **Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal encoder.

           Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less optimal individual
           vectors. Default value is 1.

### median
       Pick median pixel from certain rectangle defined by radius.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### radius
           Set horizontal radius size. Default value is 1.  Allowed range is integer from 1 to 127.

### planes
           Set which planes to process. Default is 15, which is all available planes.

### radiusV
           Set  vertical  radius  size. Default value is 0.  Allowed range is integer from 0 to 127.
           If it is 0, value will be picked from horizontal "radius" option.

### percentile
           Set median percentile. Default value is 0.5.  Default  value  of  0.5  will  pick  always
           median values, while 0 will pick minimum values, and 1 maximum values.

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same syntax of the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### mergeplanes
       Merge color channel components from several video streams.

       The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge  selected  input  planes  to  the  output
       video.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### mapping
           Set input to output plane mapping. Default is 0.

           The  mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a hexadecimal number in
           the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the mapping for the first plane of  the  output
           stream.  'A'  sets the number of the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane
           number of the corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3).  The  rest  of  the  mappings  is
           similar,  'Bb'  describes  the mapping for the output stream second plane, 'Cc' describes
           the mapping for the output stream third plane and 'Dd'  describes  the  mapping  for  the
           output stream fourth plane.

### format
           Set output pixel format. Default is "yuva444p".

### map0s
### map1s
### map2s
### map3s
           Set input to output stream mapping for output Nth plane. Default is 0.

### map0p
### map1p
### map2p
### map3p
           Set input to output plane mapping for output Nth plane. Default is 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:

                   [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p

       •   Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:

                   [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p

       •   Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:

                   format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p

       •   Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:

                   format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p

       •   Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:

                   format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p

### mestimate
       Estimate  and  export  motion  vectors  using  block matching algorithms.  Motion vectors are
       stored in frame side data to be used by other filters.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### method
           Specify the motion estimation method. Accepts one of the following values:

           **esa **Exhaustive search algorithm.

           **tss **Three step search algorithm.

           **tdls**
               Two dimensional logarithmic search algorithm.

           **ntss**
               New three step search algorithm.

           **fss **Four step search algorithm.

           **ds  **Diamond search algorithm.

           **hexbs**
               Hexagon-based search algorithm.

           **epzs**
               Enhanced predictive zonal search algorithm.

           **umh **Uneven multi-hexagon search algorithm.

           Default value is **esa**.

### mb_size
           Macroblock size. Default 16.

### search_param
           Search parameter. Default 7.

### midequalizer
       Apply Midway Image Equalization effect using two video streams.

       Midway Image Equalization adjusts a  pair  of  images  to  have  the  same  histogram,  while
       maintaining  their dynamics as much as possible. It's useful for e.g. matching exposures from
       a pair of stereo cameras.

       This filter has two inputs and one output, which must be of same pixel format, but may be  of
       different  sizes.  The output of filter is first input adjusted with midway histogram of both
       inputs.

       This filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes to process. Default is 15, which is all available planes.

### minterpolate
       Convert the video to specified frame rate using motion interpolation.

       This filter accepts the following options:

       **fps **Specify the output frame rate. This can be rational e.g. "60000/1001". Frames are dropped
           if _fps_ is lower than source fps. Default 60.

### mi_mode
           Motion interpolation mode. Following values are accepted:

           **dup **Duplicate previous or next frame for interpolating new ones.

           **blend**
               Blend source frames. Interpolated frame is mean of previous and next frames.

           **mci **Motion compensated interpolation. Following options are effective when this  mode  is
               selected:

               **mc_mode**
                   Motion compensation mode. Following values are accepted:

                   **obmc**
                       Overlapped block motion compensation.

                   **aobmc**
                       Adaptive  overlapped block motion compensation. Window weighting coefficients
                       are controlled adaptively according to the reliabilities of  the  neighboring
                       motion vectors to reduce oversmoothing.

                   Default mode is **obmc**.

               **me_mode**
                   Motion estimation mode. Following values are accepted:

                   **bidir**
                       Bidirectional motion estimation. Motion vectors are estimated for each source
                       frame in both forward and backward directions.

                   **bilat**
                       Bilateral  motion  estimation.  Motion  vectors  are  estimated  directly for
                       interpolated frame.

                   Default mode is **bilat**.

               **me  **The algorithm to be used for motion estimation. Following values are accepted:

                   **esa **Exhaustive search algorithm.

                   **tss **Three step search algorithm.

                   **tdls**
                       Two dimensional logarithmic search algorithm.

                   **ntss**
                       New three step search algorithm.

                   **fss **Four step search algorithm.

                   **ds  **Diamond search algorithm.

                   **hexbs**
                       Hexagon-based search algorithm.

                   **epzs**
                       Enhanced predictive zonal search algorithm.

                   **umh **Uneven multi-hexagon search algorithm.

                   Default algorithm is **epzs**.

               **mb_size**
                   Macroblock size. Default 16.

               **search_param**
                   Motion estimation search parameter. Default 32.

               **vsbmc**
                   Enable variable-size block motion compensation. Motion estimation is applied with
                   smaller block sizes at object boundaries in order to make  the  them  less  blur.
                   Default is 0 (disabled).

       **scd **Scene  change  detection  method.  Scene  change  leads  motion  vectors  to be in random
           direction. Scene change detection replace interpolated frames by duplicate ones. May  not
           be needed for other modes. Following values are accepted:

           **none**
               Disable scene change detection.

           **fdiff**
               Frame  difference.  Corresponding  pixel  values  are  compared  and  if it satisfies
               _scd_threshold_ scene change is detected.

           Default method is **fdiff**.

### scd_threshold
           Scene change detection threshold. Default is 10..

### mix
       Mix several video input streams into one video stream.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### inputs
           The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.

### weights
           Specify weight of each input video stream as  sequence.   Each  weight  is  separated  by
           space.  If  number of weights is smaller than number of _frames_ last specified weight will
           be used for all remaining unset weights.

### scale
           Specify scale, if it is set it will be multiplied with sum of each weight multiplied with
           pixel values to give final destination pixel value. By default _scale_ is  auto  scaled  to
           sum of weights.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

### duration
           Specify how end of stream is determined.

           **longest**
               The duration of the longest input. (default)

           **shortest**
               The duration of the shortest input.

           **first**
               The duration of the first input.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### weights
### scale
### planes
           Syntax is same as option with same name.

### monochrome
       Convert video to gray using custom color filter.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

       **cb  **Set the chroma blue spot. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.  Default value is 0.

       **cr  **Set the chroma red spot. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.  Default value is 0.

### size
           Set the color filter size. Allowed range is from .1 to 10.  Default value is 1.

### high
           Set the highlights strength. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### morpho
       This  filter  allows  to apply main morphological grayscale transforms, erode and dilate with
       arbitrary structures set in second input stream.

       Unlike naive implementation and much slower performance in **erosion **and **dilation **filters, when
       speed is critical "morpho" filter should be used instead.

       A description of accepted options follows,

### mode
           Set morphological transform to apply, can be:

           **erode**
           **dilate**
           **open**
           **close**
           **gradient**
           **tophat**
           **blackhat**

           Default is "erode".

### planes
           Set planes to filter, by default all planes except alpha are filtered.

### structure
           Set which structure video frames will be processed from second input stream, can be _first_
           or _all_. Default is _all_.

       The "morpho" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### mpdecimate
       Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in order to reduce frame rate.

       The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate  encoding  (e.g.  streaming  over  dialup
       modem),  but  it  could  in  theory  be  used  for  fixing movies that were inverse-telecined
       incorrectly.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

       **max **Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if positive),  or  the
           minimum  interval  between  dropped frames (if negative). If the value is 0, the frame is
           dropped disregarding the number of previous sequentially dropped frames.

           Default value is 0.

### keep
           Set the maximum number of consecutive similar frames to ignore before to  start  dropping
           them.   If  the  value  is  0,  the  frame is dropped disregarding the number of previous
           sequentially similar frames.

           Default value is 0.

       **hi**
       **lo**
### frac
           Set the dropping threshold values.

           Values for **hi **and  **lo  **are  for  8x8  pixel  blocks  and  represent  actual  pixel  value
           differences,  so a threshold of 64 corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or
           the same spread out differently over the block.

           A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more than a  threshold  of
           **hi**,  and  if  no  more than **frac **blocks (1 meaning the whole image) differ by more than a
           threshold of **lo**.

           Default value for **hi **is 64*12, default value for **lo **is 64*5, and default value  for  **frac**
           is 0.33.

### msad
       Obtain the MSAD (Mean Sum of Absolute Differences) between two input videos.

       This filter takes two input videos.

       Both  input  videos  must  have  the same resolution and pixel format for this filter to work
       correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs  have  the  same  number  of  frames,  which  are
       compared one by one.

       The obtained per component, average, min and max MSAD is printed through the logging system.

       The filter stores the calculated MSAD of each frame in frame metadata.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       In  the  below example the input file _main.mpg_ being processed is compared with the reference
       file _ref.mpg_.

               ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi msad -f null -

### multiply
       Multiply first video stream pixels values with second video stream pixels values.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### scale
           Set the scale applied to second video stream. By default is 1.  Allowed range is  from  0
           to 9.

### offset
           Set  the offset applied to second video stream. By default is 0.5.  Allowed range is from
           -1 to 1.

### planes
           Specify planes from input video stream that will be processed.  By default all planes are
           processed.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### negate
       Negate (invert) the input video.

       It accepts the following option:

### components
           Set components to negate.

           Available values for components are:

           **y**
           **u**
           **v**
           **a**
           **r**
           **g**
           **b**
### negate_alpha
           With value 1, it negates the alpha component, if present. Default value is 0.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### nlmeans
       Denoise frames using Non-Local Means algorithm.

       Each pixel is adjusted by looking for  other  pixels  with  similar  contexts.  This  context
       similarity  is  defined  by  comparing  their  surrounding  patches  of size **p**x**p**. Patches are
       searched in an area of **r**x**r **around the pixel.

       Note that the research area defines centers for patches, which means  some  patches  will  be
       made of pixels outside that research area.

       The filter accepts the following options.

       **s   **Set denoising strength. Default is 1.0. Must be in range [1.0, 30.0].

       **p   **Set patch size. Default is 7. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].

       **pc  **Same as **p **but for chroma planes.

           The default value is _0_ and means automatic.

       **r   **Set research size. Default is 15. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].

       **rc  **Same as **r **but for chroma planes.

           The default value is _0_ and means automatic.

### nnedi
       Deinterlace video using neural network edge directed interpolation.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### weights
           Mandatory  option,  without binary file filter can not work.  Currently file can be found
           here: <https://github.com/dubhater/vapoursynth-nnedi3/blob/master/src/nnedi3_weights.bin>

### deint
           Set which frames to deinterlace, by default it is "all".  Can be "all" or "interlaced".

### field
           Set mode of operation.

           Can be one of the following:

           **af  **Use frame flags, both fields.

           **a   **Use frame flags, single field.

           **t   **Use top field only.

           **b   **Use bottom field only.

           **tf  **Use both fields, top first.

           **bf  **Use both fields, bottom first.

### planes
           Set which planes to process, by default filter process all frames.

### nsize
           Set size of local neighborhood around each pixel, used by the predictor neural network.

           Can be one of the following:

           **s8x6**
           **s16x6**
           **s32x6**
           **s48x6**
           **s8x4**
           **s16x4**
           **s32x4**
       **nns **Set the number of neurons in predictor neural network.  Can be one of the following:

           **n16**
           **n32**
           **n64**
           **n128**
           **n256**
### qual
           Controls the number of different neural network predictions that are blended together  to
           compute the final output value. Can be "fast", default or "slow".

### etype
           Set which set of weights to use in the predictor.  Can be one of the following:

           **a, abs**
               weights trained to minimize absolute error

           **s, mse**
               weights trained to minimize squared error

### pscrn
           Controls  whether  or  not  the prescreener neural network is used to decide which pixels
           should be processed by the predictor neural network and which can be  handled  by  simple
           cubic interpolation.  The prescreener is trained to know whether cubic interpolation will
           be  sufficient  for  a  pixel or whether it should be predicted by the predictor nn.  The
           computational complexity of the prescreener nn is much less than that  of  the  predictor
           nn.  Since  most  pixels  can  be  handled  by cubic interpolation, using the prescreener
           generally results in much faster processing.  The prescreener is pretty accurate, so  the
           difference between using it and not using it is almost always unnoticeable.

           Can be one of the following:

           **none**
           **original**
           **new**
           **new2**
           **new3**

           Default is "new".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options, excluding _weights_ option.

### noformat
       Force  libavfilter  not  to  use any of the specified pixel formats for the input to the next
       filter.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### pix_fmts
           A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".

       _Examples_

       •   Force libavfilter to use a format different from _yuv420p_  for  the  input  to  the  vflip
           filter:

                   noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip

       •   Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:

                   noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p

### noise
       Add noise on video input frame.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### all_seed
### c0_seed
### c1_seed
### c2_seed
### c3_seed
           Set  noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case of _all_seed_.
           Default value is 123457.

### all_strength, alls
### c0_strength, c0s
### c1_strength, c1s
### c2_strength, c2s
### c3_strength, c3s
           Set noise strength  for  specific  pixel  component  or  all  pixel  components  in  case
           _all_strength_. Default value is 0. Allowed range is [0, 100].

### all_flags, allf
### c0_flags, c0f
### c1_flags, c1f
### c2_flags, c2f
### c3_flags, c3f
           Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if _all_flags_.  Available values
           for component flags are:

           **a   **averaged temporal noise (smoother)

           **p   **mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern

           **t   **temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)

           **u   **uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)

       _Examples_

       Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:

               noise=alls=20:allf=t+u

### normalize
       Normalize    RGB    video    (aka   histogram   stretching,   contrast   stretching).    See:
       <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normalization_>(image_processing)

       For each channel of each frame, the filter computes the input range and maps it  linearly  to
       the  user-specified  output  range.  The output range defaults to the full dynamic range from
       pure black to pure white.

       Temporal smoothing can be used on the input range to  reduce  flickering  (rapid  changes  in
       brightness)  caused  when  small  dark  or  bright  objects enter or leave the scene. This is
       similar to the auto-exposure (automatic gain control) on a video camera, and,  like  a  video
       camera, it may cause a period of over- or under-exposure of the video.

       The  R,G,B  channels can be normalized independently, which may cause some color shifting, or
       linked together as a single channel, which  prevents  color  shifting.  Linked  normalization
       preserves  hue.  Independent  normalization  does not, so it can be used to remove some color
       casts. Independent and linked normalization can be combined in any ratio.

       The normalize filter accepts the following options:

### blackpt
### whitept
           Colors which define the output range. The minimum input value is mapped to  the  _blackpt_.
           The  maximum  input  value  is  mapped  to the _whitept_.  The defaults are black and white
           respectively. Specifying white for  _blackpt_  and  black  for  _whitept_  will  give  color-
           inverted,  normalized  video.  Shades  of  grey  can  be used to reduce the dynamic range
           (contrast). Specifying saturated colors here can create some interesting effects.

### smoothing
           The number of previous frames to use for temporal smoothing.  The  input  range  of  each
           channel  is  smoothed  using  a  rolling average over the current frame and the _smoothing_
           previous frames. The default is 0 (no temporal smoothing).

### independence
           Controls the ratio of independent (color shifting) channel normalization to linked (color
           preserving) normalization. 0.0 is fully linked, 1.0 is fully independent. Defaults to 1.0
           (fully independent).

### strength
           Overall strength of the filter. 1.0 is full strength. 0.0 is a  rather  expensive  no-op.
           Defaults to 1.0 (full strength).

       _Commands_

       This  filter  supports  same  **commands  **as  options, excluding _smoothing_ option.  The command
       accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

       _Examples_

       Stretch video contrast to use the full dynamic range, with no temporal smoothing; may flicker
       depending on the source content:

               normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=0

       As above, but with 50 frames of temporal smoothing; flicker should be reduced,  depending  on
       the source content:

               normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=50

       As above, but with hue-preserving linked channel normalization:

               normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=50:independence=0

       As above, but with half strength:

               normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=50:independence=0:strength=0.5

       Map the darkest input color to red, the brightest input color to cyan:

               normalize=blackpt=red:whitept=cyan

### null
       Pass the video source unchanged to the output.

### ocr
       Optical Character Recognition

       This  filter  uses Tesseract for optical character recognition. To enable compilation of this
       filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libtesseract".

       It accepts the following options:

### datapath
           Set datapath to tesseract data. Default is to use whatever was set at installation.

### language
           Set language, default is "eng".

### whitelist
           Set character whitelist.

### blacklist
           Set character blacklist.

       The filter exports recognized text  as  the  frame  metadata  "lavfi.ocr.text".   The  filter
       exports confidence of recognized words as the frame metadata "lavfi.ocr.confidence".

### ocv
       Apply a video transform using libopencv.

       To  enable  this  filter, install the libopencv library and headers and configure FFmpeg with
       "--enable-libopencv".

       It accepts the following parameters:

### filter_name
           The name of the libopencv filter to apply.

### filter_params
           The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default values  are
           assumed.

       Refer   to   the   official   libopencv   documentation   for   more   precise   information:
       <**<http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html>**>

       Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.

       _dilate_

       Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.  It  corresponds  to  the  libopencv
       function "cvDilate".

       It accepts the parameters: _struct_el_|_nb_iterations_.

       _struct_el_     represents     a     structuring     element,     and     has    the    syntax:
       _cols_x_rows_+_anchor_x_x_anchor_y_/_shape_

       _cols_ and _rows_ represent the number of columns and rows of the structuring  element,  _anchor_x_
       and _anchor_y_ the anchor point, and _shape_ the shape for the structuring element. _shape_ must be
       "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".

       If  the value for _shape_ is "custom", it must be followed by a string of the form "=_filename_".
       The file with name _filename_ is assumed to represent  a  binary  image,  with  each  printable
       character  corresponding  to  a  bright pixel. When a custom _shape_ is used, _cols_ and _rows_ are
       ignored, the number or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.

       The default value for _struct_el_ is "3x3+0x0/rect".

       _nb_iterations_ specifies the number of times the  transform  is  applied  to  the  image,  and
       defaults to 1.

       Some examples:

               # Use the default values
               ocv=dilate

               # Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
               ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2

               # Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
               # The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
               #   *
               #  ***
               # *****
               #  ***
               #   *
               # The specified columns and rows are ignored
               # but the anchor point coordinates are not
               ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2

       _erode_

       Erode  an  image  by  using  a specific structuring element.  It corresponds to the libopencv
       function "cvErode".

       It accepts the parameters: _struct_el_:_nb_iterations_, with the same syntax and semantics as the
       **dilate **filter.

       _smooth_

       Smooth the input video.

       The filter takes the following parameters: _type_|_param1_|_param2_|_param3_|_param4_.

       _type_ is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of the following values:  "blur",
       "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian", or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".

       The  meaning  of  _param1_,  _param2_,  _param3_, and _param4_ depends on the smooth type. _param1_ and
       _param2_ accept integer positive values or 0. _param3_ and _param4_ accept floating point values.

       The default value for _param1_ is 3. The default value for the other parameters is 0.

       These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the libopencv function "cvSmooth".

### oscilloscope
       2D Video Oscilloscope.

       Useful to measure spatial impulse, step responses, chroma delays, etc.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **x   **Set scope center x position.

       **y   **Set scope center y position.

       **s   **Set scope size, relative to frame diagonal.

       **t   **Set scope tilt/rotation.

       **o   **Set trace opacity.

       **tx  **Set trace center x position.

       **ty  **Set trace center y position.

       **tw  **Set trace width, relative to width of frame.

       **th  **Set trace height, relative to height of frame.

       **c   **Set which components to trace. By default it traces first three components.

       **g   **Draw trace grid. By default is enabled.

       **st  **Draw some statistics. By default is enabled.

       **sc  **Draw scope. By default is enabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
       corresponding option.

       If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

       _Examples_

       •   Inspect full first row of video frame.

                   oscilloscope=x=0.5:y=0:s=1

       •   Inspect full last row of video frame.

                   oscilloscope=x=0.5:y=1:s=1

       •   Inspect full 5th line of video frame of height 1080.

                   oscilloscope=x=0.5:y=5/1080:s=1

       •   Inspect full last column of video frame.

                   oscilloscope=x=1:y=0.5:s=1:t=1

### overlay
       Overlay one video on top of another.

       It  takes  two  inputs  and  has one output. The first input is the "main" video on which the
       second input is overlaid.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       A description of the accepted options follows.

       **x**
       **y   **Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video on the  main  video.
           Default  value  is "0" for both expressions. In case the expression is invalid, it is set
           to a huge value (meaning that the overlay will not be displayed within the output visible
           area).

### eof_action
           See **framesync**.

### eval
           Set when the expressions for **x**, and **y **are evaluated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command  is
               processed

           **frame**
               evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

           Default value is **frame**.

### shortest
           See **framesync**.

### format
           Set the format for the output video.

           It accepts the following values:

           **yuv420**
               force YUV 4:2:0 8-bit planar output

           **yuv420p10**
               force YUV 4:2:0 10-bit planar output

           **yuv422**
               force YUV 4:2:2 8-bit planar output

           **yuv422p10**
               force YUV 4:2:2 10-bit planar output

           **yuv444**
               force YUV 4:4:4 8-bit planar output

           **yuv444p10**
               force YUV 4:4:4 10-bit planar output

           **rgb **force RGB 8-bit packed output

           **gbrp**
               force RGB 8-bit planar output

           **auto**
               automatically pick format

           Default value is **yuv420**.

### repeatlast
           See **framesync**.

### alpha
           Set  format  of alpha of the overlaid video, it can be _straight_ or _premultiplied_. Default
           is _straight_.

       The **x**, and **y **expressions can contain the following parameters.

### main_w, W
### main_h, H
           The main input width and height.

### overlay_w, w
### overlay_h, h
           The overlay input width and height.

       **x**
       **y   **The computed values for _x_ and _y_. They are evaluated for each new frame.

### hsub
### vsub
           horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output format. For example for the
           pixel format "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       **n   **the number of input frame, starting from 0

       **pos **the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated, do not use

       **t   **The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       Note that the _n_, _t_ variables are available only when evaluation is done _per_ _frame_,  and  will
       evaluate to NAN when **eval **is set to **init**.

       Be  aware  that  frames  are  taken from each input video in timestamp order, hence, if their
       initial  timestamps  differ,  it  is  a  good  idea  to  pass  the  two  inputs   through   a
       _setpts=PTS-STARTPTS_  filter to have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
       the _movie_ filter does.

       You can chain together more overlays but you should test the efficiency of such approach.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

       **x**
       **y   **Modify the x and y of the overlay input.  The command accepts  the  same  syntax  of  the
           corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

       _Examples_

       •   Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main video:

                   overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10

           Using named options the example above becomes:

                   overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10

       •   Insert  a  transparent  PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input, using the **ffmpeg**
           tool with the "-filter_complex" option:

                   ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output

       •   Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom right corner)  using  the
           **ffmpeg **tool:

                   ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output

       •   Add  a  transparent  color layer on top of the main video; "WxH" must specify the size of
           the main input to the overlay filter:

                   color=color=red@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]

       •   Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake filter) side by side
           using the **ffplay **tool:

                   ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'

           The above command is the same as:

                   ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'

       •   Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to  the  right  top  part  of  the  screen
           starting since time 2:

                   overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0

       •   Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:

                   ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
                   nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
                   [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
                   [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
                   [background][left]       overlay=shortest=1       [background+left];
                   [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
                   "

       •   Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section

                   ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
                   -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
                   masked.avi

       •   Chain several overlays in cascade:

                   nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
                   testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
                   [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg]   overlay=0:0     [mid0];
                   [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0   [mid1];
                   [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100   [mid2];
                   [in3] null,       [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]

### overlay_cuda
       Overlay one video on top of another.

       This  is the CUDA variant of the **overlay **filter.  It only accepts CUDA frames. The underlying
       input pixel formats have to match.

       It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the  "main"  video  on  which  the
       second input is overlaid.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **x**
       **y   **Set expressions for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video on the main video.

           They can contain the following parameters:

           **main_w, W**
           **main_h, H**
               The main input width and height.

           **overlay_w, w**
           **overlay_h, h**
               The overlay input width and height.

           **x**
           **y   **The computed values for _x_ and _y_. They are evaluated for each new frame.

           **n   **The ordinal index of the main input frame, starting from 0.

           **pos **The  byte  offset  position  in  the  file  of  the main input frame, NAN if unknown.
               Deprecated, do not use.

           **t   **The timestamp of the main input frame, expressed in seconds, NAN if unknown.

           Default value is "0" for both expressions.

### eval
           Set when the expressions for **x **and **y **are evaluated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               Evaluate  expressions  once  during  filter  initialization  or  when  a  command  is
               processed.

           **frame**
               Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

           Default value is **frame**.

### eof_action
           See **framesync**.

### shortest
           See **framesync**.

### repeatlast
           See **framesync**.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

### owdenoise
       Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### depth
           Set depth.

           Larger  depth  values  will  denoise  lower  frequency  components  more,  but  slow down
           filtering.

           Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is 8.

### luma_strength, ls
           Set luma strength.

           Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.

### chroma_strength, cs
           Set chroma strength.

           Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.

### pad
       Add paddings to the input  image,  and  place  the  original  input  at  the  provided  _x_,  _y_
       coordinates.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### width, w
### height, h
           Specify  an  expression  for the size of the output image with the paddings added. If the
           value for _width_ or _height_ is 0, the corresponding input size is used for the output.

           The _width_ expression can reference the value set  by  the  _height_  expression,  and  vice
           versa.

           The default value of _width_ and _height_ is 0.

       **x**
       **y   **Specify  the  offsets to place the input image at within the padded area, with respect to
           the top/left border of the output image.

           The _x_ expression can reference the value set by the _y_ expression, and vice versa.

           The default value of _x_ and _y_ is 0.

           If _x_ or _y_ evaluate to a negative number,  they'll  be  changed  so  the  input  image  is
           centered on the padded area.

### color
           Specify  the  color  of the padded area. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           The default value of _color_ is "black".

### eval
           Specify when to evaluate  _width_, _height_, _x_ and _y_ expression.

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command  is
               processed.

           **frame**
               Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.

           Default value is **init**.

### aspect
           Pad to aspect instead to a resolution.

       The  value  for  the _width_, _height_, _x_, and _y_ options are expressions containing the following
       constants:

### in_w
### in_h
           The input video width and height.

       **iw**
       **ih  **These are the same as _in_w_ and _in_h_.

### out_w
### out_h
           The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as specified by the _width_  and
           _height_ expressions.

       **ow**
       **oh  **These are the same as _out_w_ and _out_h_.

       **x**
       **y   **The x and y offsets as specified by the _x_ and _y_ expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.

       **a   **same as _iw_ / _ih_

       **sar **input sample aspect ratio

       **dar **input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_iw_ / _ih_) * _sar_

### hsub
### vsub
           The  horizontal  and  vertical  chroma subsample values. For example for the pixel format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _Examples_

       •   Add paddings with the color "violet" to  the  input  video.  The  output  video  size  is
           640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at column 0, row 40

                   pad=640:480:0:40:violet

           The example above is equivalent to the following command:

                   pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet

       •   Pad  the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2, and put the input video
           at the center of the padded area:

                   pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"

       •   Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum  value  between  the
           input width and height, and put the input video at the center of the padded area:

                   pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"

       •   Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:

                   pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"

       •   In  case  of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect correctly, it is
           necessary to use _sar_ in the expression, according to the relation:

                   (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
                   X = output_dar / sar

           Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:

                   pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"

       •   Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right corner of  the  output
           padded area:

                   pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"

### palettegen
       Generate one palette for a whole video stream.

       It accepts the following options:

### max_colors
           Set  the  maximum  number  of  colors to quantize in the palette.  Note: the palette will
           still contain 256 colors; the unused palette entries will be black.

### reserve_transparent
           Create a palette of 255 colors  maximum  and  reserve  the  last  one  for  transparency.
           Reserving the transparency color is useful for GIF optimization.  If not set, the maximum
           of  colors  in  the  palette  will be 256. You probably want to disable this option for a
           standalone image.  Set by default.

### transparency_color
           Set the color that will be used as background for transparency.

### stats_mode
           Set statistics mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **full**
               Compute full frame histograms.

           **diff**
               Compute histograms only for the part that differs from previous frame. This might  be
               relevant  to  give more importance to the moving part of your input if the background
               is static.

           **single**
               Compute new histogram for each frame.

           Default value is _full_.

       The  filter  also  exports  the  frame  metadata  "lavfi.color_quant_ratio"  ("nb_color_in  /
       nb_color_out") which you can use to evaluate the degree of color quantization of the palette.
       This information is also visible at _info_ logging level.

       _Examples_

       •   Generate a representative palette of a given video using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf palettegen palette.png

### paletteuse
       Use a palette to downsample an input video stream.

       The filter takes two inputs: one video stream and a palette. The palette must be a 256 pixels
       image.

       It accepts the following options:

### dither
           Select dithering mode. Available algorithms are:

           **bayer**
               Ordered 8x8 bayer dithering (deterministic)

           **heckbert**
               Dithering  as  defined by Paul Heckbert in 1982 (simple error diffusion).  Note: this
               dithering is sometimes considered "wrong" and is included as a reference.

           **floyd_steinberg**
               Floyd and Steingberg dithering (error diffusion)

           **sierra2**
               Frankie Sierra dithering v2 (error diffusion)

           **sierra2_4a**
               Frankie Sierra dithering v2 "Lite" (error diffusion)

           **sierra3**
               Frankie Sierra dithering v3 (error diffusion)

           **burkes**
               Burkes dithering (error diffusion)

           **atkinson**
               Atkinson dithering by Bill Atkinson at Apple Computer (error diffusion)

           **none**
               Disable dithering.

           Default is _sierra2_4a_.

### bayer_scale
           When _bayer_ dithering is selected, this option defines the scale of the pattern (how  much
           the  crosshatch  pattern  is  visible).  A  low value means more visible pattern for less
           banding, and higher value means less visible pattern at the cost of more banding.

           The option must be an integer value in the range [0,5]. Default is _2_.

### diff_mode
           If set, define the zone to process

           **rectangle**
               Only  the  changing  rectangle  will  be  reprocessed.  This  is   similar   to   GIF
               cropping/offsetting  compression  mechanism.  This  option can be useful for speed if
               only a part of the image is changing, and has use cases such as limiting the scope of
               the error diffusal **dither **to the rectangle that bounds the moving scene (it leads  to
               more  deterministic  output  if  the  scene doesn't change much, and as a result less
               moving noise and better GIF compression).

           Default is _none_.

       **new **Take new palette for each output frame.

### alpha_threshold
           Sets the alpha threshold for transparency. Alpha values  above  this  threshold  will  be
           treated  as  completely  opaque,  and  values  below  this  threshold  will be treated as
           completely transparent.

           The option must be an integer value in the range [0,255]. Default is _128_.

       _Examples_

       •   Use a palette (generated for example with **palettegen**) to encode a GIF using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mkv -i palette.png -lavfi paletteuse output.gif

### perspective
       Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

       **x0**
       **y0**
       **x1**
       **y1**
       **x2**
       **y2**
       **x3**
       **y3  **Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
           Default values are "0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H" with which perspective will  remain  unchanged.   If
           the  "sense"  option  is  set  to "source", then the specified points will be sent to the
           corners of the destination. If the "sense" option  is  set  to  "destination",  then  the
           corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.

           The expressions can use the following variables:

           **W**
           **H   **the width and height of video frame.

           **in  **Input frame count.

           **on  **Output frame count.

### interpolation
           Set interpolation for perspective correction.

           It accepts the following values:

           **linear**
           **cubic**

           Default value is **linear**.

### sense
           Set interpretation of coordinate options.

           It accepts the following values:

           **0, source**
               Send  point  in  the  source specified by the given coordinates to the corners of the
               destination.

           **1, destination**
               Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified by the given
               coordinates.

               Default value is **source**.

### eval
           Set when the expressions for coordinates **x0,y0,...x3,y3 **are evaluated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command  is
               processed

           **frame**
               evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

           Default value is **init**.

### phase
       Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.

       The  intended  use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the opposite field order
       to the film-to-video transfer.

       A description of the accepted parameters follows.

### mode
           Set phase mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **t   **Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.  Filter will delay  the  bottom
               field.

           **b   **Capture  field  order  bottom-first,  transfer  top-first.  Filter will delay the top
               field.

           **p   **Capture and transfer with the same  field  order.  This  mode  only  exists  for  the
               documentation  of  the  other options to refer to, but if you actually select it, the
               filter will faithfully do nothing.

           **a   **Capture field order determined  automatically  by  field  flags,  transfer  opposite.
               Filter selects among **t **and **b **modes on a frame by frame basis using field flags. If no
               field information is available, then this works just like **u**.

           **u   **Capture  unknown  or  varying,  transfer opposite.  Filter selects among **t **and **b **on a
               frame by frame basis by analyzing the  images  and  selecting  the  alternative  that
               produces best match between the fields.

           **T   **Capture  top-first,  transfer unknown or varying.  Filter selects among **t **and **p **using
               image analysis.

           **B   **Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.  Filter  selects  among  **b  **and  **p**
               using image analysis.

           **A   **Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.  Filter selects among
               **t**,  **b  **and  **p  **using  field  flags  and  image  analysis.  If no field information is
               available, then this works just like **U**. This is the default mode.

           **U   **Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.  Filter selects among **t**, **b **and **p  **using
               image analysis only.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### photosensitivity
       Reduce various flashes in video, so to help users with epilepsy.

       It accepts the following options:

### frames, f
           Set how many frames to use when filtering. Default is 30.

### threshold, t
           Set detection threshold factor. Default is 1.  Lower is stricter.

### skip
           Set  how many pixels to skip when sampling frames. Default is 1.  Allowed range is from 1
           to 1024.

### bypass
           Leave frames unchanged. Default is disabled.

### pixdesctest
       Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal  testing.  The  output  video
       should be equal to the input video.

       For example:

               format=monow, pixdesctest

       can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.

### pixelize
       Apply pixelization to video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### width, w
### height, h
           Set block dimensions that will be used for pixelization.  Default value is 16.

### mode, m
           Set the mode of pixelization used.

           Possible values are:

           **avg**
           **min**
           **max**

           Default value is "avg".

### planes, p
           Set what planes to filter. Default is to filter all planes.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports all options as **commands**.

### pixscope
       Display sample values of color channels. Mainly useful for checking color and levels. Minimum
       supported resolution is 640x480.

       The filters accept the following options:

       **x   **Set scope X position, relative offset on X axis.

       **y   **Set scope Y position, relative offset on Y axis.

       **w   **Set scope width.

       **h   **Set scope height.

       **o   **Set window opacity. This window also holds statistics about pixel area.

       **wx  **Set window X position, relative offset on X axis.

       **wy  **Set window Y position, relative offset on Y axis.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

   **pp**
       Enable  the  specified  chain  of  postprocessing  subfilters using libpostproc. This library
       should be automatically selected with a  GPL  build  ("--enable-gpl").   Subfilters  must  be
       separated  by  '/'  and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.  Each subfilter and some options
       have a short and a long name that can be used interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.

       The filters accept the following options:

### subfilters
           Set postprocessing subfilters string.

       All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:

### a/autoq
           Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.

### c/chrom
           Do chrominance filtering, too (default).

### y/nochrom
           Do luma filtering only (no chrominance).

### n/noluma
           Do chrominance filtering only (no luma).

       These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.

       Available subfilters are:

### hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
           Horizontal deblocking filter

           **difference**
               Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).

           **flatness**
               Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).

### vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
           Vertical deblocking filter

           **difference**
               Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).

           **flatness**
               Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).

### ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
           Accurate horizontal deblocking filter

           **difference**
               Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).

           **flatness**
               Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).

### va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
           Accurate vertical deblocking filter

           **difference**
               Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).

           **flatness**
               Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).

       The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and  flatness  values  so
       you cannot set different horizontal and vertical thresholds.

### h1/x1hdeblock
           Experimental horizontal deblocking filter

### v1/x1vdeblock
           Experimental vertical deblocking filter

### dr/dering
           Deringing filter

### tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
           **threshold1**
               larger -> stronger filtering

           **threshold2**
               larger -> stronger filtering

           **threshold3**
               larger -> stronger filtering

### al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
           **f/fullyrange**
               Stretch luma to "0-255".

### lb/linblenddeint
           Linear  blend  deinterlacing  filter  that  deinterlaces the given block by filtering all
           lines with a "(1 2 1)" filter.

### li/linipoldeint
           Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block  by  linearly
           interpolating every second line.

### ci/cubicipoldeint
           Cubic  interpolating  deinterlacing  filter  deinterlaces  the  given  block by cubically
           interpolating every second line.

### md/mediandeint
           Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a median filter
           to every second line.

### fd/ffmpegdeint
           FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering  every  second
           line with a "(-1 4 2 4 -1)" filter.

### l5/lowpass5
           Vertically  applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
           filtering all lines with a "(-1 2 6 2 -1)" filter.

### fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
           Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you specify.

           **quantizer**
               Quantizer to use

### de/default
           Default pp filter combination ("hb|a,vb|a,dr|a")

### fa/fast
           Fast pp filter combination ("h1|a,v1|a,dr|a")

       **ac  **High quality pp filter combination ("ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a")

       _Examples_

       •   Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic brightness/contrast:

                   pp=hb/vb/dr/al

       •   Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:

                   pp=de/-al

       •   Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:

                   pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3

       •   Apply deblocking on luma only, and switch vertical deblocking  on  or  off  automatically
           depending on available CPU time:

                   pp=hb|y/vb|a

### pp7
       Apply  Postprocessing  filter  7.  It is variant of the **spp **filter, similar to spp = 6 with 7
       point DCT, where only the center sample is used after IDCT.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **qp  **Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0 to 63.  If  not
           set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).

### mode
           Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:

           **hard**
               Set hard thresholding.

           **soft**
               Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).

           **medium**
               Set medium thresholding (good results, default).

### premultiply
       Apply  alpha  premultiply  effect to input video stream using first plane of second stream as
       alpha.

       Both streams must have same dimensions and same pixel format.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default  value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

### inplace
           Do not require 2nd input for processing, instead use alpha plane from input stream.

### prewitt
       Apply prewitt operator to input video stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set  which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### pseudocolor
       Alter frame colors in video with pseudocolors.

       This filter accepts the following options:

       **c0  **set pixel first component expression

       **c1  **set pixel second component expression

       **c2  **set pixel third component expression

       **c3  **set pixel fourth component expression, corresponds to the alpha component

### index, i
           set component to use as base for altering colors

### preset, p
           Pick one of built-in LUTs. By default is set to none.

           Available LUTs:

           **magma**
           **inferno**
           **plasma**
           **viridis**
           **turbo**
           **cividis**
           **range1**
           **range2**
           **shadows**
           **highlights**
           **solar**
           **nominal**
           **preferred**
           **total**
           **spectral**
           **cool**
           **heat**
           **fiery**
           **blues**
           **green**
           **helix**
### opacity
           Set opacity of output colors. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is set to 1.

       Each of the expression options specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table
       for the corresponding pixel component values.

       The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:

       **w**
       **h   **The input width and height.

       **val **The input value for the pixel component.

### ymin, umin, vmin, amin
           The minimum allowed component value.

### ymax, umax, vmax, amax
           The maximum allowed component value.

       All expressions default to "val".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Change too high luma values to gradient:

                   pseudocolor="'if(between(val,ymax,amax),lerp(ymin,ymax,(val-ymax)/(amax-ymax)),-1):if(between(val,ymax,amax),lerp(umax,umin,(val-ymax)/(amax-ymax)),-1):if(between(val,ymax,amax),lerp(vmin,vmax,(val-ymax)/(amax-ymax)),-1):-1'"

### psnr
       Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise Ratio) between  two  input
       videos.

       This  filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is considered the "main" source
       and is passed unchanged to the output. The second input is used as a  "reference"  video  for
       computing the PSNR.

       Both  video  inputs  must  have  the same resolution and pixel format for this filter to work
       correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs  have  the  same  number  of  frames,  which  are
       compared one by one.

       The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.

       The  filter  stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each frame, and at the end of
       the processing it is averaged across all frames equally, and the following formula is applied
       to obtain the PSNR:

               PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)

       Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the image.

       The description of the accepted parameters follows.

### stats_file, f
           If specified the filter will use the named file to  save  the  PSNR  of  each  individual
           frame. When filename equals "-" the data is sent to standard output.

### stats_version
           Specifies  which  version  of  the  stats  file format to use. Details of each format are
           written below.  Default value is 1.

### stats_add_max
           Determines whether the max value is output  to  the  stats  log.   Default  value  is  0.
           Requires stats_version >= 2. If this is set and stats_version < 2, the filter will return
           an error.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       The  file  printed  if  _stats_file_ is selected, contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the
       form _key_:_value_ for each compared couple of frames.

       If a _stats_version_ greater than 1 is specified, a header line precedes the list of per-frame-
       pair stats, with key value pairs following the frame format with the following parameters:

### psnr_log_version
           The version of the log file format. Will match _stats_version_.

### fields
           A comma separated list of the per-frame-pair parameters included in the log.

       A description of each shown per-frame-pair parameter follows:

       **n   **sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1

### mse_avg
           Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared frames, averaged over
           all the image components.

### mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_b, mse_a
           Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average  difference  of  the  compared  frames  for  the
           component specified by the suffix.

### psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
           Peak  Signal  to  Noise  ratio  of the compared frames for the component specified by the
           suffix.

### max_avg, max_y, max_u, max_v
           Maximum allowed value for each channel, and average over all channels.

       _Examples_

       •   For example:

                   movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
                   [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]

           On this example the input file being  processed  is  compared  with  the  reference  file
           _ref_movie.mpg_. The PSNR of each individual frame is stored in _stats.log_.

       •   Another example with different containers:

                   ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mkv -lavfi  "[0:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[main];[1:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[ref];[main][ref]psnr" -f null -

### pullup
       Pulldown  reversal  (inverse  telecine)  filter,  capable  of  handling  mixed hard-telecine,
       24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive content.

       The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in  making  its  decisions.
       This  filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock onto a pattern to follow, but it
       instead looks forward to the following fields  in  order  to  identify  matches  and  rebuild
       progressive frames.

       To  produce  content  with  an  even  framerate,  insert  the  fps  filter  after pullup, use
       "fps=24000/1001" if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,  "fps=24"  for  30fps  and  the  (rare)
       telecined 25fps input.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **jl**
       **jr**
       **jt**
       **jb  **These  options  set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and bottom of
           the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels, while  top  and  bottom
           are in units of 2 lines.  The default is 8 pixels on each side.

       **sb  **Set  the  strict  breaks.  Setting  this  option  to  1 will reduce the chances of filter
           generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an excessive  number  of
           frames  to  be  dropped  during high motion sequences.  Conversely, setting it to -1 will
           make filter match fields more easily.  This may help processing of video where  there  is
           slight  blurring  between the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in
           the output.  Default value is 0.

       **mp  **Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:

           **l   **Use luma plane.

           **u   **Use chroma blue plane.

           **v   **Use chroma red plane.

           This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma  plane  for  doing
           filter's  computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean source material, but more
           likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there is chroma noise  (rainbow  effect)  or
           any  grayscale  video.  The main purpose of setting **mp **to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
           load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.

       For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is necessary to change the
       output frame rate. For example, to inverse telecine NTSC input:

               ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...

   **qp**
       Change video quantization parameters (QP).

       The filter accepts the following option:

       **qp  **Set expression for quantization parameter.

       The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others, the following
       constants:

       _known_
           1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.

       _qp_  Sequential index starting from -129 to 128.

       _Examples_

       •   Some equation like:

                   qp=2+2*sin(PI*qp)

### random
       Flush video frames from internal cache of frames into a random order.  No frame is discarded.
       Inspired by **frei0r **nervous filter.

### frames
           Set size in number of frames of internal cache, in range from 2 to 512. Default is 30.

### seed
           Set seed for random  number  generator,  must  be  an  integer  included  between  0  and
           "UINT32_MAX".  If not specified, or if explicitly set to less than 0, the filter will try
           to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.

### readeia608
       Read closed captioning (EIA-608) information from the top lines of a video frame.

       This filter adds frame metadata for  "lavfi.readeia608.X.cc"  and  "lavfi.readeia608.X.line",
       where  "X"  is  the  number  of  the  identified  line with EIA-608 data (starting from 0). A
       description of each metadata value follows:

### lavfi.readeia608.X.cc
           The two bytes stored as EIA-608 data (printed in hexadecimal).

### lavfi.readeia608.X.line
           The number of the line on which the EIA-608 data was identified and read.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### scan_min
           Set the line to start scanning for EIA-608 data. Default is 0.

### scan_max
           Set the line to end scanning for EIA-608 data. Default is 29.

       **spw **Set the ratio of width reserved for sync code detection.  Default is 0.27. Allowed  range
           is "[0.1 - 0.7]".

       **chp **Enable  checking  the  parity bit. In the event of a parity error, the filter will output
           0x00 for that character. Default is false.

       **lp  **Lowpass lines prior to further processing. Default is enabled.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Output a csv with presentation time  and  the  first  two  lines  of  identified  EIA-608
           captioning data.

                   ffprobe -f lavfi -i movie=captioned_video.mov,readeia608 -show_entries frame=pts_time:frame_tags=lavfi.readeia608.0.cc,lavfi.readeia608.1.cc -of csv

### readvitc
       Read vertical interval timecode (VITC) information from the top lines of a video frame.

       The  filter  adds  frame  metadata  key "lavfi.readvitc.tc_str" with the timecode value, if a
       valid timecode has been detected. Further metadata key "lavfi.readvitc.found" is set  to  0/1
       depending on whether timecode data has been found or not.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### scan_max
           Set the maximum number of lines to scan for VITC data. If the value is set to -1 the full
           video frame is scanned. Default is 45.

### thr_b
           Set  the  luma threshold for black. Accepts float numbers in the range [0.0,1.0], default
           value is 0.2. The value must be equal or less than "thr_w".

### thr_w
           Set the luma threshold for white. Accepts float numbers in the range  [0.0,1.0],  default
           value is 0.6. The value must be equal or greater than "thr_b".

       _Examples_

       •   Detect  and  draw  VITC  data  onto  the  video frame; if no valid VITC is detected, draw
           "--:--:--:--" as a placeholder:

                   ffmpeg -i input.avi -filter:v 'readvitc,drawtext=fontfile=FreeMono.ttf:text=%{metadata\\:lavfi.readvitc.tc_str\\:--\\\\\\:--\\\\\\:--\\\\\\:--}:x=(w-tw)/2:y=400-ascent'

### remap
       Remap pixels using 2nd: Xmap and 3rd: Ymap input video stream.

       Destination pixel at position (X, Y) will be picked from source (x, y)  position  where  x  =
       Xmap(X,  Y) and y = Ymap(X, Y). If mapping values are out of range, zero value for pixel will
       be used for destination pixel.

       Xmap and Ymap input video streams must be of same dimensions. Output video stream  will  have
       Xmap/Ymap video stream dimensions.  Xmap and Ymap input video streams are 16bit depth, single
       channel.

### format
           Specify  pixel  format  of output from this filter. Can be "color" or "gray".  Default is
           "color".

### fill
           Specify the color of the unmapped pixels. For  the  syntax  of  this  option,  check  the
           **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default color is "black".

### removegrain
       The removegrain filter is a spatial denoiser for progressive video.

       **m0  **Set mode for the first plane.

       **m1  **Set mode for the second plane.

       **m2  **Set mode for the third plane.

       **m3  **Set mode for the fourth plane.

       Range of mode is from 0 to 24. Description of each mode follows:

       _0_   Leave input plane unchanged. Default.

       _1_   Clips the pixel with the minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.

       _2_   Clips the pixel with the second minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.

       _3_   Clips the pixel with the third minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.

       _4_   Clips  the  pixel with the fourth minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.  This is
           equivalent to a median filter.

       _5_   Line-sensitive clipping giving the minimal change.

       _6_   Line-sensitive clipping, intermediate.

       _7_   Line-sensitive clipping, intermediate.

       _8_   Line-sensitive clipping, intermediate.

       _9_   Line-sensitive clipping on a line where the neighbours pixels are the closest.

       _10_  Replaces the target pixel with the closest neighbour.

       _11_  [1 2 1] horizontal and vertical kernel blur.

       _12_  Same as mode 11.

       _13_  Bob mode, interpolates top field from the  line  where  the  neighbours  pixels  are  the
           closest.

       _14_  Bob  mode,  interpolates  bottom  field from the line where the neighbours pixels are the
           closest.

       _15_  Bob mode, interpolates top field. Same as 13 but with a  more  complicated  interpolation
           formula.

       _16_  Bob mode, interpolates bottom field. Same as 14 but with a more complicated interpolation
           formula.

       _17_  Clips  the  pixel with the minimum and maximum of respectively the maximum and minimum of
           each pair of opposite neighbour pixels.

       _18_  Line-sensitive clipping using  opposite  neighbours  whose  greatest  distance  from  the
           current pixel is minimal.

       _19_  Replaces the pixel with the average of its 8 neighbours.

       _20_  Averages the 9 pixels ([1 1 1] horizontal and vertical blur).

       _21_  Clips pixels using the averages of opposite neighbour.

       _22_  Same as mode 21 but simpler and faster.

       _23_  Small edge and halo removal, but reputed useless.

       _24_  Similar as 23.

### removelogo
       Suppress  a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which pixels comprise the logo.
       It works by filling in the pixels that comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### filename, f
           Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by  libavformat.  The
           width and height of the image file must match those of the video stream being processed.

       Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not considered part of the logo,
       non-zero  pixels  are  considered  part  of the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and
       black (0) for the rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is recommended  to
       take  a  screen  capture  of  a black frame with the logo visible, and then using a threshold
       filter followed by the erode filter once or twice.

       If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember  that  if  logo  pixels  are  not
       covered, the filter quality will be much reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo
       does  not  hurt as much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over the
       image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra  pixels  will  slow  things
       down on a large logo.

### repeatfields
       This  filter  uses  the  repeat_field  flag from the Video ES headers and hard repeats fields
       based on its value.

### reverse
       Reverse a video clip.

       Warning: This filter requires memory to buffer the entire clip, so trimming is suggested.

       _Examples_

       •   Take the first 5 seconds of a clip, and reverse it.

                   trim=end=5,reverse

### rgbashift
       Shift R/G/B/A pixels horizontally and/or vertically.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **rh  **Set amount to shift red horizontally.

       **rv  **Set amount to shift red vertically.

       **gh  **Set amount to shift green horizontally.

       **gv  **Set amount to shift green vertically.

       **bh  **Set amount to shift blue horizontally.

       **bv  **Set amount to shift blue vertically.

       **ah  **Set amount to shift alpha horizontally.

       **av  **Set amount to shift alpha vertically.

### edge
           Set edge mode, can be _smear_, default, or _warp_.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### roberts
       Apply roberts cross operator to input video stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default  value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### rotate
       Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       A description of the optional parameters follows.

### angle, a
           Set  an  expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video clockwise, expressed
           as a number of radians. A negative value will result in a counter-clockwise rotation.  By
           default it is set to "0".

           This expression is evaluated for each frame.

### out_w, ow
           Set  the  output  width  expression, default value is "iw".  This expression is evaluated
           just once during configuration.

### out_h, oh
           Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".  This  expression  is  evaluated
           just once during configuration.

### bilinear
           Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables it. Default value is 1.

### fillcolor, c
           Set  the  color  used  to  fill the output area not covered by the rotated image. For the
           general syntax of this option, check the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.   If
           the special value "none" is selected then no background is printed (useful for example if
           the background is never shown).

           Default value is "black".

       The  expressions  for  the  angle and the output size can contain the following constants and
       functions:

       **n   **sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN before the  first
           frame is filtered.

       **t   **time  in  seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is configured. It is
           always NAN before the first frame is filtered.

### hsub
### vsub
           horizontal and vertical chroma  subsample  values.  For  example  for  the  pixel  format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

### in_w, iw
### in_h, ih
           the input video width and height

### out_w, ow
### out_h, oh
           the  output  width  and  height,  that is the size of the padded area as specified by the
           _width_ and _height_ expressions

### rotw(a)
### roth(a)
           the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input video rotated by  _a_
           radians.

           These are only available when computing the **out_w **and **out_h **expressions.

       _Examples_

       •   Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:

                   rotate=PI/6

       •   Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:

                   rotate=-PI/6

       •   Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:

                   rotate=45*PI/180

       •   Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:

                   rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T

       •   Make  the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T seconds and an amplitude of
           A radians:

                   rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)

       •   Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating input video is  always
           completely contained in the output:

                   rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'

       •   Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever shown:

                   rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/[sqrt(2)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/sqrt/2/markdown)':oh=ow:c=none

       _Commands_

       The filter supports the following commands:

### a, angle
           Set  the  angle  expression.   The  command  accepts the same syntax of the corresponding
           option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### sab
       Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### luma_radius, lr
           Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default value is 1.0.  A
           greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower processing.

### luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
           Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default value is 1.0.

### luma_strength, ls
           Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must be a value in the
           0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.

### chroma_radius, cr
           Set  chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range -0.9-4.0. A greater value will
           result in a more blurred image, and in slower processing.

### chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
           Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the -0.9-2.0 range.

### chroma_strength, cs
           Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must be a  value  in
           the -0.9-100.0 range.

       Each  chroma  option  value,  if  not  explicitly specified, is set to the corresponding luma
       option value.

### scale
       Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.

       The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be  the  same  of  the  input,  by
       changing the output sample aspect ratio.

       If  the  input  image  format  is different from the format requested by the next filter, the
       scale filter will convert the input to the requested format.

       _Options_

       The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options supported by  the  libswscale
       scaler.

       See **the ffmpeg-scaler manual **for the complete list of scaler options.

### width, w
### height, h
           Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input dimension.

           If  the _width_ or _w_ value is 0, the input width is used for the output. If the _height_ or _h_
           value is 0, the input height is used for the output.

           If one and only one of the values is -n with n >= 1, the scale filter will  use  a  value
           that  maintains  the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other specified
           dimension. After that it will, however,  make  sure  that  the  calculated  dimension  is
           divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.

           If  both  values  are -n with n >= 1, the behavior will be identical to both values being
           set to 0 as previously detailed.

           See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension expression.

### eval
           Specify when to evaluate _width_ and _height_ expression. It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command  is
               processed.

           **frame**
               Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.

           Default value is **init**.

### interl
           Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:

           **1   **Force interlaced aware scaling.

           **0   **Do not apply interlaced scaling.

           **-1  **Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames are flagged as
               interlaced or not.

           Default value is **0**.

### flags
           Set  libswscale  scaling  flags.  See  **the  ffmpeg-scaler manual **for the complete list of
           values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies the default flags.

### param0, param1
           Set libswscale input parameters for scaling algorithms that need them.  See  **the  ffmpeg-**
           **scaler  manual  **for  the  complete  documentation. If not explicitly specified the filter
           applies empty parameters.

### size, s
           Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in  the**
           **ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### in_color_matrix
### out_color_matrix
           Set in/output YCbCr color space type.

           This  allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing a specific
           value used for the output and encoder.

           If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.

           Possible values:

           **auto**
               Choose automatically.

           **bt709**
               Format conforming  to  International  Telecommunication  Union  (ITU)  Recommendation
               BT.709.

           **fcc **Set  color  space  conforming  to the United States Federal Communications Commission
               (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).

           **bt601**
           **bt470**
           **smpte170m**
               Set color space conforming to:

               •   ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601

               •   ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G

               •   Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004

           **smpte240m**
               Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.

           **bt2020**
               Set color space conforming to ITU-R BT.2020 non-constant luminance system.

### in_range
### out_range
           Set in/output YCbCr sample range.

           This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing a  specific
           value  used  for the output and encoder. If not specified, the range depends on the pixel
           format. Possible values:

           **auto/unknown**
               Choose automatically.

           **jpeg/full/pc**
               Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).

           **mpeg/limited/tv**
               Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).

### force_original_aspect_ratio
           Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if  necessary  to  keep  the
           original aspect ratio. Possible values:

           **disable**
               Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.

           **decrease**
               The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.

           **increase**
               The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.

           One  useful  instance  of  this  option is that when you know a specific device's maximum
           allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to that,  while  retaining
           the  aspect  ratio.  For  example,  device  A allows 1280x720 playback, and your video is
           1920x800. Using this option (set it to decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to  the  command
           line makes the output 1280x533.

           Please  note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for **w **or **h**, you still need
           to specify the output resolution for this option to work.

### force_divisible_by
           Ensures that both the output dimensions, width and height, are  divisible  by  the  given
           integer  when used together with **force_original_aspect_ratio**. This works similar to using
           "-n" in the **w **and **h **options.

           This option  respects  the  value  set  for  **force_original_aspect_ratio**,  increasing  or
           decreasing the resolution accordingly. The video's aspect ratio may be slightly modified.

           This  option  can  be  handy  if  you need to have a video fit within or exceed a defined
           resolution using **force_original_aspect_ratio **but also have encoder restrictions on  width
           or height divisibility.

       The values of the **w **and **h **options are expressions containing the following constants:

       _in_w_
       _in_h_
           The input width and height

       _iw_
       _ih_  These are the same as _in_w_ and _in_h_.

       _out_w_
       _out_h_
           The output (scaled) width and height

       _ow_
       _oh_  These are the same as _out_w_ and _out_h_

       _a_   The same as _iw_ / _ih_

       _sar_ input sample aspect ratio

       _dar_ The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from "(iw / ih) * sar".

       _hsub_
       _vsub_
           horizontal  and  vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the pixel format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _ohsub_
       _ovsub_
           horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the pixel  format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _n_   The  (sequential)  number  of  the  input  frame,  starting  from 0.  Only available with
           "eval=frame".

       _t_   The presentation timestamp of the input frame, expressed as a  number  of  seconds.  Only
           available with "eval=frame".

       _pos_ The  position  (byte offset) of the frame in the input stream, or NaN if this information
           is unavailable and/or meaningless  (for  example  in  case  of  synthetic  video).   Only
           available with "eval=frame".  Deprecated, do not use.

       _Examples_

       •   Scale the input video to a size of 200x100

                   scale=w=200:h=100

           This is equivalent to:

                   scale=200:100

           or:

                   scale=200x100

       •   Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:

                   scale=qcif

           which can also be written as:

                   scale=size=qcif

       •   Scale the input to 2x:

                   scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih

       •   The above is the same as:

                   scale=2*in_w:2*in_h

       •   Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:

                   scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1

       •   Scale the input to half size:

                   scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2

       •   Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:

                   scale=3/2*iw:ow

       •   Seek Greek harmony:

                   scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
                   scale=ih*PHI:ih

       •   Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:

                   scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih

       •   Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma subsample values:

                   scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"

       •   Increase  the  width  to  a  maximum  of 500 pixels, keeping the same aspect ratio as the
           input:

                   scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'

       •   Make pixels square by combining scale and setsar:

                   scale='trunc(ih*dar):ih',setsar=1/1

       •   Make pixels square by combining scale and setsar, making sure the resulting resolution is
           even (required by some codecs):

                   scale='trunc(ih*dar/2)*2:trunc(ih/2)*2',setsar=1/1

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### width, w
### height, h
           Set the output video dimension expression.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
           corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### scale_cuda
       Scale  (resize)  and  convert (pixel format) the input video, using accelerated CUDA kernels.
       Setting the output width and height works in the same way as for the **scale **filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **w**
       **h   **Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input dimension.

           Allows for the same expressions as the **scale **filter.

### interp_algo
           Sets the algorithm used for scaling:

           _nearest_
               Nearest neighbour

               Used by default if input parameters match the desired output.

           _bilinear_
               Bilinear

           _bicubic_
               Bicubic

               This is the default.

           _lanczos_
               Lanczos

### format
           Controls the output pixel format. By default, or if none is specified,  the  input  pixel
           format is used.

           The filter does not support converting between YUV and RGB pixel formats.

### passthrough
           If set to 0, every frame is processed, even if no conversion is neccesary.  This mode can
           be useful to use the filter as a buffer for a downstream frame-consumer that exhausts the
           limited decoder frame pool.

           If set to 1, frames are passed through as-is if they match the desired output parameters.
           This is the default behaviour.

### param
           Algorithm-Specific parameter.

           Affects the curves of the bicubic algorithm.

### force_original_aspect_ratio
### force_divisible_by
           Work the same as the identical **scale **filter options.

       _Examples_

       •   Scale input to 720p, keeping aspect ratio and ensuring the output is yuv420p.

                   scale_cuda=-2:720:format=yuv420p

       •   Upscale to 4K using nearest neighbour algorithm.

                   scale_cuda=4096:2160:interp_algo=nearest

       •   Don't  do any conversion or scaling, but copy all input frames into newly allocated ones.
           This can be useful to deal with a filter and encode chain  that  otherwise  exhausts  the
           decoders frame pool.

                   scale_cuda=passthrough=0

### scale_npp
       Use  the  NVIDIA  Performance  Primitives  (libnpp)  to  perform  scaling and/or pixel format
       conversion on CUDA video frames. Setting the output width and height works in the same way as
       for the _scale_ filter.

       The following additional options are accepted:

### format
           The pixel format of the output CUDA frames. If set to the string  "same"  (the  default),
           the  input  format will be kept. Note that automatic format negotiation and conversion is
           not yet supported for hardware frames

### interp_algo
           The interpolation algorithm used for resizing. One of the following:

           **nn  **Nearest neighbour.

           **linear**
           **cubic**
           **cubic2p_bspline**
               2-parameter cubic (B=1, C=0)

           **cubic2p_catmullrom**
               2-parameter cubic (B=0, C=1/2)

           **cubic2p_b05c03**
               2-parameter cubic (B=1/2, C=3/10)

           **super**
               Supersampling

           **lanczos**
### force_original_aspect_ratio
           Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if  necessary  to  keep  the
           original aspect ratio. Possible values:

           **disable**
               Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.

           **decrease**
               The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.

           **increase**
               The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.

           One  useful  instance  of  this  option is that when you know a specific device's maximum
           allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to that,  while  retaining
           the  aspect  ratio.  For  example,  device  A allows 1280x720 playback, and your video is
           1920x800. Using this option (set it to decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to  the  command
           line makes the output 1280x533.

           Please  note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for **w **or **h**, you still need
           to specify the output resolution for this option to work.

### force_divisible_by
           Ensures that both the output dimensions, width and height, are  divisible  by  the  given
           integer  when used together with **force_original_aspect_ratio**. This works similar to using
           "-n" in the **w **and **h **options.

           This option  respects  the  value  set  for  **force_original_aspect_ratio**,  increasing  or
           decreasing the resolution accordingly. The video's aspect ratio may be slightly modified.

           This  option  can  be  handy  if  you need to have a video fit within or exceed a defined
           resolution using **force_original_aspect_ratio **but also have encoder restrictions on  width
           or height divisibility.

### eval
           Specify when to evaluate _width_ and _height_ expression. It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               Only  evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command is
               processed.

           **frame**
               Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.

       The values of the **w **and **h **options are expressions containing the following constants:

       _in_w_
       _in_h_
           The input width and height

       _iw_
       _ih_  These are the same as _in_w_ and _in_h_.

       _out_w_
       _out_h_
           The output (scaled) width and height

       _ow_
       _oh_  These are the same as _out_w_ and _out_h_

       _a_   The same as _iw_ / _ih_

       _sar_ input sample aspect ratio

       _dar_ The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from "(iw / ih) * sar".

       _n_   The (sequential) number of the  input  frame,  starting  from  0.   Only  available  with
           "eval=frame".

       _t_   The  presentation  timestamp  of  the input frame, expressed as a number of seconds. Only
           available with "eval=frame".

       _pos_ The position (byte offset) of the frame in the input stream, or NaN if  this  information
           is  unavailable  and/or  meaningless  (for  example  in  case  of synthetic video).  Only
           available with "eval=frame".  Deprecated, do not use.

### scale2ref
       Scale (resize) the input video, based on a reference video.

       See the scale filter for  available  options,  scale2ref  supports  the  same  but  uses  the
       reference  video  instead  of  the main input as basis. scale2ref also supports the following
       additional constants for the **w **and **h **options:

       _main_w_
       _main_h_
           The main input video's width and height

       _main_a_
           The same as _main_w_ / _main_h_

       _main_sar_
           The main input video's sample aspect ratio

       _main_dar,_ _mdar_
           The main input video's display  aspect  ratio.  Calculated  from  "(main_w  /  main_h)  *
           main_sar".

       _main_hsub_
       _main_vsub_
           The  main input video's horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values.  For example for
           the pixel format "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _main_n_
           The (sequential) number of the main input frame, starting from 0.   Only  available  with
           "eval=frame".

       _main_t_
           The  presentation  timestamp  of  the main input frame, expressed as a number of seconds.
           Only available with "eval=frame".

       _main_pos_
           The position (byte offset) of the frame  in  the  main  input  stream,  or  NaN  if  this
           information  is  unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
           Only available with "eval=frame".

       _Examples_

       •   Scale a subtitle stream (b) to match the main video (a) in size before overlaying

                   'scale2ref[b][a];[a][b]overlay'

       •   Scale a logo to 1/10th the height of a video, while preserving its display aspect ratio.

                   [logo-in][video-in]scale2ref=w=oh*mdar:h=ih/10[logo-out][video-out]

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### width, w
### height, h
           Set the output video dimension expression.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
           corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

### scale2ref_npp
       Use  the NVIDIA Performance Primitives (libnpp) to scale (resize) the input video, based on a
       reference video.

       See the **scale_npp **filter for available options, scale2ref_npp supports the same but uses  the
       reference video instead of the main input as basis. scale2ref_npp also supports the following
       additional constants for the **w **and **h **options:

       _main_w_
       _main_h_
           The main input video's width and height

       _main_a_
           The same as _main_w_ / _main_h_

       _main_sar_
           The main input video's sample aspect ratio

       _main_dar,_ _mdar_
           The  main  input  video's  display  aspect  ratio.  Calculated  from "(main_w / main_h) *
           main_sar".

       _main_n_
           The (sequential) number of the main input frame, starting from 0.   Only  available  with
           "eval=frame".

       _main_t_
           The  presentation  timestamp  of  the main input frame, expressed as a number of seconds.
           Only available with "eval=frame".

       _main_pos_
           The position (byte offset) of the frame  in  the  main  input  stream,  or  NaN  if  this
           information  is  unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
           Only available with "eval=frame".

       _Examples_

       •   Scale a subtitle stream (b) to match the main video (a) in size before overlaying

                   'scale2ref_npp[b][a];[a][b]overlay_cuda'

       •   Scale a logo to 1/10th the height of a video, while preserving its display aspect ratio.

                   [logo-in][video-in]scale2ref_npp=w=oh*mdar:h=ih/10[logo-out][video-out]

### scale_vt
       Scale and convert the color parameters using VTPixelTransferSession.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **w**
       **h   **Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input dimension.

### color_matrix
           Set the output colorspace matrix.

### color_primaries
           Set the output color primaries.

### color_transfer
           Set the output transfer characteristics.

### scharr
       Apply scharr operator to input video stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default  value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### scroll
       Scroll input video horizontally and/or vertically by constant speed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### horizontal, h
           Set  the  horizontal  scrolling  speed.  Default  is  0.  Allowed  range is from -1 to 1.
           Negative values changes scrolling direction.

### vertical, v
           Set the vertical scrolling speed. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.   Negative
           values changes scrolling direction.

### hpos
           Set  the  initial horizontal scrolling position. Default is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to
           1.

### vpos
           Set the initial vertical scrolling position. Default is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following **commands**:

### horizontal, h
           Set the horizontal scrolling speed.

### vertical, v
           Set the vertical scrolling speed.

### scdet
       Detect video scene change.

       This filter sets frame metadata with mafd between frame, the scene  score,  and  forward  the
       frame to the next filter, so they can use these metadata to detect scene change or others.

       In  addition,  this  filter  logs  a  message and sets frame metadata when it detects a scene
       change by **threshold**.

       "lavfi.scd.mafd" metadata keys are set with mafd for every frame.

       "lavfi.scd.score" metadata keys are set with scene change score for  every  frame  to  detect
       scene change.

       "lavfi.scd.time"  metadata  keys  are set with current filtered frame time which detect scene
       change with **threshold**.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### threshold, t
           Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change.  Good  values
           are in the "[8.0, 14.0]" range. The range for **threshold **is "[0., 100.]".

           Default value is 10..

### sc_pass, s
           Set  the  flag to pass scene change frames to the next filter. Default value is 0 You can
           enable it if you want to get snapshot of scene change frames only.

### selectivecolor
       Adjust cyan, magenta, yellow and black (CMYK) to certain ranges of colors  (such  as  "reds",
       "yellows",  "greens",  "cyans",  ...). The adjustment range is defined by the "purity" of the
       color (that is, how saturated it already is).

       This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop Selective Color tool.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### correction_method
           Select color correction method.

           Available values are:

           **absolute**
               Specified  adjustments  are  applied  "as-is"  (added/subtracted  to  original  pixel
               component value).

           **relative**
               Specified adjustments are relative to the original component value.

           Default is "absolute".

### reds
           Adjustments for red pixels (pixels where the red component is the maximum)

### yellows
           Adjustments for yellow pixels (pixels where the blue component is the minimum)

### greens
           Adjustments for green pixels (pixels where the green component is the maximum)

### cyans
           Adjustments for cyan pixels (pixels where the red component is the minimum)

### blues
           Adjustments for blue pixels (pixels where the blue component is the maximum)

### magentas
           Adjustments for magenta pixels (pixels where the green component is the minimum)

### whites
           Adjustments for white pixels (pixels where all components are greater than 128)

### neutrals
           Adjustments for all pixels except pure black and pure white

### blacks
           Adjustments for black pixels (pixels where all components are lesser than 128)

### psfile
           Specify a Photoshop selective color file (".asv") to import the settings from.

       All  the  adjustment  settings  (**reds**,  **yellows**, ...) accept up to 4 space separated floating
       point adjustment values in the [-1,1] range, respectively  to  adjust  the  amount  of  cyan,
       magenta, yellow and black for the pixels of its range.

       _Examples_

       •   Increase  cyan by 50% and reduce yellow by 33% in every green areas, and increase magenta
           by 27% in blue areas:

                   selectivecolor=greens=.5 0 -.33 0:blues=0 .27

       •   Use a Photoshop selective color preset:

                   selectivecolor=psfile=MySelectiveColorPresets/Misty.asv

### separatefields
       The "separatefields" takes  a  frame-based  video  input  and  splits  each  frame  into  its
       components  fields,  producing a new half height clip with twice the frame rate and twice the
       frame count.

       This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which of each pair  of  fields
       to   place   first  in  the  output.   If  it  gets  it  wrong  use  **setfield  **filter  before
       "separatefields" filter.

### setdar, setsar
       The "setdar" filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter output video.

       This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel)  Aspect  Ratio,  according  to  the
       following equation:

               <DAR> = <HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION> / <VERTICAL_RESOLUTION> * <SAR>

       Keep  in  mind  that  the  "setdar"  filter does not modify the pixel dimensions of the video
       frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by this filter may be changed by later  filters  in
       the  filterchain,  e.g.  in  case  of  scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
       applied.

       The "setsar" filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for the filter output video.

       Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the output display aspect ratio
       will change according to the equation above.

       Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the "setsar" filter may be changed by  later
       filters in the filterchain, e.g. if another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### r, ratio, dar ("setdar" only), sar ("setsar" only)
           Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.

           The  parameter  can be a floating point number string, or an expression. If the parameter
           is not specified, the value "0" is assumed, meaning that the same input value is used.

       **max **Set the maximum integer value to  use  for  expressing  numerator  and  denominator  when
           reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.  Default value is 100.

       The parameter _sar_ is an expression containing the following constants:

### w, h
           The input width and height.

       **a   **Same as _w_ / _h_.

       **sar **The input sample aspect ratio.

       **dar **The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as (_w_ / _h_) * _sar_.

### hsub, vsub
           Horizontal  and  vertical  chroma  subsample  values.  For  example, for the pixel format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _Examples_

       •   To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:

                   setdar=dar=1.77777
                   setdar=dar=16/9

       •   To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:

                   setsar=sar=10/11

       •   To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of 1000 in the
           aspect ratio reduction, use the command:

                   setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000

### setfield
       Force field for the output video frame.

       The "setfield" filter marks the interlace type field for  the  output  frames.  It  does  not
       change the input frame, but only sets the corresponding property, which affects how the frame
       is treated by following filters (e.g. "fieldorder" or "yadif").

       The filter accepts the following options:

### mode
           Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same field property.

           **bff **Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.

           **tff **Mark the frame as top-field-first.

           **prog**
               Mark the frame as progressive.

### setparams
       Force frame parameter for the output video frame.

       The  "setparams"  filter  marks  interlace and color range for the output frames. It does not
       change the input frame, but only sets the corresponding property, which affects how the frame
       is treated by filters/encoders.

### field_mode
           Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same field property (default).

           **bff **Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.

           **tff **Mark the frame as top-field-first.

           **prog**
               Mark the frame as progressive.

### range
           Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same color range property (default).

           **unspecified, unknown**
               Mark the frame as unspecified color range.

           **limited, tv, mpeg**
               Mark the frame as limited range.

           **full, pc, jpeg**
               Mark the frame as full range.

### color_primaries
           Set the color primaries.  Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same color primaries property (default).

           **bt709**
           **unknown**
           **bt470m**
           **bt470bg**
           **smpte170m**
           **smpte240m**
           **film**
           **bt2020**
           **smpte428**
           **smpte431**
           **smpte432**
           **jedec-p22**
### color_trc
           Set the color transfer.  Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same color trc property (default).

           **bt709**
           **unknown**
           **bt470m**
           **bt470bg**
           **smpte170m**
           **smpte240m**
           **linear**
           **log100**
           **log316**
           **iec61966-2-4**
           **bt1361e**
           **iec61966-2-1**
           **bt2020-10**
           **bt2020-12**
           **smpte2084**
           **smpte428**
           **arib-std-b67**
### colorspace
           Set the colorspace.  Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same colorspace property (default).

           **gbr**
           **bt709**
           **unknown**
           **fcc**
           **bt470bg**
           **smpte170m**
           **smpte240m**
           **ycgco**
           **bt2020nc**
           **bt2020c**
           **smpte2085**
           **chroma-derived-nc**
           **chroma-derived-c**
           **ictcp**

### sharpen_npp
       Use the NVIDIA Performance Primitives  (libnpp)  to  perform  image  sharpening  with  border
       control.

       The following additional options are accepted:

### border_type
           Type of sampling to be used ad frame borders. One of the following:

           **replicate**
               Replicate pixel values.

### shear
       Apply shear transform to input video.

       This filter supports the following options:

       **shx **Shear factor in X-direction. Default value is 0.  Allowed range is from -2 to 2.

       **shy **Shear factor in Y-direction. Default value is 0.  Allowed range is from -2 to 2.

### fillcolor, c
           Set  the color used to fill the output area not covered by the transformed video. For the
           general syntax of this option, check the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.   If
           the special value "none" is selected then no background is printed (useful for example if
           the background is never shown).

           Default value is "black".

### interp
           Set interpolation type. Can be "bilinear" or "nearest". Default is "bilinear".

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### showinfo
       Show  a  line  containing various information for each input video frame.  The input video is
       not modified.

       This filter supports the following options:

### checksum
           Calculate checksums of each plane. By default enabled.

       The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form _key_:_value_.

       The following values are shown in the output:

       **n   **The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.

       **pts **The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of time base  units.
           The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.

### pts_time
           The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of seconds.

       **fmt **The pixel format name.

       **sar **The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form _num_/_den_.

       **s   **The  size  of  the  input  frame.  For  the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

       **i   **The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for  top  field  first,  "B"  for
           bottom field first).

### iskey
           This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.

### type
           The  picture  type  of  the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a P-frame, "B" for a
           B-frame, or  "?"  for  an  unknown  type).   Also  refer  to  the  documentation  of  the
           "AVPictureType"   enum   and   of  the  "av_get_picture_type_char"  function  defined  in
           _libavutil/avutil.h_.

### checksum
           The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.

### plane_checksum
           The Adler-32 checksum (printed  in  hexadecimal)  of  each  plane  of  the  input  frame,
           expressed in the form "[_c0_ _c1_ _c2_ _c3_]".

### mean
           The  mean value of pixels in each plane of the input frame, expressed in the form "[_mean0_
           _mean1_ _mean2_ _mean3_]".

### stdev
           The standard deviation of pixel values in each plane of the input frame, expressed in the
           form "[_stdev0_ _stdev1_ _stdev2_ _stdev3_]".

### showpalette
       Displays the 256 colors palette of each frame. This filter is only relevant  for  _pal8_  pixel
       format frames.

       It accepts the following option:

       **s   **Set  the  size of the box used to represent one palette color entry. Default is 30 (for a
           "30x30" pixel box).

### shuffleframes
       Reorder and/or duplicate and/or drop video frames.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mapping
           Set the destination indexes of input frames.  This is space  or  '|'  separated  list  of
           indexes  that  maps  input  frames  to output frames. Number of indexes also sets maximal
           value that each index may have.  '-1' index have special meaning  and  that  is  to  drop
           frame.

       The first frame has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.

       _Examples_

       •   Swap second and third frame of every three frames of the input:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "shuffleframes=0 2 1" OUTPUT

       •   Swap 10th and 1st frame of every ten frames of the input:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "shuffleframes=9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0" OUTPUT

### shufflepixels
       Reorder pixels in video frames.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### direction, d
           Set  shuffle  direction.  Can  be  forward  or  inverse  direction.  Default direction is
           forward.

### mode, m
           Set shuffle mode. Can be horizontal, vertical or block mode.

### width, w
### height, h
           Set shuffle block_size. In case of horizontal shuffle mode only width  part  of  size  is
           used, and in case of vertical shuffle mode only height part of size is used.

### seed, s
           Set  random  seed  used with shuffling pixels. Mainly useful to set to be able to reverse
           filtering process to get original input.  For example, to  reverse  forward  shuffle  you
           need to use same parameters and exact same seed and to set direction to inverse.

### shuffleplanes
       Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### map0
           The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.

### map1
           The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.

### map2
           The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.

### map3
           The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.

       The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.

       _Examples_

       •   Swap the second and third planes of the input:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT

### signalstats
       Evaluate  various  visual  metrics  that  assist  in  determining  issues associated with the
       digitization of analog video media.

       By default the filter will log these metadata values:

       **YMIN**
           Display the minimal Y value contained within the  input  frame.  Expressed  in  range  of
           [0-255].

       **YLOW**
           Display  the  Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in range of
           [0-255].

       **YAVG**
           Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of [0-255].

       **YHIGH**
           Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in  range  of
           [0-255].

       **YMAX**
           Display  the  maximum  Y  value  contained  within the input frame. Expressed in range of
           [0-255].

       **UMIN**
           Display the minimal U value contained within the  input  frame.  Expressed  in  range  of
           [0-255].

       **ULOW**
           Display  the  U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in range of
           [0-255].

       **UAVG**
           Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of [0-255].

       **UHIGH**
           Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in  range  of
           [0-255].

       **UMAX**
           Display  the  maximum  U  value  contained  within the input frame. Expressed in range of
           [0-255].

       **VMIN**
           Display the minimal V value contained within the  input  frame.  Expressed  in  range  of
           [0-255].

       **VLOW**
           Display  the  V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in range of
           [0-255].

       **VAVG**
           Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of [0-255].

       **VHIGH**
           Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in  range  of
           [0-255].

       **VMAX**
           Display  the  maximum  V  value  contained  within the input frame. Expressed in range of
           [0-255].

       **SATMIN**
           Display the minimal saturation value contained within  the  input  frame.   Expressed  in
           range of [0-~181.02].

       **SATLOW**
           Display  the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.  Expressed in
           range of [0-~181.02].

       **SATAVG**
           Display the average saturation value within  the  input  frame.  Expressed  in  range  of
           [0-~181.02].

       **SATHIGH**
           Display  the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.  Expressed in
           range of [0-~181.02].

       **SATMAX**
           Display the maximum saturation value contained within  the  input  frame.   Expressed  in
           range of [0-~181.02].

       **HUEMED**
           Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of [0-360].

       **HUEAVG**
           Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of [0-360].

       **YDIF**
           Display  the  average of sample value difference between all values of the Y plane in the
           current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.  Expressed  in  range
           of [0-255].

       **UDIF**
           Display  the  average of sample value difference between all values of the U plane in the
           current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.  Expressed  in  range
           of [0-255].

       **VDIF**
           Display  the  average of sample value difference between all values of the V plane in the
           current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.  Expressed  in  range
           of [0-255].

       **YBITDEPTH**
           Display bit depth of Y plane in current frame.  Expressed in range of [0-16].

       **UBITDEPTH**
           Display bit depth of U plane in current frame.  Expressed in range of [0-16].

       **VBITDEPTH**
           Display bit depth of V plane in current frame.  Expressed in range of [0-16].

       The filter accepts the following options:

### stat
       **out stat  **specify  an additional form of image analysis.  **out **output video with the specified
           type of pixel highlighted.

           Both options accept the following values:

           **tout**
               Identify _temporal_  _outliers_  pixels.  A  _temporal_  _outlier_  is  a  pixel  unlike  the
               neighboring  pixels  of  the  same  field.  Examples of temporal outliers include the
               results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.

           **vrep**
               Identify _vertical_ _line_ _repetition_. Vertical line repetition includes similar rows  of
               pixels  within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line repetition is common, but
               this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an analog source. When it occurs  in
               video  that  results  from  the  digitization  of  an  analog  source it can indicate
               concealment from a dropout compensator.

           **brng**
               Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.

### color, c
           Set the highlight color for the **out **option. The default color is yellow.

       _Examples_

       •   Output data of various video metrics:

                   ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats="stat=tout+vrep+brng" -show_frames

       •   Output specific data about the minimum and maximum values of the Y plane per frame:

                   ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats -show_entries frame_tags=lavfi.signalstats.YMAX,lavfi.signalstats.YMIN

       •   Playback video while highlighting pixels that are outside of broadcast range in red.

                   ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats="out=brng:color=red"

       •   Playback video with signalstats metadata drawn over the frame.

                   ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats=stat=brng+vrep+tout,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=signalstat_drawtext.txt

           The contents of signalstat_drawtext.txt used in the command are:

                   time %{pts:hms}
                   Y (%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMIN}-%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMAX})
                   U (%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMIN}-%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMAX})
                   V (%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMIN}-%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMAX})
                   saturation maximum: %{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.SATMAX}

### signature
       Calculates the MPEG-7 Video Signature. The filter can handle more than  one  input.  In  this
       case  the  matching  between  the  inputs  can be calculated additionally.  The filter always
       passes through the first input. The signature of each stream can be written into a file.

       It accepts the following options:

### detectmode
           Enable or disable the matching process.

           Available values are:

           **off **Disable the calculation of a matching (default).

           **full**
               Calculate the matching for the whole video and output whether the whole video matches
               or only parts.

           **fast**
               Calculate only until a matching is found or the video ends. Should be faster in  some
               cases.

### nb_inputs
           Set the number of inputs. The option value must be a non negative integer.  Default value
           is 1.

### filename
           Set  the  path  to which the output is written. If there is more than one input, the path
           must be a prototype, i.e. must contain %d or %0nd (where n is a positive  integer),  that
           will  be  replaced  with the input number. If no filename is specified, no output will be
           written. This is the default.

### format
           Choose the output format.

           Available values are:

           **binary**
               Use the specified binary representation (default).

           **xml **Use the specified xml representation.

### th_d
           Set threshold to detect one word as similar. The option value must be an integer  greater
           than zero. The default value is 9000.

### th_dc
           Set threshold to detect all words as similar. The option value must be an integer greater
           than zero. The default value is 60000.

### th_xh
           Set  threshold  to  detect frames as similar. The option value must be an integer greater
           than zero. The default value is 116.

### th_di
           Set the minimum length of a sequence in frames to recognize it as matching sequence.  The
           option value must be a non negative integer value.  The default value is 0.

### th_it
           Set the minimum relation, that matching frames to all frames must have.  The option value
           must be a double value between 0 and 1. The default value is 0.5.

       _Examples_

       •   To calculate the signature of an input video and store it in signature.bin:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf signature=filename=signature.bin -map 0:v -f null -

       •   To  detect  whether  two  videos  match  and  store  the  signatures  in  XML  format  in
           signature0.xml and signature1.xml:

                   ffmpeg -i input1.mkv -i input2.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] signature=nb_inputs=2:detectmode=full:format=xml:filename=signature%d.xml" -map :v -f null -

### siti
       Calculate Spatial Information (SI) and Temporal Information  (TI)  scores  for  a  video,  as
       defined  in  ITU-T  Rec.  P.910  (11/21):  Subjective  video  quality  assessment methods for
       multimedia applications. Available PDF at  <**<https://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-P.910-202111-S/en>**>.
       Note  that  this  is a legacy implementation that corresponds to a superseded recommendation.
       Refer     to     ITU-T     Rec.     P.910     (07/22)     for     the     latest     version:
       <**<https://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-P.910-202207-I/en>**>

       It accepts the following option:

### print_summary
           If set to 1, Summary statistics will be printed to the console. Default 0.

       _Examples_

       •   To calculate SI/TI metrics and print summary:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -vf siti=print_summary=1 -f null -

### smartblur
       Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.

       It accepts the following options:

### luma_radius, lr
           Set  the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in the range [0.1,5.0] that
           specifies the variance of the gaussian filter used to blur the image (slower if  larger).
           Default value is 1.0.

### luma_strength, ls
           Set  the  luma  strength. The option value must be a float number in the range [-1.0,1.0]
           that configures the blurring. A value included in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a
           value included in [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.

### luma_threshold, lt
           Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to  determine  whether  a  pixel  should  be
           blurred  or  not. The option value must be an integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0
           will filter all the image, a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a  value
           included in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.

### chroma_radius, cr
           Set  the  chroma  radius.  The option value must be a float number in the range [0.1,5.0]
           that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter used to  blur  the  image  (slower  if
           larger). Default value is **luma_radius**.

### chroma_strength, cs
           Set  the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number in the range [-1.0,1.0]
           that configures the blurring. A value included in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a
           value included in [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is **luma_strength**.

### chroma_threshold, ct
           Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine whether  a  pixel  should  be
           blurred  or  not. The option value must be an integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0
           will filter all the image, a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a  value
           included in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is **luma_threshold**.

       If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value is set.

### sobel
       Apply sobel operator to input video stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set  which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### spp
       Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the  image  at  several
       (or - in the case of **quality **level 6 - all) shifts and average the results.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### quality
           Set  quality.  This  option  defines  the  number  of levels for averaging. It accepts an
           integer in the range 0-6. If set to 0, the filter will have no effect. A value of 6 means
           the higher quality. For each increment of that value the  speed  drops  by  a  factor  of
           approximately 2.  Default value is 3.

       **qp  **Force  a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the
           video stream (if available).

### mode
           Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:

           **hard**
               Set hard thresholding (default).

           **soft**
               Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).

### use_bframe_qp
           Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to  1.  Using  this  option  may  cause
           flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is 0 (not enabled).

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### quality, level
           Set quality level. The value "max" can be used to set the maximum level, currently 6.

   **sr**
       Scale the input by applying one of the super-resolution methods based on convolutional neural
       networks. Supported models:

       •   Super-Resolution     Convolutional     Neural     Network     model     (SRCNN).      See
           <**<https://arxiv.org/abs/1501.00092>**>.

       •   Efficient    Sub-Pixel    Convolutional    Neural    Network    model    (ESPCN).     See
           <**<https://arxiv.org/abs/1609.05158>**>.

       Training  scripts  as  well  as  scripts  for  model  file  (.pb)  saving  can  be  found  at
       <**<https://github.com/XueweiMeng/sr/tree/sr_dnn_native>**>.    Original    repository    is     at
       <**<https://github.com/HighVoltageRocknRoll/sr.git>**>.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### dnn_backend
           Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts the
           following values:

           **tensorflow**
               TensorFlow  backend.  To enable this backend you need to install the TensorFlow for C
               library (see <**<https://www.tensorflow.org/install/lang_c>**>) and configure  FFmpeg  with
               "--enable-libtensorflow"

### model
           Set  path  to  model  file specifying network architecture and its parameters.  Note that
           different backends use different file formats.  TensorFlow,  OpenVINO  backend  can  load
           files for only its format.

### scale_factor
           Set  scale  factor  for  SRCNN model. Allowed values are 2, 3 and 4.  Default value is 2.
           Scale factor is necessary for SRCNN  model,  because  it  accepts  input  upscaled  using
           bicubic upscaling with proper scale factor.

       To get full functionality (such as async execution), please use the **dnn_processing **filter.

### ssim
       Obtain the SSIM (Structural SImilarity Metric) between two input videos.

       This  filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is considered the "main" source
       and is passed unchanged to the output. The second input is used as a  "reference"  video  for
       computing the SSIM.

       Both  video  inputs  must  have  the same resolution and pixel format for this filter to work
       correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs  have  the  same  number  of  frames,  which  are
       compared one by one.

       The filter stores the calculated SSIM of each frame.

       The description of the accepted parameters follows.

### stats_file, f
           If  specified  the  filter  will  use  the named file to save the SSIM of each individual
           frame. When filename equals "-" the data is sent to standard output.

       The file printed if _stats_file_ is selected, contains a sequence of  key/value  pairs  of  the
       form _key_:_value_ for each compared couple of frames.

       A description of each shown parameter follows:

       **n   **sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1

### Y, U, V, R, G, B
           SSIM of the compared frames for the component specified by the suffix.

       **All **SSIM of the compared frames for the whole frame.

       **dB  **Same as above but in dB representation.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       _Examples_

       •   For example:

                   movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
                   [main][ref] ssim="stats_file=stats.log" [out]

           On  this  example  the  input  file  being  processed is compared with the reference file
           _ref_movie.mpg_. The SSIM of each individual frame is stored in _stats.log_.

       •   Another example with both psnr and ssim at same time:

                   ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi  "ssim;[0:v][1:v]psnr" -f null -

       •   Another example with different containers:

                   ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mkv -lavfi  "[0:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[main];[1:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[ref];[main][ref]ssim" -f null -

### stereo3d
       Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.

       The filters accept the following options:

       **in  **Set stereoscopic image format of input.

           Available values for input image formats are:

           **sbsl**
               side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)

           **sbsr**
               side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)

           **sbs2l**
               side by side parallel with half width resolution (left eye left, right eye right)

           **sbs2r**
               side by side crosseye with half width resolution (right eye left, left eye right)

           **abl**
           **tbl **above-below (left eye above, right eye below)

           **abr**
           **tbr **above-below (right eye above, left eye below)

           **ab2l**
           **tb2l**
               above-below with half height resolution (left eye above, right eye below)

           **ab2r**
           **tb2r**
               above-below with half height resolution (right eye above, left eye below)

           **al  **alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)

           **ar  **alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)

           **irl **interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)

           **irr **interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)

           **icl **interleaved columns, left eye first

           **icr **interleaved columns, right eye first

               Default value is **sbsl**.

       **out **Set stereoscopic image format of output.

           **sbsl**
               side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)

           **sbsr**
               side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)

           **sbs2l**
               side by side parallel with half width resolution (left eye left, right eye right)

           **sbs2r**
               side by side crosseye with half width resolution (right eye left, left eye right)

           **abl**
           **tbl **above-below (left eye above, right eye below)

           **abr**
           **tbr **above-below (right eye above, left eye below)

           **ab2l**
           **tb2l**
               above-below with half height resolution (left eye above, right eye below)

           **ab2r**
           **tb2r**
               above-below with half height resolution (right eye above, left eye below)

           **al  **alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)

           **ar  **alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)

           **irl **interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)

           **irr **interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)

           **arbg**
               anaglyph red/blue gray (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)

           **argg**
               anaglyph red/green gray (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)

           **arcg**
               anaglyph red/cyan gray (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)

           **arch**
               anaglyph red/cyan half colored (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)

           **arcc**
               anaglyph red/cyan color (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)

           **arcd**
               anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection  of  dubois  (red
               filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)

           **agmg**
               anaglyph green/magenta gray (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)

           **agmh**
               anaglyph  green/magenta  half  colored  (green  filter on left eye, magenta filter on
               right eye)

           **agmc**
               anaglyph green/magenta colored (green filter on left eye,  magenta  filter  on  right
               eye)

           **agmd**
               anaglyph  green/magenta  color  optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
               (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)

           **aybg**
               anaglyph yellow/blue gray (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)

           **aybh**
               anaglyph yellow/blue half colored (yellow filter on left eye, blue  filter  on  right
               eye)

           **aybc**
               anaglyph yellow/blue colored (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)

           **aybd**
               anaglyph  yellow/blue  color  optimized  with  the least squares projection of dubois
               (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)

           **ml  **mono output (left eye only)

           **mr  **mono output (right eye only)

           **chl **checkerboard, left eye first

           **chr **checkerboard, right eye first

           **icl **interleaved columns, left eye first

           **icr **interleaved columns, right eye first

           **hdmi**
               HDMI frame pack

           Default value is **arcd**.

       _Examples_

       •   Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:

                   stereo3d=sbsl:aybd

       •   Convert input video from above below (left eye above, right eye below) to  side  by  side
           crosseye.

                   stereo3d=abl:sbsr

### streamselect, astreamselect
       Select video or audio streams.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### inputs
           Set number of inputs. Default is 2.

       **map **Set input indexes to remap to outputs.

       _Commands_

       The "streamselect" and "astreamselect" filter supports the following commands:

       **map **Set input indexes to remap to outputs.

       _Examples_

       •   Select first 5 seconds 1st stream and rest of time 2nd stream:

                   sendcmd='5.0 streamselect map 1',streamselect=inputs=2:map=0

       •   Same as above, but for audio:

                   asendcmd='5.0 astreamselect map 1',astreamselect=inputs=2:map=0

### subtitles
       Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.

       To  enable  compilation  of  this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libass".
       This filter also requires a build with libavcodec  and  libavformat  to  convert  the  passed
       subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation Alpha) subtitles format.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### filename, f
           Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.

### original_size
           Specify  the  size  of the original video, the video for which the ASS file was composed.
           For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.
           Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic, this is necessary to  correctly  scale
           the fonts if the aspect ratio has been changed.

### fontsdir
           Set  a  directory path containing fonts that can be used by the filter.  These fonts will
           be used in addition to whatever the font provider uses.

### alpha
           Process alpha channel, by default alpha channel is untouched.

### charenc
           Set subtitles input character encoding. "subtitles"  filter  only.  Only  useful  if  not
           UTF-8.

### stream_index, si
           Set subtitles stream index. "subtitles" filter only.

### force_style
           Override  default  style  or script info parameters of the subtitles. It accepts a string
           containing ASS style format "KEY=VALUE" couples separated by ",".

### wrap_unicode
           Break lines according to the Unicode Line Breaking Algorithm.  Availability  requires  at
           least  libass  release  0.17.0  (or LIBASS_VERSION 0x01600010), _and_ libass must have been
           built with libunibreak.

           The option is enabled by default except for native ASS.

       If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value specifies the **filename**.

       For example, to render the file _sub.srt_ on top of the input video, use the command:

               subtitles=sub.srt

       which is equivalent to:

               subtitles=filename=sub.srt

       To render the default subtitles stream from file _video.mkv_, use:

               subtitles=video.mkv

       To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:

               subtitles=video.mkv:si=1

       To make the subtitles stream from _sub.srt_ appear in 80% transparent blue "DejaVu Serif", use:

               subtitles=sub.srt:force_style='Fontname=DejaVu Serif,PrimaryColour=&HCCFF0000'

### super2xsai
       Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the  Super2xSaI  (Scale  and  Interpolate)  pixel  art
       scaling algorithm.

       Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.

### swaprect
       Swap two rectangular objects in video.

       This filter accepts the following options:

       **w   **Set object width.

       **h   **Set object height.

       **x1  **Set 1st rect x coordinate.

       **y1  **Set 1st rect y coordinate.

       **x2  **Set 2nd rect x coordinate.

       **y2  **Set 2nd rect y coordinate.

           All expressions are evaluated once for each frame.

       The all options are expressions containing the following constants:

       **w**
       **h   **The input width and height.

       **a   **same as _w_ / _h_

       **sar **input sample aspect ratio

       **dar **input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_w_ / _h_) * _sar_

       **n   **The number of the input frame, starting from 0.

       **t   **The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.

       **pos **the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated, do not use

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### swapuv
       Swap U & V plane.

### tblend
       Blend successive video frames.

       See **blend**

### telecine
       Apply telecine process to the video.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### first_field
           **top, t**
               top field first

           **bottom, b**
               bottom field first The default value is "top".

### pattern
           A  string  of  numbers  representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.  The default
           value is 23.

               Some typical patterns:

               NTSC output (30i):
               27.5p: 32222
               24p: 23 (classic)
               24p: 2332 (preferred)
               20p: 33
               18p: 334
               16p: 3444

               PAL output (25i):
               27.5p: 12222
               24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
               16.67p: 33
               16p: 33333334

### thistogram
       Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video across time.

       Unlike **histogram **video filter which only shows histogram of single  input  frame  at  certain
       time, this filter shows also past histograms of number of frames defined by "width" option.

       The computed histogram is a representation of the color component distribution in an image.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### width, w
           Set  width  of single color component output. Default value is 0.  Value of 0 means width
           will be picked from input video.  This also set number  of  passed  histograms  to  keep.
           Allowed range is [0, 8192].

### display_mode, d
           Set display mode.  It accepts the following values:

           **stack**
               Per color component graphs are placed below each other.

           **parade**
               Per color component graphs are placed side by side.

           **overlay**
               Presents  information  identical  to  that  in  the  "parade", except that the graphs
               representing color components are superimposed directly over one another.

           Default is "stack".

### levels_mode, m
           Set mode. Can be either "linear", or "logarithmic".  Default is "linear".

### components, c
           Set what color components to display.  Default is 7.

### bgopacity, b
           Set background opacity. Default is 0.9.

### envelope, e
           Show envelope. Default is disabled.

### ecolor, ec
           Set envelope color. Default is "gold".

### slide
           Set slide mode.

           Available values for slide is:

           **frame**
               Draw new frame when right border is reached.

           **replace**
               Replace old columns with new ones.

           **scroll**
               Scroll from right to left.

           **rscroll**
               Scroll from left to right.

           **picture**
               Draw single picture.

           Default is "replace".

### threshold
       Apply threshold effect to video stream.

       This filter needs four video streams to perform thresholding.  First stream is stream we  are
       filtering.   Second  stream  is holding threshold values, third stream is holding min values,
       and last, fourth stream is holding max values.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default  value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

       For  example  if  first  stream pixel's component value is less then threshold value of pixel
       component from 2nd threshold stream, third stream value will picked, otherwise fourth  stream
       pixel component value will be picked.

       Using color source filter one can perform various types of thresholding:

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Binary threshold, using gray color as threshold:

                   ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -f lavfi -i color=black -f lavfi -i color=white -lavfi threshold output.avi

       •   Inverted binary threshold, using gray color as threshold:

                   ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -f lavfi -i color=white -f lavfi -i color=black -lavfi threshold output.avi

       •   Truncate binary threshold, using gray color as threshold:

                   ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -lavfi threshold output.avi

       •   Threshold to zero, using gray color as threshold:

                   ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -f lavfi -i color=white -i 320x240.avi -lavfi threshold output.avi

       •   Inverted threshold to zero, using gray color as threshold:

                   ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=white -lavfi threshold output.avi

### thumbnail
       Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **n   **Set  the  frames batch size to analyze; in a set of _n_ frames, the filter will pick one of
           them, and then handle the next batch of _n_ frames until the end. Default is 100.

       **log **Set the log level to display picked frame stats.  Default is "info".

       Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger _n_ value will result in  a
       higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.

       _Examples_

       •   Extract one picture each 50 frames:

                   thumbnail=50

       •   Complete example of a thumbnail creation with **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png

### tile
       Tile several successive frames together.

       The **untile **filter can do the reverse.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### layout
           Set  the  grid size in the form "COLUMNSxROWS". Range is upto UINT_MAX cells.  Default is
           "6x5".

### nb_frames
           Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must  be  less  than  or
           equal to _w_x_h_. The default value is 0, meaning all the area will be used.

### margin
           Set the outer border margin in pixels. Range is 0 to 1024. Default is 0.

### padding
           Set  the  inner  border  thickness  (i.e.  the number of pixels between frames). For more
           advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),  refer  to  the
           pad video filter. Range is 0 to 1024. Default is 0.

### color
           Specify  the  color  of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  The default value of _color_ is "black".

### overlap
           Set the number of frames to overlap when tiling several successive frames together.   The
           value must be between 0 and _nb_frames_ _-_ _1_. Default is 0.

### init_padding
           Set  the  number  of  frames  to initially be empty before displaying first output frame.
           This controls how soon will one get first output frame.  The value must be between 0  and
           _nb_frames_ _-_ _1_. Default is 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (**-skip_frame nokey**) in a movie:

                   ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png

           The  **-vsync  0  **is  necessary  to  prevent  **ffmpeg  **from duplicating each output frame to
           accommodate the originally detected frame rate.

       •   Display 5 pictures in an area of "3x2" frames, with 7 pixels between them, and  2  pixels
           of initial margin, using mixed flat and named options:

                   tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2

### tinterlace
       Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.

       Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is considered odd.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### mode
           Specify  the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified as a value alone.
           See below for a list of values for this option.

           Available values are:

           **merge, 0**
               Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field, generating a  double
               height frame at half frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444

                       Output:
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444

           **drop_even, 1**
               Only  output  odd  frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with unchanged
               height at half frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444

                       Output:
                       11111                           33333
                       11111                           33333
                       11111                           33333
                       11111                           33333

           **drop_odd, 2**
               Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a  frame  with  unchanged
               height at half frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444

                       Output:
                                       22222                           44444
                                       22222                           44444
                                       22222                           44444
                                       22222                           44444

           **pad, 3**
               Expand  each  frame  to full height, but pad alternate lines with black, generating a
               frame with double height at the same input frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444

                       Output:
                       11111           .....           33333           .....
                       .....           22222           .....           44444
                       11111           .....           33333           .....
                       .....           22222           .....           44444
                       11111           .....           33333           .....
                       .....           22222           .....           44444
                       11111           .....           33333           .....
                       .....           22222           .....           44444

           **interleave_top, 4**
               Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower  field  from  even  frames,
               generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
                       11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
                       11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
                       11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-

                       Output:
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444

           **interleave_bottom, 5**
               Interleave  the  lower  field  from odd frames with the upper field from even frames,
               generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
                       11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
                       11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
                       11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444

                       Output:
                       22222                           44444
                       11111                           33333
                       22222                           44444
                       11111                           33333

           **interlacex2, 6**
               Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames  are  inserted  each  containing  the
               second temporal field from the previous input frame and the first temporal field from
               the  next  input  frame.  This  mode  relies  on the top_field_first flag. Useful for
               interlaced video displays with no field synchronisation.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                        11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                        11111           22222           33333           44444

                       Output:
                       11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444   44444
                        11111   11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444
                       11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444   44444
                        11111   11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444

           **mergex2, 7**
               Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field, generating a  double
               height frame at same frame rate.

                        ------> time
                       Input:
                       Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4

                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444
                       11111           22222           33333           44444

                       Output:
                       11111           33333           33333           55555
                       22222           22222           44444           44444
                       11111           33333           33333           55555
                       22222           22222           44444           44444
                       11111           33333           33333           55555
                       22222           22222           44444           44444
                       11111           33333           33333           55555
                       22222           22222           44444           44444

           Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward compatibility reasons.

           Default mode is "merge".

### flags
           Specify flags influencing the filter process.

           Available value for _flags_ is:

           **low_pass_filter, vlpf**
               Enable linear vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.  Vertical low-pass filtering
               is  required  when creating an interlaced destination from a progressive source which
               contains high-frequency vertical detail. Filtering will  reduce  interlace  'twitter'
               and Moire patterning.

           **complex_filter, cvlpf**
               Enable complex vertical low-pass filtering.  This will slightly less reduce interlace
               'twitter'  and  Moire  patterning  but  better retain detail and subjective sharpness
               impression.

           **bypass_il**
               Bypass already interlaced frames, only adjust the frame rate.

           Vertical low-pass filtering and bypassing already interlaced frames can only  be  enabled
           for **mode _**interleave_top_ and _interleave_bottom_.

### tmedian
       Pick median pixels from several successive input video frames.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### radius
           Set radius of median filter.  Default is 1. Allowed range is from 1 to 127.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 15, by which all planes are processed.

### percentile
           Set  median  percentile.  Default  value  is  0.5.  Default value of 0.5 will pick always
           median values, while 0 will pick minimum values, and 1 maximum values.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports all above options as **commands**, excluding option "radius".

### tmidequalizer
       Apply Temporal Midway Video Equalization effect.

       Midway Video Equalization adjusts a sequence of video frames to  have  the  same  histograms,
       while maintaining their dynamics as much as possible. It's useful for e.g. matching exposures
       from a video frames sequence.

       This filter accepts the following option:

### radius
           Set filtering radius. Default is 5. Allowed range is from 1 to 127.

### sigma
           Set  filtering  sigma. Default is 0.5. This controls strength of filtering.  Setting this
           option to 0 effectively does nothing.

### planes
           Set which planes to process. Default is 15, which is all available planes.

### tmix
       Mix successive video frames.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### frames
           The number of successive frames to mix. If unspecified, it defaults to 3.

### weights
           Specify weight of each input video frame.  Each weight is separated by space.  If  number
           of  weights  is  smaller than number of _frames_ last specified weight will be used for all
           remaining unset weights.

### scale
           Specify scale, if it is set it will be multiplied with sum of each weight multiplied with
           pixel values to give final destination pixel value. By default _scale_ is  auto  scaled  to
           sum of weights.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

       _Examples_

       •   Average 7 successive frames:

                   tmix=frames=7:weights="1 1 1 1 1 1 1"

       •   Apply simple temporal convolution:

                   tmix=frames=3:weights="-1 3 -1"

       •   Similar as above but only showing temporal differences:

                   tmix=frames=3:weights="-1 2 -1":scale=1

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### weights
### scale
### planes
           Syntax is same as option with same name.

### tonemap
       Tone map colors from different dynamic ranges.

       This  filter  expects data in single precision floating point, as it needs to operate on (and
       can output) out-of-range values. Another filter, such as **zscale**, is  needed  to  convert  the
       resulting frame to a usable format.

       The  tonemapping  algorithms  implemented  only work on linear light, so input data should be
       linearized beforehand (and possibly correctly tagged).

               ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf zscale=transfer=linear,tonemap=clip,zscale=transfer=bt709,format=yuv420p OUTPUT

       _Options_

       The filter accepts the following options.

### tonemap
           Set the tone map algorithm to use.

           Possible values are:

           _none_
               Do not apply any tone map, only desaturate overbright pixels.

           _clip_
               Hard-clip any out-of-range values. Use it for perfect  color  accuracy  for  in-range
               values, while distorting out-of-range values.

           _linear_
               Stretch the entire reference gamut to a linear multiple of the display.

           _gamma_
               Fit a logarithmic transfer between the tone curves.

           _reinhard_
               Preserve  overall  image  brightness  with  a simple curve, using nonlinear contrast,
               which results in flattening details and degrading color accuracy.

           _hable_
               Preserve both dark and bright details better than _reinhard_, at the cost  of  slightly
               darkening  everything.  Use  it when detail preservation is more important than color
               and brightness accuracy.

           _mobius_
               Smoothly map out-of-range values, while retaining contrast and  colors  for  in-range
               material  as  much  as  possible.  Use  it when color accuracy is more important than
               detail preservation.

           Default is none.

### param
           Tune the tone mapping algorithm.

           This affects the following algorithms:

           _none_
               Ignored.

           _linear_
               Specifies the scale factor to use while stretching.  Default to 1.0.

           _gamma_
               Specifies the exponent of the function.  Default to 1.8.

           _clip_
               Specify an extra linear coefficient to multiply  into  the  signal  before  clipping.
               Default to 1.0.

           _reinhard_
               Specify  the  local  contrast coefficient at the display peak.  Default to 0.5, which
               means that in-gamut values will be about half as bright as when clipping.

           _hable_
               Ignored.

           _mobius_
               Specify the transition point from linear to mobius transform. Every value below  this
               point  is  guaranteed  to  be mapped 1:1. The higher the value, the more accurate the
               result will be, at the cost of losing bright details.  Default to 0.3, which  due  to
               the steep initial slope still preserves in-range colors fairly accurately.

### desat
           Apply  desaturation  for  highlights that exceed this level of brightness. The higher the
           parameter, the more color information will  be  preserved.  This  setting  helps  prevent
           unnaturally  blown-out  colors  for  super-highlights,  by  (smoothly) turning into white
           instead. This makes images feel more natural, at the cost of reducing  information  about
           out-of-range colors.

           The  default  of  2.0  is  somewhat  conservative  and will mostly just apply to skies or
           directly sunlit surfaces. A setting of 0.0 disables this option.

           This option works only if the input frame has a supported color tag.

### peak
           Override signal/nominal/reference peak with this value. Useful  when  the  embedded  peak
           information  in  display metadata is not reliable or when tone mapping from a lower range
           to a higher range.

### tpad
       Temporarily pad video frames.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### start
           Specify number of delay frames before input video stream. Default is 0.

### stop
           Specify  number  of  padding  frames  after  input  video  stream.   Set  to  -1  to  pad
           indefinitely. Default is 0.

### start_mode
           Set  kind  of frames added to beginning of stream.  Can be either _add_ or _clone_.  With _add_
           frames of solid-color are added.  With _clone_ frames are clones of first  frame.   Default
           is _add_.

### stop_mode
           Set  kind of frames added to end of stream.  Can be either _add_ or _clone_.  With _add_ frames
           of solid-color are added.  With _clone_ frames are clones of last frame.  Default is _add_.

### start_duration, stop_duration
           Specify the duration of the start/stop delay.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in  the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown)  manual  **for the accepted syntax.  These options override _start_ and _stop_.
           Default is 0.

### color
           Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           The default value of _color_ is "black".

### transpose
       Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **dir **Specify the transposition direction.

           Can assume the following values:

           **0, 4, cclock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:

                       L.R     L.l
                       . . ->  . .
                       l.r     R.r

           **1, 5, clock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:

                       L.R     l.L
                       . . ->  . .
                       l.r     r.R

           **2, 6, cclock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:

                       L.R     R.r
                       . . ->  . .
                       l.r     L.l

           **3, 7, clock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:

                       L.R     r.R
                       . . ->  . .
                       l.r     l.L

           For  values  between  4-7,  the transposition is only done if the input video geometry is
           portrait and not landscape. These values are deprecated, the "passthrough" option  should
           be used instead.

           Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of symbolic constants.

### passthrough
           Do  not  apply  the  transposition if the input geometry matches the one specified by the
           specified value. It accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Always apply transposition.

           **portrait**
               Preserve portrait geometry (when _height_ >= _width_).

           **landscape**
               Preserve landscape geometry (when _width_ >= _height_).

           Default value is "none".

       For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait layout:

               transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait

       The command above can also be specified as:

               transpose=1:portrait

### transpose_npp
       Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.   For  more  in  depth
       examples see the **transpose **video filter, which shares mostly the same options.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **dir **Specify the transposition direction.

           Can assume the following values:

           **cclock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip. (default)

           **clock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.

           **cclock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.

           **clock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip.

### passthrough
           Do  not  apply  the  transposition if the input geometry matches the one specified by the
           specified value. It accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Always apply transposition. (default)

           **portrait**
               Preserve portrait geometry (when _height_ >= _width_).

           **landscape**
               Preserve landscape geometry (when _width_ >= _height_).

### trim
       Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### start
           Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e.  the  frame  with  the  timestamp
           _start_ will be the first frame in the output.

       **end **Specify  the  time  of  the  first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame immediately
           preceding the one with the timestamp _end_ will be the last frame in the output.

### start_pts
           This is the same as _start_, except this option sets the start timestamp in timebase  units
           instead of seconds.

### end_pts
           This  is  the  same  as  _end_, except this option sets the end timestamp in timebase units
           instead of seconds.

### duration
           The maximum duration of the output in seconds.

### start_frame
           The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.

### end_frame
           The number of the first frame that should be dropped.

       **start**, **end**, and **duration **are expressed as time duration specifications; see **the Time duration**
       **section in the [ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

       Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the **duration  **option  look  at  the
       frame  timestamp,  while  the  _frame  variants simply count the frames that pass through the
       filter. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish for the output
       timestamps to start at zero, insert a setpts filter after the trim filter.

       If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy  and  keep  all  the
       frames  that  match  at  least  one  of the specified constraints. To keep only the part that
       matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim filters.

       The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.  just the end
       values to keep everything before the specified time.

       Examples:

       •   Drop everything except the second minute of input:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120

       •   Keep only the first second:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1

### unpremultiply
       Apply alpha unpremultiply effect to input video stream using first plane of second stream  as
       alpha.

       Both streams must have same dimensions and same pixel format.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set  which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.  By default value
           0xf, all planes will be processed.

           If the format has 1 or 2 components, then luma is bit 0.   If  the  format  has  3  or  4
           components:  for  RGB  formats  bit  0  is green, bit 1 is blue and bit 2 is red; for YUV
           formats bit 0 is luma, bit 1 is chroma-U and bit 2 is chroma-V.  If  present,  the  alpha
           channel is always the last bit.

### inplace
           Do not require 2nd input for processing, instead use alpha plane from input stream.

### unsharp
       Sharpen or blur the input video.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### luma_msize_x, lx
           Set  the  luma  matrix  horizontal  size. It must be an odd integer between 3 and 23. The
           default value is 5.

### luma_msize_y, ly
           Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an  odd  integer  between  3  and  23.  The
           default value is 5.

### luma_amount, la
           Set  the  luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable values lay
           between -1.5 and 1.5.

           Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will sharpen it, a value
           of zero will disable the effect.

           Default value is 1.0.

### chroma_msize_x, cx
           Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between 3  and  23.  The
           default value is 5.

### chroma_msize_y, cy
           Set  the  chroma  matrix  vertical  size. It must be an odd integer between 3 and 23. The
           default value is 5.

### chroma_amount, ca
           Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable values lay
           between -1.5 and 1.5.

           Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will sharpen it, a value
           of zero will disable the effect.

           Default value is 0.0.

### alpha_msize_x, ax
           Set the alpha matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between  3  and  23.  The
           default value is 5.

### alpha_msize_y, ay
           Set  the  alpha  matrix  vertical  size.  It must be an odd integer between 3 and 23. The
           default value is 5.

### alpha_amount, aa
           Set the alpha effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable values  lay
           between -1.5 and 1.5.

           Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will sharpen it, a value
           of zero will disable the effect.

           Default value is 0.0.

       All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply strong luma sharpen effect:

                   unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5

       •   Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:

                   unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2

### untile
       Decompose a video made of tiled images into the individual images.

       The  frame  rate  of  the output video is the frame rate of the input video multiplied by the
       number of tiles.

       This filter does the reverse of **tile**.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### layout
           Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of this  option,
           check the **"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

       _Examples_

       •   Produce  a  1-second  video from a still image file made of 25 frames stacked vertically,
           like an analogic film reel:

                   ffmpeg -r 1 -i image.jpg -vf untile=1x25 movie.mkv

### uspp
       Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the  image  at
       several (or - in the case of **quality **level 8 - all) shifts and average the results.

       The  way  this  differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes & decodes each
       case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8 DCT similar to MJPEG.

       This filter is only available in ffmpeg version 4.4 or earlier.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### quality
           Set quality. This option defines the number  of  levels  for  averaging.  It  accepts  an
           integer in the range 0-8. If set to 0, the filter will have no effect. A value of 8 means
           the  higher  quality.  For  each  increment  of that value the speed drops by a factor of
           approximately 2.  Default value is 3.

       **qp  **Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP from  the
           video stream (if available).

### codec
           Use specified codec instead of snow.

### v360
       Convert 360 videos between various formats.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### input
### output
           Set format of the input/output video.

           Available formats:

           **e**
           **equirect**
               Equirectangular projection.

           **c3x2**
           **c6x1**
           **c1x6**
               Cubemap with 3x2/6x1/1x6 layout.

               Format specific options:

               **in_pad**
               **out_pad**
                   Set padding proportion for the input/output cubemap. Values in decimals.

                   Example values:

                   **0   **No padding.

                   **0.01**
                       1% of face is padding. For example, with 1920x1280 resolution face size would
                       be  640x640  and  padding  would  be 3 pixels from each side. (640 * 0.01 = 6
                       pixels)

                   Default value is **@samp{0**}.  Maximum value is **@samp{0.1**}.

               **fin_pad**
               **fout_pad**
                   Set fixed padding for the input/output cubemap. Values in pixels.

                   Default value is **@samp{0**}. If  greater  than  zero  it  overrides  other  padding
                   options.

               **in_forder**
               **out_forder**
                   Set  order  of  faces for the input/output cubemap. Choose one direction for each
                   position.

                   Designation of directions:

                   **r   **right

                   **l   **left

                   **u   **up

                   **d   **down

                   **f   **forward

                   **b   **back

                   Default value is **@samp{rludfb**}.

               **in_frot**
               **out_frot**
                   Set rotation of faces for the input/output cubemap. Choose  one  angle  for  each
                   position.

                   Designation of angles:

                   **0   **0 degrees clockwise

                   **1   **90 degrees clockwise

                   **2   **180 degrees clockwise

                   **3   **270 degrees clockwise

                   Default value is **@samp{000000**}.

           **eac **Equi-Angular Cubemap.

           **flat**
           **gnomonic**
           **rectilinear**
               Regular video.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **dfisheye**
               Dual fisheye.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **barrel**
           **fb**
           **barrelsplit**
               Facebook's 360 formats.

           **sg  **Stereographic format.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **mercator**
               Mercator format.

           **ball**
               Ball format, gives significant distortion toward the back.

           **hammer**
               Hammer-Aitoff map projection format.

           **sinusoidal**
               Sinusoidal map projection format.

           **fisheye**
               Fisheye projection.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **pannini**
               Pannini projection.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
                   Set output pannini parameter.

               **ih_fov**
                   Set input pannini parameter.

           **cylindrical**
               Cylindrical projection.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **perspective**
               Perspective projection. _(output_ _only)_

               Format specific options:

               **v_fov**
                   Set perspective parameter.

           **tetrahedron**
               Tetrahedron projection.

           **tsp **Truncated square pyramid projection.

           **he**
           **hequirect**
               Half equirectangular projection.

           **equisolid**
               Equisolid format.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **og  **Orthographic format.

               Format specific options:

               **h_fov**
               **v_fov**
               **d_fov**
                   Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If  diagonal  field  of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of
                   view.

               **ih_fov**
               **iv_fov**
               **id_fov**
                   Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

                   If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and  vertical  field  of
                   view.

           **octahedron**
               Octahedron projection.

           **cylindricalea**
               Cylindrical Equal Area projection.

### interp
           Set  interpolation  method._Note:_  _more_  _complex_  _interpolation_  _methods_ _require_ _much_ _more_
           _memory_ _to_ _run._

           Available methods:

           **near**
           **nearest**
               Nearest neighbour.

           **line**
           **linear**
               Bilinear interpolation.

           **lagrange9**
               Lagrange9 interpolation.

           **cube**
           **cubic**
               Bicubic interpolation.

           **lanc**
           **lanczos**
               Lanczos interpolation.

           **sp16**
           **spline16**
               Spline16 interpolation.

           **gauss**
           **gaussian**
               Gaussian interpolation.

           **mitchell**
               Mitchell interpolation.

           Default value is **@samp{line**}.

       **w**
       **h   **Set the output video resolution.

           Default resolution depends on formats.

### in_stereo
### out_stereo
           Set the input/output stereo format.

           **2d  **2D mono

           **sbs **Side by side

           **tb  **Top bottom

           Default value is **@samp{2d**} for input and output format.

### yaw
### pitch
### roll
           Set rotation for the output video. Values in degrees.

### rorder
           Set rotation order for the output video. Choose one item for each position.

           **y, Y**
               yaw

           **p, P**
               pitch

           **r, R**
               roll

           Default value is **@samp{ypr**}.

### h_flip
### v_flip
### d_flip
           Flip     the     output     video     horizontally(swaps     left-right)/vertically(swaps
           up-down)/in-depth(swaps back-forward). Boolean values.

### ih_flip
### iv_flip
           Set if input video is flipped horizontally/vertically. Boolean values.

### in_trans
           Set if input video is transposed. Boolean value, by default disabled.

### out_trans
           Set if output video needs to be transposed. Boolean value, by default disabled.

### h_offset
### v_offset
           Set  output  horizontal/vertical  off-axis offset. Default is set to 0.  Allowed range is
           from -1 to 1.

### alpha_mask
           Build mask in alpha plane for all unmapped pixels  by  marking  them  fully  transparent.
           Boolean value, by default disabled.

### reset_rot
           Reset rotation of output video. Boolean value, by default disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Convert  equirectangular  video  to  cubemap with 3x2 layout and 1% padding using bicubic
           interpolation:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf v360=e:c3x2:cubic:out_pad=0.01 output.mkv

       •   Extract back view of Equi-Angular Cubemap:

                   ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf v360=eac:flat:yaw=180 output.mkv

       •   Convert transposed and horizontally flipped Equi-Angular Cubemap in  side-by-side  stereo
           format to equirectangular top-bottom stereo format:

                   v360=eac:equirect:in_stereo=sbs:in_trans=1:ih_flip=1:out_stereo=tb

       _Commands_

       This filter supports subset of above options as **commands**.

### vaguedenoiser
       Apply a wavelet based denoiser.

       It  transforms  each  frame  from  the  video  input  into  the  wavelet domain, using Cohen-
       Daubechies-Feauveau 9/7. Then it applies some filtering to the obtained coefficients. It does
       an inverse wavelet transform after.  Due  to  wavelet  properties,  it  should  give  a  nice
       smoothed result, and reduced noise, without blurring picture features.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### threshold
           The  filtering  strength.  The  higher,  the  more  filtered  the  video  will  be.  Hard
           thresholding can use a higher threshold than soft thresholding  before  the  video  looks
           overfiltered. Default value is 2.

### method
           The filtering method the filter will use.

           It accepts the following values:

           **hard**
               All values under the threshold will be zeroed.

           **soft**
               All  values  under  the threshold will be zeroed. All values above will be reduced by
               the threshold.

           **garrote**
               Scales or nullifies coefficients - intermediary between (more) soft and  (less)  hard
               thresholding.

           Default is garrote.

### nsteps
           Number  of  times,  the  wavelet  will decompose the picture. Picture can't be decomposed
           beyond a particular point (typically, 8 for a 640x480 frame - as 2^9 = 512 > 480).  Valid
           values are integers between 1 and 32. Default value is 6.

### percent
           Partial  of full denoising (limited coefficients shrinking), from 0 to 100. Default value
           is 85.

### planes
           A list of the planes to process. By default all planes are processed.

### type
           The threshold type the filter will use.

           It accepts the following values:

           **universal**
               Threshold used is same for all decompositions.

           **bayes**
               Threshold used depends also on each decomposition coefficients.

           Default is universal.

### varblur
       Apply variable blur filter by using 2nd video stream to set blur radius.  The 2nd stream must
       have the same dimensions.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### min_r
           Set min allowed radius. Allowed range is from 0 to 254. Default is 0.

### max_r
           Set max allowed radius. Allowed range is from 1 to 255. Default is 8.

### planes
           Set which planes to process. By default, all are used.

       The "varblur" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports all the above options as **commands**.

### vectorscope
       Display  2  color  component  values  in  the  two  dimensional  graph  (which  is  called  a
       vectorscope).

       This filter accepts the following options:

### mode, m
           Set vectorscope mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **gray**
           **tint**
               Gray  values  are  displayed  on graph, higher brightness means more pixels have same
               component color value on location in graph. This is the default mode.

           **color**
               Gray values are displayed on graph. Surrounding pixels values which are  not  present
               in  video  frame  are drawn in gradient of 2 color components which are set by option
               "x" and "y". The 3rd color component is static.

           **color2**
               Actual color components values present in video frame are displayed on graph.

           **color3**
               Similar as color2 but higher frequency of same values "x" and "y" on graph  increases
               value  of  another  color  component, which is luminance by default values of "x" and
               "y".

           **color4**
               Actual colors present in video frame are displayed on graph. If two different  colors
               map  to  same position on graph then color with higher value of component not present
               in graph is picked.

           **color5**
               Gray values are displayed on graph. Similar to "color" but with 3rd  color  component
               picked from radial gradient.

       **x   **Set which color component will be represented on X-axis. Default is 1.

       **y   **Set which color component will be represented on Y-axis. Default is 2.

### intensity, i
           Set intensity, used by modes: gray, color, color3 and color5 for increasing brightness of
           color component which represents frequency of (X, Y) location in graph.

### envelope, e
           **none**
               No envelope, this is default.

           **instant**
               Instant envelope, even darkest single pixel will be clearly highlighted.

           **peak**
               Hold  maximum and minimum values presented in graph over time. This way you can still
               spot out of range values without constantly looking at vectorscope.

           **peak+instant**
               Peak and instant envelope combined together.

### graticule, g
           Set what kind of graticule to draw.

           **none**
           **green**
           **color**
           **invert**
### opacity, o
           Set graticule opacity.

### flags, f
           Set graticule flags.

           **white**
               Draw graticule for white point.

           **black**
               Draw graticule for black point.

           **name**
               Draw color points short names.

### bgopacity, b
           Set background opacity.

### lthreshold, l
           Set low threshold for color component not represented on X or Y axis.  Values lower  than
           this  value will be ignored. Default is 0.  Note this value is multiplied with actual max
           possible value one pixel component can have. So for 8-bit input and low  threshold  value
           of 0.1 actual threshold is 0.1 * 255 = 25.

### hthreshold, h
           Set  high  threshold  for  color component not represented on X or Y axis.  Values higher
           than this value will be ignored. Default is 1.  Note this value is multiplied with actual
           max possible value one pixel component can have. So for 8-bit input  and  high  threshold
           value of 0.9 actual threshold is 0.9 * 255 = 230.

### colorspace, c
           Set what kind of colorspace to use when drawing graticule.

           **auto**
           **601**
           **709**

           Default is auto.

### tint0, t0
### tint1, t1
           Set  color  tint  for gray/tint vectorscope mode. By default both options are zero.  This
           means no tint, and output will remain gray.

### vidstabdetect
       Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see **vidstabtransform **for pass 2.

       This filter generates a file with relative translation  and  rotation  transform  information
       about subsequent frames, which is then used by the **vidstabtransform **filter.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libvidstab".

       This filter accepts the following options:

### result
           Set  the  path  to  the  file used to write the transforms information.  Default value is
           _transforms.trf_.

### shakiness
           Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It  accepts  an  integer  in  the
           range  1-10,  a  value of 1 means little shakiness, a value of 10 means strong shakiness.
           Default value is 5.

### accuracy
           Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the range 1-15. A  value
           of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high accuracy. Default value is 15.

### stepsize
           Set  stepsize  of  the  search process. The region around minimum is scanned with 1 pixel
           resolution. Default value is 6.

### mincontrast
           Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is discarded. Must be  a
           floating point value in the range 0-1. Default value is 0.3.

### tripod
           Set reference frame number for tripod mode.

           If  enabled,  the  motion  of the frames is compared to a reference frame in the filtered
           stream, identified by the specified number. The idea is to compensate all movements in  a
           more-or-less static scene and keep the camera view absolutely still.

           If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.

### show
           Show  fields  and  transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an integer in the range
           0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any visualization.

### fileformat
           Format for the transforms data file to be written.  Acceptable values are

           **ascii**
               Human-readable plain text

           **binary**
               Binary format, roughly 40% smaller than "ascii". (_default_)

       _Examples_

       •   Use default values:

                   vidstabdetect

       •   Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file _mytransforms.trf_:

                   vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"

       •   Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting video:

                   vidstabdetect=show=1

       •   Analyze a video with medium shakiness using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi

### vidstabtransform
       Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2, see **vidstabdetect **for pass 1.

       Read a file with transform information for each frame  and  apply/compensate  them.  Together
       with   the   **vidstabdetect   **filter   this   can   be   used  to  deshake  videos.  See  also
       <**<http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab>**>. It is important to also use  the  **unsharp  **filter,  see
       below.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libvidstab".

       _Options_

### input
           Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is _transforms.trf_.

### smoothing
           Set  the  number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the camera movements.
           Default value is 10.

           For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the past and  10  in  the
           future)  to  smoothen  the motion in the video. A larger value leads to a smoother video,
           but limits the acceleration of the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where
           a static camera is simulated.

### optalgo
           Set the camera path optimization algorithm.

           Accepted values are:

           **gauss**
               gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)

           **avg **averaging on transformations

### maxshift
           Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1, meaning no limit.

### maxangle
           Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to  rotate  frames.  Default  value  is  -1,
           meaning no limit.

### crop
           Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement compensation.

           Available values are:

           **keep**
               keep image information from previous frame (default)

           **black**
               fill the border black

### invert
           Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.

### relative
           Consider  transforms  as  relative  to  previous frame if set to 1, absolute if set to 0.
           Default value is 0.

### zoom
           Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in  a  zoom-in  effect,  a  negative
           value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no zoom).

### optzoom
           Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.

           Accepted values are:

           **0   **disabled

           **1   **optimal  static  zoom  value  is  determined (only very strong movements will lead to
               visible borders) (default)

           **2   **optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be visible), see **zoomspeed**

           Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.

### zoomspeed
           Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when **optzoom **is set  to  2).  Range  is
           from 0 to 5, default value is 0.25.

### interpol
           Specify type of interpolation.

           Available values are:

           **no  **no interpolation

           **linear**
               linear only horizontal

           **bilinear**
               linear in both directions (default)

           **bicubic**
               cubic in both directions (slow)

### tripod
           Enable  virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to "relative=0:smoothing=0".
           Default value is 0.

           Use also "tripod" option of **vidstabdetect**.

### debug
           Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions are written  to  the
           temporary file _global_motions.trf_. Default value is 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Use **ffmpeg **for a typical stabilization with default values:

                   ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg

           Note the use of the **unsharp **filter which is always recommended.

       •   Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:

                   vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"

       •   Smoothen the video even more:

                   vidstabtransform=smoothing=30

### vflip
       Flip the input video vertically.

       For example, to vertically flip a video with **ffmpeg**:

               ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi

### vfrdet
       Detect variable frame rate video.

       This filter tries to detect if the input is variable or constant frame rate.

       At  end  it will output number of frames detected as having variable delta pts, and ones with
       constant delta pts.  If there was frames with variable delta, than it will also show min, max
       and average delta encountered.

### vibrance
       Boost or alter saturation.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### intensity
           Set strength of boost if positive value or strength of alter if negative value.   Default
           is 0. Allowed range is from -2 to 2.

### rbal
           Set the red balance. Default is 1. Allowed range is from -10 to 10.

### gbal
           Set the green balance. Default is 1. Allowed range is from -10 to 10.

### bbal
           Set the blue balance. Default is 1. Allowed range is from -10 to 10.

### rlum
           Set the red luma coefficient.

### glum
           Set the green luma coefficient.

### blum
           Set the blue luma coefficient.

### alternate
           If  "intensity"  is  negative  and this is set to 1, colors will change, otherwise colors
           will be less saturated, more towards gray.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as **commands**.

### vif
       Obtain the average VIF (Visual Information Fidelity) between two input videos.

       This filter takes two input videos.

       Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format  for  this  filter  to  work
       correctly.  Also  it  assumes  that  both  inputs  have  the same number of frames, which are
       compared one by one.

       The obtained average VIF score is printed through the logging system.

       The filter stores the calculated VIF score of each frame.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       In the below example the input file _main.mpg_ being processed is compared with  the  reference
       file _ref.mpg_.

               ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi vif -f null -

### vignette
       Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### angle, a
           Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.

           The value is clipped in the "[0,PI/2]" range.

           Default value: "PI/5"

       **x0**
       **y0  **Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively "w/2" and "h/2" by default.

### mode
           Set forward/backward mode.

           Available modes are:

           **forward**
               The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.

           **backward**
               The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.  This
               can  be  used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic detection to
               extract the lens **angle **and other settings (yet). It can also  be  used  to  create  a
               burning effect.

           Default value is **forward**.

### eval
           Set evaluation mode for the expressions (**angle**, **x0**, **y0**).

           It accepts the following values:

           **init**
               Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.

           **frame**
               Evaluate  expressions  for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the **init **mode
               since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it allows  advanced  dynamic
               expressions.

           Default value is **init**.

### dither
           Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is 1 (enabled).

### aspect
           Set  vignette  aspect.  This  setting  allows  one  to  adjust the shape of the vignette.
           Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular  vignetting  following
           the dimensions of the video.

           Default is "1/1".

       _Expressions_

       The **alpha**, **x0 **and **y0 **expressions can contain the following parameters.

       **w**
       **h   **input width and height

       **n   **the number of input frame, starting from 0

       **pts **the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in _TB_ units,
           NAN if undefined

       **r   **frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown

       **t   **the  PTS  (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame, expressed in seconds, NAN
           if undefined

       **tb  **time base of the input video

       _Examples_

       •   Apply simple strong vignetting effect:

                   vignette=PI/4

       •   Make a flickering vignetting:

                   vignette='PI/[4+random(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/4%2Brandom/1/markdown)*PI/50':eval=frame

### vmafmotion
       Obtain the average VMAF motion score of a video.  It is one of the component metrics of VMAF.

       The obtained average motion score is printed through the logging system.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### stats_file
           If specified, the filter will use the named file to save the motion score of  each  frame
           with  respect  to  the  previous  frame.   When  filename  equals "-" the data is sent to
           standard output.

       Example:

               ffmpeg -i ref.mpg -vf vmafmotion -f null -

### vstack
       Stack input videos vertically.

       All streams must be of same pixel format and of same width.

       Note that this filter is faster than using **overlay **and **pad **filter to create same output.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### inputs
           Set number of input streams. Default is 2.

### shortest
           If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest  input  terminates.  Default
           value is 0.

### w3fdif
       Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field Deinterlacing Filter").

       Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and implemented based on the de-
       interlace  algorithm written by Jim Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing
       filter uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.

       This filter uses field-dominance information in frame to decide which of each pair of  fields
       to  place  first  in  the  output.   If  it gets it wrong use **setfield **filter before "w3fdif"
       filter.

       There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple" and  "complex".  Which  set  of
       filter coefficients is used can be set by passing an optional parameter:

### filter
           Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:

           **simple**
               Simple filter coefficient set.

           **complex**
               More-complex filter coefficient set.

           Default value is **complex**.

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           The default value is "field".

### parity
           The  picture  field  parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one of the
           following values:

           **tff **Assume the top field is first.

           **bff **Assume the bottom field is first.

           **auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The default value is "auto".  If the interlacing is  unknown  or  the  decoder  does  not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **all **Deinterlace all frames,

           **interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           Default value is **all**.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### waveform
       Video waveform monitor.

       The  waveform  monitor  plots color component intensity. By default luma only. Each column of
       the waveform corresponds to a column of pixels in the source video.

       It accepts the following options:

### mode, m
           Can be either "row", or "column". Default is "column".  In row mode,  the  graph  on  the
           left  side  represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
           In column mode, the top side represents  color  component  value  =  0  and  bottom  side
           represents value = 255.

### intensity, i
           Set  intensity.  Smaller  values  are  useful  to  find  out  how many values of the same
           luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.   Default  value  is  0.04.  Allowed
           range is [0, 1].

### mirror, r
           Set  mirroring  mode.  0  means  unmirrored,  1 means mirrored.  In mirrored mode, higher
           values will be represented on the left side for "row" mode and at the  top  for  "column"
           mode. Default is 1 (mirrored).

### display, d
           Set display mode.  It accepts the following values:

           **overlay**
               Presents  information  identical  to  that  in  the  "parade", except that the graphs
               representing color components are superimposed directly over one another.

               This display mode makes it easier to spot relative  differences  or  similarities  in
               overlapping  areas of the color components that are supposed to be identical, such as
               neutral whites, grays, or blacks.

           **stack**
               Display separate graph for the color components side by side in  "row"  mode  or  one
               below the other in "column" mode.

           **parade**
               Display  separate graph for the color components side by side in "column" mode or one
               below the other in "row" mode.

               Using this display mode makes it easy to spot  color  casts  in  the  highlights  and
               shadows  of  an  image, by comparing the contours of the top and the bottom graphs of
               each waveform. Since whites, grays, and blacks are  characterized  by  exactly  equal
               amounts  of  red,  green, and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three
               waveforms of roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
               making level adjustments the three waveforms.

           Default is "stack".

### components, c
           Set which color components to display. Default is 1, which means only luma or  red  color
           component if input is in RGB colorspace. If is set for example to 7 it will display all 3
           (if) available color components.

### envelope, e
           **none**
               No envelope, this is default.

           **instant**
               Instant  envelope,  minimum  and  maximum  values  presented  in graph will be easily
               visible even with small "step" value.

           **peak**
               Hold minimum and maximum values presented in graph across  time.  This  way  you  can
               still spot out of range values without constantly looking at waveforms.

           **peak+instant**
               Peak and instant envelope combined together.

### filter, f
           **lowpass**
               No filtering, this is default.

           **flat**
               Luma and chroma combined together.

           **aflat**
               Similar as above, but shows difference between blue and red chroma.

           **xflat**
               Similar as above, but use different colors.

           **yflat**
               Similar as above, but again with different colors.

           **chroma**
               Displays only chroma.

           **color**
               Displays actual color value on waveform.

           **acolor**
               Similar as above, but with luma showing frequency of chroma values.

### graticule, g
           Set which graticule to display.

           **none**
               Do not display graticule.

           **green**
               Display green graticule showing legal broadcast ranges.

           **orange**
               Display orange graticule showing legal broadcast ranges.

           **invert**
               Display invert graticule showing legal broadcast ranges.

### opacity, o
           Set graticule opacity.

### flags, fl
           Set graticule flags.

           **numbers**
               Draw numbers above lines. By default enabled.

           **dots**
               Draw dots instead of lines.

### scale, s
           Set scale used for displaying graticule.

           **digital**
           **millivolts**
           **ire**

           Default is digital.

### bgopacity, b
           Set background opacity.

### tint0, t0
### tint1, t1
           Set  tint  for output.  Only used with lowpass filter and when display is not overlay and
           input pixel formats are not RGB.

### fitmode, fm
           Set sample aspect ratio of video output frames.  Can be used to configure waveform so  it
           is not streched too much in one of directions.

           **none**
               Set sample aspect ration to 1/1.

           **size**
               Set sample aspect ratio to match input size of video

           Default is **none**.

### input
           Set  input formats for filter to pick from.  Can be **all**, for selecting from all available
           formats, or **first**, for selecting first available format.  Default is **first**.

### weave, doubleweave
       The "weave" takes a field-based video input and join each two sequential fields  into  single
       frame, producing a new double height clip with half the frame rate and half the frame count.

       The "doubleweave" works same as "weave" but without halving frame rate and frame count.

       It accepts the following option:

### first_field
           Set first field. Available values are:

           **top, t**
               Set the frame as top-field-first.

           **bottom, b**
               Set the frame as bottom-field-first.

       _Examples_

       •   Interlace video using **select **and **separatefields **filter:

                   separatefields,select=eq(mod(n,4),0)+eq(mod(n,4),3),weave

### xbr
       Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel art. It follows a
       set of edge-detection rules, see <**<https://forums.libretro.com/t/xbr-algorithm-tutorial/123>**>.

       It accepts the following option:

       **n   **Set the scaling dimension: 2 for "2xBR", 3 for "3xBR" and 4 for "4xBR".  Default is 3.

### xcorrelate
       Apply normalized cross-correlation between first and second input video stream.

       Second input video stream dimensions must be lower than first input video stream.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### planes
           Set which planes to process.

### secondary
           Set which secondary video frames will be processed from second input video stream, can be
           _first_ or _all_. Default is _all_.

       The "xcorrelate" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

### xfade
       Apply  cross  fade from one input video stream to another input video stream.  The cross fade
       is applied for specified duration.

       Both inputs must be constant frame-rate and have the same  resolution,  pixel  format,  frame
       rate and timebase.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### transition
           Set one of available transition effects:

           **custom**
           **fade**
           **wipeleft**
           **wiperight**
           **wipeup**
           **wipedown**
           **slideleft**
           **slideright**
           **slideup**
           **slidedown**
           **circlecrop**
           **rectcrop**
           **distance**
           **fadeblack**
           **fadewhite**
           **radial**
           **smoothleft**
           **smoothright**
           **smoothup**
           **smoothdown**
           **circleopen**
           **circleclose**
           **vertopen**
           **vertclose**
           **horzopen**
           **horzclose**
           **dissolve**
           **pixelize**
           **diagtl**
           **diagtr**
           **diagbl**
           **diagbr**
           **hlslice**
           **hrslice**
           **vuslice**
           **vdslice**
           **hblur**
           **fadegrays**
           **wipetl**
           **wipetr**
           **wipebl**
           **wipebr**
           **squeezeh**
           **squeezev**
           **zoomin**
           **fadefast**
           **fadeslow**
           **hlwind**
           **hrwind**
           **vuwind**
           **vdwind**
           **coverleft**
           **coverright**
           **coverup**
           **coverdown**
           **revealleft**
           **revealright**
           **revealup**
           **revealdown**

           Default transition effect is fade.

### duration
           Set  cross  fade  duration  in seconds.  Range is 0 to 60 seconds.  Default duration is 1
           second.

### offset
           Set cross fade start relative to first input stream in seconds.  Default offset is 0.

### expr
           Set expression for custom transition effect.

           The expressions can use the following variables and functions:

           **X**
           **Y   **The coordinates of the current sample.

           **W**
           **H   **The width and height of the image.

           **P   **Progress of transition effect.

           **PLANE**
               Currently processed plane.

           **A   **Return value of first input at current location and plane.

           **B   **Return value of second input at current location and plane.

           **a0(x, y)**
           **a1(x, y)**
           **a2(x, y)**
           **a3(x, y)**
               Return the value of the pixel at  location  (_x_,_y_)  of  the  first/second/third/fourth
               component of first input.

           **b0(x, y)**
           **b1(x, y)**
           **b2(x, y)**
           **b3(x, y)**
               Return  the  value  of  the  pixel at location (_x_,_y_) of the first/second/third/fourth
               component of second input.

       _Examples_

       •   Cross fade from one input video to another input video, with fade transition and duration
           of transition of 2 seconds starting at offset of 5 seconds:

                   ffmpeg -i first.mp4 -i second.mp4 -filter_complex xfade=transition=fade:duration=2:offset=5 output.mp4

### xmedian
       Pick median pixels from several input videos.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### inputs
           Set number of inputs.  Default is 3. Allowed range is from 3 to 255.  If number of inputs
           is even number, than result will be mean value between two median values.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 15, by which all planes are processed.

### percentile
           Set median percentile. Default value is 0.5.  Default  value  of  0.5  will  pick  always
           median values, while 0 will pick minimum values, and 1 maximum values.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports all above options as **commands**, excluding option "inputs".

### xstack
       Stack video inputs into custom layout.

       All streams must be of same pixel format.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### inputs
           Set number of input streams. Default is 2.

### layout
           Specify  layout  of  inputs.  This option requires the desired layout configuration to be
           explicitly set by the user.  This sets position of each video input in output. Each input
           is separated by '|'.  The first number represents  the  column,  and  the  second  number
           represents  the row.  Numbers start at 0 and are separated by '_'. Optionally one can use
           wX and hX, where X is video input from which to take width or  height.   Multiple  values
           can be used when separated by '+'. In such case values are summed together.

           Note  that  if  inputs  are  of different sizes gaps may appear, as not all of the output
           video frame will be filled. Similarly, videos can overlap each other  if  their  position
           doesn't leave enough space for the full frame of adjoining videos.

           For  2  inputs,  a default layout of "0_0|w0_0" (equivalent to "grid=2x1") is set. In all
           other cases, a layout or a grid must be set by the user. Either "grid" or "layout" can be
           specified at a time.  Specifying both will result in an error.

### grid
           Specify a fixed size grid of inputs.  This option is used to create a fixed size grid  of
           the  input  streams.  Set the grid size in the form "COLUMNSxROWS". There must be "ROWS *
           COLUMNS" input streams and they will be arranged as a grid with "ROWS" rows and "COLUMNS"
           columns. When using this option, each input stream within a row must have the same height
           and all the rows must have the same width.

           If "grid" is set, then "inputs" option is ignored  and  is  implicitly  set  to  "ROWS  *
           COLUMNS".

           For  2  inputs,  a default grid of "2x1" (equivalent to "layout=0_0|w0_0") is set. In all
           other cases, a layout or a grid must be set by the user. Either "grid" or "layout" can be
           specified at a time.  Specifying both will result in an error.

### shortest
           If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest  input  terminates.  Default
           value is 0.

### fill
           If set to valid color, all unused pixels will be filled with that color.  By default fill
           is set to none, so it is disabled.

       _Examples_

       •   Display 4 inputs into 2x2 grid.

           Layout:

                   input1(0, 0)  | input3(w0, 0)
                   input2(0, h0) | input4(w0, h0)



                   xstack=inputs=4:layout=0_0|0_h0|w0_0|w0_h0

           Note that if inputs are of different sizes, gaps or overlaps may occur.

       •   Display 4 inputs into 1x4 grid.

           Layout:

                   input1(0, 0)
                   input2(0, h0)
                   input3(0, h0+h1)
                   input4(0, h0+h1+h2)



                   xstack=inputs=4:layout=0_0|0_h0|0_h0+h1|0_h0+h1+h2

           Note that if inputs are of different widths, unused space will appear.

       •   Display 9 inputs into 3x3 grid.

           Layout:

                   input1(0, 0)       | input4(w0, 0)      | input7(w0+w3, 0)
                   input2(0, h0)      | input5(w0, h0)     | input8(w0+w3, h0)
                   input3(0, h0+h1)   | input6(w0, h0+h1)  | input9(w0+w3, h0+h1)



                   xstack=inputs=9:layout=0_0|0_h0|0_h0+h1|w0_0|w0_h0|w0_h0+h1|w0+w3_0|w0+w3_h0|w0+w3_h0+h1

           Note that if inputs are of different sizes, gaps or overlaps may occur.

       •   Display 16 inputs into 4x4 grid.

           Layout:

                   input1(0, 0)       | input5(w0, 0)       | input9 (w0+w4, 0)       | input13(w0+w4+w8, 0)
                   input2(0, h0)      | input6(w0, h0)      | input10(w0+w4, h0)      | input14(w0+w4+w8, h0)
                   input3(0, h0+h1)   | input7(w0, h0+h1)   | input11(w0+w4, h0+h1)   | input15(w0+w4+w8, h0+h1)
                   input4(0, h0+h1+h2)| input8(w0, h0+h1+h2)| input12(w0+w4, h0+h1+h2)| input16(w0+w4+w8, h0+h1+h2)



                   xstack=inputs=16:layout=0_0|0_h0|0_h0+h1|0_h0+h1+h2|w0_0|w0_h0|w0_h0+h1|w0_h0+h1+h2|w0+w4_0|
                   w0+w4_h0|w0+w4_h0+h1|w0+w4_h0+h1+h2|w0+w4+w8_0|w0+w4+w8_h0|w0+w4+w8_h0+h1|w0+w4+w8_h0+h1+h2

           Note that if inputs are of different sizes, gaps or overlaps may occur.

### yadif
       Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing filter").

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **0, send_frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **1, send_field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           **2, send_frame_nospatial**
               Like "send_frame", but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

           **3, send_field_nospatial**
               Like "send_field", but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

           The default value is "send_frame".

### parity
           The  picture  field  parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one of the
           following values:

           **0, tff**
               Assume the top field is first.

           **1, bff**
               Assume the bottom field is first.

           **-1, auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The default value is "auto".  If the interlacing is  unknown  or  the  decoder  does  not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **0, all**
               Deinterlace all frames.

           **1, interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           The default value is "all".

### yadif_cuda
       Deinterlace the input video using the **yadif **algorithm, but implemented in CUDA so that it can
       work as part of a GPU accelerated pipeline with nvdec and/or nvenc.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **0, send_frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **1, send_field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           **2, send_frame_nospatial**
               Like "send_frame", but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

           **3, send_field_nospatial**
               Like "send_field", but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

           The default value is "send_frame".

### parity
           The  picture  field  parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one of the
           following values:

           **0, tff**
               Assume the top field is first.

           **1, bff**
               Assume the bottom field is first.

           **-1, auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The default value is "auto".  If the interlacing is  unknown  or  the  decoder  does  not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **0, all**
               Deinterlace all frames.

           **1, interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           The default value is "all".

### yaepblur
       Apply  blur filter while preserving edges ("yaepblur" means "yet another edge preserving blur
       filter").  The algorithm is described in "J. S. Lee,  Digital  image  enhancement  and  noise
       filtering by use of local statistics, IEEE Trans. Pattern Anal. Mach. Intell. PAMI-2, 1980."

       It accepts the following parameters:

### radius, r
           Set the window radius. Default value is 3.

### planes, p
           Set which planes to filter. Default is only the first plane.

### sigma, s
           Set blur strength. Default value is 128.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports same **commands **as options.

### zoompan
       Apply Zoom & Pan effect.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### zoom, z
           Set the zoom expression. Range is 1-10. Default is 1.

       **x**
       **y   **Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.

       **d   **Set the duration expression in number of frames.  This sets for how many number of frames
           effect will last for single input image. Default is 90.

       **s   **Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.

       **fps **Set the output frame rate, default is '25'.

       Each expression can contain the following constants:

### in_w, iw
           Input width.

### in_h, ih
           Input height.

### out_w, ow
           Output width.

### out_h, oh
           Output height.

       **in  **Input frame count.

       **on  **Output frame count.

### in_time, it
           The input timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.

### out_time, time, ot
           The output timestamp expressed in seconds.

       **x**
       **y   **Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression for current input frame.

       **px**
       **py  **'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was not yet such
           frame (first input frame).

### zoom
           Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.

### pzoom
           Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.

### duration
           Number  of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression for each
           input frame.

### pduration
           number of output frames created for previous input frame

       **a   **Rational number: input width / input height

       **sar **sample aspect ratio

       **dar **display aspect ratio

       _Examples_

       •   Zoom in up to 1.5x and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:

                   zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360

       •   Zoom in up to 1.5x and pan always at center of picture:

                   zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='iw/2-(iw/zoom/2)':y='ih/2-(ih/zoom/2)'

       •   Same as above but without pausing:

                   zoompan=z='min(max(zoom,pzoom)+0.0015,1.5)':d=1:x='iw/2-(iw/zoom/2)':y='ih/2-(ih/zoom/2)'

       •   Zoom in 2x into center of picture only for the first second of the input video:

                   zoompan=z='if(between(in_time,0,1),2,1)':d=1:x='iw/2-(iw/zoom/2)':y='ih/2-(ih/zoom/2)'

### zscale
       Scale     (resize)     the     input      video,      using      the      z.lib      library:
       <**<https://github.com/sekrit-twc/zimg>**>.  To  enable  compilation  of  this  filter, you need to
       configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libzimg".

       The zscale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the  same  as  the  input,  by
       changing the output sample aspect ratio.

       If  the  input  image  format  is different from the format requested by the next filter, the
       zscale filter will convert the input to the requested format.

       _Options_

       The filter accepts the following options.

### width, w
### height, h
           Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input dimension.

           If the _width_ or _w_ value is 0, the input width is used for the output. If the _height_ or  _h_
           value is 0, the input height is used for the output.

           If  one  and only one of the values is -n with n >= 1, the zscale filter will use a value
           that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the  other  specified
           dimension.  After  that  it  will,  however,  make  sure that the calculated dimension is
           divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.

           If both values are -n with n >= 1, the behavior will be identical to  both  values  being
           set to 0 as previously detailed.

           See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension expression.

### size, s
           Set  the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the**
           **ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### dither, d
           Set the dither type.

           Possible values are:

           _none_
           _ordered_
           _random_
           _error_diffusion_

           Default is none.

### filter, f
           Set the resize filter type.

           Possible values are:

           _point_
           _bilinear_
           _bicubic_
           _spline16_
           _spline36_
           _lanczos_

           Default is bilinear.

### range, r
           Set the color range.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _limited_
           _full_

           Default is same as input.

### primaries, p
           Set the color primaries.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _709_
           _unspecified_
           _170m_
           _240m_
           _2020_

           Default is same as input.

### transfer, t
           Set the transfer characteristics.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _709_
           _unspecified_
           _601_
           _linear_
           _2020_10_
           _2020_12_
           _smpte2084_
           _iec61966-2-1_
           _arib-std-b67_

           Default is same as input.

### matrix, m
           Set the colorspace matrix.

           Possible value are:

           _input_
           _709_
           _unspecified_
           _470bg_
           _170m_
           _2020_ncl_
           _2020_cl_

           Default is same as input.

### rangein, rin
           Set the input color range.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _limited_
           _full_

           Default is same as input.

### primariesin, pin
           Set the input color primaries.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _709_
           _unspecified_
           _170m_
           _240m_
           _2020_

           Default is same as input.

### transferin, tin
           Set the input transfer characteristics.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _709_
           _unspecified_
           _601_
           _linear_
           _2020_10_
           _2020_12_

           Default is same as input.

### matrixin, min
           Set the input colorspace matrix.

           Possible value are:

           _input_
           _709_
           _unspecified_
           _470bg_
           _170m_
           _2020_ncl_
           _2020_cl_
### chromal, c
           Set the output chroma location.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _left_
           _center_
           _topleft_
           _top_
           _bottomleft_
           _bottom_
### chromalin, cin
           Set the input chroma location.

           Possible values are:

           _input_
           _left_
           _center_
           _topleft_
           _top_
           _bottomleft_
           _bottom_
       **npl **Set the nominal peak luminance.

### param_a
           Parameter A for scaling filters. Parameter "b" for bicubic, and the number of filter taps
           for lanczos.

### param_b
           Parameter B for scaling filters. Parameter "c" for bicubic.

       The values of the **w **and **h **options are expressions containing the following constants:

       _in_w_
       _in_h_
           The input width and height

       _iw_
       _ih_  These are the same as _in_w_ and _in_h_.

       _out_w_
       _out_h_
           The output (scaled) width and height

       _ow_
       _oh_  These are the same as _out_w_ and _out_h_

       _a_   The same as _iw_ / _ih_

       _sar_ input sample aspect ratio

       _dar_ The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from "(iw / ih) * sar".

       _hsub_
       _vsub_
           horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the  pixel  format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _ohsub_
       _ovsub_
           horizontal  and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the pixel format
           "yuv422p" _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### width, w
### height, h
           Set the output video dimension expression.  The command accepts the same  syntax  of  the
           corresponding option.

           If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

## OPENCL VIDEO FILTERS
       Below is a description of the currently available OpenCL video filters.

       To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-opencl".

       Running  OpenCL  filters requires you to initialize a hardware device and to pass that device
       to all filters in any filter graph.

### -init_hw_device opencl[=_
           Initialise a new hardware device of type _opencl_  called  _name_,  using  the  given  device
           parameters.

### -filter_hw_device _
           Pass the hardware device called _name_ to all filters in any filter graph.

       For more detailed information see <**<https://www.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html#Advanced-Video-options>**>

       •   Example  of  choosing  the first device on the second platform and running avgblur_opencl
           filter with default parameters on it.

                   -init_hw_device opencl=gpu:1.0 -filter_hw_device gpu -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, avgblur_opencl, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       Since OpenCL filters are not able to access frame data in normal memory, all frame data needs
       to be uploaded(**hwupload**) to hardware surfaces connected  to  the  appropriate  device  before
       being  used  and  then  downloaded(**hwdownload**) back to normal memory. Note that **hwupload **will
       upload to a surface with the same layout as the software frame, so it may be necessary to add
       a **format **filter immediately before to get the input into the right format and **hwdownload **does
       not support all formats on the output - it may be necessary to insert  an  additional  **format**
       filter immediately following in the graph to get the output in a supported format.

### avgblur_opencl
       Apply average blur filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sizeX
           Set horizontal radius size.  Range is "[1, 1024]" and default value is 1.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 0xf, by which all planes are processed.

### sizeY
           Set  vertical  radius size. Range is "[1, 1024]" and default value is 0. If zero, "sizeX"
           value will be used.

       _Example_

       •   Apply average blur filter with horizontal and vertical size of 3, setting each  pixel  of
           the output to the average value of the 7x7 region centered on it in the input. For pixels
           on the edges of the image, the region does not extend beyond the image boundaries, and so
           out-of-range coordinates are not used in the calculations.

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, avgblur_opencl=3, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### boxblur_opencl
       Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### luma_radius, lr
### luma_power, lp
### chroma_radius, cr
### chroma_power, cp
### alpha_radius, ar
### alpha_power, ap

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### luma_radius, lr
### chroma_radius, cr
### alpha_radius, ar
           Set  an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the corresponding input
           plane.

           The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be greater than the value of
           the expression "min(w,h)/2" for the luma and alpha planes, and of "min(cw,ch)/2" for  the
           chroma planes.

           Default  value  for  **luma_radius **is "2". If not specified, **chroma_radius **and **alpha_radius**
           default to the corresponding value set for **luma_radius**.

           The expressions can contain the following constants:

           **w**
           **h   **The input width and height in pixels.

           **cw**
           **ch  **The input chroma image width and height in pixels.

           **hsub**
           **vsub**
               The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample  values.  For  example,  for  the  pixel
               format "yuv422p", _hsub_ is 2 and _vsub_ is 1.

### luma_power, lp
### chroma_power, cp
### alpha_power, ap
           Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the corresponding plane.

           Default value for **luma_power **is 2. If not specified, **chroma_power **and **alpha_power **default
           to the corresponding value set for **luma_power**.

           A value of 0 will disable the effect.

       _Examples_

       Apply  boxblur  filter, setting each pixel of the output to the average value of box-radiuses
       _luma_radius_, _chroma_radius_, _alpha_radius_ for each plane respectively. The filter  will  apply
       _luma_power_,  _chroma_power_,  _alpha_power_ times onto the corresponding plane. For pixels on the
       edges of the image, the radius does not extend beyond the image boundaries,  and  so  out-of-
       range coordinates are not used in the calculations.

       •   Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radius set to 2 and luma, chroma,
           and  alpha power set to 3. The filter will run 3 times with box-radius set to 2 for every
           plane of the image.

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, boxblur_opencl=luma_radius=2:luma_power=3, hwdownload" OUTPUT
                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, boxblur_opencl=2:3, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply a boxblur filter with luma radius set to 2, luma_power to 1,  chroma_radius  to  4,
           chroma_power to 5, alpha_radius to 3 and alpha_power to 7.

           For the luma plane, a 2x2 box radius will be run once.

           For the chroma plane, a 4x4 box radius will be run 5 times.

           For the alpha plane, a 3x3 box radius will be run 7 times.

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, boxblur_opencl=2:1:4:5:3:7, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### colorkey_opencl
       RGB colorspace color keying.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### color
           The color which will be replaced with transparency.

### similarity
           Similarity percentage with the key color.

           0.01 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.

### blend
           Blend percentage.

           0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent, or not transparent at all.

           Higher  values  result  in  semi-transparent  pixels, with a higher transparency the more
           similar the pixels color is to the key color.

       _Examples_

       •   Make every semi-green pixel in the input transparent with some slight blending:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, colorkey_opencl=green:0.3:0.1, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### convolution_opencl
       Apply convolution of 3x3, 5x5, 7x7 matrix.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **0m**
       **1m**
       **2m**
       **3m  **Set matrix for each plane.  Matrix is sequence of 9, 25 or 49  signed  numbers.   Default
           value for each plane is "0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0".

### 0rdiv
### 1rdiv
### 2rdiv
### 3rdiv
           Set multiplier for calculated value for each plane.  If unset or 0, it will be sum of all
           matrix  elements.   The  option  value  must  be  a float number greater or equal to 0.0.
           Default value is 1.0.

### 0bias
### 1bias
### 2bias
### 3bias
           Set bias for each plane. This value is added to the result of the multiplication.  Useful
           for making the overall image brighter or darker.  The option value must be a float number
           greater or equal to 0.0. Default value is 0.0.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply sharpen:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply blur:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1/9:1/9:1/9:1/9, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply edge enhance:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:5:1:1:1:0:128:128:128, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply edge detect:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:128, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply laplacian edge detector which includes diagonals:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:0, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply emboss:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### erosion_opencl
       Apply erosion effect to the video.

       This filter replaces the pixel by the [local(3x3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/local/3x3/markdown) minimum.

       It accepts the following options:

### threshold0
### threshold1
### threshold2
### threshold3
           Limit the maximum change for each plane. Range is  "[0,  65535]"  and  default  value  is
           65535.  If 0, plane will remain unchanged.

### coordinates
           Flag  which  specifies  the  pixel to refer to.  Range is "[0, 255]" and default value is
           255, i.e. all eight pixels are used.

           Flags to local 3x3 coordinates region centered on "x":

               1 2 3

               4 x 5

               6 7 8

       _Example_

       •   Apply erosion filter with threshold0 set to 30, threshold1 set 40, threshold2 set  to  50
           and coordinates set to 231, setting each pixel of the output to the local minimum between
           pixels: 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 of the 3x3 region centered on it in the input. If the difference
           between  input pixel and local minimum is more then threshold of the corresponding plane,
           output pixel will be set to input pixel - threshold of corresponding plane.

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, erosion_opencl=30:40:50:coordinates=231, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### deshake_opencl
       Feature-point based video stabilization filter.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### tripod
           Simulates a tripod by preventing any camera movement whatsoever from the original  frame.
           Defaults to 0.

### debug
           Whether  or  not  additional debug info should be displayed, both in the processed output
           and in the console.

           Note that in order to see console debug output you will also need to pass "-v verbose" to
           ffmpeg.

           Viewing point matches in the output video is only supported for RGB input.

           Defaults to 0.

### adaptive_crop
           Whether or not to do a tiny bit of cropping at the borders to cut down on the  amount  of
           mirrored pixels.

           Defaults to 1.

### refine_features
           Whether or not feature points should be refined at a sub-pixel level.

           This can be turned off for a slight performance gain at the cost of precision.

           Defaults to 1.

### smooth_strength
           The strength of the smoothing applied to the camera path from 0.0 to 1.0.

           1.0  is  the  maximum  smoothing  strength  while  values  less  than that result in less
           smoothing.

           0.0 causes the filter to adaptively choose a smoothing strength on a per-frame basis.

           Defaults to 0.0.

### smooth_window_multiplier
           Controls the size of the smoothing window (the number of  frames  buffered  to  determine
           motion information from).

           The  size of the smoothing window is determined by multiplying the framerate of the video
           by this number.

           Acceptable values range from 0.1 to 10.0.

           Larger values increase the amount of motion data available for determining how to  smooth
           the  camera  path, potentially improving smoothness, but also increase latency and memory
           usage.

           Defaults to 2.0.

       _Examples_

       •   Stabilize a video with a fixed, medium smoothing strength:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, deshake_opencl=smooth_strength=0.5, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Stabilize a video with debugging (both in console and in rendered video):

                   -i INPUT -filter_complex "[0:v]format=rgba, hwupload, deshake_opencl=debug=1, hwdownload, format=rgba, format=yuv420p" -v verbose OUTPUT

### dilation_opencl
       Apply dilation effect to the video.

       This filter replaces the pixel by the [local(3x3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/local/3x3/markdown) maximum.

       It accepts the following options:

### threshold0
### threshold1
### threshold2
### threshold3
           Limit the maximum change for each plane. Range is  "[0,  65535]"  and  default  value  is
           65535.  If 0, plane will remain unchanged.

### coordinates
           Flag  which  specifies  the  pixel to refer to.  Range is "[0, 255]" and default value is
           255, i.e. all eight pixels are used.

           Flags to local 3x3 coordinates region centered on "x":

               1 2 3

               4 x 5

               6 7 8

       _Example_

       •   Apply dilation filter with threshold0 set to 30, threshold1 set 40, threshold2 set to  50
           and coordinates set to 231, setting each pixel of the output to the local maximum between
           pixels: 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 of the 3x3 region centered on it in the input. If the difference
           between  input pixel and local maximum is more then threshold of the corresponding plane,
           output pixel will be set to input pixel + threshold of corresponding plane.

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, dilation_opencl=30:40:50:coordinates=231, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### nlmeans_opencl
       Non-local Means denoise filter through OpenCL, this filter accepts same options as **nlmeans**.

### overlay_opencl
       Overlay one video on top of another.

       It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the  "main"  video  on  which  the
       second  input  is  overlaid.  This filter requires same memory layout for all the inputs. So,
       format conversion may be needed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **x   **Set the x coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.  Default value is 0.

       **y   **Set the y coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.  Default value is 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Overlay an image LOGO at the top-left corner of the INPUT video. Both inputs are  yuv420p
           format.

                   -i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuv420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_opencl, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   The  inputs have same memory layout for color channels , the overlay has additional alpha
           plane, like INPUT is yuv420p, and the LOGO is yuva420p.

                   -i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuva420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_opencl, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### pad_opencl
       Add paddings to the input  image,  and  place  the  original  input  at  the  provided  _x_,  _y_
       coordinates.

       It accepts the following options:

### width, w
### height, h
           Specify  an  expression  for the size of the output image with the paddings added. If the
           value for _width_ or _height_ is 0, the corresponding input size is used for the output.

           The _width_ expression can reference the value set  by  the  _height_  expression,  and  vice
           versa.

           The default value of _width_ and _height_ is 0.

       **x**
       **y   **Specify  the  offsets to place the input image at within the padded area, with respect to
           the top/left border of the output image.

           The _x_ expression can reference the value set by the _y_ expression, and vice versa.

           The default value of _x_ and _y_ is 0.

           If _x_ or _y_ evaluate to a negative number,  they'll  be  changed  so  the  input  image  is
           centered on the padded area.

### color
           Specify  the  color  of the padded area. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Color"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### aspect
           Pad to an aspect instead to a resolution.

       The value for the _width_, _height_, _x_, and _y_ options are expressions  containing  the  following
       constants:

### in_w
### in_h
           The input video width and height.

       **iw**
       **ih  **These are the same as _in_w_ and _in_h_.

### out_w
### out_h
           The  output width and height (the size of the padded area), as specified by the _width_ and
           _height_ expressions.

       **ow**
       **oh  **These are the same as _out_w_ and _out_h_.

       **x**
       **y   **The x and y offsets as specified by the _x_ and _y_ expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.

       **a   **same as _iw_ / _ih_

       **sar **input sample aspect ratio

       **dar **input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (_iw_ / _ih_) * _sar_

### prewitt_opencl
       Apply the Prewitt operator (<**<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Prewitt_operator>**>) to input  video
       stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 0xf, by which all planes are processed.

### scale
           Set  value  which  will  be multiplied with filtered result.  Range is "[0.0, 65535]" and
           default value is 1.0.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.  Range is "[-65535, 65535]" and default
           value is 0.0.

       _Example_

       •   Apply the Prewitt operator with scale set to 2 and delta set to 10.

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, prewitt_opencl=scale=2:delta=10, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### program_opencl
       Filter video using an OpenCL program.

### source
           OpenCL program source file.

### kernel
           Kernel name in program.

### inputs
           Number of inputs to the filter.  Defaults to 1.

### size, s
           Size of output frames.  Defaults to the same as the first input.

       The "program_opencl" filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       The program source file must contain a kernel function with the given name, which will be run
       once for each plane of the output.  Each run on a plane gets enqueued as a separate 2D global
       NDRange with one work-item for each pixel to be generated.  The global  ID  offset  for  each
       work-item is therefore the coordinates of a pixel in the destination image.

       The kernel function needs to take the following arguments:

       •   Destination image, ___write_only_ _image2d_t_.

           This image will become the output; the kernel should write all of it.

       •   Frame index, _unsigned_ _int_.

           This is a counter starting from zero and increasing by one for each frame.

       •   Source images, ___read_only_ _image2d_t_.

           These  are  the  most  recent  images  on  each  input.  The kernel may read from them to
           generate the output, but they can't be written to.

       Example programs:

       •   Copy the input to the output (output must be the same size as the input).

                   __kernel void copy(__write_only image2d_t destination,
                                      unsigned int index,
                                      __read_only  image2d_t source)
                   {
                       const sampler_t sampler = CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE;

                       int2 location = (int2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));

                       float4 value = read_imagef(source, sampler, location);

                       write_imagef(destination, location, value);
                   }

       •   Apply a simple transformation, rotating the input by an amount increasing with the  index
           counter.   Pixel values are linearly interpolated by the sampler, and the output need not
           have the same dimensions as the input.

                   __kernel void rotate_image(__write_only image2d_t dst,
                                              unsigned int index,
                                              __read_only  image2d_t src)
                   {
                       const sampler_t sampler = (CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE |
                                                  CLK_FILTER_LINEAR);

                       float angle = (float)index / 100.0f;

                       float2 dst_dim = convert_float2(get_image_dim(dst));
                       float2 src_dim = convert_float2(get_image_dim(src));

                       float2 dst_cen = dst_dim / 2.0f;
                       float2 src_cen = src_dim / 2.0f;

                       int2   dst_loc = (int2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));

                       float2 dst_pos = convert_float2(dst_loc) - dst_cen;
                       float2 src_pos = {
                           cos(angle) * dst_pos.x - sin(angle) * dst_pos.y,
                           sin(angle) * dst_pos.x + cos(angle) * dst_pos.y
                       };
                       src_pos = src_pos * src_dim / dst_dim;

                       float2 src_loc = src_pos + src_cen;

                       if (src_loc.x < 0.0f      || src_loc.y < 0.0f ||
                           src_loc.x > src_dim.x || src_loc.y > src_dim.y)
                           write_imagef(dst, dst_loc, 0.5f);
                       else
                           write_imagef(dst, dst_loc, read_imagef(src, sampler, src_loc));
                   }

       •   Blend two inputs together, with the amount of each input  used  varying  with  the  index
           counter.

                   __kernel void blend_images(__write_only image2d_t dst,
                                              unsigned int index,
                                              __read_only  image2d_t src1,
                                              __read_only  image2d_t src2)
                   {
                       const sampler_t sampler = (CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE |
                                                  CLK_FILTER_LINEAR);

                       float blend = (cos((float)index / 50.0f) + 1.0f) / 2.0f;

                       int2  dst_loc = (int2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));
                       int2 src1_loc = dst_loc * get_image_dim(src1) / get_image_dim(dst);
                       int2 src2_loc = dst_loc * get_image_dim(src2) / get_image_dim(dst);

                       float4 val1 = read_imagef(src1, sampler, src1_loc);
                       float4 val2 = read_imagef(src2, sampler, src2_loc);

                       write_imagef(dst, dst_loc, val1 * blend + val2 * (1.0f - blend));
                   }

### remap_opencl
       Remap pixels using 2nd: Xmap and 3rd: Ymap input video stream.

       Destination  pixel  at  position  (X, Y) will be picked from source (x, y) position where x =
       Xmap(X, Y) and y = Ymap(X, Y). If mapping values are out of range, zero value for pixel  will
       be used for destination pixel.

       Xmap  and  Ymap input video streams must be of same dimensions. Output video stream will have
       Xmap/Ymap video stream dimensions.  Xmap and Ymap input video streams are 32bit  float  pixel
       format, single channel.

### interp
           Specify  interpolation  used  for  remapping  of  pixels.   Allowed values are "near" and
           "linear".  Default value is "linear".

### fill
           Specify the color of the unmapped pixels. For  the  syntax  of  this  option,  check  the
           **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default color is "black".

### roberts_opencl
       Apply  the  Roberts  cross  operator (<**<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roberts_cross>**>) to input
       video stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 0xf, by which all planes are processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.  Range  is  "[0.0,  65535]"  and
           default value is 1.0.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.  Range is "[-65535, 65535]" and default
           value is 0.0.

       _Example_

       •   Apply the Roberts cross operator with scale set to 2 and delta set to 10

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, roberts_opencl=scale=2:delta=10, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### sobel_opencl
       Apply  the  Sobel  operator  (<**<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sobel_operator>**>)  to input video
       stream.

       The filter accepts the following option:

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 0xf, by which all planes are processed.

### scale
           Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.  Range  is  "[0.0,  65535]"  and
           default value is 1.0.

### delta
           Set value which will be added to filtered result.  Range is "[-65535, 65535]" and default
           value is 0.0.

       _Example_

       •   Apply sobel operator with scale set to 2 and delta set to 10

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, sobel_opencl=scale=2:delta=10, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### tonemap_opencl
       Perform HDR(PQ/HLG) to SDR conversion with tone-mapping.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### tonemap
           Specify the tone-mapping operator to be used. Same as tonemap option in **tonemap**.

### param
           Tune the tone mapping algorithm. same as param option in **tonemap**.

### desat
           Apply  desaturation  for  highlights that exceed this level of brightness. The higher the
           parameter, the more color information will  be  preserved.  This  setting  helps  prevent
           unnaturally  blown-out  colors  for  super-highlights,  by  (smoothly) turning into white
           instead. This makes images feel more natural, at the cost of reducing  information  about
           out-of-range colors.

           The  default  value  is  0.5,  and  the algorithm here is a little different from the cpu
           version tonemap currently. A setting of 0.0 disables this option.

### threshold
           The tonemapping algorithm parameters is fine-tuned per each scene.  And  a  threshold  is
           used  to detect whether the scene has changed or not. If the distance between the current
           frame average brightness and the current running average exceeds a  threshold  value,  we
           would re-calculate scene average and peak brightness.  The default value is 0.2.

### format
           Specify the output pixel format.

           Currently supported formats are:

           _p010_
           _nv12_
### range, r
           Set the output color range.

           Possible values are:

           _tv/mpeg_
           _pc/jpeg_

           Default is same as input.

### primaries, p
           Set the output color primaries.

           Possible values are:

           _bt709_
           _bt2020_

           Default is same as input.

### transfer, t
           Set the output transfer characteristics.

           Possible values are:

           _bt709_
           _bt2020_

           Default is bt709.

### matrix, m
           Set the output colorspace matrix.

           Possible value are:

           _bt709_
           _bt2020_

           Default is same as input.

       _Example_

       •   Convert  HDR(PQ/HLG)  video  to  bt2020-transfer-characteristic  p010 format using linear
           operator.

                   -i INPUT -vf "format=p010,hwupload,tonemap_opencl=t=bt2020:tonemap=linear:format=p010,hwdownload,format=p010" OUTPUT

### unsharp_opencl
       Sharpen or blur the input video.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### luma_msize_x, lx
           Set the luma matrix horizontal size.  Range is "[1, 23]" and default value is 5.

### luma_msize_y, ly
           Set the luma matrix vertical size.  Range is "[1, 23]" and default value is 5.

### luma_amount, la
           Set the luma effect strength.  Range is "[-10, 10]" and default value is 1.0.

           Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will sharpen it, a value
           of zero will disable the effect.

### chroma_msize_x, cx
           Set the chroma matrix horizontal size.  Range is "[1, 23]" and default value is 5.

### chroma_msize_y, cy
           Set the chroma matrix vertical size.  Range is "[1, 23]" and default value is 5.

### chroma_amount, ca
           Set the chroma effect strength.  Range is "[-10, 10]" and default value is 0.0.

           Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will sharpen it, a value
           of zero will disable the effect.

       All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.

       _Examples_

       •   Apply strong luma sharpen effect:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, unsharp_opencl=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5, hwdownload" OUTPUT

       •   Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:

                   -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, unsharp_opencl=7:7:-2:7:7:-2, hwdownload" OUTPUT

### xfade_opencl
       Cross fade two videos with custom transition effect by using OpenCL.

       It accepts the following options:

### transition
           Set one of possible transition effects.

           **custom**
               Select custom transition effect, the actual transition  description  will  be  picked
               from source and kernel options.

           **fade**
           **wipeleft**
           **wiperight**
           **wipeup**
           **wipedown**
           **slideleft**
           **slideright**
           **slideup**
           **slidedown**
               Default transition is fade.

### source
           OpenCL program source file for custom transition.

### kernel
           Set name of kernel to use for custom transition from program source file.

### duration
           Set duration of video transition.

### offset
           Set time of start of transition relative to first video.

       The program source file must contain a kernel function with the given name, which will be run
       once for each plane of the output.  Each run on a plane gets enqueued as a separate 2D global
       NDRange  with  one  work-item  for each pixel to be generated.  The global ID offset for each
       work-item is therefore the coordinates of a pixel in the destination image.

       The kernel function needs to take the following arguments:

       •   Destination image, ___write_only_ _image2d_t_.

           This image will become the output; the kernel should write all of it.

       •   First Source image, ___read_only_ _image2d_t_.  Second Source image, ___read_only_ _image2d_t_.

           These are the most recent images on each  input.   The  kernel  may  read  from  them  to
           generate the output, but they can't be written to.

       •   Transition progress, _float_. This value is always between 0 and 1 inclusive.

       Example programs:

       •   Apply dots curtain transition effect:

                   __kernel void blend_images(__write_only image2d_t dst,
                                              __read_only  image2d_t src1,
                                              __read_only  image2d_t src2,
                                              float progress)
                   {
                       const sampler_t sampler = (CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE |
                                                  CLK_FILTER_LINEAR);
                       int2  p = (int2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));
                       float2 rp = (float2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));
                       float2 dim = (float2)(get_image_dim(src1).x, get_image_dim(src1).y);
                       rp = rp / dim;

                       float2 dots = (float2)(20.0, 20.0);
                       float2 center = (float2)(0,0);
                       float2 unused;

                       float4 val1 = read_imagef(src1, sampler, p);
                       float4 val2 = read_imagef(src2, sampler, p);
                       bool next = distance(fract(rp * dots, &unused), (float2)(0.5, 0.5)) < (progress / distance(rp, center));

                       write_imagef(dst, p, next ? val1 : val2);
                   }

## VAAPI VIDEO FILTERS
       VAAPI  Video  filters  are  usually  used  with  VAAPI  decoder and VAAPI encoder. Below is a
       description of VAAPI video filters.

       To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-vaapi".

       To use vaapi filters, you need to setup the vaapi device  correctly.  For  more  information,
       please read <**<https://trac.ffmpeg.org/wiki/Hardware/VAAPI>**>

### overlay_vaapi
       Overlay one video on the top of another.

       It  takes  two  inputs  and  has one output. The first input is the "main" video on which the
       second input is overlaid.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **x**
       **y   **Set expressions for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video on the main video.

           Default value is "0" for both expressions.

       **w**
       **h   **Set expressions for the width and height the overlaid video on the main video.

           Default values are 'overlay_iw' for 'w' and 'overlay_ih*w/overlay_iw' for 'h'.

           The expressions can contain the following parameters:

           **main_w, W**
           **main_h, H**
               The main input width and height.

           **overlay_iw**
           **overlay_ih**
               The overlay input width and height.

           **overlay_w, w**
           **overlay_h, h**
               The overlay output width and height.

           **overlay_x, x**
           **overlay_y, y**
               Position of the overlay layer inside of main

### alpha
           Set transparency of overlaid video. Allowed range is 0.0  to  1.0.   Higher  value  means
           lower transparency.  Default value is 1.0.

### eof_action
           See **framesync**.

### shortest
           See **framesync**.

### repeatlast
           See **framesync**.

       This filter also supports the **framesync **options.

       _Examples_

       •   Overlay  an  image  LOGO  at the top-left corner of the INPUT video. Both inputs for this
           filter are yuv420p format.

                   -i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuv420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_vaapi" OUTPUT

       •   Overlay an image LOGO at the offset (200, 100) from the  top-left  corner  of  the  INPUT
           video.  The inputs have same memory layout for color channels, the overlay has additional
           alpha plane, like INPUT is yuv420p, and the LOGO is yuva420p.

                   -i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuva420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_vaapi=x=200:y=100:w=400:h=300:alpha=1.0, hwdownload, format=nv12" OUTPUT

### tonemap_vaapi
       Perform  HDR(High Dynamic Range) to SDR(Standard Dynamic Range) conversion with tone-mapping.
       It maps the dynamic range of HDR10 content to the SDR content.   It  currently  only  accepts
       HDR10 as input.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### format
           Specify the output pixel format.

           Currently supported formats are:

           _p010_
           _nv12_

           Default is nv12.

### primaries, p
           Set the output color primaries.

           Default is same as input.

### transfer, t
           Set the output transfer characteristics.

           Default is bt709.

### matrix, m
           Set the output colorspace matrix.

           Default is same as input.

       _Example_

       •   Convert HDR(HDR10) video to bt2020-transfer-characteristic p010 format

                   tonemap_vaapi=format=p010:t=bt2020-10

### hstack_vaapi
       Stack input videos horizontally.

       This is the VA-API variant of the **hstack **filter, each input stream may have different height,
       this filter will scale down/up each input stream while keeping the orignal aspect.

       It accepts the following options:

### inputs
           See **hstack**.

### shortest
           See **hstack**.

### height
           Set height of output. If set to 0, this filter will set height of output to height of the
           first input stream. Default value is 0.

### vstack_vaapi
       Stack input videos vertically.

       This  is the VA-API variant of the **vstack **filter, each input stream may have different width,
       this filter will scale down/up each input stream while keeping the orignal aspect.

       It accepts the following options:

### inputs
           See **vstack**.

### shortest
           See **vstack**.

### width
           Set width of output. If set to 0, this filter will set width of output to  width  of  the
           first input stream. Default value is 0.

### xstack_vaapi
       Stack video inputs into custom layout.

       This  is the VA-API variant of the **xstack **filter,  each input stream may have different size,
       this filter will scale down/up each input stream to the given output size, or the size of the
       first input stream.

       It accepts the following options:

### inputs
           See **xstack**.

### shortest
           See **xstack**.

### layout
           See **xstack**.  Moreover, this permits the user to supply output size for each input stream.

                   xstack_vaapi=inputs=4:layout=0_0_1920x1080|0_h0_1920x1080|w0_0_1920x1080|w0_h0_1920x1080

### grid
           See **xstack**.

### grid_tile_size
           Set output size for each input stream when **grid **is set. If this option is not  set,  this
           filter  will  set  output  size by default to the size of the first input stream. For the
           syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### fill
           See **xstack**.

## VULKAN VIDEO FILTERS
       Below is a description of the currently available Vulkan video filters.

       To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure  FFmpeg  with  "--enable-vulkan"
       and either "--enable-libglslang" or "--enable-libshaderc".

       Running  Vulkan  filters requires you to initialize a hardware device and to pass that device
       to all filters in any filter graph.

### -init_hw_device vulkan[=_
           Initialise a new hardware device of type _vulkan_  called  _name_,  using  the  given  device
           parameters and options in _key=value_. The following options are supported:

           **debug**
               Switches validation layers on if set to 1.

           **linear_images**
               Allocates linear images. Does not apply to decoding.

           **disable_multiplane**
               Disables multiplane images. Does not apply to decoding.

### -filter_hw_device _
           Pass the hardware device called _name_ to all filters in any filter graph.

       For more detailed information see <**<https://www.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html#Advanced-Video-options>**>

       •   Example  of  choosing  the  first  device  and running nlmeans_vulkan filter with default
           parameters on it.

                   -init_hw_device vulkan=vk:0 -filter_hw_device vk -i INPUT -vf "hwupload,nlmeans_vulkan,hwdownload" OUTPUT

       As Vulkan filters are not able to access frame data in normal memory, all frame data needs to
       be uploaded (**hwupload**) to hardware surfaces connected to the appropriate device before  being
       used  and  then downloaded (**hwdownload**) back to normal memory. Note that **hwupload **will upload
       to a frame with the same layout as the software frame, so it may be necessary to add a **format**
       filter immediately before to get the input into the right  format  and  **hwdownload  **does  not
       support  all  formats  on the output - it is usually necessary to insert an additional **format**
       filter immediately following in the graph to get the output in a supported format.

### avgblur_vulkan
       Apply an average blur filter, implemented on the GPU using Vulkan.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sizeX
           Set horizontal radius size.  Range is "[1, 32]" and default value is 3.

### sizeY
           Set vertical radius size. Range is "[1, 32]" and default value is 3.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. Default value is 0xf, by which all planes are processed.

### blend_vulkan
       Blend two Vulkan frames into each other.

       The "blend" filter takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the  first  input  is  the
       "top"  layer  and second input is "bottom" layer.  By default, the output terminates when the
       longest input terminates.

       A description of the accepted options follows.

### c0_mode
### c1_mode
### c2_mode
### c3_mode
### all_mode
           Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case of  _all_mode_.
           Default value is "normal".

           Available values for component modes are:

           **normal**
           **multiply**

### bwdif_vulkan
       Deinterlacer using **bwdif**, the "Bob Weaver Deinterlacing Filter" algorithm, implemented on the
       GPU using Vulkan.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### mode
           The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:

           **0, send_frame**
               Output one frame for each frame.

           **1, send_field**
               Output one frame for each field.

           The default value is "send_field".

### parity
           The  picture  field  parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one of the
           following values:

           **0, tff**
               Assume the top field is first.

           **1, bff**
               Assume the bottom field is first.

           **-1, auto**
               Enable automatic detection of field parity.

           The default value is "auto".  If the interlacing is  unknown  or  the  decoder  does  not
           export this information, top field first will be assumed.

### deint
           Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:

           **0, all**
               Deinterlace all frames.

           **1, interlaced**
               Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

           The default value is "all".

### chromaber_vulkan
       Apply  an effect that emulates chromatic aberration. Works best with RGB inputs, but provides
       a similar effect with YCbCr inputs too.

### dist_x
           Horizontal displacement multiplier. Each chroma pixel's position will  be  multiplied  by
           this amount, starting from the center of the image. Default is 0.

### dist_y
           Similarly, this sets the vertical displacement multiplier. Default is 0.

### color_vulkan
       Video  source  that  creates  a  Vulkan  frame of a solid color.  Useful for benchmarking, or
       overlaying.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### color
           The color to use. Either a name, or a hexadecimal value.  The default value is "black".

### size
           The size of the output frame. Default value is "1920x1080".

### rate
           The framerate to output at. Default value is 60 frames per second.

### duration
           The video duration. Default value is -0.000001.

       **sar **The video signal aspect ratio. Default value is "1/1".

### format
           The pixel format of the output Vulkan frames. Default value is "yuv444p".

### out_range
           Set the output YCbCr sample range.

           This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing a  specific
           value  used  for the output and encoder. If not specified, the range depends on the pixel
           format. Possible values:

           **auto/unknown**
               Choose automatically.

           **jpeg/full/pc**
               Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).

           **mpeg/limited/tv**
               Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).

### vflip_vulkan
       Flips an image vertically.

### hflip_vulkan
       Flips an image horizontally.

### flip_vulkan
       Flips an image along both the vertical and horizontal axis.

### gblur_vulkan
       Apply Gaussian blur filter on Vulkan frames.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sigma
           Set horizontal sigma, standard deviation of Gaussian blur. Default is 0.5.

### sigmaV
           Set vertical sigma, if negative it will be same as "sigma".  Default is -1.

### planes
           Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.

### size
           Set the kernel size along the horizontal axis. Default is 19.

### sizeV
           Set the kernel size along the vertical axis. Default is 0, which sets  to  use  the  same
           value as _size_.

### nlmeans_vulkan
       Denoise  frames  using  Non-Local  Means  algorithm,  implemented  on  the  GPU using Vulkan.
       Supports more pixel formats than **nlmeans **or **nlmeans_opencl**, including alpha channel support.

       The filter accepts the following options.

       **s   **Set denoising strength for all components. Default is 1.0. Must be in range [1.0, 100.0].

       **p   **Set patch size for all planes. Default is 7. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].

       **r   **Set research size. Default is 15. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].

       **t   **Set parallelism. Default is 36. Must be a number in the range [1,  168].   Larger  values
           may  speed  up  processing,  at  the  cost of more VRAM.  Lower values will slow it down,
           reducing VRAM usage.  Only supported  on  GPUs  with  atomic  float  operations  (RDNA3+,
           Ampere+).

       **s0**
       **s1**
       **s2**
       **s3  **Set  denoising  strength for a specific component. Default is _1_, equal to **s**.  Must be odd
           number in range [1, 100].

       **p0**
       **p1**
       **p2**
       **p3  **Set patch size for a specific component. Default is _7_, equal to **p**.  Must be odd number in
           range [0, 99].

### overlay_vulkan
       Overlay one video on top of another.

       It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the  "main"  video  on  which  the
       second  input is overlaid.  This filter requires all inputs to use the same pixel format. So,
       format conversion may be needed.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **x   **Set the x coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.  Default value is 0.

       **y   **Set the y coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.  Default value is 0.

### transpose_vt
       Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.   For  more  in  depth
       examples see the **transpose **video filter, which shares mostly the same options.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **dir **Specify the transposition direction.

           Can assume the following values:

           **cclock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip. (default)

           **clock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.

           **cclock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.

           **clock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip.

           **hflip**
               Flip the input video horizontally.

           **vflip**
               Flip the input video vertically.

### passthrough
           Do  not  apply  the  transposition if the input geometry matches the one specified by the
           specified value. It accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Always apply transposition. (default)

           **portrait**
               Preserve portrait geometry (when _height_ >= _width_).

           **landscape**
               Preserve landscape geometry (when _width_ >= _height_).

### transpose_vulkan
       Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.   For  more  in  depth
       examples see the **transpose **video filter, which shares mostly the same options.

       It accepts the following parameters:

       **dir **Specify the transposition direction.

           Can assume the following values:

           **cclock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip. (default)

           **clock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.

           **cclock**
               Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.

           **clock_flip**
               Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip.

### passthrough
           Do  not  apply  the  transposition if the input geometry matches the one specified by the
           specified value. It accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Always apply transposition. (default)

           **portrait**
               Preserve portrait geometry (when _height_ >= _width_).

           **landscape**
               Preserve landscape geometry (when _width_ >= _height_).

## QSV VIDEO FILTERS
       Below is a description of the currently available QSV video filters.

       To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with "--enable-libmfx" or
       "--enable-libvpl".

       To use QSV filters, you need to setup the QSV device correctly. For more information,  please
       read <**<https://trac.ffmpeg.org/wiki/Hardware/QuickSync>**>

### hstack_qsv
       Stack input videos horizontally.

       This  is  the  QSV variant of the **hstack **filter, each input stream may have different height,
       this filter will scale down/up each input stream while keeping the orignal aspect.

       It accepts the following options:

### inputs
           See **hstack**.

### shortest
           See **hstack**.

### height
           Set height of output. If set to 0, this filter will set height of output to height of the
           first input stream. Default value is 0.

### vstack_qsv
       Stack input videos vertically.

       This is the QSV variant of the **vstack **filter, each input stream  may  have  different  width,
       this filter will scale down/up each input stream while keeping the orignal aspect.

       It accepts the following options:

### inputs
           See **vstack**.

### shortest
           See **vstack**.

### width
           Set  width  of  output. If set to 0, this filter will set width of output to width of the
           first input stream. Default value is 0.

### xstack_qsv
       Stack video inputs into custom layout.

       This is the QSV variant of the **xstack **filter.

       It accepts the following options:

### inputs
           See **xstack**.

### shortest
           See **xstack**.

### layout
           See **xstack**.  Moreover, this permits the user to supply output size for each input stream.

                   xstack_qsv=inputs=4:layout=0_0_1920x1080|0_h0_1920x1080|w0_0_1920x1080|w0_h0_1920x1080

### grid
           See **xstack**.

### grid_tile_size
           Set output size for each input stream when **grid **is set. If this option is not  set,  this
           filter  will  set  output  size by default to the size of the first input stream. For the
           syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### fill
           See **xstack**.

## VIDEO SOURCES
       Below is a description of the currently available video sources.

### buffer
       Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.

       This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular  through  the  interface
       defined in _libavfilter/buffersrc.h_.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### video_size
           Specify  the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the syntax of this
           option, check the **"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### width
           The input video width.

### height
           The input video height.

### pix_fmt
           A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.  It may be a  number
           corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format name.

### time_base
           Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.

### frame_rate
           Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.

### pixel_aspect, sar
           The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.

### hw_frames_ctx
           When  using  a  hardware pixel format, this should be a reference to an AVHWFramesContext
           describing input frames.

       For example:

               buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1

       will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and with format  "yuv410p",
       assuming  1/24 as the timestamps timebase and square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).  Since
       the  pixel  format  with  name  "yuv410p"  corresponds  to  the  number  6  (check  the  enum
       AVPixelFormat definition in _libavutil/pixfmt.h_), this example corresponds to:

               buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1

       Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this syntax is deprecated:

       _width_:_height_:_pix_fmt_:_time_base.num_:_time_base.den_:_pixel_aspect.num_:_pixel_aspect.den_

### cellauto
       Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.

       The  initial  state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the **filename **and **pattern**
       options. If such options are not specified an initial state is created randomly.

       At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of the cellular  automaton
       next generation. The behavior when the whole frame is filled is defined by the **scroll **option.

       This source accepts the following options:

### filename, f
           Read  the  initial  cellular  automaton  state, i.e. the starting row, from the specified
           file.  In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, a  newline
           will terminate the row, and further characters in the file will be ignored.

### pattern, p
           Read  the  initial  cellular  automaton  state, i.e. the starting row, from the specified
           string.

           Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive cell, a  newline  will
           terminate the row, and further characters in the string will be ignored.

### rate, r
           Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.  Default is 25.

### random_fill_ratio, ratio
           Set  the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It is a floating point
           number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.

           This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.

### random_seed, seed
           Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer included between  0
           and  UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter will try to use
           a good random seed on a best effort basis.

### rule
           Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.  Default value  is
           110.

### size, s
           Set  the  size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           If **filename **or **pattern **is specified, the size is set by  default  to  the  width  of  the
           specified initial state row, and the height is set to _width_ * PHI.

           If  **size  **is  set,  it  must  contain  the width of the specified pattern string, and the
           specified pattern will be centered in the larger row.

           If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value defaults to  "320x518"
           (used for a randomly generated initial state).

### scroll
           If  set  to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output have been already
           filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be written over the top  row  just  after
           the bottom row is filled.  Defaults to 1.

### start_full, full
           If  set  to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before outputting the first
           frame.  This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.

### stitch
           If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.  This is the default behavior,
           for disabling set the value to 0.

       _Examples_

       •   Read the initial state from _pattern_, and specify an output of size 200x400.

                   cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400

       •   Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill ratio of 2/3:

                   cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200

       •   Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single  alive  cell  centered  on  an
           initial row with width 100:

                   cellauto=p=@s=100x400:full=0:rule=18

       •   Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:

                   cellauto=p='@@ @ @@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18

### coreimagesrc
       Video source generated on GPU using Apple's CoreImage API on OSX.

       This  video  source is a specialized version of the **coreimage **video filter.  Use a core image
       generator at the beginning of the applied filterchain to generate the content.

       The coreimagesrc video source accepts the following options:

### list_generators
           List all available generators along with all their respective options as well as possible
           minimum and maximum values along with the default values.

                   list_generators=true

### size, s
           Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  The default value is "320x240".

### rate, r
           Specify  the  frame  rate  of  the  sourced  video, as the number of frames generated per
           second. It has to be a string in the  format  _frame_rate_num_/_frame_rate_den_,  an  integer
           number,  a  floating  point  number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default
           value is "25".

       **sar **Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.

### duration, d
           Set  the  duration  of  the  sourced  video.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in   the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

           If  not  specified,  or  the  expressed duration is negative, the video is supposed to be
           generated forever.

       Additionally, all options of the **coreimage **video filter are accepted.  A complete filterchain
       can be used for further processing of the generated  input  without  CPU-HOST  transfer.  See
       **coreimage **documentation and examples for details.

       _Examples_

       •   Use  CIQRCodeGenerator to create a QR code for the FFmpeg homepage, given as complete and
           escaped command-line for Apple's standard bash shell:

                   ffmpeg -f lavfi -i coreimagesrc=s=100x100:filter=CIQRCodeGenerator@inputMessage=https\\\\\://FFmpeg.org/@inputCorrectionLevel=H -frames:v 1 QRCode.png

           This example is equivalent to the QRCode example of **coreimage  **without  the  need  for  a
           nullsrc video source.

### ddagrab
       Captures the Windows Desktop via Desktop Duplication API.

       The  filter  exclusively returns D3D11 Hardware Frames, for on-gpu encoding or processing. So
       an explicit **hwdownload **is needed for any kind of software processing.

       It accepts the following options:

### output_idx
           DXGI Output Index to capture.

           Usually corresponds to the index Windows has given the screen minus one, so it's starting
           at 0.

           Defaults to output 0.

### draw_mouse
           Whether to draw the mouse cursor.

           Defaults to true.

           Only affects hardware cursors. If a game or application renders  its  own  cursor,  it'll
           always be captured.

### framerate
           Framerate at which the desktop will be captured.

           Defaults to 30 FPS.

### video_size
           Specify the size of the captured video.

           Defaults to the full size of the screen.

           Cropped from the bottom/right if smaller than screen size.

### offset_x
           Horizontal offset of the captured video.

### offset_y
           Vertical offset of the captured video.

### output_fmt
           Desired filter output format.  Defaults to 8 Bit BGRA.

           It accepts the following values:

           **auto**
               Passes all supported output formats to DDA and returns what DDA decides to use.

           **8bit**
           **bgra**
               8 Bit formats always work, and DDA will convert to them if neccesary.

           **10bit**
           **x2bgr10**
               Filter initialization will fail if 10 bit format is requested but unavailable.

       _Examples_

       Capture primary screen and encode using nvenc:

               ffmpeg -f lavfi -i ddagrab -c:v h264_nvenc -cq 18 output.mp4

       You  can  also  skip  the  lavfi  device  and  directly  use  the  filter.  Also demonstrates
       downloading the frame and encoding with libx264.  Explicit  output  format  specification  is
       required in this case:

               ffmpeg -filter_complex ddagrab=output_idx=1:framerate=60,hwdownload,format=bgra -c:v libx264 -crf 18 output.mp4

       If you want to capture only a subsection of the desktop, this can be achieved by specifying a
       smaller size and its offsets into the screen:

               ddagrab=video_size=800x600:offset_x=100:offset_y=100

### gradients
       Generate several gradients.

### size, s
           Set  frame  size.  For  the  syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the**
           **ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default value is "640x480".

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### c0, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7
           Set 8 colors. Default values for colors is to pick random one.

### x0, y0, y0, y1
           Set gradient line source and destination points. If negative or out of range, random ones
           are picked.

### nb_colors, n
           Set number of colors to use at once. Allowed range is from 2 to 8. Default value is 2.

### seed
           Set seed for picking gradient line points.

### duration, d
           Set  the  duration  of  the  sourced  video.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in   the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

           If  not  specified,  or  the  expressed duration is negative, the video is supposed to be
           generated forever.

### speed
           Set speed of gradients rotation.

### type, t
           Set type of gradients, can be "linear" or "radial" or "circular" or "spiral".

### mandelbrot
       Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the  point  specified  with
       _start_x_ and _start_y_.

       This source accepts the following options:

### end_pts
           Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.

### end_scale
           Set the terminal scale value.  Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.

### inner
           Set  the  inner  coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the Mandelbrot fractal
           internal region.

           It shall assume one of the following values:

           **black**
               Set black mode.

           **convergence**
               Show time until convergence.

           **mincol**
               Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.

           **period**
               Set period mode.

           Default value is _mincol_.

### bailout
           Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.

### maxiter
           Set the maximum of iterations performed by the  rendering  algorithm.  Default  value  is
           7189.

### outer
           Set outer coloring mode.  It shall assume one of following values:

           **iteration_count**
               Set iteration count mode.

           **normalized_iteration_count**
               set normalized iteration count mode.

           Default value is _normalized_iteration_count_.

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### size, s
           Set  frame  size.  For  the  syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the**
           **ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default value is "640x480".

### start_scale
           Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.

### start_x
           Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between -100 and 100.  Default
           value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.

### start_y
           Set  the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between -100 and 100. Default
           value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.

### mptestsrc
       Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.

       The size of the generated video  is  fixed,  and  is  256x256.   This  source  is  useful  in
       particular for testing encoding features.

       This source accepts the following options:

### rate, r
           Specify  the  frame  rate  of  the  sourced  video, as the number of frames generated per
           second. It has to be a string in the  format  _frame_rate_num_/_frame_rate_den_,  an  integer
           number,  a  floating  point  number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default
           value is "25".

### duration, d
           Set  the  duration  of  the  sourced  video.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in   the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

           If  not  specified,  or  the  expressed duration is negative, the video is supposed to be
           generated forever.

### test, t
           Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:

           **dc_luma**
           **dc_chroma**
           **freq_luma**
           **freq_chroma**
           **amp_luma**
           **amp_chroma**
           **cbp**
           **mv**
           **ring1**
           **ring2**
           **all**
           **max_frames, m**
               Set the maximum number of frames generated for each test, default value is 30.

           Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.

       Some examples:

               mptestsrc=t=dc_luma

       will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.

### frei0r_src
       Provide a frei0r source.

       To enable compilation of this filter you need to install  the  frei0r  header  and  configure
       FFmpeg with "--enable-frei0r".

       This source accepts the following parameters:

### size
           The  size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### framerate
           The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form _num_/_den_ or  a  frame
           rate abbreviation.

### filter_name
           The  name  to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and how to
           set the parameters, read the **frei0r **section in the video filters documentation.

### filter_params
           A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.

       For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200 and frame rate  10  which
       is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:

               frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay

### life
       Generate a life pattern.

       This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.

       The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell which can be in one of
       two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell interacts with its eight neighbours, which are
       the cells that are horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.

       At  each  interaction  the  grid  evolves  according to the adopted rule, which specifies the
       number of neighbor alive cells which will make a cell stay alive or  born.  The  **rule  **option
       allows one to specify the rule to adopt.

       This source accepts the following options:

### filename, f
           Set  the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file, each non-whitespace
           character is considered an alive cell, and newline is used to delimit  the  end  of  each
           row.

           If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated randomly.

### rate, r
           Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.  Default is 25.

### random_fill_ratio, ratio
           Set  the  random  fill  ratio  for the initial random grid. It is a floating point number
           value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.  It is ignored when a file is specified.

### random_seed, seed
           Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer included  between  0
           and  UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter will try to use
           a good random seed on a best effort basis.

### rule
           Set the life rule.

           A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S_NS_/B_NB_", where _NS_ and _NB_ are  sequences
           of numbers in the range 0-8, _NS_ specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
           live cell stay alive, and _NB_ the number of alive neighbor cells which make a dead cell to
           become  alive  (i.e.  to  "born").   "s"  and  "b"  can  be used in place of "S" and "B",
           respectively.

           Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9 high  order  bits  are
           used  to  encode  the  next  cell  state if it is alive for each number of neighbor alive
           cells, the low order bits specify the rule for "borning" new  cells.  Higher  order  bits
           encode for an higher number of neighbor cells.  For example the number 6153 = "(12<<9)+9"
           specifies a stay alive rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".

           Default  value  is  "S23/B3",  which is the original Conway's game of life rule, and will
           keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive cells, and will  born  a  new  cell  if
           there are three alive cells around a dead cell.

### size, s
           Set  the  size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

           If **filename **is specified, the size is set by default to the same size of the input  file.
           If  **size  **is  set,  it must contain the size specified in the input file, and the initial
           grid defined in that file is centered in the larger resulting area.

           If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240" (used for a randomly
           generated initial grid).

### stitch
           If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the top and bottom  edges
           also. Defaults to 1.

### mold
           Set  cell  mold  speed. If set, a dead cell will go from **death_color **to **mold_color **with a
           step of **mold**. **mold **can have a value from 0 to 255.

### life_color
           Set the color of living (or new born) cells.

### death_color
           Set the color of dead cells. If **mold **is set, this is the first color used to represent  a
           dead cell.

### mold_color
           Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.

           For  the  syntax  of these 3 color options, check the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils**
           **manual**.

       _Examples_

       •   Read a grid from _pattern_, and center it on a grid of size 300x300 pixels:

                   life=f=pattern:s=300x300

       •   Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:

                   life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200

       •   Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:

                   life=rule=S14/B34

       •   Full example with slow death effect (mold) using **ffplay**:

                   ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16

### allrgb, allyuv, color, colorchart, colorspectrum, haldclutsrc,  nullsrc,  pal75bars,  pal100bars,
### rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc, testsrc2, yuvtestsrc
       The "allrgb" source returns frames of size 4096x4096 of all rgb colors.

       The "allyuv" source returns frames of size 4096x4096 of all yuv colors.

       The "color" source provides an uniformly colored input.

       The "colorchart" source provides a colors checker chart.

       The "colorspectrum" source provides a color spectrum input.

       The "haldclutsrc" source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also **haldclut **filter.

       The  "nullsrc" source returns unprocessed video frames. It is mainly useful to be employed in
       analysis / debugging tools, or as the source for filters which ignore the input data.

       The "pal75bars" source generates a color bars pattern, based on EBU PAL recommendations  with
       75% color levels.

       The "pal100bars" source generates a color bars pattern, based on EBU PAL recommendations with
       100% color levels.

       The "rgbtestsrc" source generates an RGB test pattern useful for detecting RGB vs BGR issues.
       You should see a red, green and blue stripe from top to bottom.

       The  "smptebars"  source  generates  a  color  bars  pattern,  based on the SMPTE Engineering
       Guideline EG 1-1990.

       The "smptehdbars" source generates a color bars pattern, based on the SMPTE RP 219-2002.

       The "testsrc" source generates a test video pattern, showing a  color  pattern,  a  scrolling
       gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly intended for testing purposes.

       The  "testsrc2" source is similar to testsrc, but supports more pixel formats instead of just
       "rgb24". This allows using it as  an  input  for  other  tests  without  requiring  a  format
       conversion.

       The  "yuvtestsrc"  source generates an YUV test pattern. You should see a y, cb and cr stripe
       from top to bottom.

       The sources accept the following parameters:

### level
           Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the "haldclutsrc" source.  A  level
           of "N" generates a picture of "N*N*N" by "N*N*N" pixels to be used as identity matrix for
           3D lookup tables. Each component is coded on a "1/(N*N)" scale.

### color, c
           Specify  the color of the source, only available in the "color" source. For the syntax of
           this option, check the **"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.

### size, s
           Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  The default value is "320x240".

           This option is not available with the "allrgb", "allyuv", and "haldclutsrc" filters.

### rate, r
           Specify  the  frame  rate  of  the  sourced  video, as the number of frames generated per
           second. It has to be a string in the  format  _frame_rate_num_/_frame_rate_den_,  an  integer
           number,  a  floating  point  number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default
           value is "25".

### duration, d
           Set  the  duration  of  the  sourced  video.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in   the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

           If  not  specified,  or  the  expressed duration is negative, the video is supposed to be
           generated forever.

           Since the frame rate is used as time base, all frames including the last  one  will  have
           their  full  duration. If the specified duration is not a multiple of the frame duration,
           it will be rounded up.

       **sar **Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.

### alpha
           Specify the alpha (opacity) of the background, only available in the  "testsrc2"  source.
           The value must be between 0 (fully transparent) and 255 (fully opaque, the default).

### decimals, n
           Set  the  number  of  decimals  to show in the timestamp, only available in the "testsrc"
           source.

           The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original timestamp value  multiplied
           by the power of 10 of the specified value. Default value is 0.

### type
           Set  the type of the color spectrum, only available in the "colorspectrum" source. Can be
           one of the following:

           **black**
           **white**
           **all**
### patch_size
           Set patch size of single color patch, only available in the "colorchart" source.  Default
           is "64x64".

### preset
           Set colorchecker colors preset, only available in the "colorchart" source.

           Available values are:

           **reference**
           **skintones**

           Default value is "reference".

       _Examples_

       •   Generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size 176x144 and a frame rate of 10
           frames per second:

                   testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10

       •   The  following  graph description will generate a red source with an opacity of 0.2, with
           size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10 frames per second:

                   color=c=<red@0.2>:s=qcif:r=10

       •   If the input content is to be ignored, "nullsrc"  can  be  used.  The  following  command
           generates noise in the luma plane by employing the "geq" filter:

                   nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=[random(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/random/1/markdown)*255:128:128

       _Commands_

       The "color" source supports the following commands:

### c, color
           Set  the  color  of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the corresponding **color**
           option.

### openclsrc
       Generate video using an OpenCL program.

### source
           OpenCL program source file.

### kernel
           Kernel name in program.

### size, s
           Size of frames to generate.  This must be set.

### format
           Pixel format to use for the generated frames.  This must be set.

### rate, r
           Number of frames generated every second.  Default value is '25'.

       For details of how the program loading works, see the **program_opencl **filter.

       Example programs:

       •   Generate a colour ramp by setting pixel values from the position  of  the  pixel  in  the
           output image.  (Note that this will work with all pixel formats, but the generated output
           will not be the same.)

                   __kernel void ramp(__write_only image2d_t dst,
                                      unsigned int index)
                   {
                       int2 loc = (int2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));

                       float4 val;
                       val.xy = val.zw = convert_float2(loc) / convert_float2(get_image_dim(dst));

                       write_imagef(dst, loc, val);
                   }

       •   Generate a Sierpinski carpet pattern, panning by a single pixel each frame.

                   __kernel void sierpinski_carpet(__write_only image2d_t dst,
                                                   unsigned int index)
                   {
                       int2 loc = (int2)([get_global_id(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/0/markdown), [get_global_id(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/getglobalid/1/markdown));

                       float4 value = 0.0f;
                       int x = loc.x + index;
                       int y = loc.y + index;
                       while (x > 0 || y > 0) {
                           if (x % 3 == 1 && y % 3 == 1) {
                               value = 1.0f;
                               break;
                           }
                           x /= 3;
                           y /= 3;
                       }

                       write_imagef(dst, loc, value);
                   }

### sierpinski
       Generate a Sierpinski carpet/triangle fractal, and randomly pan around.

       This source accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Set  frame  size.  For  the  syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in the**
           **ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default value is "640x480".

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### seed
           Set seed which is used for random panning.

### jump
           Set max jump for single pan destination. Allowed range is from 1 to 10000.

### type
           Set fractal type, can be default "carpet" or "triangle".

### zoneplate
       Generate a zoneplate test video pattern.

       This source accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the  **"Video  size"  section  in  the**
           **ffmpeg-utils manual**. Default value is "320x240".

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### duration, d
           Set   the  duration  of  the  sourced  video.  See  **the  Time  duration  section  in  the**
           [**ffmpeg-utils(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg-utils/1/markdown) manual **for the accepted syntax.

           If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the  video  is  supposed  to  be
           generated forever.

       **sar **Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.

### precision
           Set  precision  in  bits  for  look-up  table for sine calculations. Default value is 10.
           Allowed range is from 4 to 16.

       **xo  **Set horizontal axis offset for output signal. Default value is 0.

       **yo  **Set vertical axis offset for output signal. Default value is 0.

       **to  **Set time axis offset for output signal. Default value is 0.

       **k0  **Set 0-order, constant added to signal phase. Default value is 0.

       **kx  **Set 1-order, phase factor multiplier for horizontal axis. Default value is 0.

       **ky  **Set 1-order, phase factor multiplier for vertical axis. Default value is 0.

       **kt  **Set 1-order, phase factor multiplier for time axis. Default value is 0.

### kxt, kyt, kxy
           Set phase factor multipliers for combination of spatial and temporal axis.  Default value
           is 0.

       **kx2 **Set 2-order, phase factor multiplier for horizontal axis. Default value is 0.

       **ky2 **Set 2-order, phase factor multiplier for vertical axis. Default value is 0.

       **kt2 **Set 2-order, phase factor multiplier for time axis. Default value is 0.

       **ku  **Set the constant added to  final  phase  to  produce  chroma-blue  component  of  signal.
           Default value is 0.

       **kv  **Set the constant added to final phase to produce chroma-red component of signal.  Default
           value is 0.

       _Commands_

       This source supports the some above options as **commands**.

       _Examples_

       •   Generate horizontal color sine sweep:

                   zoneplate=ku=512:kv=0:kt2=0:kx2=256:s=wvga:xo=-426:kt=11

       •   Generate vertical color sine sweep:

                   zoneplate=ku=512:kv=0:kt2=0:ky2=156:s=wvga:yo=-240:kt=11

       •   Generate circular zone-plate:

                   zoneplate=ku=512:kv=100:kt2=0:ky2=256:kx2=556:s=wvga:yo=0:kt=11

## VIDEO SINKS
       Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.

### buffersink
       Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter graph.

       This  sink  is  mainly  intended  for  programmatic  use, in particular through the interface
       defined in _libavfilter/buffersink.h_ or the options system.

       It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which defines the incoming buffers'
       formats, to be passed as the opaque parameter to "avfilter_init_filter" for initialization.

### nullsink
       Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the  input  video.  It  is  mainly  useful  as  a
       template and for use in analysis / debugging tools.

## MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
       Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.

### a3dscope
       Convert input audio to 3d scope video output.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### size, s
           Specify  the  video  size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "hd720".

       **fov **Set the camera field of view. Default is 90 degrees.  Allowed range is from 40 to 150.

### roll
           Set the camera roll.

### pitch
           Set the camera pitch.

       **yaw **Set the camera yaw.

### xzoom
           Set the camera zoom on X-axis.

### yzoom
           Set the camera zoom on Y-axis.

### zzoom
           Set the camera zoom on Z-axis.

### xpos
           Set the camera position on X-axis.

### ypos
           Set the camera position on Y-axis.

### zpos
           Set the camera position on Z-axis.

### length
           Set the length of displayed audio waves in number of frames.

       _Commands_

       Filter supports the some above options as **commands**.

### abitscope
       Convert input audio to a video output, displaying the audio bit scope.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### size, s
           Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "1024x256".

### colors
           Specify  list of colors separated by space or by '|' which will be used to draw channels.
           Unrecognized or missing colors will be replaced by white color.

### mode, m
           Set output mode. Can be "bars" or "trace". Default is "bars".

### adrawgraph
       Draw a graph using input audio metadata.

       See **drawgraph**

### agraphmonitor
       See **graphmonitor**.

### ahistogram
       Convert input audio to a video output, displaying the volume histogram.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### dmode
           Specify how histogram is calculated.

           It accepts the following values:

           **single**
               Use single histogram for all channels.

           **separate**
               Use separate histogram for each channel.

           Default is "single".

### rate, r
           Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default value is "25".

### size, s
           Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "hd720".

### scale
           Set display scale.

           It accepts the following values:

           **log **logarithmic

           **sqrt**
               square root

           **cbrt**
               cubic root

           **lin **linear

           **rlog**
               reverse logarithmic

           Default is "log".

### ascale
           Set amplitude scale.

           It accepts the following values:

           **log **logarithmic

           **lin **linear

           Default is "log".

### acount
           Set  how  much  frames  to  accumulate  in  histogram.   Default is 1. Setting this to -1
           accumulates all frames.

### rheight
           Set histogram ratio of window height.

### slide
           Set sonogram sliding.

           It accepts the following values:

           **replace**
               replace old rows with new ones.

           **scroll**
               scroll from top to bottom.

           Default is "replace".

### hmode
           Set histogram mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **abs **Use absolute values of samples.

           **sign**
               Use untouched values of samples.

           Default is "abs".

### aphasemeter
       Measures phase of input audio,  which  is  exported  as  metadata  "lavfi.aphasemeter.phase",
       representing  mean  phase  of current audio frame. A video output can also be produced and is
       enabled by default. The audio is passed through as first output.

       Audio will be rematrixed to stereo if it has a different channel layout. Phase  value  is  in
       range  "[-1,  1]"  where  -1  means left and right channels are completely out of phase and 1
       means channels are in phase.

       The filter accepts the following options, all related to its video output:

### rate, r
           Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.

### size, s
           Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video  size"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "800x400".

       **rc**
       **gc**
       **bc  **Specify  the  red, green, blue contrast. Default values are 2, 7 and 1.  Allowed range is
           "[0, 255]".

       **mpc **Set color which will be used for drawing median  phase.  If  color  is  "none"  which  is
           default, no median phase value will be drawn.

### video
           Enable video output. Default is enabled.

       _phasing_ _detection_

       The  filter  also  detects  out  of  phase and mono sequences in stereo streams.  It logs the
       sequence start, end and duration when it lasts longer or as long as the minimum set.

       The filter accepts the following options for this detection:

### phasing
           Enable mono and out of phase detection. Default is disabled.

### tolerance, t
           Set phase tolerance for mono detection, in amplitude ratio. Default is 0.  Allowed  range
           is "[0, 1]".

### angle, a
           Set angle threshold for out of phase detection, in degree. Default is 170.  Allowed range
           is "[90, 180]".

### duration, d
           Set mono or out of phase duration until notification, expressed in seconds. Default is 2.

       _Examples_

       •   Complete example with **ffmpeg **to detect 1 second of mono with 0.001 phase tolerance:

                   ffmpeg -i stereo.wav -af aphasemeter=video=0:phasing=1:duration=1:tolerance=0.001 -f null -

### avectorscope
       Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector scope.

       The  filter  is  used  to  measure  the difference between channels of stereo audio stream. A
       monaural signal, consisting of identical left and right signal, results in straight  vertical
       line.  Any  stereo  separation is visible as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous
       figure.  If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line  appears  this  indicates
       that the left and right channels are out of phase.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### mode, m
           Set the vectorscope mode.

           Available values are:

           **lissajous**
               Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.

           **lissajous_xy**
               Same as above but not rotated.

           **polar**
               Shape resembling half of circle.

           Default value is **lissajous**.

### size, s
           Set  the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size"**
           **section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "400x400".

### rate, r
           Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.

       **rc**
       **gc**
       **bc**
       **ac  **Specify the red, green, blue and alpha contrast. Default values are 40, 160, 80 and  255.
           Allowed range is "[0, 255]".

       **rf**
       **gf**
       **bf**
       **af  **Specify the red, green, blue and alpha fade. Default values are 15, 10, 5 and 5.  Allowed
           range is "[0, 255]".

### zoom
           Set the zoom factor. Default value is 1. Allowed range is "[0, 10]".  Values lower than _1_
           will auto adjust zoom factor to maximal possible value.

### draw
           Set the vectorscope drawing mode.

           Available values are:

           **dot **Draw dot for each sample.

           **line**
               Draw line between previous and current sample.

           **aaline**
               Draw anti-aliased line between previous and current sample.

           Default value is **dot**.

### scale
           Specify amplitude scale of audio samples.

           Available values are:

           **lin **Linear.

           **sqrt**
               Square root.

           **cbrt**
               Cubic root.

           **log **Logarithmic.

### swap
           Swap left channel axis with right channel axis.

### mirror
           Mirror axis.

           **none**
               No mirror.

           **x   **Mirror only x axis.

           **y   **Mirror only y axis.

           **xy  **Mirror both axis.

       _Examples_

       •   Complete example using **ffplay**:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
                                [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the all above options as commands except options "size" and "rate".

### bench, abench
       Benchmark part of a filtergraph.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### action
           Start or stop a timer.

           Available values are:

           **start**
               Get    the    current   time,   set   it   as   frame   metadata   (using   the   key
               "lavfi.bench.start_time"), and forward the frame to the next filter.

           **stop**
               Get the current time and fetch the "lavfi.bench.start_time" metadata from  the  input
               frame  metadata  to  get  the  time difference. Time difference, average, maximum and
               minimum time (respectively "t",  "avg",  "max"  and  "min")  are  then  printed.  The
               timestamps are expressed in seconds.

       _Examples_

       •   Benchmark **selectivecolor **filter:

                   bench=start,selectivecolor=reds=-.2 .12 -.49,bench=stop

### concat
       Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the other.

       The  filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All segments must have
       the same number of streams of each type, and that will also  be  the  number  of  streams  at
       output.

       The filter accepts the following options:

       **n   **Set the number of segments. Default is 2.

       **v   **Set  the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video streams in each
           segment. Default is 1.

       **a   **Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio streams in  each
           segment. Default is 0.

### unsafe
           Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.

       The filter has _v_+_a_ outputs: first _v_ video outputs, then _a_ audio outputs.

       There  are  _n_x(_v_+_a_)  inputs: first the inputs for the first segment, in the same order as the
       outputs, then the inputs for the second segment, etc.

       Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various  reasons  including
       codec  frame  size or sloppy authoring. For that reason, related synchronized streams (e.g. a
       video and its audio track) should be concatenated at once. The concat  filter  will  use  the
       duration  of  the  longest stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad
       shorter audio streams with silence.

       For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.

       All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the filtering system
       will automatically select a common pixel format  for  video  streams,  and  a  common  sample
       format,  sample  rate  and  channel  layout  for  audio  streams, but other settings, such as
       resolution, must be converted explicitly by the user.

       Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame  rate  at  output;  be
       sure to configure the output file to handle it.

       _Examples_

       •   Concatenate  an  opening,  an  episode  and an ending, all in bilingual version (video in
           stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):

                   ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
                     '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
                      concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
                     -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv

       •   Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the  (a)movie  sources,
           and adjusting the resolution:

                   movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
                   movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
                   [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]

           Note  that  a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams do not have
           exactly the same duration in the first file.

       _Commands_

       This filter supports the following commands:

### next
           Close the current segment and step to the next one

### ebur128
       EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream and analyzes its  loudness  level.
       By  default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the Momentary loudness (identified
       by "M"), Short-term loudness ("S"), Integrated loudness ("I") and Loudness Range ("LRA").

       The filter can only analyze streams which have sample  format  is  double-precision  floating
       point. The input stream will be converted to this specification, if needed. Users may need to
       insert aformat and/or aresample filters after this filter to obtain the original parameters.

       The  filter  also has a video output (see the _video_ option) with a real time graph to observe
       the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged message mentioned above, so it is not
       printed anymore when this option is set, unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing
       area contains the short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right  is
       for  the  momentary  loudness (400 milliseconds), but can optionally be configured to instead
       display short-term loudness (see _gauge_).

       The green area marks a  +/- 1LU target range around the target loudness (-23LUFS by  default,
       unless modified through _target_).

       More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on <**<http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness>**>.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### video
           Activate  the  video  output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this option is
           set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if activated. Default is 0.

### size
           Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this  option,  check
           the  **"Video  size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default and minimum resolution is
           "640x480".

### meter
           Set the EBU scale meter. Default is 9. Common values are 9 and 18, respectively  for  EBU
           scale  meter  +9  and  EBU scale meter +18. Any other integer value between this range is
           allowed.

### metadata
           Set metadata injection. If set to 1, the audio input will be segmented into 100ms  output
           frames,  each  of  them  containing  various  loudness  information in metadata.  All the
           metadata keys are prefixed with "lavfi.r128.".

           Default is 0.

### framelog
           Force the frame logging level.

           Available values are:

           **quiet**
               logging disabled

           **info**
               information logging level

           **verbose**
               verbose logging level

           By default, the logging level is set to _info_. If the **video **or the  **metadata  **options  are
           set, it switches to _verbose_.

### peak
           Set peak mode(s).

           Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a "flag" type). Possible values are:

           **none**
               Disable any peak mode (default).

           **sample**
               Enable sample-peak mode.

               Simple  peak  mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message for sample-
               peak (identified by "SPK").

           **true**
               Enable true-peak mode.

               If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of  the  input  stream
               for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.  (identified by "TPK") and
               true-peak  per  frame  (identified  by  "FTPK").   This  mode  requires  a build with
               "libswresample".

### dualmono
           Treat mono input files as "dual mono". If a mono file  is  intended  for  playback  on  a
           stereo  system,  its  EBU  R128  measurement  will  be perceptually incorrect.  If set to
           "true", this option will compensate for this effect.  Multi-channel input files  are  not
           affected by this option.

### panlaw
           Set a specific pan law to be used for the measurement of dual mono files.  This parameter
           is optional, and has a default value of -3.01dB.

### target
           Set  a  specific target level (in LUFS) used as relative zero in the visualization.  This
           parameter is optional and has a default value  of  -23LUFS  as  specified  by  EBU  R128.
           However,  material  published  online  may  prefer  a level of -16LUFS (e.g. for use with
           podcasts or video platforms).

### gauge
           Set the value displayed by the gauge. Valid values are "momentary" and s "shortterm".  By
           default  the momentary value will be used, but in certain scenarios it may be more useful
           to observe the short term value instead (e.g.  live mixing).

### scale
           Sets the display scale for the loudness. Valid parameters are  "absolute"  (in  LUFS)  or
           "relative"  (LU)  relative  to  the  target.  This only affects the video output, not the
           summary or continuous log output.

### integrated
           Read-only exported value for measured integrated loudness, in LUFS.

### range
           Read-only exported value for measured loudness range, in LU.

### lra_low
           Read-only exported value for measured LRA low, in LUFS.

### lra_high
           Read-only exported value for measured LRA high, in LUFS.

### sample_peak
           Read-only exported value for measured sample peak, in dBFS.

### true_peak
           Read-only exported value for measured true peak, in dBFS.

       _Examples_

       •   Real-time graph using **ffplay**, with a EBU scale meter +18:

                   ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"

       •   Run an analysis with **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -

### interleave, ainterleave
       Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.

       "interleave" works with video inputs, "ainterleave" with audio.

       These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest queued frame to the output.

       Input streams must have well defined, monotonically increasing frame timestamp values.

       In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue at least one frame  for
       each  input, so they cannot work in case one input is not yet terminated and will not receive
       incoming frames.

       For example consider the case when one input is a "select" filter which  always  drops  input
       frames.  The "interleave" filter will keep reading from that input, but it will never be able
       to send new frames to output until the input sends an end-of-stream signal.

       Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop frames  in  case  one  input
       receives more frames than the other ones, and the queue is already filled.

       These filters accept the following options:

### nb_inputs, n
           Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.

### duration
           How to determine the end-of-stream.

           **longest**
               The duration of the longest input. (default)

           **shortest**
               The duration of the shortest input.

           **first**
               The duration of the first input.

       _Examples_

       •   Interleave frames belonging to different streams using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi

       •   Add flickering blur effect:

                   select='if(gt([random(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/random/0/markdown), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave

### latency, alatency
       Measure filtering latency.

       Report  previous filter filtering latency, delay in number of audio samples for audio filters
       or number of video frames for video filters.

       On end of input stream, filter will report min and max measured latency for previous  running
       filter in filtergraph.

### metadata, ametadata
       Manipulate frame metadata.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### mode
           Set mode of operation of the filter.

           Can be one of the following:

           **select**
               If  both  "value"  and  "key" is set, select frames which have such metadata. If only
               "key" is set, select every frame that has such key in metadata.

           **add **Add new metadata "key" and "value". If key is already available do nothing.

           **modify**
               Modify value of already present key.

           **delete**
               If "value" is set, delete only keys that have such value.  Otherwise, delete key.  If
               "key" is not set, delete all metadata values in the frame.

           **print**
               Print key and its value if metadata was found. If "key" is not set print all metadata
               values available in frame.

       **key **Set key used with all modes. Must be set for all modes except "print" and "delete".

### value
           Set  metadata  value  which will be used. This option is mandatory for "modify" and "add"
           mode.

### function
           Which function to use when comparing metadata value and "value".

           Can be one of following:

           **same_str**
               Values are interpreted as strings, returns true if metadata value is same as "value".

           **starts_with**
               Values are interpreted as strings, returns true if metadata  value  starts  with  the
               "value" option string.

           **less**
               Values  are  interpreted  as  floats,  returns  true  if  metadata value is less than
               "value".

           **equal**
               Values are interpreted as floats, returns true if  "value"  is  equal  with  metadata
               value.

           **greater**
               Values  are  interpreted  as  floats,  returns true if metadata value is greater than
               "value".

           **expr**
               Values are interpreted as floats, returns  true  if  expression  from  option  "expr"
               evaluates to true.

           **ends_with**
               Values  are  interpreted  as  strings,  returns  true if metadata value ends with the
               "value" option string.

### expr
           Set expression which is used when  "function"  is  set  to  "expr".   The  expression  is
           evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following constants:

           **VALUE1, FRAMEVAL**
               Float representation of "value" from metadata key.

           **VALUE2, USERVAL**
               Float representation of "value" as supplied by user in "value" option.

### file
           If  specified  in  "print"  mode,  output  is written to the named file. Instead of plain
           filename any writable url can be specified. Filename ``-'' is a  shorthand  for  standard
           output.  If  "file"  option  is  not  set,  output is written to the log with AV_LOG_INFO
           loglevel.

### direct
           Reduces buffering in print mode when output is written to a URL set using _file_.

       _Examples_

       •   Print all metadata values  for  frames  with  key  "lavfi.signalstats.YDIF"  with  values
           between 0 and 1.

                   signalstats,metadata=print:key=lavfi.signalstats.YDIF:value=0:function=expr:expr='between(VALUE1,0,1)'

       •   Print silencedetect output to file _metadata.txt_.

                   silencedetect,ametadata=mode=print:file=metadata.txt

       •   Direct all metadata to a pipe with file descriptor 4.

                   metadata=mode=print:file='pipe\:4'

### perms, aperms
       Set read/write permissions for the output frames.

       These  filters  are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the following filter in
       the filtergraph.

       The filters accept the following options:

### mode
           Select the permissions mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **none**
               Do nothing. This is the default.

           **ro  **Set all the output frames read-only.

           **rw  **Set all the output frames directly writable.

           **toggle**
               Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.

           **random**
               Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.

### seed
           Set the seed for the _random_ mode, must be an integer included between 0 and "UINT32_MAX".
           If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter will try to use  a  good  random
           seed on a best effort basis.

       Note:  in  case  of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the following one,
       the permission might not be received as expected in that following filter. Inserting a **format**
       or **aformat **filter before the perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.

### realtime, arealtime
       Slow down filtering to match real time approximately.

       These filters will pause the filtering for a variable amount of time to match the output rate
       with the input timestamps.  They are similar to the **re **option to "ffmpeg".

       They accept the following options:

### limit
           Time limit for the pauses. Any pause longer than that  will  be  considered  a  timestamp
           discontinuity and reset the timer. Default is 2 seconds.

### speed
           Speed  factor  for processing. The value must be a float larger than zero.  Values larger
           than 1.0 will result in faster than realtime processing,  smaller  will  slow  processing
           down. The _limit_ is automatically adapted accordingly. Default is 1.0.

           A processing speed faster than what is possible without these filters cannot be achieved.

       _Commands_

       Both filters supports the all above options as **commands**.

### segment, asegment
       Split single input stream into multiple streams.

       This filter does opposite of concat filters.

       "segment" works on video frames, "asegment" on audio samples.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### timestamps
           Timestamps  of  output  segments  separated  by  '|'. The first segment will run from the
           beginning of the input stream. The last segment will run  until  the  end  of  the  input
           stream

### frames, samples
           Exact frame/sample count to split the segments.

       In  all  cases,  prefixing  an  each  segment  with '+' will make it relative to the previous
       segment.

       _Examples_

       •   Split input audio stream into three output audio streams,  starting  at  start  of  input
           audio  stream  and storing that in 1st output audio stream, then following at 60th second
           and storing than in 2nd output audio stream, and last after 150th second of  input  audio
           stream store in 3rd output audio stream:

                   asegment=timestamps="60|150"

### select, aselect
       Select frames to pass in output.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### expr, e
           Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.

           If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.

           If  the  evaluation  result  is  negative  or NaN, the frame is sent to the first output;
           otherwise it is sent to the output with index  "ceil(val)-1",  assuming  that  the  input
           index starts from 0.

           For  example a value of 1.2 corresponds to the output with index "ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1",
           that is the second output.

### outputs, n
           Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected frame is based on the
           result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.

       The expression can contain the following constants:

       **n   **The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.

### selected_n
           The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.

### prev_selected_n
           The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.

       **TB  **The timebase of the input timestamps.

       **pts **The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered frame, expressed in _TB_ units.  It's  NAN
           if undefined.

       **t   **The PTS of the filtered frame, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.

### prev_pts
           The PTS of the previously filtered frame. It's NAN if undefined.

### prev_selected_pts
           The PTS of the last previously filtered frame. It's NAN if undefined.

### prev_selected_t
           The  PTS  of  the  last  previously  selected  frame,  expressed  in seconds. It's NAN if
           undefined.

### start_pts
           The first PTS in the stream which is not NAN. It remains NAN if not found.

### start_t
           The first PTS, in seconds, in the stream which is not NAN. It remains NAN if not found.

       **pict_type _**(video_ _only)_
           The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following values:

           **I**
           **P**
           **B**
           **S**
           **SI**
           **SP**
           **BI**
       **interlace_type _**(video_ _only)_
           The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:

           **PROGRESSIVE**
               The frame is progressive (not interlaced).

           **TOPFIRST**
               The frame is top-field-first.

           **BOTTOMFIRST**
               The frame is bottom-field-first.

       **consumed_sample_n _**(audio_ _only)_
           the number of selected samples before the current frame

       **samples_n _**(audio_ _only)_
           the number of samples in the current frame

       **sample_rate _**(audio_ _only)_
           the input sample rate

       **key **This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.

       **pos **the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information  is  not  available
           (e.g. for synthetic video); deprecated, do not use

       **scene _**(video_ _only)_
           value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low probability for
           the  current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher value means the current frame
           is more likely to be one (see the example below)

### concatdec_select
           The concat demuxer can select only part of a concat input file by setting an inpoint  and
           an  outpoint,  but  the  output  packets  may  not  be entirely contained in the selected
           interval. By using this variable, it is possible to skip frames generated by  the  concat
           demuxer which are not exactly contained in the selected interval.

           This  works  by  comparing  the  frame  pts  against  the  _lavf.concat.start_time_ and the
           _lavf.concat.duration_ packet metadata values which are also present in the decoded frames.

           The _concatdec_select_ variable is -1 if the frame pts is at least  start_time  and  either
           the  duration  metadata is missing or the frame pts is less than start_time + duration, 0
           otherwise, and NaN if the start_time metadata is missing.

           That basically means that an input frame is selected if its pts is  within  the  interval
           set by the concat demuxer.

       The default value of the select expression is "1".

       _Examples_

       •   Select all frames in input:

                   select

           The example above is the same as:

                   select=1

       •   Skip all frames:

                   select=0

       •   Select only I-frames:

                   select='eq(pict_type\,I)'

       •   Select one frame every 100:

                   select='not(mod(n\,100))'

       •   Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:

                   select=between(t\,10\,20)

       •   Select only I-frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:

                   select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)

       •   Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:

                   select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'

       •   Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:

                   aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'

       •   Create a mosaic of the first scenes:

                   ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png

           Comparing _scene_ against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane choice.

       •   Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:

                   select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h

       •   Select  useful  frames  from  an  ffconcat file which is using inpoints and outpoints but
           where the source files are not intra frame only.

                   ffmpeg -copyts -vsync 0 -segment_time_metadata 1 -i input.ffconcat -vf select=concatdec_select -af aselect=concatdec_select output.avi

### sendcmd, asendcmd
       Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.

       These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the filtergraph.

       "sendcmd" must be inserted between two video filters, "asendcmd" must be inserted between two
       audio filters, but apart from that they act the same way.

       The specification of commands can be provided in  the  filter  arguments  with  the  _commands_
       option, or in a file specified by the _filename_ option.

       These filters accept the following options:

### commands, c
           Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.

### filename, f
           Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.

       _Commands_ _syntax_

       A  commands  description consists of a sequence of interval specifications, comprising a list
       of commands to be executed when a particular event  related  to  that  interval  occurs.  The
       occurring  event  is  typically  the  current  frame  time  entering  or leaving a given time
       interval.

       An interval is specified by the following syntax:

               <START>[-<END>] <COMMANDS>;

       The time interval is specified by the _START_ and _END_ times.  _END_ is optional and  defaults  to
       the maximum time.

       The  current  frame time is considered within the specified interval if it is included in the
       interval [_START_, _END_), that is when the time is greater or equal to _START_ and is lesser  than
       _END_.

       _COMMANDS_  consists  of  a  sequence  of one or more command specifications, separated by ",",
       relating to that interval.  The syntax of a command specification is given by:

               [<FLAGS>] <TARGET> <COMMAND> <ARG>

       _FLAGS_ is optional and specifies the type of events relating to the time interval which enable
       sending the specified command, and must be a non-null sequence of identifier flags  separated
       by "+" or "|" and enclosed between "[" and "]".

       The following flags are recognized:

### enter
           The  command  is  sent when the current frame timestamp enters the specified interval. In
           other words, the command is sent when the previous frame timestamp was not in  the  given
           interval, and the current is.

### leave
           The  command  is  sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the specified interval. In
           other words, the command is sent when the previous  frame  timestamp  was  in  the  given
           interval, and the current is not.

### expr
           The command _ARG_ is interpreted as expression and result of expression is passed as _ARG_.

           The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following constants:

           **POS **Original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined for the current
               frame. Deprecated, do not use.

           **PTS **The presentation timestamp in input.

           **N   **The count of the input frame for video or audio, starting from 0.

           **T   **The time in seconds of the current frame.

           **TS  **The start time in seconds of the current command interval.

           **TE  **The end time in seconds of the current command interval.

           **TI  **The interpolated time of the current command interval, TI = (T - TS) / (TE - TS).

           **W   **The video frame width.

           **H   **The video frame height.

       If _FLAGS_ is not specified, a default value of "[enter]" is assumed.

       _TARGET_  specifies  the  target  of  the  command,  usually  the name of the filter class or a
       specific filter instance name.

       _COMMAND_ specifies the name of the command for the target filter.

       _ARG_ is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for the given _COMMAND_.

       Between one interval specification and  another,  whitespaces,  or  sequences  of  characters
       starting with "#" until the end of line, are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.

       A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax follows:

               <COMMAND_FLAG>  ::= "enter" | "leave"
               <COMMAND_FLAGS> ::= <COMMAND_FLAG> [(+|"|")<COMMAND_FLAG>]
               <COMMAND>       ::= ["[" <COMMAND_FLAGS> "]"] <TARGET> <COMMAND> [<ARG>]
               <COMMANDS>      ::= <COMMAND> [,<COMMANDS>]
               <INTERVAL>      ::= <START>[-<END>] <COMMANDS>
               <INTERVALS>     ::= <INTERVAL>[;<INTERVALS>]

       _Examples_

       •   Specify audio tempo change at second 4:

                   asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo

       •   Target a specific filter instance:

                   asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo@my tempo 1.5',atempo@my

       •   Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.

                   # show text in the interval 5-10
                   5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
                            [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';

                   # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
                   15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
                             [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
                             [leave] hue s 1,
                             [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';

                   # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
                   25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)

           A  filtergraph  allowing  to  read  and  process  the above command list stored in a file
           _test.cmd_, can be specified with:

                   sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue

### setpts, asetpts
       Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.

       "setpts" works on video frames, "asetpts" on audio frames.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### expr
           The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.

       The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following constants:

### FRAME_RATE, FR
           frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video

       **PTS **The presentation timestamp in input

       **N   **The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,  not  including
           the current frame for audio, starting from 0.

       **NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES**
           The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only audio)

### NB_SAMPLES, S
           The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)

### SAMPLE_RATE, SR
           The audio sample rate.

       **STARTPTS**
           The PTS of the first frame.

       **STARTT**
           the time in seconds of the first frame

       **INTERLACED**
           State whether the current frame is interlaced.

       **T   **the time in seconds of the current frame

       **POS **original  position  in  the  file of the frame, or undefined if undefined for the current
           frame; deprecated, do not use

       **PREV_INPTS**
           The previous input PTS.

       **PREV_INT**
           previous input time in seconds

       **PREV_OUTPTS**
           The previous output PTS.

       **PREV_OUTT**
           previous output time in seconds

       **RTCTIME**
           The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use [**time**(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/time/0/markdown) instead.

       **RTCSTART**
           The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.

       **TB  **The timebase of the input timestamps.

       **T_CHANGE**
           Time of the first frame after command was applied or  time  of  the  first  frame  if  no
           commands.

       _Examples_

       •   Start counting PTS from zero

                   setpts=PTS-STARTPTS

       •   Apply fast motion effect:

                   setpts=0.5*PTS

       •   Apply slow motion effect:

                   setpts=2.0*PTS

       •   Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:

                   setpts=N/(25*TB)

       •   Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:

                   setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'

       •   Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:

                   setpts=PTS+10/TB

       •   Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:

                   setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'

       •   Generate timestamps by counting samples:

                   asetpts=N/SR/TB

       _Commands_

       Both filters support all above options as **commands**.

### setrange
       Force color range for the output video frame.

       The  "setrange"  filter  marks  the  color  range property for the output frames. It does not
       change the input frame, but only sets the corresponding property, which affects how the frame
       is treated by following filters.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### range
           Available values are:

           **auto**
               Keep the same color range property.

           **unspecified, unknown**
               Set the color range as unspecified.

           **limited, tv, mpeg**
               Set the color range as limited.

           **full, pc, jpeg**
               Set the color range as full.

### settb, asettb
       Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.  It is mainly  useful  for  testing
       timebase configuration.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### expr, tb
           The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.

       The  value  for  **tb  **is  an arithmetic expression representing a rational. The expression can
       contain the constants "AVTB" (the default timebase), "intb" (the  input  timebase)  and  "sr"
       (the sample rate, audio only). Default value is "intb".

       _Examples_

       •   Set the timebase to 1/25:

                   settb=expr=1/25

       •   Set the timebase to 1/10:

                   settb=expr=0.1

       •   Set the timebase to 1001/1000:

                   settb=1+0.001

       •   Set the timebase to 2*intb:

                   settb=2*intb

       •   Set the default timebase value:

                   settb=AVTB

### showcqt
       Convert  input  audio to a video output representing frequency spectrum logarithmically using
       Brown-Puckette constant Q  transform  algorithm  with  direct  frequency  domain  coefficient
       calculation  (but  the  transform  itself  is  not really constant Q, instead the Q factor is
       actually variable/clamped), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify the video size for the output. It must be even. For the syntax  of  this  option,
           check the **"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "1920x1080".

### fps, rate, r
           Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.

### bar_h
           Set the bargraph height. It must be even. Default value is -1 which computes the bargraph
           height automatically.

### axis_h
           Set  the axis height. It must be even. Default value is -1 which computes the axis height
           automatically.

### sono_h
           Set the sonogram height. It must be even. Default value is -1 which computes the sonogram
           height automatically.

### fullhd
           Set the fullhd resolution. This option is deprecated, use _size_, _s_ instead. Default  value
           is 1.

### sono_v, volume
           Specify the sonogram volume expression. It can contain variables:

           **bar_v**
               the _bar_v_ evaluated expression

           **frequency, freq, f**
               the frequency where it is evaluated

           **timeclamp, tc**
               the value of _timeclamp_ option

           and functions:

           **a_weighting(f)**
               A-weighting of equal loudness

           **b_weighting(f)**
               B-weighting of equal loudness

           **c_weighting(f)**
               C-weighting of equal loudness.

           Default value is 16.

### bar_v, volume2
           Specify the bargraph volume expression. It can contain variables:

           **sono_v**
               the _sono_v_ evaluated expression

           **frequency, freq, f**
               the frequency where it is evaluated

           **timeclamp, tc**
               the value of _timeclamp_ option

           and functions:

           **a_weighting(f)**
               A-weighting of equal loudness

           **b_weighting(f)**
               B-weighting of equal loudness

           **c_weighting(f)**
               C-weighting of equal loudness.

           Default value is "sono_v".

### sono_g, gamma
           Specify  the  sonogram  gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
           makes the spectrum having more range. Default value is 3.  Acceptable range is "[1, 7]".

### bar_g, gamma2
           Specify the bargraph gamma. Default value is 1. Acceptable range is "[1, 7]".

### bar_t
           Specify the bargraph transparency level. Lower value makes the bargraph sharper.  Default
           value is 1. Acceptable range is "[0, 1]".

### timeclamp, tc
           Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between accuracy in
           time domain and frequency domain.  If  timeclamp  is  lower,  event  in  time  domain  is
           represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum), otherwise event in frequency domain
           is  represented  more accurately (such as bass guitar). Acceptable range is "[0.002, 1]".
           Default value is 0.17.

### attack
           Set attack time in seconds. The default is 0  (disabled).  Otherwise,  it  limits  future
           samples  by  applying  asymmetric  windowing  in  time domain, useful when low latency is
           required. Accepted range is "[0, 1]".

### basefreq
           Specify the transform base frequency. Default value  is  20.01523126408007475,  which  is
           frequency 50 cents below E0. Acceptable range is "[10, 100000]".

### endfreq
           Specify  the  transform  end  frequency.  Default value is 20495.59681441799654, which is
           frequency 50 cents above D#10. Acceptable range is "[10, 100000]".

### coeffclamp
           This option is deprecated and ignored.

### tlength
           Specify the transform length in time domain. Use this option to control  accuracy  trade-
           off  between  time domain and frequency domain at every frequency sample.  It can contain
           variables:

           **frequency, freq, f**
               the frequency where it is evaluated

           **timeclamp, tc**
               the value of _timeclamp_ option.

           Default value is "384*tc/(384+tc*f)".

### count
           Specify the transform count for every video frame. Default value is 6.  Acceptable  range
           is "[1, 30]".

### fcount
           Specify  the  transform  count for every single pixel. Default value is 0, which makes it
           computed automatically. Acceptable range is "[0, 10]".

### fontfile
           Specify font file for use with freetype to draw the axis. If not specified, use  embedded
           font.  Note  that  drawing with font file or embedded font is not implemented with custom
           _basefreq_ and _endfreq_, use _axisfile_ option instead.

### font
           Specify fontconfig pattern. This has lower priority than _fontfile_. The ":" in the pattern
           may be replaced by "|" to avoid unnecessary escaping.

### fontcolor
           Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should  return  integer
           value 0xRRGGBB. It can contain variables:

           **frequency, freq, f**
               the frequency where it is evaluated

           **timeclamp, tc**
               the value of _timeclamp_ option

           and functions:

           **midi(f)**
               midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: [E0(16)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/E0/16/markdown), [C1(24)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/C1/24/markdown), [C2(36)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/C2/36/markdown), [A4(69)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/A4/69/markdown)

           **r(x), g(x), b(x)**
               red, green, and blue value of intensity x.

           Default    value    is    "st(0,    (midi(f)-59.5)/12);    st(1,   if(between([ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/0/markdown),0,1),
           0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*[ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/0/markdown)), 0)); r([1-ld(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/1-ld/1/markdown)) + b([ld(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/1/markdown))".

### axisfile
           Specify image file to draw the axis. This option override _fontfile_ and _fontcolor_ option.

### axis, text
           Enable/disable drawing text to the axis. If it is set  to  0,  drawing  to  the  axis  is
           disabled, ignoring _fontfile_ and _axisfile_ option.  Default value is 1.

       **csp **Set colorspace. The accepted values are:

           **unspecified**
               Unspecified (default)

           **bt709**
               BT.709

           **fcc **FCC

           **bt470bg**
               BT.470BG or BT.601-6 625

           **smpte170m**
               SMPTE-170M or BT.601-6 525

           **smpte240m**
               SMPTE-240M

           **bt2020ncl**
               BT.2020 with non-constant luminance

### cscheme
           Set  spectrogram  color  scheme.  This  is  list  of  floating  point  values with format
           "left_r|left_g|left_b|right_r|right_g|right_b".  The default is "1|0.5|0|0|0.5|1".

       _Examples_

       •   Playing audio while showing the spectrum:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'

       •   Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'

       •   Playing at 1280x720:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=s=1280x720:count=4 [out0]'

       •   Disable sonogram display:

                   sono_h=0

       •   A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
                                    asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'

       •   Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
                                    asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'

       •   Custom volume:

                   bar_v=10:sono_v=bar_v*a_weighting(f)

       •   Custom gamma, now spectrum is linear to the amplitude.

                   bar_g=2:sono_g=2

       •   Custom tlength equation:

                   tc=0.33:tlength='st(0,0.17); 384*tc / (384 / [ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/0/markdown) + tc*f /([1-ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/1-ld/0/markdown))) + 384*tc / (tc*f / [ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ld/0/markdown) + 384 /([1-ld(0)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/1-ld/0/markdown)))'

       •   Custom fontcolor and fontfile, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue:

                   fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, [g(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/g/1/markdown))':fontfile=myfont.ttf

       •   Custom font using fontconfig:

                   font='Courier New,Monospace,mono|bold'

       •   Custom frequency range with custom axis using image file:

                   axisfile=myaxis.png:basefreq=40:endfreq=10000

### showcwt
       Convert input audio to video output representing frequency spectrum using Continuous  Wavelet
       Transform and Morlet wavelet.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify  the  video  size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "640x512".

### rate, r
           Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.

### scale
           Set the frequency scale used. Allowed values are:

           **linear**
           **log**
           **bark**
           **mel**
           **erbs**
           **sqrt**
           **cbrt**
           **qdrt**

           Default value is "linear".

### iscale
           Set the intensity scale used. Allowed values are:

           **linear**
           **log**
           **sqrt**
           **cbrt**
           **qdrt**

           Default value is "log".

       **min **Set the minimum frequency that will be used in output.  Default is 20 Hz.

       **max **Set the maximum frequency that will be used in output.  Default is  20000  Hz.  The  real
           frequency  upper  limit depends on input audio's sample rate and such will be enforced on
           this value when it is set to value greater than Nyquist frequency.

### imin
           Set the minimum intensity that will be used in output.

### imax
           Set the maximum intensity that will be used in output.

### logb
           Set the logarithmic basis for  brightness  strength  when  mapping  calculated  magnitude
           values to pixel values.  Allowed range is from 0 to 1.  Default value is 0.0001.

### deviation
           Set  the  frequency  deviation.   Lower  values than 1 are more frequency oriented, while
           higher values than 1 are more time oriented.  Allowed range is from  0  to  10.   Default
           value is 1.

       **pps **Set  the  number  of pixel output per each second in one row.  Allowed range is from 1 to
           1024.  Default value is 64.

### mode
           Set the output visual mode. Allowed values are:

           **magnitude**
               Show magnitude.

           **phase**
               Show only phase.

           **magphase**
               Show combination of magnitude and phase.  Magnitude is mapped to brightness and phase
               to color.

           **channel**
               Show unique color per channel magnitude.

           **stereo**
               Show unique color per stereo difference.

           Default value is "magnitude".

### slide
           Set the output slide method. Allowed values are:

           **replace**
           **scroll**
           **frame**
### direction
           Set the direction method for output slide method. Allowed values are:

           **lr  **Direction from left to right.

           **rl  **Direction from right to left.

           **ud  **Direction from up to down.

           **du  **Direction from down to up.

       **bar **Set the ratio of bargraph display to display size. Default is 0.

### rotation
           Set color rotation, must be in [-1.0, 1.0] range.  Default value is 0.

### showfreqs
       Convert input audio to video output representing the audio power spectrum.   Audio  amplitude
       is on Y-axis while frequency is on X-axis.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify  size  of video. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video size" section in**
           **the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default is "1024x512".

### rate, r
           Set video rate. Default is 25.

### mode
           Set display mode.  This set how each frequency bin will be represented.

           It accepts the following values:

           **line**
           **bar**
           **dot**

           Default is "bar".

### ascale
           Set amplitude scale.

           It accepts the following values:

           **lin **Linear scale.

           **sqrt**
               Square root scale.

           **cbrt**
               Cubic root scale.

           **log **Logarithmic scale.

           Default is "log".

### fscale
           Set frequency scale.

           It accepts the following values:

           **lin **Linear scale.

           **log **Logarithmic scale.

           **rlog**
               Reverse logarithmic scale.

           Default is "lin".

### win_size
           Set window size. Allowed range is from 16 to 65536.

           Default is 2048

### win_func
           Set windowing function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default is "hanning".

### overlap
           Set window overlap. In range "[0, 1]". Default is 1,  which  means  optimal  overlap  for
           selected window function will be picked.

### averaging
           Set  time averaging. Setting this to 0 will display current maximal peaks.  Default is 1,
           which means time averaging is disabled.

### colors
           Specify list of colors separated by space or by '|' which will be used  to  draw  channel
           frequencies. Unrecognized or missing colors will be replaced by white color.

### cmode
           Set channel display mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **combined**
           **separate**

           Default is "combined".

### minamp
           Set minimum amplitude used in "log" amplitude scaler.

### data
           Set data display mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **magnitude**
           **phase**
           **delay**

           Default is "magnitude".

### channels
           Set channels to use when processing audio. By default all are processed.

### showspatial
       Convert  stereo  input audio to a video output, representing the spatial relationship between
       two channels.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "512x512".

### win_size
           Set window size. Allowed range is from _1024_ to _65536_. Default size is _4096_.

### win_func
           Set window function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hann**
           **hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default value is "hann".

### rate, r
           Set output framerate.

### showspectrum
       Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency spectrum.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify  the  video  size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "640x512".

### slide
           Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.

           It accepts the following values:

           **replace**
               the samples start again on the left when they reach the right

           **scroll**
               the samples scroll from right to left

           **fullframe**
               frames are only produced when the samples reach the right

           **rscroll**
               the samples scroll from left to right

           **lreplace**
               the samples start again on the right when they reach the left

           Default value is "replace".

### mode
           Specify display mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **combined**
               all channels are displayed in the same row

           **separate**
               all channels are displayed in separate rows

           Default value is **combined**.

### color
           Specify display color mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **channel**
               each channel is displayed in a separate color

           **intensity**
               each channel is displayed using the same color scheme

           **rainbow**
               each channel is displayed using the rainbow color scheme

           **moreland**
               each channel is displayed using the moreland color scheme

           **nebulae**
               each channel is displayed using the nebulae color scheme

           **fire**
               each channel is displayed using the fire color scheme

           **fiery**
               each channel is displayed using the fiery color scheme

           **fruit**
               each channel is displayed using the fruit color scheme

           **cool**
               each channel is displayed using the cool color scheme

           **magma**
               each channel is displayed using the magma color scheme

           **green**
               each channel is displayed using the green color scheme

           **viridis**
               each channel is displayed using the viridis color scheme

           **plasma**
               each channel is displayed using the plasma color scheme

           **cividis**
               each channel is displayed using the cividis color scheme

           **terrain**
               each channel is displayed using the terrain color scheme

           Default value is **channel**.

### scale
           Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.

           It accepts the following values:

           **lin **linear

           **sqrt**
               square root, default

           **cbrt**
               cubic root

           **log **logarithmic

           **4thrt**
               4th root

           **5thrt**
               5th root

           Default value is **sqrt**.

### fscale
           Specify frequency scale.

           It accepts the following values:

           **lin **linear

           **log **logarithmic

           Default value is **lin**.

### saturation
           Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide  alternative  color
           scheme.  0  is no saturation at all.  Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.  Default
           value is 1.

### win_func
           Set window function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hann**
           **hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default value is "hann".

### orientation
           Set orientation of time vs frequency axis. Can be "vertical" or "horizontal". Default  is
           "vertical".

### overlap
           Set  ratio  of  overlap  window.  Default  value is 0.  When value is 1 overlap is set to
           recommended size for specific window function currently used.

### gain
           Set scale gain for calculating intensity color values.  Default value is 1.

### data
           Set which data to display. Can be "magnitude", default or "phase",  or  unwrapped  phase:
           "uphase".

### rotation
           Set color rotation, must be in [-1.0, 1.0] range.  Default value is 0.

### start
           Set start frequency from which to display spectrogram. Default is 0.

### stop
           Set stop frequency to which to display spectrogram. Default is 0.

       **fps **Set upper frame rate limit. Default is "auto", unlimited.

### legend
           Draw time and frequency axes and legends. Default is disabled.

### drange
           Set dynamic range used to calculate intensity color values. Default is 120 dBFS.  Allowed
           range is from 10 to 200.

### limit
           Set  upper limit of input audio samples volume in dBFS. Default is 0 dBFS.  Allowed range
           is from -100 to 100.

### opacity
           Set opacity strength when using pixel format output with alpha component.

       The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that section.

       _Examples_

       •   Large window with logarithmic color scaling:

                   showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log

       •   Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using **ffplay**:

                   ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
                                [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'

### showspectrumpic
       Convert input audio to a single video frame, representing the audio frequency spectrum.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "4096x2048".

### mode
           Specify display mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **combined**
               all channels are displayed in the same row

           **separate**
               all channels are displayed in separate rows

           Default value is **combined**.

### color
           Specify display color mode.

           It accepts the following values:

           **channel**
               each channel is displayed in a separate color

           **intensity**
               each channel is displayed using the same color scheme

           **rainbow**
               each channel is displayed using the rainbow color scheme

           **moreland**
               each channel is displayed using the moreland color scheme

           **nebulae**
               each channel is displayed using the nebulae color scheme

           **fire**
               each channel is displayed using the fire color scheme

           **fiery**
               each channel is displayed using the fiery color scheme

           **fruit**
               each channel is displayed using the fruit color scheme

           **cool**
               each channel is displayed using the cool color scheme

           **magma**
               each channel is displayed using the magma color scheme

           **green**
               each channel is displayed using the green color scheme

           **viridis**
               each channel is displayed using the viridis color scheme

           **plasma**
               each channel is displayed using the plasma color scheme

           **cividis**
               each channel is displayed using the cividis color scheme

           **terrain**
               each channel is displayed using the terrain color scheme

           Default value is **intensity**.

### scale
           Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.

           It accepts the following values:

           **lin **linear

           **sqrt**
               square root, default

           **cbrt**
               cubic root

           **log **logarithmic

           **4thrt**
               4th root

           **5thrt**
               5th root

           Default value is **log**.

### fscale
           Specify frequency scale.

           It accepts the following values:

           **lin **linear

           **log **logarithmic

           Default value is **lin**.

### saturation
           Set  saturation  modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide alternative color
           scheme. 0 is no saturation at all.  Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0]  range.   Default
           value is 1.

### win_func
           Set window function.

           It accepts the following values:

           **rect**
           **bartlett**
           **hann**
           **hanning**
           **hamming**
           **blackman**
           **welch**
           **flattop**
           **bharris**
           **bnuttall**
           **bhann**
           **sine**
           **nuttall**
           **lanczos**
           **gauss**
           **tukey**
           **dolph**
           **cauchy**
           **parzen**
           **poisson**
           **bohman**
           **kaiser**

           Default value is "hann".

### orientation
           Set  orientation of time vs frequency axis. Can be "vertical" or "horizontal". Default is
           "vertical".

### gain
           Set scale gain for calculating intensity color values.  Default value is 1.

### legend
           Draw time and frequency axes and legends. Default is enabled.

### rotation
           Set color rotation, must be in [-1.0, 1.0] range.  Default value is 0.

### start
           Set start frequency from which to display spectrogram. Default is 0.

### stop
           Set stop frequency to which to display spectrogram. Default is 0.

### drange
           Set dynamic range used to calculate intensity color values. Default is 120 dBFS.  Allowed
           range is from 10 to 200.

### limit
           Set upper limit of input audio samples volume in dBFS. Default is 0 dBFS.  Allowed  range
           is from -100 to 100.

### opacity
           Set opacity strength when using pixel format output with alpha component.

       _Examples_

       •   Extract an audio spectrogram of a whole audio track in a 1024x1024 picture using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i audio.flac -lavfi showspectrumpic=s=1024x1024 spectrogram.png

### showvolume
       Convert input audio volume to a video output.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### rate, r
           Set video rate.

       **b   **Set border width, allowed range is [0, 5]. Default is 1.

       **w   **Set channel width, allowed range is [80, 8192]. Default is 400.

       **h   **Set channel height, allowed range is [1, 900]. Default is 20.

       **f   **Set fade, allowed range is [0, 1]. Default is 0.95.

       **c   **Set volume color expression.

           The expression can use the following variables:

           **VOLUME**
               Current max volume of channel in dB.

           **PEAK**
               Current peak.

           **CHANNEL**
               Current channel number, starting from 0.

       **t   **If set, displays channel names. Default is enabled.

       **v   **If set, displays volume values. Default is enabled.

       **o   **Set orientation, can be horizontal: "h" or vertical: "v", default is "h".

       **s   **Set step size, allowed range is [0, 5]. Default is 0, which means step is disabled.

       **p   **Set background opacity, allowed range is [0, 1]. Default is 0.

       **m   **Set metering mode, can be peak: "p" or rms: "r", default is "p".

       **ds  **Set display scale, can be linear: "lin" or log: "log", default is "lin".

       **dm  **In  second.   If  set  to > 0., display a line for the max level in the previous seconds.
           default is disabled: 0.

       **dmc **The color of the max line. Use when "dm" option is set to > 0.  default is: "orange"

### showwaves
       Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option,  check  the  **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "600x240".

### mode
           Set display mode.

           Available values are:

           **point**
               Draw a point for each sample.

           **line**
               Draw a vertical line for each sample.

           **p2p **Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.

           **cline**
               Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.

           Default value is "point".

       **n   **Set  the  number  of  samples  which  are printed on the same column. A larger value will
           decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive integer. This option can be set only  if  the
           value for _rate_ is not explicitly specified.

### rate, r
           Set  the  (approximate)  output frame rate. This is done by setting the option _n_. Default
           value is "25".

### split_channels
           Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.

### colors
           Set colors separated by '|' which are going to be used for drawing of each channel.

### scale
           Set amplitude scale.

           Available values are:

           **lin **Linear.

           **log **Logarithmic.

           **sqrt**
               Square root.

           **cbrt**
               Cubic root.

           Default is linear.

### draw
           Set the draw mode. This is mostly useful to set for high _n_.

           Available values are:

           **scale**
               Scale pixel values for each drawn sample.

           **full**
               Draw every sample directly.

           Default value is "scale".

       _Examples_

       •   Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation at the same time:

                   amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]

       •   Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a frame rate of  30  frames
           per second:

                   aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]

### showwavespic
       Convert input audio to a single video frame, representing the samples waves.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Specify  the  video  size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the **"Video**
           **size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual**.  Default value is "600x240".

### split_channels
           Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.

### colors
           Set colors separated by '|' which are going to be used for drawing of each channel.

### scale
           Set amplitude scale.

           Available values are:

           **lin **Linear.

           **log **Logarithmic.

           **sqrt**
               Square root.

           **cbrt**
               Cubic root.

           Default is linear.

### draw
           Set the draw mode.

           Available values are:

           **scale**
               Scale pixel values for each drawn sample.

           **full**
               Draw every sample directly.

           Default value is "scale".

### filter
           Set the filter mode.

           Available values are:

           **average**
               Use average samples values for each drawn sample.

           **peak**
               Use peak samples values for each drawn sample.

           Default value is "average".

       _Examples_

       •   Extract a channel split representation of the wave form of  a  whole  audio  track  in  a
           1024x800 picture using **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i audio.flac -lavfi showwavespic=split_channels=1:s=1024x800 waveform.png

### sidedata, asidedata
       Delete frame side data, or select frames based on it.

       This filter accepts the following options:

### mode
           Set mode of operation of the filter.

           Can be one of the following:

           **select**
               Select every frame with side data of "type".

           **delete**
               Delete side data of "type". If "type" is not set, delete all side data in the frame.

### type
           Set  side  data  type used with all modes. Must be set for "select" mode. For the list of
           frame side data types, refer to the "AVFrameSideDataType" enum in _libavutil/frame.h_.  For
           example, to choose "AV_FRAME_DATA_PANSCAN" side data, you must specify "PANSCAN".

### spectrumsynth
       Synthesize audio from 2 input video spectrums, first input stream represents magnitude across
       time  and  second  represents  phase  across  time.  The filter will transform from frequency
       domain as displayed in videos back to time domain as presented in audio output.

       This filter is primarily created for reversing processed **showspectrum **filter outputs, but can
       synthesize sound from other spectrograms too.  But in such case results are going to be  poor
       if  the  phase  data is not available, because in such cases phase data need to be recreated,
       usually it's just recreated from random  noise.   For  best  results  use  gray  only  output
       ("channel"  color  mode in **showspectrum **filter) and "log" scale for magnitude video and "lin"
       scale for phase video. To produce phase, for 2nd video,  use  "data"  option.  Inputs  videos
       should  generally  use  "fullframe"  slide  mode  as that saves resources needed for decoding
       video.

       The filter accepts the following options:

### sample_rate
           Specify sample rate of output audio, the sample rate of audio  from  which  spectrum  was
           generated may differ.

### channels
           Set number of channels represented in input video spectrums.

### scale
           Set  scale  which  was  used  when  generating magnitude input spectrum.  Can be "lin" or
           "log". Default is "log".

### slide
           Set slide which was used when generating inputs spectrums.  Can be  "replace",  "scroll",
           "fullframe" or "rscroll".  Default is "fullframe".

### win_func
           Set window function used for resynthesis.

### overlap
           Set  window  overlap.  In  range  "[0, 1]". Default is 1, which means optimal overlap for
           selected window function will be picked.

### orientation
           Set orientation  of  input  videos.  Can  be  "vertical"  or  "horizontal".   Default  is
           "vertical".

       _Examples_

       •   First  create  magnitude and phase videos from audio, assuming audio is stereo with 44100
           sample rate, then resynthesize videos back to audio with spectrumsynth:

                   ffmpeg -i input.flac -lavfi showspectrum=mode=separate:scale=log:overlap=0.875:color=channel:slide=fullframe:data=magnitude -an -c:v rawvideo magnitude.nut
                   ffmpeg -i input.flac -lavfi showspectrum=mode=separate:scale=lin:overlap=0.875:color=channel:slide=fullframe:data=phase -an -c:v rawvideo phase.nut
                   ffmpeg -i magnitude.nut -i phase.nut -lavfi spectrumsynth=channels=2:sample_rate=44100:win_func=hann:overlap=0.875:slide=fullframe output.flac

### split, asplit
       Split input into several identical outputs.

       "asplit" works with audio input, "split" with video.

       The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If  unspecified,
       it defaults to 2.

       _Examples_

       •   Create two separate outputs from the same input:

                   [in] split [out0][out1]

       •   To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of outputs, like in:

                   [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]

       •   Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and one padded:

                   [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
                   [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0    [cropout];
                   [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];

       •   Create 5 copies of the input audio with **ffmpeg**:

                   ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT

### zmq, azmq
       Receive  commands  sent  through  a  libzmq  client,  and  forward  them  to  filters  in the
       filtergraph.

       "zmq" and "azmq" work as a pass-through filters. "zmq" must be  inserted  between  two  video
       filters,  "azmq"  between  two audio filters. Both are capable to send messages to any filter
       type.

       To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq  library  and  headers  and  configure
       FFmpeg with "--enable-libzmq".

       For more information about libzmq see: <**<http://www.zeromq.org/>**>

       The  "zmq" and "azmq" filters work as a libzmq server, which receives messages sent through a
       network interface defined by the **bind_address **(or  the  abbreviation  "**b**")  option.   Default
       value of this option is _tcp://localhost:5555_. You may want to alter this value to your needs,
       but do not forget to escape any ':' signs (see **filtergraph escaping**).

       The received message must be in the form:

               <TARGET> <COMMAND> [<ARG>]

       _TARGET_  specifies  the  target  of  the  command,  usually  the name of the filter class or a
       specific  filter  instance  name.  The  default  filter  instance  name  uses   the   pattern
       **Parsed_<filter_name>_<index>**,  but  you  can override this by using the **filter_name@id **syntax
       (see **Filtergraph syntax**).

       _COMMAND_ specifies the name of the command for the target filter.

       _ARG_ is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the given _COMMAND_.

       Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command is injected  into  the
       filtergraph.  Depending  on  the result, the filter will send a reply to the client, adopting
       the format:

               <ERROR_CODE> <ERROR_REASON>
               <MESSAGE>

       _MESSAGE_ is optional.

       _Examples_

       Look at _tools/zmqsend_ for an example of a zmq client which  can  be  used  to  send  commands
       processed by these filters.

       Consider  the  following  filtergraph  generated by **ffplay**.  In this example the last overlay
       filter has an instance name. All other filters will have default instance names.

               ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
               color=s=100x100:c=red  [l];
               color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
               nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
               [bg][l]   overlay     [bg+l];
               [bg+l][r] overlay@my=x=100 "

       To change the color of the left side of the video, the following command can be used:

               echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend

       To change the right side:

               echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend

       To change the position of the right side:

               echo overlay@my x 150 | tools/zmqsend

## MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
       Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.

### amovie
       This is the same as **movie **source, except it selects an audio stream by default.

### avsynctest
       Generate an Audio/Video Sync Test.

       Generated stream periodically shows flash video frame and emits beep  in  audio.   Useful  to
       inspect A/V sync issues.

       It accepts the following options:

### size, s
           Set output video size. Default value is "hd720".

### framerate, fr
           Set output video frame rate. Default value is 30.

### samplerate, sr
           Set output audio sample rate. Default value is 44100.

### amplitude, a
           Set output audio beep amplitude. Default value is 0.7.

### period, p
           Set output audio beep period in seconds. Default value is 3.

### delay, dl
           Set output video flash delay in number of frames. Default value is 0.

### cycle, c
           Enable cycling of video delays, by default is disabled.

### duration, d
           Set stream output duration. By default duration is unlimited.

### fg, bg, ag
           Set foreground/background/additional color.

       _Commands_

       This source supports the some above options as **commands**.

### movie
       Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.

       It accepts the following parameters:

### filename
           The  name  of  the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a device or a
           stream accessed through some protocol).

### format_name, f
           Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can  be  either  the  name  of  a
           container  or an input device. If not specified, the format is guessed from _movie_name_ or
           by probing.

### seek_point, sp
           Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output starting  from  this  seek
           point.  The  parameter  is  evaluated  with  "av_strtod",  so  the numerical value may be
           suffixed by an IS postfix. The default value is "0".

### streams, s
           Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified, separated  by  "+".  The
           source  will then have as many outputs, in the same order. The syntax is explained in the
           **"Stream specifiers" section in the ffmpeg  manual**.  Two  special  names,  "dv"  and  "da"
           specify  respectively  the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default is "dv",
           or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".

### stream_index, si
           Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,  the  most  suitable
           video  stream  will  be automatically selected. The default value is "-1". Deprecated. If
           the filter is called "amovie", it will select audio instead of video.

### loop
           Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.  If the value is 0,  the  stream
           will be looped infinitely.  Default value is "1".

           Note  that  when  the  movie  is looped the source timestamps are not changed, so it will
           generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.

### discontinuity
           Specifies the time difference between frames  above  which  the  point  is  considered  a
           timestamp discontinuity which is removed by adjusting the later timestamps.

### dec_threads
           Specifies the number of threads for decoding

### format_opts
           Specify  format options for the opened file. Format options can be specified as a list of
           _key_=_value_  pairs  separated  by  ':'.  The   following   example   shows   how   to   add
           protocol_whitelist and protocol_blacklist options:

                   ffplay -f lavfi
                   "movie=filename='1.sdp':format_opts='protocol_whitelist=file,rtp,udp\:protocol_blacklist=http'"

       It  allows  overlaying  a second video on top of the main input of a filtergraph, as shown in
       this graph:

               input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
                                                   ^
                                                   |
               movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+

       _Examples_

       •   Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay  it  on  top  of  the
           input labelled "in":

                   movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
                   [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
                   [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]

       •   Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input labelled "in":

                   movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
                   [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
                   [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]

       •   Read  the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from dvd.vob; the video is
           connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is connected to the pad named "audio":

                   movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]

       _Commands_

       Both movie and amovie support the following commands:

### seek
           Perform seek using "av_seek_frame".  The syntax is: seek _stream_index_|_timestamp_|_flags_

           •   _stream_index_: If stream_index is -1, a default stream is selected, and  _timestamp_  is
               automatically converted from AV_TIME_BASE units to the stream specific time_base.

           •   _timestamp_:  Timestamp  in  AVStream.time_base units or, if no stream is specified, in
               AV_TIME_BASE units.

           •   _flags_: Flags which select direction and seeking mode.

### get_duration
           Get movie duration in AV_TIME_BASE units.

## SEE ALSO
       [**ffmpeg**(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffmpeg/1/markdown), [**ffplay**(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffplay/1/markdown), [**ffprobe**(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/ffprobe/1/markdown), [**libavfilter**(3)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/libavfilter/3/markdown)

## AUTHORS
       The FFmpeg developers.

       For   details   about   the   authorship,   see   the   Git   history    of    the    project
       (<https://git.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg>),  e.g.  by  typing  the  command **git log **in the FFmpeg source
       directory, or browsing the online repository at <**<https://git.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg>**>.

       Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file _MAINTAINERS_ in the source code
       tree.

                                                                                   [_FFMPEG-FILTERS_(1)](https://www.chedong.com/phpMan.php/man/FFMPEG-FILTERS/1/markdown)
